1665 questions with model answers · Maths Paper 2 (Calculator) · GCSE Mathematics revision
Simplify fully (2x³)² × 4x⁵ ÷ x⁴
This 3-mark challenge question requires three index laws applied in sequence. Step 1 — power of a power: (2x³)² = 2² × (x³)² = 4x⁶. A common mistake here is forgetting to square the coefficient, giving x⁶ instead of 4x⁶. Step 2 — multiplication: 4x⁶ × 4x⁵: multiply coefficients (4 × 4 = 16) and add indices (6 + 5 = 11) to get 16x¹¹. Step 3 — division: 16x¹¹ ÷ x⁴: keep coefficient, subtract indices (11 − 4 = 7) to get 16x⁷. Work through brackets first, then multiplication, then division — this order prevents errors. Each step earns one mark.
Simplify 2x³ × 5x⁴
When multiplying algebraic terms, handle the numbers and the letters separately. Multiply the coefficients (the numbers in front): 2 × 5 = 10. Then apply the multiplication law to the letters: x³ × x⁴ = x³⁺⁴ = x⁷. Combine to get 10x⁷. A common error is to only add the indices and forget to multiply the coefficients, giving x⁷ instead of 10x⁷. Another mistake is adding the coefficients (2 + 5 = 7) rather than multiplying them. The 2 marks reflect these two separate processes: M1 for the coefficient, A1 for the correct index.
Simplify 12x⁵ ÷ 4x²
When dividing algebraic terms, handle numbers and letters separately. Divide the coefficients: 12 ÷ 4 = 3. Then apply the division law to the letters: x⁵ ÷ x² = x⁵⁻² = x³. Combine to get 3x³. A common mistake is to subtract the coefficients (12 − 4 = 8) rather than dividing them. Another error is adding the indices instead of subtracting. The 2 marks reflect the two separate processes: M1 for the coefficient calculation, A1 for the correct power of x.
Simplify (3x²)⁴
When the entire bracket (3x²)⁴ is raised to a power, everything inside the bracket gets raised to that power. Work through two separate operations. First, raise the coefficient to the power: 3⁴ = 81. Then, apply the power-of-a-power law to the letter: (x²)⁴ = x²ˣ⁴ = x⁸. Combine: 81x⁸. A common mistake is only raising the letter and forgetting the coefficient (giving x⁸ instead of 81x⁸). Another is writing 3 × 4 = 12 as the coefficient rather than computing 3⁴ = 81. The 2 marks reflect: M1 for the coefficient (81) and A1 for the correct power (x⁸).
Work out the value of 8^(2/3)
For a^(m/n), the rule is: the denominator gives the root, the numerator gives the power. Always do the root first, then the power. Here, 8^(2/3) = (³√8)² = 2² = 4. Step 1: ³√8 = 2 (because 2³ = 8). Step 2: 2² = 4. A common misconception is thinking you can divide 8 by the index (8 ÷ 3 × 2 ≈ 5.3) — this is wrong. The 2 marks reflect: M1 for finding the cube root (2), A1 for squaring it (4). Always work with the root before the power.
Work out the value of 4^(-3/2)
A negative fractional index combines two rules. Work in stages: first handle the fractional part (ignoring the negative), then apply the negative (reciprocal). For 4^(-3/2): Step 1 — fractional part: 4^(3/2) = (√4)³ = 2³ = 8. Step 2 — negative index: 4^(-3/2) = 1/4^(3/2) = 1/8. A common error is getting 8 and forgetting to take the reciprocal. The marks are: M1 for correctly calculating 4^(3/2) = 8, A1 for applying the reciprocal to get 1/8 = 0.125.
Simplify a⁵ × a³
The multiplication law states: when multiplying powers with the same base, add the indices. Here, a⁵ × a³ = a⁵⁺³ = a⁸. Do NOT multiply the indices together (which would give a¹⁵) — that is the power-of-a-power law, not the multiplication law. You only add indices when the base letters are identical. The answer must stay as a letter with a power — do not try to work out a numerical value.
Simplify y⁸ ÷ y⁵
The division law states: when dividing powers with the same base, subtract the indices. Here, y⁸ ÷ y⁵ = y⁸⁻⁵ = y³. Crucially, you subtract (not divide) the indices — y⁸ ÷ y⁵ does not become y⁸/⁵ or y^1.6. Also note you subtract the bottom index from the top index, not the other way around (8 − 5 = 3, not 5 − 8 = −3). This law is the opposite of the multiplication law and is essential for simplifying expressions in algebra and standard form.
Simplify (m³)⁴
The power-of-a-power law states: when raising a power to another power, multiply the indices. Here, (m³)⁴ = m³ˣ⁴ = m¹². Do NOT add the indices (which would give m⁷) — that mistake comes from confusing this with the multiplication law. The key difference: a⁵ × a³ means you ADD (multiplication law), but (a³)⁴ means you MULTIPLY (power-of-a-power law). You can verify this: (m³)⁴ means m³ written four times, i.e. m³ × m³ × m³ × m³ = m³⁺³⁺³⁺³ = m¹².
Work out the value of 5⁰
The zero index law: any non-zero number raised to the power 0 equals 1. So 5⁰ = 1. This is not obvious from first principles, but it follows from the division law: aⁿ ÷ aⁿ = aⁿ⁻ⁿ = a⁰, and any number divided by itself is 1, so a⁰ = 1. Two common wrong answers are 0 (confusing the zero index with a zero result) and 5 (ignoring the index). This law holds for any non-zero base: 100⁰ = 1, (2x)⁰ = 1, even 999999⁰ = 1.
Work out the value of 2⁻³
The negative index law: a⁻ⁿ = 1/aⁿ. Apply this in two steps. First, apply the rule: 2⁻³ = 1/2³. Then evaluate: 2³ = 8, so 2⁻³ = 1/8 = 0.125. The key understanding is that the negative index makes the number a fraction (reciprocal), NOT a negative number. Writing -8 or -0.125 is a very common mistake. Equally common is writing just 8 (calculating 2³ and ignoring the negative index). Always think: 'negative index → flip to denominator, make index positive'.
Write 1/x² using a negative index.
This question applies the negative index law in reverse: instead of calculating a⁻ⁿ as a fraction, you convert a fraction back to a negative index. The rule is 1/aⁿ = a⁻ⁿ. Here, 1/x² = x⁻². Think of it this way: the denominator 'moves up' to the top, and the index becomes negative. This is the same law used in standard form and simplifying algebraic fractions. Accept x^-2 or x^(-2) as alternative written forms.
Which of these is equivalent to a³ × a⁵?
The correct answer is a⁸. The multiplication law says: same base, multiplying, so ADD the indices: a³ × a⁵ = a³⁺⁵ = a⁸. The distractors test common errors: a¹⁵ comes from multiplying indices (3 × 5 = 15 — that is the power-of-a-power law, not multiplication). a² comes from subtracting indices (5 − 3 = 2 — that is the division law). 2a⁸ adds a spurious coefficient of 2. When multiplying two identical letter terms, the coefficient stays at 1 unless numbers are present — there is no '2 lots of a⁸' here.
Work out the value of 27^(1/3)
The fractional index law: a^(1/n) = ⁿ√a. The denominator of the fraction tells you which root to take. Here, 27^(1/3) = ³√27 (cube root of 27). Ask yourself: what number cubed equals 27? Since 3³ = 27, the answer is 3. A common mistake is dividing by 3 (giving 9), which confuses the fractional index with ordinary division. The calculator allows you to use the fraction index directly — look for the x^y or ^ button. This law is the basis for all fractional index questions at GCSE.
Solve the simultaneous equations: y = x² - 5x + 2 y = 2x - 4 Give your solutions to 2 decimal places.
Use the quadratic formula to solve x² + 3x - 5 = 0 Give your solutions to 2 decimal places.
A rectangle has length (x + 5) cm and width (x + 2) cm. The area of the rectangle is 40 cm². Form a quadratic equation and solve it to find the value of x.
Solve x² - 6x + 2 = 0 Give your answer in the form p ± q√r where p, q, r are integers.
Show that x² + 8x + 5 can be written in the form (x + p)² + q where p and q are integers to be found.
Solve x² - 10x + 7 = 0 by completing the square. Give your answer in the form p ± √q where p and q are integers.
The equation kx² + 6x + 2 = 0 has no real solutions. Explain what this tells you about the value of k.
The equation x² + 5x + 10 = 0 has:
Calculate the discriminant b² - 4ac = 25 - 40 = -15, which is negative. A negative discriminant means the equation has NO real solutions (the parabola doesn't cross the x-axis).
Which of the following is the factorised form of x² - x - 12?
We need factors of -12 that add to -1. The factors 3 and -4 work: 3 × (-4) = -12 and 3 + (-4) = -1. So the factorised form is (x + 3)(x - 4).
The expression x² + 6x + 13 can be written as (x + 3)² + k. What is the minimum value of x² + 6x + 13?
(x + 3)² is always ≥ 0, with minimum value 0 when x = -3. So x² + 6x + 13 = (x+3)² + k has minimum value k. Since (x+3)² = x² + 6x + 9, we have x² + 6x + 13 = (x+3)² + 4, so k = 4 and the minimum value is 4.
Express as a single fraction in its simplest form 1/x + 2/(x+1) - 3/(x-1)
Simplify fully (x² + 5x + 6)/(x² - 4)
Write as a single fraction in its simplest form 2/x + 3/(x+1)
Write as a single fraction in its simplest form 5/(x-2) - 3/(x+1)
Show that 1/(x - 1) - 1/(x + 1) simplifies to 2/(x² - 1)
Explain why you need a common denominator when adding algebraic fractions.
Fractions can only be added when they have the same denominator because the denominator tells you the size of the parts. You can only combine parts that are the same size.
Simplify 6x²/3x
Cancel common factors: 6÷3 = 2, and x²÷x = x. So 6x²/3x = 2x.
Which of these is the correct way to add 3/(x+1) + 5/(x+1)
When the denominators are the same, keep the denominator and add the numerators: 3/(x+1) + 5/(x+1) = (3+5)/(x+1) = 8/(x+1).
Which is the correct simplification of (x+2)/3 × 6/(x+2)
(x+2) appears in numerator and denominator, so it cancels. Left with 6/3 = 2.
Prove that (n + 1)² − (n − 1)² = 4n. Hence prove that when n is an even number, (n + 1)² − (n − 1)² is always divisible by 8.
Write all quantities in algebraic form, expand and simplify systematically, and arrive at the required conclusion through clearly stated steps. In formal proofs, each line of working follows logically from the previous. The final line should be a clear concluding statement. Omitting steps or jumping to the conclusion without showing the algebra risks losing method marks even if the final statement is correct.
Prove that (n + 1)² − n² = 2n + 1. Hence explain why the difference between consecutive square numbers is always odd.
Represent consecutive integers as n and n+1 (or n−1, n, n+1 for three). Expand the given product or expression, collect like terms, and show the result has the form required by the question. Every step of algebra must be shown. The conclusion should explicitly state what has been proved: 'Since [expression] = [factorised form], this proves that [the result is always...]'.
Prove algebraically that the sum of any two consecutive integers is always odd.
In algebraic proof, represent the quantities using general forms: even numbers as 2n, odd numbers as 2n+1, consecutive integers as n and n+1. Manipulate these algebraically and show that the result has the required form. For example, proving the sum of two odd numbers is even: (2m+1)+(2n+1) = 2(m+n+1), which has factor 2 so is even. The proof must work for all integers, not just specific examples.
Prove that n² + n is always even for any positive integer n.
Represent consecutive odd numbers as 2n+1 and 2n+3. Multiply: (2n+1)(2n+3) = 4n²+8n+3. Analyse the structure of this result to prove the stated property. All algebraic steps must be shown. Specific numerical examples are not proofs — the algebraic manipulation must hold for all integer values of n. State a clear conclusion at the end.
Prove algebraically that the sum of two odd numbers is always even.
Expand the left-hand side step by step and show it equals the right-hand side. Do not work backwards from the answer. Start from the left-hand side, expand all brackets, collect like terms, and simplify until the right-hand side is reached. Each algebraic manipulation earns marks. The proof is invalid if you assume the result and work backwards.
Prove that the sum of three consecutive integers is always a multiple of 3.
Let the starting integer be n and express related integers using n. Expand the product or sum of these expressions, collect like terms, and show the result has the required property (e.g. has factor 2, or factor 3). State the conclusion explicitly: 'This shows the result is always [divisible by 3 / even / etc.]'. Without the conclusion, the proof is incomplete.
Prove that the square of any odd number is always odd.
A disproof by counter-example needs one specific case where the claim fails. Choose a value, compute the result, and clearly explain why the claim is false for this value. State your conclusion explicitly: 'This shows the claim is false because...' You only need one counter-example. Verify your chosen example actually fails the claim before stating it as your answer.
Show that (n + 3)² − (n − 1)² simplifies to 8(n + 1)
Expand both brackets: (n+3)² = n²+6n+9 and (n−1)² = n²−2n+1. Subtracting: (n²+6n+9) − (n²−2n+1) = 8n+8 = 8(n+1). The n² terms cancel, leaving 8n+8. Factorising gives 8(n+1), confirming the identity. Each expansion step must be shown clearly — markers need to see the full expansion, the subtraction (including the cancellation of n²), and the factorisation.
Sarah says: 'If you square a prime number and subtract 1, the result is always even.' Find a counter-example to disprove Sarah's claim.
The counter-example is the prime number 2 — the only even prime. All odd primes squared give an odd number, and odd minus 1 is even, so they appear to support Sarah's claim. But 2² − 1 = 4 − 1 = 3, which is odd, disproving it. When testing primes, always try 2 first since it is uniquely even. The answer required is the prime number 2, not the result 3.
Prove by exhaustion that when you divide any single-digit positive integer by 4, the remainder is always 0, 1, 2, or 3. Show your working by testing all possible cases.
Test all 9 single-digit positive integers: 1÷4=0 r1, 2÷4=0 r2, 3÷4=0 r3, 4÷4=1 r0, 5÷4=1 r1, 6÷4=1 r2, 7÷4=1 r3, 8÷4=2 r0, 9÷4=2 r1. All remainders are 0, 1, 2, or 3. Therefore, when dividing any single-digit positive integer by 4, the remainder is always 0, 1, 2, or 3.
Expand the expression fully, collect all terms, and factorise to show the required factor is present. For example, to show divisibility by 6, show the expression equals 6k for some integer k. Write the expression in factorised form with the required factor explicit. The factorisation step is the key — if the factor is not shown as a clear multiplier, the proof is incomplete.
Which expression represents an even number for all integer values of n?
An even number is always a multiple of 2. The expression 2n represents 2 times any integer, which always gives an even number. For example: if n=3, then 2n=6 (even); if n=10, then 2n=20 (even).
How many counter-examples do you need to disprove a mathematical conjecture?
A conjecture claims something is ALWAYS true. To disprove it, you only need ONE example where it's false. That single counter-example proves the statement isn't always true, which disproves the conjecture.
Which expression represents three consecutive integers?
Consecutive integers follow one after another with a difference of 1. If the first integer is n, the next is n+1, and the third is n+2. For example: 5, 6, 7 or 20, 21, 22.
Tom claims: 'If you add 1 to a multiple of 4, the result is always prime.' Which of the following is a counter-example to disprove Tom's claim?
A counter-example must show the claim is FALSE. Tom claims the result is always prime. Option B gives 4×2+1=9, which is NOT prime (9=3×3), so this disproves Tom's claim.
Three charities share a donation of £1800 in the ratio 5:7:3 The charity with the largest share gives 20% of their money to a fourth charity. How much does the fourth charity receive?
This two-step problem first requires ratio sharing, then a percentage calculation. Step 1: find total parts (5 + 7 + 3 = 15) and one part (£1800 ÷ 15 = £120). Step 2: find the largest share — 7 parts = 7 × £120 = £840. Step 3: calculate 20% of the largest share: 0.2 × £840 = £168. Common mistakes include taking 20% of the total donation (£1800) rather than the largest share, or identifying the wrong charity as the largest. Always identify which share is largest before proceeding.
Three numbers are in the ratio 2:5:7 The sum of the smallest and largest number is 99 Work out the middle number.
The sum of smallest and largest corresponds to 2 + 7 = 9 parts (not all 14). So 9 parts = 99, giving one part = 99 ÷ 9 = 11. The middle number is 5 parts = 5 × 11 = 55. A common mistake is dividing 99 by 14 (all parts), which is wrong because the middle number is not included in the 99. Always identify precisely which ratio parts are represented by the given sum.
Tom, Jerry and Spike share 240 sweets in the ratio 2:3:5 Work out how many sweets each person gets.
To share 240 sweets in the ratio 2:3:5: (1) add ratio numbers to get total parts: 2 + 3 + 5 = 10; (2) find the value of one part: 240 ÷ 10 = 24 sweets; (3) multiply by each ratio number: Tom = 2 × 24 = 48, Jerry = 3 × 24 = 72, Spike = 5 × 24 = 120. A common error is adding the part value to the ratio number instead of multiplying. Always verify by adding all shares: 48 + 72 + 120 = 240.
Two numbers are in the ratio 5:8 The difference between the numbers is 21 Work out the larger number.
Use the difference method: the difference between the two values corresponds to the difference in ratio parts. The ratio 5:8 has a part-difference of 8 − 5 = 3. Since 3 parts = 21, one part = 21 ÷ 3 = 7. The larger number = 8 × 7 = 56. A common mistake is dividing 21 by 8 (the larger ratio number) instead of 3 (the difference between the ratio numbers). Always use the difference in parts, not the individual parts themselves.
The ratio of cats to dogs in a rescue centre is 5:3 There are 12 more cats than dogs. Work out the total number of animals in the rescue centre.
Use the difference method: the difference between cats and dogs (12 animals) corresponds to the difference in their ratio parts (5 − 3 = 2 parts). So 2 parts = 12 animals, meaning one part = 12 ÷ 2 = 6 animals. The total number of parts = 5 + 3 = 8, so the total animals = 8 × 6 = 48. A common mistake is finding only the number of cats (30) and forgetting to add the dogs (18). The question asks for the total, so add both groups at the end.
A paint mixture uses red, blue and yellow paint in the ratio 5:3:2 What percentage of the mixture is blue paint?
To convert a ratio part to a percentage: (1) find the total number of parts by adding all ratio numbers: 5 + 3 + 2 = 10; (2) write blue paint as a fraction of the total: 3/10; (3) convert to a percentage: 3/10 × 100 = 30%. A common mistake is giving the answer as a decimal (0.3) without converting to a percentage. Another mistake is using 3 directly as the answer — this is the ratio number, not the percentage.
Sarah shares £90 in the ratio 2:3 She works out: "2 + 3 = 5, so the shares are £2 and £3" Explain what Sarah has done wrong and work out the correct shares.
Sarah's error was using the ratio numbers (2 and 3) as the actual pound amounts instead of finding what one part is worth. Correct method: total parts = 2 + 3 = 5; one part = £90 ÷ 5 = £18; shares = 2 × £18 = £36 and 3 × £18 = £54. In error-explanation questions, state what the mistake was, show the correct calculation, and give the correct answer.
Share £120 in the ratio 3:5 Work out how much the smaller share is.
To share in a ratio: (1) add the ratio numbers to find total parts — here 3 + 5 = 8; (2) divide the total by the number of parts to find one part — £120 ÷ 8 = £15; (3) multiply one part by the smaller ratio number — 3 × £15 = £45. A common mistake is dividing by 3 or 5 directly without finding the total parts first. Always check: the shares should add back to the original amount (£45 + £75 = £120).
Ben and Aisha share some money in the ratio 3:5 Ben gets £45 Work out the total amount of money they shared.
Working backwards from one share: Ben's £45 represents 3 parts, so one part = £45 ÷ 3 = £15. The total number of parts is 3 + 5 = 8, so the total amount = 8 × £15 = £120. A common mistake is stopping after finding Aisha's share (5 × £15 = £75) rather than the total. The question asks for the total, not Aisha's individual share. Always re-read what the question is asking for before writing your final answer.
A recipe for 4 people uses flour and sugar in the ratio 7:3 The recipe uses 350g of flour. How much sugar is needed?
When one quantity in a ratio is known, divide it by its ratio number to find the value of one part. Flour = 7 parts = 350g, so one part = 350 ÷ 7 = 50g. Sugar = 3 parts = 3 × 50 = 150g. A common mistake is multiplying 350 by 3 directly (which gives 1050g — far too much) or dividing 350 by 3. The key step is always dividing the known amount by its ratio number first to find the one-part value.
Liam says: "If you share £50 in the ratio 1:4, the larger share is £40." Explain why Liam is correct.
In 'explain' questions you must show the working that proves the claim, not just restate it. For full marks: state the total number of parts (1 + 4 = 5); show how one part is found (50 ÷ 5 = £10); and calculate the larger share (4 × 10 = £40). The mark scheme requires the numerical calculation to verify Liam's statement — writing 'because he calculated it correctly' earns no marks. Always work through the mathematics step by step.
£300 is shared in the ratio 2:3 What is the smaller share?
Total parts = 2 + 3 = 5. One part = 300 ÷ 5 = 60. Smaller share = 2 × 60 = £120.
A bag contains red and blue counters in the ratio 4:9 There are 52 counters in total. How many are red?
Total parts = 4+9 = 13. One part = 52÷13 = 4. Red = 4 parts = 4×4 = 16.
The angles in a triangle are in the ratio 2:3:4 What is the size of the smallest angle?
Angles in a triangle sum to 180°. Total parts = 2+3+4 = 9. One part = 180÷9 = 20°. Smallest angle = 2 × 20° = 40°.
A cinema has adults and children in the ratio 5:3. After 15 adults leave and 9 children arrive, the ratio becomes 1:1. How many people were originally in the cinema?
Let adults = 5x and children = 3x initially. After the changes: adults = 5x − 15 and children = 3x + 9. Since the new ratio is 1:1, the two quantities are equal: 5x − 15 = 3x + 9. Solving: 2x = 24, so x = 12. The original total = 5x + 3x = 8x = 8 × 12 = 96 people. Two common errors: (1) finding x = 12 and giving that as the answer — x is not the total; (2) calculating the final total after changes (which would be 72) rather than the original. Always re-read the question to check what you are being asked to find.
A box contains red and blue counters in the ratio 3:4. When 6 red counters are added, the ratio becomes 3:2. How many blue counters are in the box?
This is a changing ratio problem requiring algebra. Start by letting red = 3x and blue = 4x (using the initial ratio 3:4). Blue doesn't change, so after adding 6 red counters, red = 3x + 6 and blue = 4x. The new ratio gives the equation: (3x + 6) / 4x = 3/2. Cross-multiplying: 2(3x + 6) = 3(4x), which simplifies to 6x + 12 = 12x, so 12 = 6x and x = 2. Blue counters = 4x = 4 × 2 = 8. A common error is finding x = 2 and stopping — always go back to answer the actual question being asked.
The ratio of cats to dogs is 2:3. The ratio of dogs to rabbits is 5:4. Find the ratio of cats to dogs to rabbits in its simplest form.
When combining two linked ratios, the shared quantity (dogs) must have the same value in both. Dogs is 3 in the first ratio and 5 in the second — find the LCM of 3 and 5, which is 15. Scale the first ratio (cats:dogs = 2:3) by multiplying by 5 to get 10:15. Scale the second ratio (dogs:rabbits = 5:4) by multiplying by 3 to get 15:12. Now dogs = 15 in both, so the combined ratio is cats:dogs:rabbits = 10:15:12. You cannot simply add or concatenate the two ratios — they must share a common dog value first.
Tom and Jerry share £240 in the ratio 5:3. How much more money does Tom receive than Jerry?
First share the total: total parts = 5 + 3 = 8, so one part = £240 ÷ 8 = £30. Tom gets 5 × £30 = £150 and Jerry gets 3 × £30 = £90. The question asks how much MORE Tom gets, so find the difference: £150 − £90 = £60. A common mistake is stopping at Tom's share (£150) and missing the final step. The phrase 'how much more' always signals you need to find the difference between two amounts, not just one person's share.
A:B = 4:5 B:C = 2:3 Find A:B:C in its simplest form.
B is the linking quantity — it appears in both ratios. B is 5 in A:B and 2 in B:C. To combine these ratios, make B equal in both using the LCM of 5 and 2, which is 10. Scale A:B = 4:5 by multiplying by 2 to get 8:10. Scale B:C = 2:3 by multiplying by 5 to get 10:15. Now B = 10 in both, giving A:B:C = 8:10:15. Check: HCF(8,10,15) = 1, so this is already in its simplest form.
Write the ratio 0.6:1.5 in its simplest form.
When a ratio contains decimals, first convert to whole numbers by multiplying both parts by 10 (or 100 if needed): 0.6 × 10 = 6, 1.5 × 10 = 15, giving 6:15. Then simplify by dividing both by the HCF of 6 and 15, which is 3: 6 ÷ 3 = 2, 15 ÷ 3 = 5, so the answer is 2:5. A common mistake is stopping at 6:15 without simplifying further — always check whether the resulting whole-number ratio can be simplified.
In a class, the ratio of boys to girls is 3:5. What fraction of the class are boys?
The ratio 3:5 tells you there are 3 parts boys and 5 parts girls. To find the fraction of the class that are boys, first find the total: 3 + 5 = 8 parts. Boys are 3 out of 8 parts, so the fraction is 3/8. A very common error is writing 3/5 — this is the ratio of boys to girls, not boys as a fraction of the whole class. Always add the ratio parts to get the denominator.
Complete the equivalent ratio: 3 : 7 = 12 : __
To find a missing value in an equivalent ratio, determine the scale factor from the part you know: 3 has become 12, so the scale factor is 12 ÷ 3 = 4. Apply the same scale factor to the other part: 7 × 4 = 28. The key principle is that equivalent ratios multiply or divide both parts by the same number. A common mistake is adding the difference (12 − 3 = 9) to 7, giving 16 — but equivalent ratios use multiplication, not addition.
Complete the equivalent ratio: 35 : 14 = __ : 2
Identify the scale factor from the part that's complete: 14 has become 2, so the scale factor is 14 ÷ 7 = 2, meaning we are dividing by 7. Apply the same operation to the other part: 35 ÷ 7 = 5. So the missing value is 5. This ratio scales down rather than up. A common error is subtracting the difference (14 − 2 = 12 from 35) to get 23 — equivalent ratios always use multiplication or division, never addition or subtraction.
The ratio of apples to oranges in a basket is 2:3. Sarah says "2/3 of the fruits are apples." Explain why Sarah is wrong.
The ratio 2:3 means 2 parts apples and 3 parts oranges. Total = 2+3 = 5 parts. Apples are 2 out of 5, which is 2/5, not 2/3. Sarah confused the ratio (2:3) with a fraction of the whole.
Write the ratio 15:25 in its simplest form.
To simplify a ratio, divide both parts by their highest common factor (HCF). The HCF of 15 and 25 is 5, so divide both: 15 ÷ 5 = 3, 25 ÷ 5 = 5, giving 3:5. The method is identical to simplifying fractions — find the HCF and divide. A common mistake is dividing the two numbers by different values (e.g. dividing 15 by 3 but 25 by 5), which gives an incorrect and unequal ratio.
A recipe uses flour and sugar in the ratio 5:2. What fraction of the mixture is flour?
The ratio 5:2 means 5 parts flour and 2 parts sugar. Total parts = 5+2 = 7. Flour is 5 out of 7 parts, so the fraction is 5/7.
Write the ratio 1/2 : 1/4 in its simplest form.
To simplify a ratio with fractions, multiply both parts by the LCM of the denominators. LCM(2,4)=4. So (1/2)×4 : (1/4)×4 = 2:1.
A fruit bowl contains apples and bananas in the ratio 7:3. What fraction of the fruits are bananas?
The ratio 7:3 means 7 parts apples and 3 parts bananas. Total parts = 7+3 = 10. Bananas are 3 out of 10 parts, so the fraction is 3/10.
A coach travels 240 km from London to Manchester. For the first 90 km, the average speed is 60 km/h. For the remaining journey, the average speed is 75 km/h. Work out the total time for the journey. Give your answer in hours and minutes.
Find the time for each stage separately using Time = Distance ÷ Speed. Stage 1: 90 ÷ 60 = 1.5 hours (1 hour 30 min). Stage 2: remaining distance = 240 − 90 = 150 km; time = 150 ÷ 75 = 2 hours. Total time = 1.5 + 2 = 3.5 hours = 3 hours 30 minutes. The key step students miss is calculating the remaining distance for stage 2 before finding its time.
A train travels from Newcastle to York, a distance of 120 km. The train leaves Newcastle at 09:25 and arrives in York at 10:55. For the first 40 km, the train travels at 80 km/h. Work out the average speed for the remaining part of the journey. Give your answer correct to 3 significant figures.
Step 1: total journey time = 10:55 − 09:25 = 90 minutes = 1.5 hours. Step 2: time for first 40 km at 80 km/h = 40 ÷ 80 = 0.5 hours. Step 3: remaining time = 1.5 − 0.5 = 1 hour. Step 4: remaining distance = 120 − 40 = 80 km. Step 5: average speed for remaining part = 80 ÷ 1 = 80 km/h. This multi-step question requires careful management of both distances and times — write down each step clearly.
A car travels 120 km at 60 km/h, then a further 180 km at 90 km/h. Work out the average speed for the whole journey.
Average speed = total distance ÷ total time. Find each time separately: Part 1: 120 ÷ 60 = 2 hours. Part 2: 180 ÷ 90 = 2 hours. Total distance = 120 + 180 = 300 km. Total time = 2 + 2 = 4 hours. Average speed = 300 ÷ 4 = 75 km/h. Note that here (75) equals the mean of the two speeds (60+90)÷2 = 75 only because the times happen to be equal. Never just average the speeds without checking this condition.
A cyclist travels for 30 minutes at 18 km/h, then for 1 hour 15 minutes at 24 km/h. Work out the average speed for the whole journey. Give your answer correct to 1 decimal place.
Convert times to hours first: 30 min = 0.5 h; 1 hour 15 min = 1.25 h. Find each distance: Part 1: 18 × 0.5 = 9 km. Part 2: 24 × 1.25 = 30 km. Total distance = 9 + 30 = 39 km. Total time = 0.5 + 1.25 = 1.75 h. Average speed = 39 ÷ 1.75 ≈ 22.3 km/h. The key error to avoid is simply averaging 18 and 24 (which gives 21), because the cyclist spends more time at the higher speed.
Convert 72 km/h to m/s. Give your answer correct to 1 decimal place.
To convert km/h to m/s, divide by 3.6 (because 1 km = 1000 m and 1 hour = 3600 s, so 1 km/h = 1000/3600 = 1/3.6 m/s). So 72 ÷ 3.6 = 20 m/s. Alternatively: convert 72 km to metres (72,000 m) and 1 hour to seconds (3600 s), then divide: 72,000 ÷ 3600 = 20 m/s. The reverse process (m/s to km/h) is to multiply by 3.6.
A sprinter runs at 9 m/s. Convert this speed to km/h.
To convert m/s to km/h, multiply by 3.6 (because 1 m/s = 3600 m per hour = 3.6 km per hour). So 9 × 3.6 = 32.4 km/h. You can also think of it step by step: 9 m/s × 3600 s/hour = 32,400 m/hour = 32.4 km/hour. A common error is dividing by 3.6 instead of multiplying — remember, m/s to km/h is the larger unit so the number gets bigger.
A runner completes a 10 km race in 45 minutes. Work out the runner's average speed in km/h.
The key step is converting 45 minutes into hours: 45 ÷ 60 = 0.75 hours. Then apply Speed = Distance ÷ Time: 10 ÷ 0.75 = 13.33 km/h (to 2 decimal places). A very common mistake is to use 45 directly as the time, giving 10 ÷ 45 = 0.22, which is wrong because the speed formula requires time in hours when the distance is in km.
A cyclist travels 24 km in 2 hours. Work out the cyclist's speed in km/h.
Use the formula Speed = Distance ÷ Time. Substitute the values: Speed = 24 ÷ 2 = 12 km/h. The units tell you the answer must be in km/h because you divided kilometres by hours. A common mistake is to multiply 24 × 2 = 48 or to divide 2 ÷ 24. Remember: to find speed, distance is always divided by time.
A car travels at a constant speed of 60 km/h for 3 hours. Work out the distance traveled.
Use the formula Distance = Speed × Time. Substitute: Distance = 60 × 3 = 180 km. Here the units work out correctly: km/h × hours = km. A common error is dividing (60 ÷ 3 = 20) instead of multiplying. The DST triangle helps: cover D to see S × T underneath.
A train travels 240 km at a speed of 80 km/h. Work out how long the journey takes.
Use the formula Time = Distance ÷ Speed. Substitute: Time = 240 ÷ 80 = 3 hours. A common error is multiplying (240 × 80 = 19200) or inverting the division (80 ÷ 240 ≈ 0.33). The DST triangle helps: cover T to see D ÷ S underneath. Always include units in your answer — here the answer is 3 hours.
A car travels at 30 km/h for 2 hours, then at 90 km/h for 1 hour. The mean of the two speeds is (30 + 90) ÷ 2 = 60 km/h. Explain why the average speed for the journey is NOT 60 km/h.
The car spent more time at 30 km/h (2 hours) than at 90 km/h (1 hour), so the average speed is weighted towards 30. Average speed = total distance / total time = 150 / 3 = 50 km/h, not 60.
Average speed is total distance divided by total time — it is NOT simply the arithmetic mean of the speeds. Here the car travels different amounts of time at each speed: 2 hours at 30 km/h and only 1 hour at 90 km/h. Total distance = (30 × 2) + (90 × 1) = 60 + 90 = 150 km. Total time = 3 hours. Average speed = 150 ÷ 3 = 50 km/h, not 60. The arithmetic mean of speeds (60 km/h) only equals the true average speed when the times spent at each speed are equal.
Which formula correctly shows the relationship between speed (S), distance (D), and time (T)?
Speed = Distance ÷ Time. This makes sense: if you travel further in the same time, your speed is higher. If you take longer for the same distance, your speed is lower.
A car travels at 40 km/h for 30 minutes, then at 80 km/h for 30 minutes. What is the average speed for the whole journey?
Total distance = (40 × 0.5) + (80 × 0.5) = 20 + 40 = 60 km. Total time = 1 hour. Average speed = 60 ÷ 1 = 60 km/h. Note that this equals the MEAN of the speeds (40+80)÷2 = 60 ONLY because the times are equal.
Which of these speeds is most realistic for a person walking?
A person walks at about 5 km/h (or about 1.4 m/s). 5 m/s would be running very fast (18 km/h), 50 km/h is cycling speed, and 500 m/s is faster than a jet plane!
A rectangular swimming pool is 25 m long, 10 m wide, and has a uniform depth of 1.5 m. Water costs £0.12 per 100 litres. Calculate the cost to fill the pool completely. (1 m³ = 1000 litres)
Volume = 25 × 10 × 1.5 = 375 m³. Convert to litres: 375 × 1000 = 375,000 litres. Number of 100-litre units = 375,000 ÷ 100 = 3750. Cost = 3750 × £0.12 = £450. This is a multi-step problem requiring: volume calculation, unit conversion (m³ to litres), then a cost calculation. Work through each step clearly and check units at every stage.
A prism has an L-shaped cross-section made from two rectangles. One rectangle is 12 cm by 4 cm, and the other is 5 cm by 3 cm. The prism is 20 cm long. Calculate the volume.
Split the L-shaped cross-section into two rectangles: area 1 = 12 × 4 = 48 cm², area 2 = 5 × 3 = 15 cm². Total cross-section area = 48 + 15 = 63 cm². Volume = 63 × 20 = 1260 cm³. The key is adding all parts of the compound cross-section before multiplying by the prism length. Common errors: using only one rectangle's area, or multiplying each rectangle's area by 20 and then adding (which gives the same answer, but requires extra care).
A prism has a trapezoidal cross-section with parallel sides of length 8 cm and 12 cm, and a perpendicular height of 5 cm between them. The prism is 15 cm long. Calculate the volume of the prism.
Volume of prism = cross-section area × length. Cross-section is a trapezium: area = (1/2)(a + b)h = (1/2)(8 + 12) × 5 = (1/2) × 20 × 5 = 50 cm². Volume = 50 × 15 = 750 cm³. The critical step is correctly applying the trapezium area formula before multiplying by the prism length. A common error is forgetting the (1/2) factor, giving area = 100 and volume = 1500.
A cylinder has a volume of 500 cm³ and a height of 8 cm. Find the radius of the cylinder. Give your answer to 2 decimal places.
Rearrange V = πr²h for r: r² = V ÷ (πh) = 500 ÷ (π × 8) = 500 ÷ 25.133 ≈ 19.894, then r = √19.894 ≈ 4.46 cm (2 d.p.). Two key steps: first divide by (π × h) to isolate r², then take the square root. A common mistake is forgetting to take the square root at the end, leaving the answer as r² ≈ 19.89 rather than r ≈ 4.46.
A cylindrical water tank has a diameter of 1.2 m and a height of 2 m. Calculate the volume of the tank in m³. Give your answer to 2 decimal places.
The diameter is 1.2 m, so the radius = 1.2 ÷ 2 = 0.6 m. Volume = πr²h = π × 0.6² × 2 = π × 0.36 × 2 = 0.72π ≈ 2.26 m³ (2 d.p.). The most common error is using the diameter (1.2) directly in the formula instead of converting to radius first. Always halve the diameter before substituting.
A cuboid has volume 360 cm³. Its length is 10 cm and its width is 6 cm. Find the height.
Rearrange the cuboid volume formula: V = l × w × h, so h = V ÷ (l × w) = 360 ÷ (10 × 6) = 360 ÷ 60 = 6 cm. First calculate the product of the two known dimensions (10 × 6 = 60), then divide the total volume by that product. A common mistake is dividing by only one dimension — always multiply the two known dimensions together first.
A cuboid has dimensions (x + 2) cm, (x - 1) cm, and 3 cm. Write an expression for the volume of the cuboid in the form ax² + bx + c.
V = (x + 2)(x − 1) × 3. First expand the bracket: (x + 2)(x − 1) = x² − x + 2x − 2 = x² + x − 2. Then multiply by 3: 3(x² + x − 2) = 3x² + 3x − 6. The key step is expanding the two linear brackets before multiplying by 3 — do not try to multiply all three factors simultaneously. Check at a test value, e.g. x = 2: (4)(1)(3) = 12; expression: 3(4) + 3(2) − 6 = 12 ✓.
A triangular prism has a triangle face with base 6 cm and height 4 cm. The prism is 10 cm long. Calculate its volume.
Volume of a triangular prism = area of triangular cross-section × length. Area of triangle = (1/2) × 6 × 4 = 12 cm². Volume = 12 × 10 = 120 cm³. The most common mistake is forgetting the 1/2 in the triangle formula, which gives 6 × 4 × 10 = 240 cm³ — double the correct answer. Always find the cross-section area first, then multiply by the length.
Find the volume of a cylinder with radius 5 cm and height 8 cm. Give your answer to 1 decimal place.
A cylinder is a circular prism: Volume = πr²h. Square the radius first: r² = 5² = 25. Then V = π × 25 × 8 = 200π ≈ 628.3 cm³ (1 d.p.). A critical error is forgetting to square the radius (using πrh instead), giving π × 5 × 8 ≈ 125.7. Another common mistake is using the diameter instead of the radius. Always use the π button on your calculator rather than approximating π as 3.14.
Find the volume of a cylinder with radius 6 cm and height 10 cm. Leave your answer in terms of π.
Volume = πr²h = π × 6² × 10 = π × 36 × 10 = 360π cm³. Leaving the answer in terms of π means writing 360π rather than computing 360 × 3.14159... ≈ 1131. Do not substitute a decimal for π — the question specifically asks for the exact form. The step to show on paper: r² = 36, then 36 × 10 = 360, so V = 360π.
A cuboid measures 10 cm × 10 cm × 10 cm. A cylinder has a diameter of 10 cm and a height of 10 cm. Which shape has the greater volume? Explain your reasoning without calculating exact volumes.
The cuboid has the greater volume. The cylinder's circular base (diameter 10 cm, so radius 5 cm) fits inside the square base of the cuboid (10 cm × 10 cm). Since the circle's area (πr² = 25π ≈ 78.5 cm²) is less than the square's area (100 cm²), and both shapes have the same height (10 cm), the cylinder's volume must be smaller.
Calculate the volume of a cuboid with length 8 cm, width 5 cm, and height 4 cm.
Volume of a cuboid = length × width × height. Substitute l = 8, w = 5, h = 4: V = 8 × 5 × 4 = 160 cm³. A useful approach is to multiply any two dimensions first (8 × 5 = 40), then multiply by the third (40 × 4 = 160). Always write the unit as cm³ for volume — the ³ shows it is a three-dimensional measurement.
A prism has a cross-sectional area of 18 cm² and a length of 12 cm. Calculate the volume.
When the cross-sectional area is already given, the volume calculation is a single multiplication: V = cross-section area × length = 18 × 12 = 216 cm³. There is no need to work out the area from scratch. A common mistake is adding (18 + 12 = 30) or dividing (18 ÷ 12 = 1.5) instead of multiplying.
Calculate the volume of the triangular prism shown. The triangular cross-section has a base of 6 cm and a perpendicular height of 4 cm. The length of the prism is 10 cm.
Area of triangular cross-section = ½ × 6 × 4 = 12 cm². Volume = 12 × 10 = 120 cm³.
A triangular prism has a volume of 360 cm³ and a length of 15 cm. Calculate the area of the cross-section.
Volume = area of cross-section × length, so area of cross-section = volume ÷ length = 360 ÷ 15 = 24 cm².
Explain why a cylinder can be considered a special type of prism.
A prism is defined as a 3D shape with a constant cross-section along its entire length. A cylinder has a circular cross-section that is the same all the way along its length, so it fits this definition. The volume formula volume = area of cross-section × length applies to both, where the cross-section is a circle with area πr².
A prism is a 3D solid with a uniform (constant) cross-section throughout its length. A cylinder has a circular cross-section that is identical at every slice — it is simply a prism with a circular cross-section. The same volume formula (V = cross-section area × length) applies.
Which formula correctly calculates the volume of a cuboid?
The volume of a cuboid is the product of all three dimensions: V = length × width × height. This gives the total space inside the 3D shape in cubic units.
A cuboid has volume 250. What are the correct units?
Volume is always measured in cubic units. The ³ shows we're measuring 3-dimensional space: cm³ (cubic centimetres), m³ (cubic metres), etc.
How many cubic centimetres (cm³) are in 1 litre?
1 litre = 1000 cm³. This is a key conversion for volume problems involving liquids or capacity.
The diagram shows a triangular prism. Which formula is used to calculate the volume of any prism?
The volume of any prism = area of cross-section × length. The cross-section is the shape that stays the same along the full length of the prism. For a triangular prism, the cross-section is a triangle.
A triangle has two sides of length 8 cm and 12 cm, with an included angle of 60°. Work out the exact area of the triangle. Give your answer in the form a√b cm² where a and b are integers.
Using area = 1/2 ab sin C with sin 60° = √3/2: Area = 1/2 × 8 × 12 × √3/2 = 48 × √3/2 = 24√3 cm².
A right-angled triangle has angles of 30° and 60°. The side opposite the 30° angle has length 5 cm. Work out the exact length of the hypotenuse. Give your answer in its simplest form.
Using sin 30° = opposite/hypotenuse: 1/2 = 5/h, so h = 5 ÷ (1/2) = 10 cm.
Work out the exact value of 2 sin 45° cos 45°. You must show all your working.
Substituting sin 45° = cos 45° = √2/2 gives 2 × (√2/2) × (√2/2) = 2 × 2/4 = 1.
A right-angled triangle has a hypotenuse of 10 cm and one angle of 60°. Calculate the exact length of the side opposite the 60° angle. Give your answer in the form a√b where a and b are integers.
Using sin 60° = opposite/hypotenuse = x/10, and sin 60° = √3/2, we get x = 10 × √3/2 = 5√3 cm.
Show that sin²30° + cos²30° = 1. You must show all your working clearly.
Substituting sin 30° = 1/2 gives sin²30° = 1/4. Substituting cos 30° = √3/2 gives cos²30° = 3/4. Adding: 1/4 + 3/4 = 1 ✓
Work out the exact value of sin 60° + cos 60°. Give your answer in its simplest form.
sin 60° = √3/2 and cos 60° = 1/2. Adding gives (√3 + 1)/2.
James says that sin 30° and cos 60° are equal. Is James correct? Explain your answer using exact values.
James is correct. sin 30° = 1/2 and cos 60° = 1/2, so they are equal.
Work out the exact value of tan²45° + 1. Simplify your answer fully.
tan 45° = 1, so tan²45° = 1. Therefore tan²45° + 1 = 1 + 1 = 2.
Which is larger: sin 30° or cos 30°? Explain your answer using exact values.
cos 30° = √3/2 ≈ 0.866, while sin 30° = 1/2 = 0.5. So cos 30° is larger.
What is the exact value of sin 30°?
sin 30° = 1/2 is one of the key exact trig values you must memorise. It comes from the 30-60-90 triangle.
What is the exact value of cos 60°?
cos 60° = 1/2. Notice that cos 60° = sin 30° (complementary angle relationship).
Write down the exact value of sin 45°.
sin 45° = √2/2 (or equivalently 1/√2). Both forms are rationalised versions of each other.
Why is tan 90° undefined?
tan 90° is undefined because tan = sin ÷ cos, and cos 90° = 0. Division by zero is undefined.
Write down the exact value of tan 60°.
tan 60° = √3. Note that tan 30° = 1/√3, which is the reciprocal.
ABCD is a cyclic quadrilateral. A tangent to the circle at point A makes an angle of 2x° with chord AB. Angle BCD = 3x + 80° Find the value of x.
By the alternate segment theorem, angle DAB = 2x°. Since ABCD is a cyclic quadrilateral, opposite angles sum to 180°. Therefore, 2x + (3x + 80) = 180. Solving: 5x + 80 = 180, so 5x = 100, giving x = 20.
Points A, B and C lie on a circle with centre O. OA = OB (radii) Angle AOB = 76° Find angle ACB, giving a reason for each step of your working.
Using the angle at centre theorem: the angle at the centre (AOB = 76°) is twice the angle at the circumference (ACB). Therefore, angle ACB = 76 ÷ 2 = 38°.
Points A, B and C lie on a circle with centre O. OA, OB and OC are radii. Angle AOC = 140° Angle BOC = 80° Show that angle ABC = 70°
Angles around point O sum to 360°, so angle AOB = 360° - 140° - 80° = 140°. Using the angle at centre theorem, angle ABC (at circumference) = 140° ÷ 2 = 70°.
ABCD is a cyclic quadrilateral. Angle ABC = 2x + 15° Angle ADC = 3x - 10° Find the value of x.
In a cyclic quadrilateral, opposite angles sum to 180°. So (2x+15) + (3x-10) = 180. Simplifying: 5x+5 = 180, so 5x = 175, giving x = 35.
A tangent to a circle at point B makes an angle of 58° with chord BA. Point C lies on the circle on the opposite side of BA to the tangent. Find angle ACB.
By the alternate segment theorem, the angle between a tangent and a chord equals the angle in the alternate segment. The tangent-chord angle is 58°, so angle ACB (in the alternate segment) is also 58°.
A tangent to a circle with centre O touches the circle at point T. OT = 5 cm (radius) The tangent extends to point P where OP = 13 cm. A student says: 'I can use Pythagoras' theorem to find PT.' Explain why the student is correct.
The tangent is perpendicular to the radius OT at point T, creating a 90° angle. This means triangle OTP is right-angled at T. Pythagoras' theorem can be applied to any right-angled triangle, so the student is correct.
In the diagram, O is the centre of the circle. The angle at the centre subtended by an arc is 124°. A second angle, y, is the angle in the major segment subtended by the same chord. Find angle y.
The two sides from the centre O to the circle are both radii, so the triangle is isosceles. The angle at the centre is 124°. The two base angles are equal and sum to 180° − 124° = 56°. Each base angle = 56° ÷ 2 = 28°. Therefore y = 28°.
Points A, B and C lie on a circle with centre O. Angle AOC = 124° Find angle ABC.
The angle at the centre (AOC = 124°) is twice the angle at the circumference (ABC). Therefore, angle ABC = 124 ÷ 2 = 62°.
Points A, B, C and D all lie on a circle. Angle BAC = 47° Points C and D are in the same segment. Find angle BDC.
Angles in the same segment are equal. Since angles BAC and BDC are both subtended by arc BC in the same segment, angle BDC = 47°.
Two tangents are drawn from external point P to a circle. The tangents touch the circle at points A and B. PA = 8 cm What is the length of PB?
Tangents drawn from an external point to a circle are equal in length. Since PA = 8 cm, PB must also be 8 cm.
In the diagram, O is the centre of the circle. The angle at the centre is 124°. Find the angle at the circumference, marked x, subtended by the same arc.
The angle at the centre is twice the angle at the circumference (subtended by the same arc). So the angle at the circumference = 124 ÷ 2 = 62°.
State the circle theorem used to find angle x in the diagram, and explain why it applies in this situation.
The theorem is: the angle at the centre is twice the angle at the circumference when both angles are subtended by the same arc. It applies here because both angles are formed from the same two points on the circle, with one vertex at the centre O and the other at the circumference.
The theorem states that the angle at the centre is twice the angle at the circumference when subtended by the same arc. To apply it you need to identify one angle with vertex at O (centre) and one at the circumference, both looking at the same chord or arc.
A circle has centre O. Chord AB has length 24 cm. OM is perpendicular to AB and M is the midpoint of AB. Find the length AM.
The perpendicular from the centre to a chord bisects the chord. Since OM is perpendicular to AB, M is the midpoint of AB. Therefore, AM = 24 ÷ 2 = 12 cm.
Triangle ABC is drawn inside a circle. AB is a diameter of the circle. Angle ACB = 90° Explain why angle ACB must be 90°.
Since AB is a diameter, angle ACB is an angle in a semicircle. The angle in a semicircle theorem states that this angle is always 90°.
AB is a diameter of a circle. Point C lies on the circle. What is the size of angle ACB?
The angle in a semicircle is always 90°. Since AB is a diameter, angle ACB is an angle in a semicircle, so it must be 90°.
A tangent touches a circle at point T. OT is a radius. What is the angle between the tangent and the radius OT?
A tangent to a circle is always perpendicular to the radius at the point of contact. Therefore, the angle is 90°.
PQRS is a cyclic quadrilateral. Angle PQR = 105° What is angle PSR?
Opposite angles in a cyclic quadrilateral sum to 180°. Angle PQR and angle PSR are opposite, so angle PSR = 180° - 105° = 75°.
The diagram shows a circle with centre O. An angle is formed at the centre O and an angle is formed at the circumference, both subtended by the same arc. What is the relationship between these two angles?
The angle at the centre is twice the angle at the circumference when both are subtended by the same arc. This is one of the fundamental circle theorems.
Work out the value of 16^(3/4) You must show your working.
For a fractional index x^(m/n), the rule is: the denominator (n) tells you which root, and the numerator (m) tells you which power. Always do the root first, then the power. Here: 16^(3/4) means find the fourth root of 16, then cube the result. Step 1 — fourth root: ⁴√16 = 2 (since 2⁴ = 16). Step 2 — cube: 2³ = 8. A very common mistake is stopping after step 1 and writing 2 — this earns 1 mark but not 2. Another mistake is multiplying the indices (3 × 4 = 12), which is incorrect. Always carry out both steps.
Estimate √70 to 1 decimal place. You must show your working.
When estimating a square root, first identify the two perfect square numbers either side of the target. Here, 64 < 70 < 81, so √70 lies between √64 = 8 and √81 = 9. Next, judge where 70 sits between 64 and 81: 70 − 64 = 6, 81 − 70 = 11, so 70 is closer to 64 than to 81, meaning √70 is closer to 8 than to 9. Trying 8.4: 8.4² = 70.56, which is close enough to accept. Always show the boundary squares — you earn a method mark just for identifying √64 = 8 and √81 = 9.
Work out the value of 5⁻² Give your answer as a fraction.
A negative index means take the reciprocal (flip to a fraction): x⁻ⁿ = 1/xⁿ. Apply this rule in two steps. First, strip the negative sign and evaluate the positive power: 5² = 25. Then flip it to a fraction: 5⁻² = 1/25. Two very common mistakes are writing -25 (treating the negative index as making the answer negative) or writing just 25 (ignoring the negative index altogether). The question says 'give your answer as a fraction', so leave it as 1/25 rather than converting to 0.04.
Work out the value of 27^(1/3)
A fractional index x^(1/n) means the nth root of x. The denominator of the fraction tells you which root to find. So 27^(1/3) means the cube root of 27. Ask yourself: which number, when cubed, gives 27? Since 3³ = 3 × 3 × 3 = 27, the answer is 3. A common error is dividing by 3 (giving 9), which confuses the fractional index with division. The key rule to remember: x^(1/2) = √x, x^(1/3) = ∛x, and in general x^(1/n) = the nth root of x.
Work out the value of 8^(-2/3) Give your answer as a fraction.
When an index is both negative and fractional (like -2/3), tackle it in two stages. First, ignore the negative sign and evaluate the fractional part: 8^(2/3) means (∛8)² = 2² = 4. Then apply the negative index by taking the reciprocal: 8^(-2/3) = 1/(8^(2/3)) = 1/4. A common error is getting 4 (correct fractional part) but forgetting to flip it to 1/4. The question also specifies 'give your answer as a fraction', so do not convert to 0.25. Remember: the negative index only flips the result — it never makes it a negative number.
Explain why x⁻¹ = 1/x
A negative index means 'take the reciprocal'. This comes from index laws: x⁻¹ × x¹ = x⁰ = 1, so x⁻¹ must equal 1/x.
Solve 2ⁿ = 64 Find the value of n.
To solve 2ⁿ = 64, you need to find which power of 2 equals 64. The most reliable method is to systematically build up powers of 2: 2¹=2, 2²=4, 2³=8, 2⁴=16, 2⁵=32, 2⁶=64. Counting six steps tells you n = 6. A common mistake is dividing 64 by 2 and getting 32, which confuses the operation with the answer. You could also recognise that 64 = 2⁶ from memory (powers of 2 are a useful sequence to know). Show your working by listing the powers of 2 — this earns the method mark even if you make an arithmetic error.
Work out 7²
7² means 7 multiplied by itself — so 7 × 7 = 49. The notation 'squared' always means the number is used as a factor exactly twice. A very common mistake is to calculate 7 × 2 = 14, treating the power as a multiplier rather than a repeated multiplication. Memorising square numbers up to 15² will make these questions quick to answer in exams.
Work out 4³
4³ means 4 multiplied by itself three times: 4 × 4 × 4. Work in two steps: 4 × 4 = 16, then 16 × 4 = 64. The word 'cubed' always means the number is used as a factor exactly three times. A common error is calculating 4 × 3 = 12, which confuses the power with a multiplier. Knowing cube numbers up to 10³ by heart is very useful for GCSE questions.
Find √144
The square root symbol √ means 'what number multiplied by itself gives this value?'. √144 asks: which number squared equals 144? Since 12 × 12 = 144, the answer is 12. Note that the √ symbol always means the positive root only — do not write ±12 unless the question specifically asks for both roots. Knowing your square numbers up to at least 15² is essential for answering these quickly without a calculator.
What is the value of 2⁻³?
A negative index means 'reciprocal'. 2⁻³ = 1/2³ = 1/8. The negative power doesn't make the number negative — it flips it to a fraction.
Find ∛125
The cube root symbol ∛ means 'what number multiplied by itself three times gives this value?'. ∛125 asks: which number cubed equals 125? Since 5 × 5 × 5 = 125, the answer is 5. A very common mistake is dividing by 3 (125 ÷ 3 ≈ 41.7), which gives the wrong operation entirely. Memorising cube numbers from 1³ to 10³ (1, 8, 27, 64, 125, 216, 343, 512, 729, 1000) will help you spot cube roots instantly.
Work out 10⁵
Powers of 10 follow a simple pattern: 10ⁿ equals 1 followed by exactly n zeros. So 10⁵ = 100,000 (the digit 1 with five zeros after it). The key shortcut to remember is that you do NOT multiply 10 by 5 — a common mistake that gives 50. Instead, think of 10⁵ as 10 multiplied by itself 5 times: 10 × 10 × 10 × 10 × 10 = 100,000. This power-of-10 pattern is the foundation of standard form, so it is worth knowing thoroughly.
Work out 3.7 × 10³
Multiplying by 10³ means multiplying by 1000, which shifts the decimal point 3 places to the right. Starting from 3.7, move the decimal: 3.7 → 37.0 → 370.0 → 3700. Remember: multiplying by a power of 10 always makes numbers bigger, so the decimal moves right. Dividing by a power of 10 moves the decimal left. A common error is moving the decimal point the wrong way — ask yourself whether the answer should be larger or smaller to check your direction.
Which of these numbers is the largest? A: 2⁵ B: 3³ C: 4² D: 5²
Calculate each: 2⁵=32, 3³=27, 4²=16, 5²=25. The largest is 32 (option A).
The mass of the Earth is approximately 6 × 10²⁴ kg. The mass of the Moon is approximately 7.4 × 10²² kg. How many times heavier is the Earth than the Moon? Give your answer as an ordinary number, correct to the nearest whole number.
The phrase 'how many times heavier' indicates division: divide Earth's mass by the Moon's mass. Set up (6 × 10^24) ÷ (7.4 × 10^22). Divide coefficients: 6 ÷ 7.4 ≈ 0.8108... Subtract powers: 10^24 ÷ 10^22 = 10^2 = 100. Multiply: 0.8108 × 100 ≈ 81. Round to the nearest whole number: 81. This 5-mark question follows the standard division method but requires a calculator for the coefficient division, and asks for an ordinary number (not standard form) as the final answer. Note that 0.81 × 10^2 is an acceptable intermediate answer, but you must convert it to 81 for the final mark.
Work out (6 × 10⁵) × (4 × 10⁻³) ÷ (8 × 10⁻¹) Give your answer in standard form.
This multi-step calculation combines multiplication and division of standard form numbers with negative powers. Work through the operations in order: first multiply (6 × 10^5) × (4 × 10^-3): coefficients 6 × 4 = 24, indices 5 + (-3) = 2, giving 24 × 10^2. Then divide by (8 × 10^-1): coefficients 24 ÷ 8 = 3, indices 2 - (-1) = 3, giving 3 × 10^3. Note that subtracting a negative index is the same as adding it. This 4-mark question rewards each correct step. The sign of the power is the most common source of error when negative indices are involved.
Work out (4 × 10⁵) × (3 × 10²) Give your answer in standard form.
When multiplying numbers in standard form, multiply the coefficients and add the powers of 10 (index law: 10^a × 10^b = 10^(a+b)). For example, 4 × 10^3 × 3 × 10^4: multiply coefficients 4 × 3 = 12, and add indices 3 + 4 = 7, giving 12 × 10^7. However, 12 is not between 1 and 10, so adjust: 12 × 10^7 = 1.2 × 10^8. This adjustment step is a common source of errors. This 3-mark question rewards multiplying coefficients (M1), adding powers (M1), and giving the final answer in correct standard form (A1).
Work out (8 × 10⁶) ÷ (2 × 10²) Give your answer in standard form.
When dividing numbers in standard form, divide the coefficients and subtract the powers (index law: 10^a ÷ 10^b = 10^(a-b)). For example, 9.6 × 10^7 ÷ 3.2 × 10^4: divide coefficients 9.6 ÷ 3.2 = 3, and subtract indices 7 - 4 = 3, giving 3 × 10^3. Check that the coefficient is between 1 and 10 — 3 satisfies this, so no further adjustment is needed. The marks follow the same pattern: coefficient division, power subtraction, final standard form answer.
Work out (4.5 × 10⁴) + (3.2 × 10³) Give your answer in standard form.
You cannot add numbers in standard form by simply adding coefficients if the powers of 10 are different. First, express both numbers with the same power of 10. For example, to add 3.6 × 10^6 and 4.5 × 10^5, convert 4.5 × 10^5 to 0.45 × 10^6. Then add coefficients: 3.6 + 0.45 = 4.05, giving 4.05 × 10^6. Check the coefficient is between 1 and 10 — it is, so the answer is 4.05 × 10^6. This 3-mark question requires showing the conversion (M1), adding correctly (M1), and giving the final standard form answer (A1).
The distance from Earth to the Sun is approximately 1.5 × 10⁸ km. Light travels at 3 × 10⁵ km per second. How long does it take light to travel from the Sun to Earth? Give your answer in seconds, in standard form.
This question applies the standard form division method to a real-world speed-distance-time problem. The formula needed is time = distance ÷ speed. Distance = 1.5 × 10^8 km, speed = 3 × 10^5 km/s. Divide: (1.5 × 10^8) ÷ (3 × 10^5). Coefficients: 1.5 ÷ 3 = 0.5. Powers: 10^8 ÷ 10^5 = 10^3. So 0.5 × 10^3. This is not in standard form (0.5 < 1), so adjust: 0.5 × 10^3 = 5 × 10^2. The answer is 5 × 10^2 seconds (500 seconds). The 3 marks cover identifying the formula (M1), dividing correctly (M1), and giving the standard form answer (A1).
Write 56000 in standard form.
To write a large number in standard form, find where to place the decimal point so the coefficient is between 1 and 10, then count how many places the decimal moved to determine the power of 10. For 56000: place the decimal after the 5 to get 5.6, and count 4 places (5.6 × 10^4). The number of places the decimal moves left equals the positive power. This is a 2-mark question — one for the correct coefficient (5.6) and one for the correct power (10^4). A common error is writing 56 × 10^3 — the coefficient must be between 1 and 10.
Write 0.000087 in standard form.
For small decimals, the power of 10 is negative. To convert 0.000087: find the first non-zero digit (8), place the decimal after it (8.7), then count how many places the decimal moved to the right — it moved 5 places right to get from 0.000087 to 8.7. Moving right to make a larger number means the power is negative: 8.7 × 10^-5. The two marks are for the correct coefficient (8.7) and the correct negative power (-5). Confusing -5 with +5 and writing 8.7 × 10^5 is a common exam mistake.
Explain why standard form is useful for writing very large or very small numbers.
Standard form is a compact way to express very large or very small numbers that would be unwieldy to write out fully. For example, the distance from Earth to the Sun (about 150,000,000,000 metres) is much cleaner as 1.5 × 10^11 m. Standard form also makes comparisons and calculations easier — comparing 3.4 × 10^11 with 5.2 × 10^9 is instant once you see the different powers, whereas comparing the full decimal representations takes much longer. For 2 marks, explain that it is easier to read or write these numbers, and that it simplifies comparisons or calculations.
Write 3.4 × 10⁵ as an ordinary number.
Standard form is written as a × 10^n where a is between 1 and 10. To convert back to an ordinary number, multiply by the power of 10. Since the power is +5, multiply 3.4 by 10^5 = 100000: move the decimal point 5 places to the right. 3.4 becomes 340000. A positive power always gives a large number; a common mistake is moving the decimal in the wrong direction or by the wrong number of places.
Write 5.2 × 10⁻⁴ as an ordinary number.
A negative power of 10 means the number is very small. 10^-4 = 1/10000 = 0.0001. To convert 5.2 × 10^-4, move the decimal point 4 places to the LEFT: 5.2 → 0.52 → 0.052 → 0.0052 → 0.00052. The negative in the power tells you the direction (left = getting smaller). A common mistake is moving right instead of left, giving 52000 — but that would be a very large number, which contradicts the negative power.
Which of these numbers is written in standard form?
Standard form requires the first number to be between 1 and 10 (1 ≤ a < 10). Only 4.5 × 10⁴ meets this requirement.
Which of these numbers is the LARGEST?
When comparing standard form numbers, first compare the powers. 10⁴ is larger than 10³ or 10², so 3.1 × 10⁴ = 31000 is the largest.
A student writes: "(2 × 10⁴) × (5 × 10³) = 10 × 10⁷" What mistake has the student made?
The student correctly calculated 2 × 5 = 10 and 10⁴⁺³ = 10⁷, giving 10 × 10⁷. However, standard form requires the coefficient to be between 1 and 10. Since 10 ≥ 10, they must write it as 1 × 10⁸.
A car travels 180 km to the nearest 10 km. The journey takes 2.5 hours to 1 decimal place. Work out the maximum possible average speed for the journey. Give your answer to a suitable degree of accuracy.
This 5-mark question combines two skills: identifying the correct bounds for a speed calculation, and giving the answer to a suitable accuracy. Speed = distance / time, so maximum speed = maximum distance / minimum time. UB(distance) = 180 + 5 = 185 km (nearest 10 km, so half-unit = 5). LB(time) = 2.5 - 0.05 = 2.45 hours (nearest 0.1 hours, so half-unit = 0.05). Maximum speed = 185 / 2.45 = 75.51... km/h. Round to 2 significant figures: 76 km/h (since distance has 2 sf). The marks are: UB of distance (M1), LB of time (M1), setting up the division (M1), calculating the result (M1), and suitable rounding (A1). A common error is using 180 / 2.45 or 185 / 2.55 — check which bound makes the result larger.
x = 7.2 cm to 1 decimal place y = 4.5 cm to 1 decimal place Work out the maximum possible area of a rectangle with length x and width y. Give your answer to a suitable degree of accuracy.
To find the maximum area, multiply the upper bounds of both dimensions. UB(x) = 7.2 + 0.05 = 7.25 cm and UB(y) = 4.5 + 0.05 = 4.55 cm. Maximum area = 7.25 × 4.55 = 32.9875 cm². However, the question asks for a suitable degree of accuracy. Because the original measurements are given to 1 decimal place (2 significant figures), the answer should also be given to 2 significant figures: 33 cm². Writing 32.9875 would give a false impression of precision that the original measurements don't support. This 4-mark question rewards finding the upper bounds (M1), multiplying them (M1), the numerical result (M1), and rounding to a suitable accuracy (A1).
The mass of a substance is 150 g to the nearest 10 g. The volume is 42 cm³ to the nearest cm³. Work out the minimum possible value of density. Use the formula: density = mass ÷ volume Give your answer to a suitable degree of accuracy.
For the minimum value of a quantity calculated by division (density = mass / volume), use the lower bound of the numerator and the upper bound of the denominator. LB(mass) = 150 - 5 = 145 g (mass is to nearest 10 g, so halve the rounding unit: 10/2 = 5). UB(volume) = 42 + 0.5 = 42.5 cm³. Minimum density = 145 / 42.5 = 3.411... g/cm³. Round to 2 significant figures: 3.4 g/cm³. The key insight is that the smallest density comes from dividing the smallest possible mass by the largest possible volume. A common mistake is swapping the bounds to get UB(mass) / LB(volume), which gives the maximum density instead.
The length of a rectangle is 12.4 cm to 1 decimal place. The width is 7.8 cm to 1 decimal place. Jamie says: "The area is definitely less than 98 cm²" Is Jamie correct? You must show your working.
When asked to verify whether something is 'definitely' true, you must test the worst case — the extreme that would most likely break the claim. Jamie says the area is definitely less than 98 cm², so you need to check whether even the maximum possible area is below 98. UB(length) = 12.4 + 0.05 = 12.45 cm and UB(width) = 7.8 + 0.05 = 7.85 cm. Maximum area = 12.45 × 7.85 = 97.7325 cm². Since 97.7325 < 98, Jamie is correct. If the maximum had been above 98, Jamie would be wrong. This 4-mark question rewards finding upper bounds (M1), computing the maximum area (M1), comparing to 98 (M1), and stating a justified conclusion (M1). Never just state a conclusion without showing the calculation.
a = 12.5 correct to 1 decimal place b = 8.3 correct to 1 decimal place Work out the maximum possible value of a + b
To find the maximum possible value of a sum, use the upper bounds of both values. For a = 12.5 to 1 d.p., the upper bound is 12.55 (add 0.05, which is half of 0.1). For b = 8.3 to 1 d.p., the upper bound is 8.35. Maximum of a + b = 12.55 + 8.35 = 20.9 (or 20.89 for strict upper bounds using 12.54... + 8.34...). Remember the rule: Maximum of addition = UB + UB. A common mistake is just adding the given values (12.5 + 8.3 = 20.8), which gives the nominal sum, not the maximum possible sum.
p = 45.7 correct to 1 decimal place q = 23.8 correct to 1 decimal place Work out the minimum possible value of p - q
For subtraction, the minimum possible value comes from using the lower bound of the first number and the upper bound of the second. For p - q: minimum = LB(p) - UB(q). LB(p) = 45.7 - 0.05 = 45.65 and UB(q) = 23.8 + 0.05 = 23.85. Minimum = 45.65 - 23.85 = 21.8. Think of it logically: if p is as small as possible and q is as large as possible, the difference p - q is at its smallest. The most common mistake is using UB(p) - LB(q), which gives the maximum difference (22.0), not the minimum. This 3-mark question awards marks for identifying the correct bounds (M1), setting up the subtraction (M1), and the final answer (A1).
A square has a perimeter of 48 cm, measured to the nearest cm. Work out the maximum possible area of the square. Give your answer to 3 significant figures.
This is a multi-step bounds problem. The perimeter is 48 cm to the nearest cm, so UB(perimeter) = 48.5 cm. For a square, each side = perimeter / 4, so maximum side = 48.5 / 4 = 12.125 cm. Area of a square = side squared, so maximum area = 12.125² = 147.015625 cm². Rounded to 3 significant figures: 147 cm². The key here is recognising that 'maximum area' requires the maximum perimeter, which then gives the maximum side length. A common mistake is using 48 / 4 = 12 directly (giving 144 cm²), which ignores the bounds entirely. The three marks correspond to: upper bound of perimeter (M1), dividing by 4 to get maximum side (M1), squaring and rounding correctly (A1).
A mass m is 45 kg to the nearest kilogram. Write down the error interval for m using inequality notation.
An error interval expresses the full range of values a rounded measurement could take. For m = 45 kg to the nearest kilogram, any value from 44.5 up to (but not including) 45.5 would round to 45. The error interval is written as 44.5 ≤ m < 45.5. The key notation detail is that the lower bound uses ≤ (included — 44.5 itself rounds to 45) while the upper bound uses < (excluded — 45.5 would round up to 46). This 2-mark question gives one mark for each bound with its correct inequality sign.
A number x is truncated to 1 decimal place. The result is 3.4 Write down the upper bound for x.
Truncation is different from rounding. When a number is truncated to 1 decimal place, the digits beyond the first decimal place are simply cut off (not rounded up). So if x is truncated to give 3.4, x could be any value from 3.4 up to (but not including) 3.5 — for example, 3.4999... truncates to 3.4, not 3.5. The upper bound is therefore 3.5. A common error is confusing truncation with rounding: if x were rounded to 3.4, the lower bound would be 3.35 (not 3.4).
Two lengths are measured as 12.3 cm and 8.7 cm (both to 1 decimal place). A student calculates 12.3 + 8.7 = 21.0 cm Explain why the answer cannot be given as 21.00 cm
This question asks you to explain a mathematical concept, which is an AO3 skill. There are two mark points to address. First, state that the original measurements are only given to 1 decimal place — this means they have limited precision of ±0.05. Second, explain that writing 21.00 implies the answer is accurate to 2 decimal places (to within ±0.005), which is far more precise than the measurements allow. This is called 'false precision'. The correct answer to give is 21.0 cm (1 decimal place, matching the inputs). Note that 21.00 and 21.0 are numerically the same, but they communicate different levels of precision to the reader. In scientific and mathematical contexts, significant figures always communicate precision.
A length is 240 cm to the nearest 10 cm. What is the lower bound of the length?
When a number is rounded to the nearest 10, the lower bound is found by subtracting half of 10 (which is 5) from the rounded value. So 240 - 5 = 235 cm.
The attendance at a match is 8400 to the nearest 100. Write down the upper bound of the attendance.
The upper bound is found by adding half the degree of accuracy to the rounded value. The attendance is rounded to the nearest 100, so half of 100 is 50. Upper bound = 8400 + 50 = 8450. Note that 8450 itself would round up to 8500, so 8450 is strictly excluded — hence upper bounds always use a strict inequality (<) in the error interval. A common mistake is to add the full 100, giving 8500.
A number n is truncated to 2 decimal places. The result is 5.47 Which error interval is correct?
Truncation means cutting off digits, not rounding. If n is truncated to 5.47, it could be any value from 5.47 (exactly) up to (but not including) 5.48. So: 5.47 ≤ n < 5.48
A rectangle has length 8.4 cm and width 5.7 cm, both measured to 1 decimal place. A student calculates the area as 47.88 cm². What is wrong with this answer?
When measurements are given to 1 decimal place, the answer cannot have more precision than the original measurements. 47.88 has 4 significant figures, which is too many. The answer should be given to 2 significant figures: 48 cm²
A rectangle has length (4 + √5) cm and width (4 - √5) cm. Work out the perimeter of the rectangle. Give your answer in its simplest form.
The key insight is that the length (4 + √5) and width (4 - √5) are a conjugate pair. When you add them: (4 + √5) + (4 - √5) = 8, because the +√5 and -√5 cancel each other out. Perimeter = 2(length + width) = 2 × 8 = 16 cm. What makes this interesting is that the answer is a whole number even though both dimensions contain surds — the surds eliminate each other. The 4 marks are: perimeter formula (M1), adding dimensions and getting 8 (M1), multiplying by 2 (M1), and the final answer 16 (A1). A common mistake is writing 2(4 + √5) + 2(4 - √5) = 8 + 2√5 — the student forgot that +√5 and -√5 cancel.
Simplify √12 + √27
You cannot add √12 + √27 directly because they are unlike surds (different numbers under the root). You must simplify each one first. √12 = √(4×3) = 2√3, and √27 = √(9×3) = 3√3. Now both have the same surd part (√3), so they are like surds and can be added: 2√3 + 3√3 = 5√3. This 3-mark question rewards each step: simplifying √12 (M1), simplifying √27 (M1), and the final sum (A1). A classic mistake is writing √12 + √27 = √39 — you can NEVER add numbers under separate roots directly.
Expand and simplify (2 + √3)(3 - √3) Give your answer in the form a + b√3 where a and b are integers.
Expanding two brackets with surds uses the FOIL method (First, Outer, Inner, Last), just like double brackets in algebra. For (2 + √3)(3 - √3): First = 2×3 = 6; Outer = 2×(-√3) = -2√3; Inner = √3×3 = 3√3; Last = √3×(-√3) = -3. Collect the integer terms: 6 + (-3) = 3. Collect the surd terms: -2√3 + 3√3 = √3. Final answer: 3 + √3. The critical step is recognising √3 × (-√3) = -3 (not -√9 or -3√3). This 3-mark question awards marks for correct expansion (M1), correct evaluation of the √3 × √3 term (M1), and collecting like terms to get the final answer (A1).
Rationalize the denominator of 12/(3 + √5) Give your answer in the form a + b√5 where a and b are integers.
When the denominator contains a binomial like (3 + √5), you cannot just multiply by √5 — you need to multiply by the conjugate (3 - √5). The conjugate has the same terms but the opposite sign between them. Multiplying: numerator = 12(3 - √5) = 36 - 12√5. Denominator = (3 + √5)(3 - √5) = 3² - (√5)² = 9 - 5 = 4. This uses the difference of squares identity. Then divide by 4: (36 - 12√5)/4 = 9 - 3√5. The 3 marks are for: identifying and using the conjugate (M1), correctly expanding the denominator to 4 (M1), and simplifying to 9 - 3√5 (A1). A common mistake is forgetting to simplify the final fraction after rationalising.
Show that (√7 + 2)(√7 - 2) = 3
The expression (√7 + 2)(√7 - 2) matches the difference of squares identity: (a + b)(a - b) = a² - b², where a = √7 and b = 2. Substituting: (√7)² - 2² = 7 - 4 = 3. You can also expand fully using FOIL: (√7)(√7) + (√7)(-2) + (2)(√7) + (2)(-2) = 7 - 2√7 + 2√7 - 4 = 7 - 4 = 3. Either method works, but recognising the difference of squares is faster. For the show-that, you must show each step explicitly: state the pattern or expansion (M1), evaluate (√7)² = 7 and 2² = 4 (M1), and conclude 7 - 4 = 3 (A1). You cannot just write 3 = 3 without working.
Simplify √20
To simplify a surd, find the largest perfect square that is a factor of the number under the root. For √20: the square factors of 20 are 4 (since 4 × 5 = 20). Using the rule √(ab) = √a × √b, write √20 = √4 × √5 = 2√5. Always use the LARGEST square factor in one step — if you use a smaller square factor first (e.g., √(2×10)) you'll need extra steps and risk errors. The mark scheme awards M1 for splitting correctly (showing √4 × √5) and A1 for the final answer 2√5.
Work out 5√3 + 2√3
Like surds work exactly like like terms in algebra. Just as 5x + 2x = 7x, we have 5√3 + 2√3 = 7√3. The surd part √3 acts like a letter variable — only the coefficients (the numbers in front) are added. Two key errors to avoid: (1) adding the numbers under the roots (√3 + √3 ≠ √6 — that's multiplication), and (2) multiplying the coefficients instead of adding them. The mark scheme gives M1 for recognising these are like terms and A1 for the answer 7√3.
Work out √6 × √8 Give your answer in its simplest form.
To multiply two surds, use the rule √a × √b = √(a × b): combine them under one square root sign. So √6 × √8 = √(6 × 8) = √48. However, the question asks for the simplest form, so you must then simplify √48. The largest square factor of 48 is 16 (since 16 × 3 = 48), so √48 = √(16 × 3) = √16 × √3 = 4√3. The mark scheme gives M1 for reaching √48 and A1 for simplifying to 4√3. Stopping at √48 scores only 1 mark — always check whether the result can be simplified.
Expand and simplify √3(2 + √3)
Expanding a single bracket with a surd works exactly the same way as normal algebra: multiply the term outside by each term inside. For √3(2 + √3): first, √3 × 2 = 2√3; second, √3 × √3 = 3 (because √a × √a = a). So the result is 2√3 + 3. Note that 2√3 and 3 are unlike terms and cannot be combined further. The key fact to remember is √3 × √3 = 3, not √9 or 9 — squaring and taking the square root cancel out, leaving just the number. The mark scheme gives M1 for correct expansion and A1 for the simplified answer 2√3 + 3.
Rationalize the denominator of 6/√3 Give your answer in its simplest form.
To rationalise the denominator of 6/√3, multiply both numerator and denominator by √3 (this is the same as multiplying by 1, so the value does not change). Numerator: 6 × √3 = 6√3. Denominator: √3 × √3 = 3. So you get 6√3/3. The question then asks for simplest form — divide both parts by 3: 6√3/3 = 2√3. Two marks are awarded: M1 for correctly multiplying to get 6√3/3 (rationalised form), and A1 for simplifying to 2√3. A common mistake is multiplying only the denominator and not the numerator — always multiply top AND bottom to keep the fraction equivalent.
Explain why it is preferable to write fractions in rationalized form rather than leaving a surd in the denominator.
Rationalized form (e.g., √2/2 instead of 1/√2) makes it easier to: (1) compare sizes of fractions, (2) perform further calculations, and (3) convert to decimal approximations. It's also the standard mathematical convention.
Which of these is the simplified form of √48?
√48 = √(16×3) = √16 × √3 = 4√3. Find the largest square factor (16), split the surd, then simplify.
To rationalize the denominator of 1/√5, you should multiply by:
To rationalize, multiply by √5/√5 (which equals 1, so doesn't change the value). This gives (1×√5)/(√5×√5) = √5/5.
Which expression is equivalent to √3 × √5?
Using the rule √a × √b = √(ab), we get √3 × √5 = √(3×5) = √15.
Convert 0.36̇ to a fraction in its simplest form. (Note: only the 6 recurs) Show all your working.
This is the hardest type of recurring decimal conversion because the decimal has a non-recurring part (0.3) before the recurring part (6). The trick is to use two different powers of 10. Since there is 1 non-recurring digit and 1 recurring digit, multiply by 10 (to shift past the non-recurring part: 10x = 3.666...) and by 100 (to shift one full cycle: 100x = 36.666...). Subtracting: 100x - 10x = 36.666... - 3.666..., so 90x = 33, giving x = 33/90 = 11/30 (HCF is 3). The 4 marks are: setting up x (M1), both multiplications (M1), correct subtraction to 90x = 33 (M1), and simplifying (A1).
Work out 0.3̇ + 0.1̇8̇ Give your answer as a fraction in its simplest form. You must show your method.
Adding recurring decimals is done by first converting each one to a fraction. 0.3̇ = 1/3 (single recurring digit: 3/9 = 1/3). 0.1̇8̇ = 2/11 (two recurring digits: 18/99, simplify by 9). Now add 1/3 + 2/11. LCM(3, 11) = 33 (they are coprime). Convert: 1/3 = 11/33 and 2/11 = 6/33. Sum = 17/33. Check: HCF(17, 33) = 1 (17 is prime and doesn't divide 33), so already in simplest form. The 4 marks correspond to: converting 0.3̇ (M1), converting 0.1̇8̇ (M1), finding common denominator and adding (M1), and final answer (A1). Do not try adding the decimals — always convert first.
Prove that 0.2̇7̇ = 3/11 You must show your working algebraically.
This is a 'prove that' version of the algebraic conversion method. Since both 2 and 7 in 0.2̇7̇ recur together as a 2-digit block (27), you multiply by 100. Let x = 0.272727..., then 100x = 27.272727... Subtracting: 100x - x = 27, so 99x = 27. Therefore x = 27/99. Simplify using HCF(27, 99) = 9: 27 ÷ 9 = 3 and 99 ÷ 9 = 11, giving x = 3/11. For show-that and prove questions, write out every step clearly and state the conclusion. The mark scheme awards B1 for setting up x correctly, M1 for multiplying by 100 and subtracting, and A1 for simplifying 27/99 to 3/11.
Convert 0.4̇5̇ to a fraction in its simplest form. You must show your working algebraically.
Converting 0.4̇5̇ to a fraction uses the algebraic method for a 2-digit recurring block. Let x = 0.454545..., then multiply by 100 (since 2 digits recur): 100x = 45.454545... Subtracting: 99x = 45. So x = 45/99. Simplify: HCF(45, 99) = 9, so 45/99 = 5/11. This 3-mark question gives M1 for setting up the equations, M1 for getting 99x = 45, and A1 for simplifying to 5/11. Quick-check using the reverse: 5/11 = 0.4545... confirming the answer. The shortcut: a 2-digit recurring block 'ab' gives ab/99.
Write these numbers in order from smallest to largest: 0.6̇ 2/3 0.67 0.6̇7̇ You must show working to justify your answer.
To compare these four numbers, convert them all to equivalent decimal expansions. 0.6̇ = 0.6666..., and 2/3 = 0.6666... — these are EQUAL (the same value). 0.67 = 0.6700... (terminates, so after 2 dp it's just zeros). 0.6̇7̇ = 0.6767... (the block '67' recurs). Comparing at the 3rd decimal place: 0.6666 < 0.6700 < 0.6767, so the order is 0.6̇, 2/3, 0.67, 0.6̇7̇. This 3-mark question awards M1 for converting to decimal form, M1 for identifying 0.6̇ = 2/3, and A1 for the correct full ordering. Students often incorrectly place 0.67 last because it looks largest — but 0.6̇7̇ is larger since it recurs above 0.67.
Show that 0.5̇4̇ = 6/11 You must use an algebraic method.
This show-that question requires a fully written algebraic proof. The 2-digit block '54' recurs, so you multiply by 100. Let x = 0.5̇4̇ = 0.545454..., then 100x = 54.545454... Subtracting: 99x = 54, so x = 54/99. Simplify: HCF(54, 99) = 9, giving x = 6/11. Conclude with 'as required' or 'therefore 0.5̇4̇ = 6/11'. The three marks are: correct setup with x and 100x (B1), subtracting to get 99x = 54 (M1), and simplifying 54/99 to 6/11 with conclusion (A1). You cannot receive full marks without stating the conclusion explicitly — in show-that questions, the final written statement is assessed.
Explain why 1/6 gives a recurring decimal. You must refer to prime factors in your answer.
This 3-mark question asks you to explain WHY a fraction gives a recurring decimal using prime factors. The rule is: a fraction in its simplest form gives a terminating decimal if and only if its denominator has ONLY prime factors of 2 and 5. For 1/6: factorise 6 as 2 × 3. The denominator has the prime factor 3, which is neither 2 nor 5. Therefore 1/6 cannot terminate and must recur. The reason this rule works is that our decimal system is base 10 = 2 × 5, so only multiples of 2 and 5 divide exactly into powers of 10. The 3 marks are for: prime factorisation of 6 (M1), stating the rule about 2s and 5s (M1), and concluding that factor 3 causes the decimal to recur (A1).
Convert 0.1̇ to a fraction. Show your working using the algebraic method.
The algebraic method for converting a recurring decimal to a fraction has four steps. Step 1: let x equal the recurring decimal (x = 0.1̇ = 0.111...). Step 2: multiply by 10 because one digit recurs — this shifts the decimal point one place: 10x = 1.111... Step 3: subtract the original equation from the new one: 10x - x = 1.111... - 0.111..., so 9x = 1. Step 4: divide both sides by 9: x = 1/9. The magic is that subtracting eliminates the recurring part. For two recurring digits, multiply by 100; for three, multiply by 1000. The M1 mark is awarded for setting up both equations correctly.
Write 0.3333... using dot notation.
Dot notation is used to show that a decimal recurs (repeats forever) without writing dots. For a single repeating digit, place a dot directly above that digit. So 0.3333... is written as 0.3̇. If a block of digits repeats (e.g. 0.181818...), place a dot above the first AND last digit of the repeating block: 0.1̇8̇. A common error is writing 0.333 — this suggests the decimal terminates after three digits, which is incorrect. The dot notation is the standard mathematical shorthand used in GCSE examinations.
Convert 0.5̇ to a fraction in its simplest form.
There is a quick rule for converting a single recurring digit to a fraction: place that digit over 9. So 0.5̇ = 5/9. This works because if x = 0.5555..., then 10x = 5.5555..., so 10x - x = 5, giving 9x = 5 and x = 5/9. Check: HCF(5, 9) = 1, so 5/9 is already in simplest form. A common mistake is confusing 0.5̇ (which recurs) with 0.5 (which terminates at 1/2). The dot above the digit is the signal that the decimal never ends.
Which of these fractions gives a recurring decimal when you divide?
A fraction gives a recurring decimal if its denominator (in simplest form) has prime factors OTHER than 2 or 5. Only 1/3 has denominator 3, which is not 2 or 5.
Write 2/11 as a recurring decimal using dot notation.
To convert a fraction to a decimal, carry out the division. 2 ÷ 11 = 0.181818... — the block '18' repeats indefinitely. In dot notation, place a dot above the first digit of the repeating block (1) and a dot above the last digit (8): 0.1̇8̇. A common mistake is placing only one dot (0.1̇8 or 0.18̇) — both digits are part of the same repeating block so both need dots. You can verify the answer: 18/99 = 2/11 (dividing both by 9), confirming 2/11 = 0.1̇8̇.
Which fraction is equivalent to 0.6̇?
The MCQ tests whether you recognise that 0.6̇ = 2/3. Using the shortcut: a single recurring digit d gives d/9, so 0.6̇ = 6/9. Simplify by dividing numerator and denominator by HCF(6, 9) = 3: 6/9 = 2/3. The distractors test common errors — 6/10 is for the terminating decimal 0.6, and 6/99 would be used for a 2-digit recurring decimal 0.0̇6̇. Worth memorising: 0.3̇ = 1/3, 0.6̇ = 2/3, 0.1̇ = 1/9. These appear frequently in GCSE questions.
Which statement is TRUE about the fraction 7/12?
A fraction in simplest form gives a terminating decimal if and only if its denominator has ONLY factors of 2 and 5. Since 12 = 2² × 3, it has factor 3, so 7/12 is recurring.
A car is bought for £18000. It depreciates by 15% each year. What is the value of the car after 3 years? Give your answer to the nearest pound.
This 5-mark compound depreciation problem requires the formula: final value = initial value × (multiplier)^n. A 15% decrease each year means the car retains 85% of its value annually, giving multiplier 0.85 = 1 - 0.15. Over 3 years: 18000 × 0.85³ = 18000 × 0.614125 = 11054.25, rounded to £11054. The five marks are: identifying multiplier 0.85 (M1), recognising that you apply it 3 times / use 0.85³ (M1), calculating 0.85³ = 0.614125 (M1), multiplying 18000 × 0.614125 (M1), and rounding to the nearest pound (A1). A critical mistake is adding 3 × 15% = 45% and subtracting that from the original — compound depreciation is not the same as simple depreciation.
After a 15% increase, a car is worth £13800. What was the original price of the car?
This is a reverse percentage question — you know the value AFTER a change and need to find the original. A 15% increase means the original was multiplied by 1.15 to get £13800. To reverse this: divide £13800 by 1.15. 13800 / 1.15 = 12000. The three mark points are: identifying the multiplier 1.15 (M1), dividing to reverse the operation (M1), and getting £12000 (A1). The most common mistake is taking 15% off £13800 (giving £11730), which is WRONG — 15% of £13800 is not the same as 15% of the original smaller value. Always reverse by dividing by the multiplier, not by subtracting a percentage of the given value.
A shop buys a jacket for £60 and sells it for £90. Calculate the percentage profit.
Percentage profit = (profit / cost price) × 100. First, find the profit: £90 - £60 = £30. Then, express this as a percentage of the COST PRICE (not the selling price): (30 / 60) × 100 = 50%. The three marks correspond to finding the profit (M1), dividing by the cost price (M1), and giving the final percentage (A1). A very common mistake is dividing by the selling price (90) instead of the cost price (60), which gives 33.3% — always use the cost price as the base. The reason is that profit is always expressed relative to what you paid, not what you sold for.
A house is valued at £200000. Its value increases by 5% each year for 2 years. What is the value of the house after 2 years?
Repeated percentage change (compound growth) means applying the percentage each year to the NEW value, not the original. A 5% increase uses the multiplier 1.05. For 2 years: 200000 × 1.05 × 1.05 = 200000 × 1.05² = 200000 × 1.1025 = 220500. The key distinction from simple percentage is that in Year 1 you get 10000 extra, but in Year 2 you get 5% of the larger amount (210000), giving 10500 extra — hence the total is 220500, not 220000. The three marks are: correct multiplier 1.05 (M1), applying it twice or using 1.05² (M1), and the final answer 220500 (A1).
The price of a sofa including 20% VAT is £750. What was the price before VAT was added?
A price of £750 including 20% VAT means £750 = 120% of the original (100% original + 20% VAT). To find the original, divide by 1.2: 750 / 1.2 = 625. The most common mistake is taking 20% off £750 (= 750 × 0.8 = 600), which gives the wrong answer. Why is 600 wrong? Because the VAT was originally added to the SMALLER original price, not to £750. If the original was £625, then VAT = 20% × 625 = 125, and 625 + 125 = 750. This confirms the answer. The three marks are: recognising £750 = 120% and identifying division by 1.2 (M1), performing the division (M1), and giving the correct answer £625 (A1).
Increase £80 by 15%.
To increase £80 by 15%, there are two equivalent methods. Method 1: find 15% of 80 (= 80 × 0.15 = 12), then add to the original: 80 + 12 = 92. Method 2 (quicker): use the multiplier 1.15 (which represents 100% + 15%) — so 80 × 1.15 = 92. The mark scheme awards M1 for finding 15% of 80 and A1 for the final total of 92. A common mistake is giving just the increase amount (12) — you must add it back to the original to get the new value. Check: does 92 seem reasonable for an 80 increased by about a sixth? Yes.
A laptop costs £450. It is reduced by 20% in a sale. What is the sale price?
A reduction of 20% means you pay 80% of the original price. Method 1: find 20% of 450 (= 0.2 × 450 = 90), then subtract from the original: 450 - 90 = 360. Method 2 (quicker): use the multiplier 0.8 (which represents 100% - 20%) — so 450 × 0.8 = 360. The M1 mark is for finding 20% of 450 (= 90) and A1 for the final sale price of £360. Common errors include giving just the discount (90) or adding instead of subtracting (540). Always re-read whether the question asks for the sale price or the amount of reduction.
In a class of 25 students, 15 are girls. What percentage of the class are girls?
To express one quantity as a percentage of another, use the formula: (part / whole) × 100. Here, girls = 15 (the part) and the whole class = 25 (the total). So: (15/25) × 100 = 0.6 × 100 = 60%. The M1 mark is for dividing 15 by 25 correctly (getting 0.6), and A1 for multiplying by 100 to give 60%. A common mistake is dividing the wrong way (25/15 = 166.7%) — always put the part over the total. Another error is giving the decimal answer (0.6) instead of converting to a percentage.
A meal costs £24 before VAT. VAT is charged at 20%. What is the total cost including VAT?
VAT at 20% is just a percentage increase in disguise. The total cost including VAT = original price × 1.2 (since 100% + 20% = 120% = 1.2). 24 × 1.2 = 28.80. Alternatively: 20% of 24 = 4.80, then 24 + 4.80 = 28.80. The M1 mark is for using multiplier 1.2 (or calculating 20% of 24 = 4.80) and A1 for the correct total of £28.80. A very common error is giving only the VAT amount (4.80) rather than the total price — the question asks for the total cost including VAT.
The price of a train ticket increases from £40 to £45. Calculate the percentage increase.
Percentage change formula: ((new value - original) / original) × 100. Here: change = 45 - 40 = 5. Percentage increase = (5 / 40) × 100 = 0.125 × 100 = 12.5%. The critical rule is to ALWAYS divide by the ORIGINAL value, not the new value. Dividing by 45 (the new value) gives approximately 11.1%, which is wrong. The M1 mark is awarded for dividing the change (5) by the original value (40), and A1 for converting 0.125 to 12.5%. If you give the answer as 0.125 (the decimal), you only get M1.
Work out 20% of 60.
To find a percentage of an amount, convert the percentage to a decimal by dividing by 100, then multiply. 20% = 20/100 = 0.2, so 20% of 60 = 60 × 0.2 = 12. Alternatively, use the fraction equivalent: 20% = 1/5, so 60 ÷ 5 = 12. A common mistake is dividing 60 by 20 to get 3 — this gives 1/20 of 60 (which is 5%), not 20%. Always check: 0.2 represents 20%, not 2%.
What is the multiplier for a 30% increase?
For a 30% increase, you need 100% (the original) + 30% (the increase) = 130% = 1.3.
After a 25% decrease, a TV costs £300. Which calculation gives the original price?
If the price decreased by 25% to £300, then £300 represents 75% of the original price (100% - 25% = 75% = 0.75). So: original × 0.75 = 300, which means original = 300 ÷ 0.75 = 400.
A price increases from £50 to £60, then decreases from £60 back to £50. Which statement is correct?
Percentage change depends on the ORIGINAL value. Increase: (10÷50)×100 = 20%. Decrease: (10÷60)×100 = 16.67%. Even though the absolute change (£10) is the same, the percentages differ because they're calculated from different starting values. The increase (20%) is greater.
Find the Lowest Common Multiple (LCM) of 12, 18 and 30.
Finding LCM of three numbers: factorise all three, then for each prime that appears in ANY factorisation, take the HIGHEST power. Here: 12 = 2² × 3, 18 = 2 × 3², 30 = 2 × 3 × 5. All primes present: 2, 3, and 5. Highest powers: 2² (from 12), 3² (from 18), 5¹ (from 30). LCM = 2² × 3² × 5 = 4 × 9 × 5 = 180. The 5 marks are for: M1 for each of the three prime factorisations, M1 for identifying highest powers, A1 for 180. Check: 180 ÷ 12 = 15, 180 ÷ 18 = 10, 180 ÷ 30 = 6 — all whole numbers, confirming 180 is divisible by all three.
Using prime factorisation, find: (a) The HCF of 180 and 252 (b) The LCM of 180 and 252 You must show your method clearly.
This 5-mark question tests both HCF and LCM from prime factorisation. Factorise both: 180 = 2² × 3² × 5 and 252 = 2² × 3² × 7. For HCF (part a): identify primes COMMON to BOTH (2 and 3), take LOWEST powers (2² and 3²). HCF = 2² × 3² = 4 × 9 = 36. For LCM (part b): include ALL primes from EITHER factorisation (2, 3, 5, 7), take HIGHEST powers of each. LCM = 2² × 3² × 5 × 7 = 4 × 9 × 5 × 7 = 1260. A very common error is swapping the rules: LCM uses HIGHEST powers, HCF uses LOWEST powers of COMMON primes only. The Venn diagram method can help: common factors (with lowest powers) go in the overlap; remaining factors go in the separate sections. Verify: HCF × LCM = 36 × 1260 = 45360 = 180 × 252.
Two buses leave a bus station at 9:00 am. Bus A returns to the station every 12 minutes. Bus B returns to the station every 18 minutes. At what time will both buses next be at the station together?
When two repeating cycles need to coincide, you need the LCM. The first time both buses return together is after LCM(12, 18) minutes. Factorise: 12 = 2² × 3, 18 = 2 × 3². LCM = 2² × 3² = 4 × 9 = 36. So they first meet again after 36 minutes. Add 36 minutes to 9:00 am to get 9:36 am. The question has 4 marks: M1 for recognising LCM is needed, M1 for finding LCM = 36, M1 for adding to the start time, A1 for 9:36 am. A common mistake is writing just '36' without converting to a time — always answer what the question actually asks for.
A rectangular floor measures 144 cm by 108 cm. Square tiles of the same size are used to tile the floor with no gaps or overlaps. What is the side length of the largest possible square tile that can be used?
The key insight here is recognising this as an HCF problem. For the square tiles to fit with no gaps, the tile side must divide exactly into BOTH dimensions. To find the LARGEST possible tile, find the HCF of 144 and 108. Prime factorise: 144 = 2⁴ × 3², 108 = 2² × 3³. Common primes: 2 and 3. Lowest powers: 2² and 3². HCF = 2² × 3² = 4 × 9 = 36. So the largest tile is 36 cm × 36 cm. Check: 144 ÷ 36 = 4 tiles along, 108 ÷ 36 = 3 tiles across. The 4-mark structure is: M1 for recognising HCF, M1 for prime factorising, M1 for applying lowest powers, A1 for 36.
Find the Lowest Common Multiple (LCM) of 18 and 24.
The LCM is found by (1) prime factorising both numbers, (2) listing ALL primes that appear in EITHER factorisation, (3) taking the HIGHEST power of each prime, (4) multiplying. Here: 18 = 2 × 3² and 24 = 2³ × 3. All primes present: 2 and 3. Highest power of 2 is 2³ (from 24), highest power of 3 is 3² (from 18). LCM = 2³ × 3² = 8 × 9 = 72. The 3 marks reflect: M1 for both factorisations, M1 for identifying highest powers (2³ and 3²), A1 for the answer 72. A common mistake is multiplying both numbers (18 × 24 = 432), which gives a multiple but not the LOWEST.
Sasha says: "All numbers of the form n² + n + 41 are prime, where n is a positive integer." Show that Sasha is wrong.
To disprove a 'for all values' statement, you only need to find ONE counter-example where it fails. The expression n² + n + 41 is famously almost always prime, but it breaks down at n = 40. Substituting: 40² + 40 + 41 = 1600 + 40 + 41 = 1681. Now show 1681 is not prime: 1681 = 41 × 41 = 41². Since 1681 has factors other than 1 and itself (specifically 41), it is composite, not prime. This disproves Sasha's claim. You need all three steps for 3 marks: choosing n = 40, calculating 1681, and showing it equals 41². Trying small values of n (1, 2, 3 ...) will not find a counter-example — the breakdown only occurs at n = 40.
Find the Highest Common Factor (HCF) of 84, 126 and 210.
Finding HCF of three numbers follows exactly the same method as two numbers — prime factorise all three, find primes common to ALL THREE (not just two), and take the lowest power of each. Here: 84 = 2² × 3 × 7, 126 = 2 × 3² × 7, 210 = 2 × 3 × 5 × 7. Common to all three: 2, 3, and 7 (note 5 only appears in 210, so it is excluded). Lowest powers: 2¹, 3¹, 7¹. HCF = 2 × 3 × 7 = 42. Check: 84 ÷ 42 = 2, 126 ÷ 42 = 3, 210 ÷ 42 = 5. All three divide exactly, so 42 is correct.
Two numbers have HCF = 6 and LCM = 180. Show that the product of the two numbers is 1080.
This 'show that' question tests whether you know the key relationship: for any two numbers a and b, a × b = HCF(a, b) × LCM(a, b). Once you know this rule, the proof is straightforward: substitute HCF = 6 and LCM = 180, giving product = 6 × 180 = 1080. In a 'show that' question, every step of reasoning must be shown — stating the rule (B1), substituting the values (M1), and completing the multiplication (A1). You cannot write '= 1080' without showing where it comes from. The rule a × b = HCF × LCM is a fundamental number theory result worth memorising.
Express 60 as a product of its prime factors. Give your answer in index form.
To express a number as a product of prime factors, use repeated division by the smallest prime that divides exactly into the number. Start with 2 (since 60 is even): 60 ÷ 2 = 30, 30 ÷ 2 = 15. Now 15 is odd so try 3: 15 ÷ 3 = 5. Finally, 5 is already prime. Collecting all the divisors: 60 = 2 × 2 × 3 × 5. In index form this is 2² × 3 × 5. Index form means using powers for any repeated factor — here 2 appears twice so it becomes 2². You earn M1 for showing the systematic division process, A1 for the correct index form answer.
Find the Highest Common Factor (HCF) of 48 and 72.
The HCF is found by (1) prime factorising both numbers, (2) identifying primes common to BOTH, (3) taking the LOWEST power of each common prime, (4) multiplying. Here: 48 = 2⁴ × 3 and 72 = 2³ × 3². Common primes are 2 and 3. Lowest power of 2 is 2³ (from 72), lowest power of 3 is 3¹ (from 48). So HCF = 2³ × 3 = 8 × 3 = 24. A very common mistake is confusing HCF with LCM (getting 144 instead). Check your answer divides into both: 48 ÷ 24 = 2 and 72 ÷ 24 = 3.
Explain why 51 is not a prime number.
For 'explain why a number is not prime', you must do two things to earn both marks: (1) identify at least one factor pair other than 1 and the number, and (2) link it to the definition of prime. Here: 51 = 3 × 17, so it has four factors (1, 3, 17, 51). Since a prime number has exactly two factors, and 51 has four, it is not prime. Many students test divisibility correctly but then just write 'it has more factors' without explicitly connecting to the prime definition. A quick divisibility test: check if the digit sum (5 + 1 = 6) is divisible by 3 — it is, so 3 divides 51.
Which of these numbers is prime?
29 is prime because it has exactly two factors: 1 and 29. The other numbers have additional factors: 27 = 3³, 33 = 3 × 11, 35 = 5 × 7.
Which statement is TRUE?
Statement B is true: 12 divides into 24 exactly (24 = 12 × 2), so every factor of 12 is also a factor of 24. The factors of 12 are {1, 2, 3, 4, 6, 12}, and all of these divide 24. Statement A is false (6, 18, 30 are multiples of 6 but not 12). Statement C is false (2 is prime and even). Statement D is false (2 is even and prime, not composite).
Which of these is the correct prime factorisation of 90?
90 = 2 × 45 = 2 × 9 × 5 = 2 × 3 × 3 × 5 = 2 × 3² × 5. Option B includes 9 which is not prime. Option C includes 10 which is not prime. Option D has 2² instead of 2¹.
Sarah spends ⅓ of her money on a book. She then spends ¼ of what remains on a drink. After buying the drink, she has £18 left. How much money did Sarah have at the start?
This is a multi-step fraction problem requiring careful tracking of what fraction of the original remains at each stage. Step 1: Sarah spends 1/3 on a book, leaving 2/3. Step 2: She spends 1/4 of what remains, which is 1/4 × 2/3 = 2/12 = 1/6 of the original. Step 3: The fraction remaining = 2/3 - 1/6 = 4/6 - 1/6 = 3/6 = 1/2. Step 4: If 1/2 of the original = £18, then the whole = £18 × 2 = £36. The critical point is that 'a quarter of what remains' means a quarter of 2/3 (not a quarter of the original). This 4-mark challenge question rewards each correct step separately.
Work out 2¾ + 1⅝ Give your answer as a mixed number in its simplest form.
For adding mixed numbers, the most reliable method is to convert both to improper fractions first: 2 and 3/4 = 11/4 and 1 and 5/8 = 13/8. The LCM of 4 and 8 is 8, so convert 11/4 to 22/8. Then add: 22/8 + 13/8 = 35/8. Convert back to a mixed number: 35 ÷ 8 = 4 remainder 3, so 35/8 = 4 and 3/8. This 3-mark question rewards showing the conversion (M1), the fraction addition (M1), and the correct mixed number answer (A1). A common error is to forget to convert the fraction sum back to a mixed number.
Work out ⅘ ÷ ⅔ Give your answer as a mixed number in its simplest form.
Dividing by a fraction means multiplying by its reciprocal. The reciprocal is found by flipping the fraction — for 2/3, the reciprocal is 3/2. So 4/5 ÷ 2/3 = 4/5 × 3/2. Multiply: (4 × 3)/(5 × 2) = 12/10 = 6/5. Convert to a mixed number: 6 ÷ 5 = 1 remainder 1, so 1 and 1/5. This 3-mark question awards one mark each for applying the reciprocal, for multiplying correctly (12/10 or 6/5), and for the final mixed number. The mnemonic 'Keep, Change, Flip' helps: keep the first fraction, change ÷ to ×, flip the second fraction.
Work out 2⅔ × 1⅘ Give your answer as a mixed number in its simplest form.
You cannot multiply mixed numbers by treating the whole parts and fraction parts separately. The correct approach is to convert both to improper fractions first: 2 and 2/3 = 8/3 (2 × 3 + 2 = 8) and 1 and 4/5 = 9/5 (1 × 5 + 4 = 9). Then multiply: 8/3 × 9/5 = 72/15. Simplify by dividing by HCF(72, 15) = 3: 24/5. Convert to a mixed number: 24 ÷ 5 = 4 remainder 4, giving 4 and 4/5. This 3-mark question follows the same M1, M1, A1 pattern — converting, multiplying, final answer.
Work out ½ + ⅔ × ¾ Give your answer as a fraction in its simplest form.
BIDMAS applies to fractions exactly as it does to integers. In the expression 1/2 + 2/3 × 3/4, the multiplication must be done first. Calculate 2/3 × 3/4 = 6/12 = 1/2. This is a satisfying simplification — the 3s cancel. Then add 1/2 + 1/2 = 1. A common mistake is to work left to right and add 1/2 + 2/3 first, getting 7/6, then multiply by 3/4 to get 7/8. That is wrong because multiplication takes priority over addition. This 3-mark question gives one mark for performing the multiplication first, one for correctly adding the result, and one for the final answer of 1.
Work out 4⅕ - 1⅔ Give your answer as a mixed number in its simplest form.
For subtracting mixed numbers, convert to improper fractions first — this is safer than trying to subtract whole and fraction parts separately. 4 and 1/5 = 21/5 (4 × 5 + 1) and 1 and 2/3 = 5/3 (1 × 3 + 2). The LCM of 5 and 3 is 15: convert 21/5 to 63/15 and 5/3 to 25/15. Subtract: 63/15 - 25/15 = 38/15. Convert back: 38 ÷ 15 = 2 remainder 8, giving 2 and 8/15. This 3-mark question follows the same three-step structure. If you tried to subtract the fraction parts separately without converting, you would get 1/5 - 2/3 = 3/15 - 10/15 = -7/15, which would require borrowing — the improper fraction method avoids this complication.
Work out ⅔ + ⅕
To add fractions with different denominators, you cannot simply add the numerators and denominators together. The key step is finding a common denominator — the smallest number both denominators divide into. For 2/3 + 1/5, the LCM of 3 and 5 is 15. Convert: 2/3 = 10/15 and 1/5 = 3/15. Now add the numerators: 10 + 3 = 13, keeping the denominator 15, giving 13/15. This is a 2-mark question — one for the correct common denominator and conversion, one for the final answer 13/15.
Work out ⅚ - ⅜ Give your answer in its simplest form.
Subtracting fractions follows the same rule as addition — you need a common denominator first. For 5/6 - 3/8, the LCM of 6 and 8 is 24. Convert: 5/6 = 20/24 and 3/8 = 9/24. Then subtract the numerators: 20 - 9 = 11, giving 11/24. Since HCF(11, 24) = 1 (11 is prime), this is already in simplest form. A common error is to subtract both numerators and denominators: 5-3=2 and 6-8=-2, which is meaningless. Always find the common denominator first.
Work out ⅔ × ⅝
Unlike addition, multiplying fractions does not require a common denominator. Simply multiply the numerators together and the denominators together: (2 × 5)/(3 × 8) = 10/24. Then simplify: HCF(10, 24) = 2, so divide both by 2 to get 5/12. A useful shortcut is to cancel before multiplying — notice that 2 and 8 share a factor of 2, so simplify 2/8 to 1/4 before multiplying, giving (1 × 5)/(3 × 4) = 5/12 directly. This 2-mark question rewards the multiplication step and the correct simplified answer.
A shop reduces all prices by ⅕. A jacket originally cost £85. Work out the sale price of the jacket.
The question says prices are reduced BY 1/5, meaning the discount is 1/5 of £85. Find the discount: 85 ÷ 5 = £17. Then the sale price is the original minus the discount: £85 - £17 = £68. An alternative method is to recognise that paying after a 1/5 reduction means you pay 4/5 of the original: 4/5 × £85 = (4 × 85) ÷ 5 = 340 ÷ 5 = £68. Both approaches earn full marks. The most common mistake is finding £17 and stopping — that is the reduction amount, not the sale price. Always re-read the question to check what is being asked.
Explain why you need a common denominator when adding fractions, but not when multiplying fractions.
This question tests your understanding of why the rules differ. When adding fractions, you are combining parts of the same whole — to do this fairly, the parts must be the same size, which requires a common denominator. For example, 1/3 + 1/4 must become 4/12 + 3/12 before you can add. When multiplying fractions, you are finding a fraction of a fraction — for instance, 1/3 × 1/4 means 'one third of one quarter'. This involves scaling, not combining, so you simply multiply tops together and bottoms together. No common denominator is needed. For 2 marks you need to explain both operations with the underlying reason for each rule.
Which of these fractions is the largest? ⅔ ¾ ⅗ ⅝
To compare fractions, convert them to the same denominator or to decimals. Using decimals: ⅔ ≈ 0.667 ¾ = 0.75 ⅗ = 0.6 ⅝ = 0.625 The largest is 0.75, which is ¾. Alternatively, using common denominator (LCM of 3,4,5,8 = 120): ⅔ = 80/120 ¾ = 90/120 (largest) ⅗ = 72/120 ⅝ = 75/120
Which fraction is equivalent to 18/24?
To find the equivalent fraction, simplify 18/24 by dividing both numerator and denominator by their HCF. Factors of 18: 1, 2, 3, 6, 9, 18 Factors of 24: 1, 2, 3, 4, 6, 8, 12, 24 HCF = 6 18 ÷ 6 = 3 24 ÷ 6 = 4 So 18/24 = ¾
Which calculation is equivalent to ⅗ ÷ ⅘?
To divide by a fraction, you multiply by its RECIPROCAL. The reciprocal of ⅘ is 5/4 (flip the fraction). So ⅗ ÷ ⅘ = ⅗ × 5/4 You can verify: ⅗ × 5/4 = 15/20 = ¾, and ⅗ ÷ ⅘ = (3÷4)/(5÷5) = 0.75/1 = ¾ ✓
Expand and simplify (x + 1)(x + 2)(x + 3) Give your answer in the form ax³ + bx² + cx + d
Triple brackets must be tackled in two stages. Stage 1: expand any two brackets first. (x + 1)(x + 2) = x² + 3x + 2. Stage 2: multiply this quadratic by the third bracket. (x² + 3x + 2)(x + 3) — multiply each term by x: x³ + 3x² + 2x, then by 3: 3x² + 9x + 6. Collecting all terms: x³ + (3x² + 3x²) + (2x + 9x) + 6 = x³ + 6x² + 11x + 6. The four marks are: expanding the first two brackets (M1), multiplying by the third (M1), expanding all six terms (M1), and the final simplified answer (A1).
Expand and simplify 2(x + 3) + 3(x - 1)
When a question says 'expand and simplify', you must do both steps. Step 1 — expand each bracket separately: 2(x + 3) = 2x + 6 and 3(x − 1) = 3x − 3. Step 2 — collect like terms: x-terms: 2x + 3x = 5x; constants: 6 − 3 = 3. Final answer: 5x + 3. The three marks are one for each bracket expansion (M1, M1) and one for the simplified answer (A1). A common mistake is leaving the answer as 2x + 6 + 3x − 3 without collecting — that earns 2 marks but not the third.
Show that (x + 2)² - (x - 3)² can be simplified to 10x - 5
This 'show that' question requires expanding two perfect squares and subtracting. Step 1: (x + 2)² = x² + 4x + 4. Step 2: (x − 3)² = x² − 6x + 9. Step 3: subtract, being careful with signs — the subtraction applies to every term in the second bracket: (x² + 4x + 4) − (x² − 6x + 9) = x² + 4x + 4 − x² + 6x − 9. Step 4: collect: x² terms cancel (x² − x² = 0); x terms: 4x + 6x = 10x; constants: 4 − 9 = −5. Result: 10x − 5. The three marks are: expanding at least one bracket correctly (M1), subtracting with correct sign changes (M1), and simplifying to 10x − 5 (A1). The most common error is writing −(x² − 6x + 9) = −x² − 6x + 9 (not changing all signs).
Expand -2(3x - 5)
Expanding −2(3x − 5) requires multiplying −2 by each term inside the bracket. First: −2 × 3x = −6x (negative times positive = negative). Second: −2 × (−5) = +10 (negative times negative = positive). Result: −6x + 10. The two marks are for getting −6x (M1) and the full correct answer −6x + 10 (A1). The most common error is writing −6x − 10, which comes from forgetting that the second multiplication involves two negatives. Always write each multiplication separately and track the signs.
Expand (x + 2)(x + 3)
Expanding double brackets requires every term in the first bracket to multiply every term in the second. Use FOIL: First (x × x = x²), Outer (x × 3 = 3x), Inner (2 × x = 2x), Last (2 × 3 = 6). This gives x² + 3x + 2x + 6. Collect the middle terms: 3x + 2x = 5x. Final answer: x² + 5x + 6. The two marks are for getting the x² term from multiplying the first terms (M1) and the complete correct answer (A1). The classic mistake is only multiplying the first and last pairs (giving x² + 6) and missing the cross-terms.
Expand and simplify (2x + 1)(x + 4)
Expanding (2x + 1)(x + 4) uses FOIL with a coefficient on the first term. First: 2x × x = 2x² (note: 2x squared is 2x², not x²). Outer: 2x × 4 = 8x. Inner: 1 × x = x. Last: 1 × 4 = 4. This gives 2x² + 8x + x + 4. Collect: 8x + x = 9x. Final answer: 2x² + 9x + 4. The two marks are for finding all four products correctly (M1) and the simplified answer (A1). The key mistake is writing 2x × x = x² rather than 2x², forgetting to include the coefficient in the multiplication.
Expand and simplify (x - 5)(x + 2)
Expanding (x − 5)(x + 2) with FOIL: First: x × x = x². Outer: x × 2 = 2x. Inner: −5 × x = −5x. Last: −5 × 2 = −10. Collect the middle terms: 2x + (−5x) = −3x. Final answer: x² − 3x − 10. The two marks are for finding all four products correctly (M1) and the full correct answer (A1). Sign errors are the main risk — writing the middle term as +3x (forgetting −5x is larger) or writing the constant as +10 (forgetting −5 × 2 = −10, not +10).
Expand (x + 5)²
A perfect square (x + 5)² must be expanded as (x + 5)(x + 5) — never just squaring each term separately. Expanding: x² + 5x + 5x + 25 = x² + 10x + 25. The middle term is 10x because you get two lots of 5x. Alternatively, use the identity (a + b)² = a² + 2ab + b² with a = x and b = 5: x² + 2(x)(5) + 25 = x² + 10x + 25. The two marks are for correctly treating it as double brackets or using the formula (M1) and the final answer (A1). The critical error is writing (x + 5)² = x² + 25, which misses the middle term entirely.
Expand (3x - 2)²
Use the identity (a − b)² = a² − 2ab + b² with a = 3x and b = 2. a² = (3x)² = 9x² (square both the coefficient and the variable). 2ab = 2 × 3x × 2 = 12x. b² = 2² = 4. So (3x − 2)² = 9x² − 12x + 4. The two marks are for getting 9x² and +4 correct (M1) and the full answer (A1). Two common errors: (1) writing (3x)² = 3x² instead of 9x², forgetting to square the 3; (2) getting the middle term as −6x (computing only 3x × 2 = 6x, forgetting the factor of 2 in 2ab).
Show that (x + 4)(x - 4) = x² - 16
This is a 'show that' question — you must provide clear working starting from the left-hand side and reaching the right. Recognise (x + 4)(x − 4) as the difference of two squares pattern (a + b)(a − b). Applying the identity: a² − b² = x² − 4² = x² − 16. Alternatively, expand fully using FOIL: x² − 4x + 4x − 16 = x² − 16 (the middle terms cancel because they are +4x and −4x). The marks are for showing the method (M1) and reaching x² − 16 (A1). In 'show that' questions, you must show the working — stating the answer alone earns no marks.
Expand and simplify (2x + 3)(2x - 3)
Recognise (2x + 3)(2x − 3) as the difference of two squares: (a + b)(a − b) = a² − b² where a = 2x and b = 3. Apply: (2x)² − 3² = 4x² − 9. The key step is computing (2x)² correctly: you must square both parts, giving 2² × x² = 4x². The two marks are for recognising the pattern and applying it correctly (M1) and the final answer 4x² − 9 (A1). The common mistake is writing (2x)² = 2x² (only squaring the variable, not the coefficient).
Which expression is equivalent to 3(x + 2)?
Multiply 3 by each term inside the bracket: 3 × x = 3x and 3 × 2 = 6, giving 3x + 6.
Which expression is equivalent to (x + 3)(x - 2)?
Expand: x² + (-2x) + 3x + (-6) = x² + x - 6. The middle terms are -2x + 3x = x.
Which identity correctly shows the difference of two squares?
The difference of two squares states that (a+b)(a-b) = a² - b². When you expand, the middle terms +ab and -ab cancel out.
Solve (2x - 1)/3 + (x + 4)/2 = 5
To solve (2x − 1)/3 + (x + 4)/2 = 5 with two fractions, find the lowest common denominator (LCD) of 3 and 2, which is 6. Multiply every term by 6: 2(2x − 1) + 3(x + 4) = 30. Expand: 4x − 2 + 3x + 12 = 30. Collect: 7x + 10 = 30. Subtract 10: 7x = 20. Divide by 7: x = 20/7. The four marks are: clearing fractions correctly (M1), correct expansion giving 7x + 10 = 30 (M1), 7x = 20 (M1), and x = 20/7 (A1). The critical step is multiplying every term — including the right-hand side — by the LCD. Forgetting to multiply the 5 by 6 gives 30 instead of the needed 30, so it actually works here, but always multiply both sides.
Solve 3(2x + 1) = 21
Solving 3(2x + 1) = 21 is a three-step process. Step 1: expand the bracket — 3 × 2x + 3 × 1 = 6x + 3, giving 6x + 3 = 21. Step 2: subtract 3 from both sides: 6x = 18. Step 3: divide by 6: x = 3. The three marks reward each step: expansion (B1), isolation of 6x (M1), and x = 3 (A1). An alternative approach is dividing 21 by 3 first to give 2x + 1 = 7, then solving the simpler equation. Both methods earn full marks.
Solve 5x + 3 = 2x + 15
When x appears on both sides, collect all x-terms to one side. From 5x + 3 = 2x + 15: subtract 2x from both sides to get 3x + 3 = 15. Then subtract 3 from both sides: 3x = 12. Divide by 3: x = 4. The three marks are for collecting x-terms (M1), isolating the x-term (M1), and x = 4 (A1). Check: 5(4) + 3 = 23 and 2(4) + 15 = 23. Always move x-terms before constants to keep working clean.
Solve 2(3x - 4) = 5(x - 1)
Solving 2(3x − 4) = 5(x − 1) with brackets on both sides. Step 1: expand both brackets — left: 6x − 8; right: 5x − 5. Equation: 6x − 8 = 5x − 5. Step 2: collect x-terms on the left — subtract 5x from both sides: x − 8 = −5. Step 3: add 8 to both sides: x = 3. The three marks reward: expanding both brackets correctly (M1), collecting x-terms to one side (M1), and x = 3 (A1). The key step is getting all x-terms to one side before isolating x.
Solve 3x + 4 = 5x + 1
From 3x + 4 = 5x + 1, collect x-terms: subtract 3x from both sides to get 4 = 2x + 1. Then subtract 1 from both sides: 3 = 2x. Divide by 2: x = 3/2. The three marks are: collecting x-terms (M1), isolating the x-term (M1), and x = 3/2 or 1.5 (A1). The non-integer answer is normal — express it as a fraction or decimal. Check: 3(3/2) + 4 = 4.5 + 4 = 8.5 and 5(3/2) + 1 = 7.5 + 1 = 8.5.
A number is doubled and then 9 is added. The result is 35. Form an equation and use it to find the number.
This question requires forming an equation from words and then solving it. Let x be the number. 'Doubled' means 2x; 'then 9 is added' gives 2x + 9; 'the result is 35' gives 2x + 9 = 35. Solve: subtract 9 from both sides (2x = 26), then divide by 2 (x = 13). The three marks are: forming the correct equation (B1), the intermediate step 2x = 26 (M1), and x = 13 (A1). Always write down the equation — the formation earns its own mark, separate from the solving.
Solve 2x + 5 = 13
This two-step equation requires two inverse operations. Step 1: remove the constant — subtract 5 from both sides: 2x + 5 − 5 = 13 − 5, giving 2x = 8. Step 2: remove the coefficient — divide both sides by 2: x = 4. The two marks are for showing the intermediate step 2x = 8 (M1) and the final answer x = 4 (A1). Always show your working — writing 2x = 8 earns the method mark even if a subsequent arithmetic error occurs.
Solve 5x + 2 = 19
This two-step equation gives a non-integer answer. Step 1: subtract 2 from both sides: 5x + 2 − 2 = 19 − 2, giving 5x = 17. Step 2: divide both sides by 5: x = 17 ÷ 5 = 3.4 (or 17/5). The two marks are for the intermediate step 5x = 17 (M1) and x = 3.4 or 17/5 (A1). Do not round to 3 — the exact non-integer answer is required. Check: 5 × 3.4 + 2 = 17 + 2 = 19.
Solve 5 - 2x = 11
When the x-term is negative, extra care with signs is needed. From 5 − 2x = 11, subtract 5 from both sides: −2x = 6. Then divide both sides by −2: x = 6 ÷ (−2) = −3. The two marks are for the intermediate −2x = 6 (M1) and x = −3 (A1). The most common mistake is writing x = 3 instead of −3 — dividing a positive by a negative gives a negative result. Check: 5 − 2(−3) = 5 + 6 = 11.
Solve (x + 3) / 5 = 4
To solve (x + 3)/5 = 4, first clear the fraction by multiplying both sides by 5: x + 3 = 20. Then subtract 3 from both sides: x = 17. The two marks are: the intermediate step x + 3 = 20 (M1) and x = 17 (A1). Check: (17 + 3)/5 = 20/5 = 4. Always clear the fraction first — this converts a fraction equation into a simple linear one.
What is the solution to 3x = 12?
To solve 3x = 12, perform the inverse operation: divide both sides by 3. So x = 12 divided by 3 = 4.
Solve x + 7 = 15
To solve x + 7 = 15, apply the inverse operation to isolate x. Since 7 is being added to x, subtract 7 from both sides: x + 7 − 7 = 15 − 7, giving x = 8. Check: 8 + 7 = 15. This is a one-step equation worth 1 mark — the mark is for x = 8. The principle is always to perform the same operation on both sides to keep the equation balanced.
Solve 5x = 35
To solve 5x = 35, apply the inverse of multiplication: divide both sides by 5. 5x ÷ 5 = 35 ÷ 5 gives x = 7. Check: 5 × 7 = 35. For any equation of the form ax = b, x = b ÷ a. The mark is for x = 7. The common mistake is subtracting 5 instead of dividing — only division reverses multiplication.
Which of the following is the correct first step when solving 3(2x + 1) = 21?
Applying the distributive law to 3(2x + 1) means multiplying 3 by each term inside the bracket: 3 times 2x = 6x and 3 times 1 = 3. The equation becomes 6x + 3 = 21.
Solve x/4 = 7
In x/4 = 7, x is being divided by 4. The inverse operation is multiplication. Multiply both sides by 4: x = 7 × 4 = 28. Check: 28 ÷ 4 = 7. This is a one-step equation — the single mark is for x = 28. The common mistake is dividing by 4 (getting x = 7/4), when you need to multiply to undo the division.
A rectangle has a length of (2x + 3) cm and a width of 5 cm. The perimeter of the rectangle is 46 cm. Which equation correctly models this situation?
The perimeter of a rectangle is 2 times length + 2 times width. Here length = (2x + 3) and width = 5, so the equation is 2(2x + 3) + 2(5) = 46.
Solve for x: (2x − 1)/3 + (x + 4)/2 = 5 Show your working clearly.
To solve (2x − 1)/3 + (x + 4)/2 = 5, first find the lowest common denominator of 3 and 2, which is 6. Multiply every term by 6: 2(2x − 1) + 3(x + 4) = 30. Expand: 4x − 2 + 3x + 12 = 30. Collect like terms: 7x + 10 = 30. Subtract 10: 7x = 20. Divide by 7: x = 20/7. The four marks are for multiplying by the LCD (M1), expanding correctly (M1dep), collecting to 7x = 20 (M1dep), and x = 20/7 (A1). Multiply all three terms — including the right-hand side 5 — by 6.
The area of a circle is given by the formula: A = πr² Make r the subject of the formula. Give your answer in simplified form.
A = πr² requires two steps to isolate r. Step 1: divide both sides by π to get r² = A/π. Step 2: take the positive square root of both sides to get r = √(A/π). The three marks are for dividing by π (M1), squaring root (M1dep), and the correct answer r = √(A/π) (A1). The square root must enclose the entire fraction A/π — write √(A/π) with brackets, not √A/π which means only √A divided by π.
Make x the subject of the formula: ax + b = cx + d
In ax + b = cx + d, x appears on both sides. Step 1: collect all x terms on one side by subtracting cx from both sides and subtracting b from both sides, giving ax − cx = d − b. Step 2: group the x terms by factorising out the common factor: x(a − c) = d − b. Step 3: divide both sides by the bracket (a − c): x = (d − b)/(a − c). The three marks are for collecting x terms (M1), factorising (M1dep), and the correct answer (A1). The key skill is recognising that x must be taken out as a common factor — you cannot isolate x unless it appears in only one term.
The period of a pendulum is given by the formula: T = 2π√(l/g) where T is the period, l is the length of the pendulum and g is the gravitational field strength. Make l the subject of the formula.
Rearranging T = 2π√(l/g) for l requires three steps working backwards through the operations. Step 1: divide both sides by 2π to isolate the square root: T/(2π) = √(l/g). Step 2: square both sides to remove the root: T²/(4π²) = l/g — note (2π)² = 4π². Step 3: multiply both sides by g: l = gT²/(4π²). The three marks are for isolating the root (M1), squaring both sides (M1dep), and the correct final answer (A1). Never square only the numerator when squaring a fraction.
Make x the subject of the formula: (x + 3)/(x − 2) = 5
When x appears in both numerator and denominator, multiply both sides by the denominator to clear the fraction. From (x + 3)/(x − 2) = 5: multiply both sides by (x − 2) to get x + 3 = 5(x − 2). Expand: x + 3 = 5x − 10. Collect x terms: 13 = 4x. Divide by 4: x = 13/4. The three marks are for clearing the fraction (M1), reaching 4x = 13 (M1dep), and x = 13/4 (A1). Remember to multiply 5 by the entire bracket (x − 2), not just by x.
Make x the subject of the formula: y = (3x + 1)/(2 − x)
When x appears in both the numerator and denominator of a fraction, clear the fraction first. From y = (3x + 1)/(2 − x): multiply both sides by (2 − x) to get y(2 − x) = 3x + 1, then expand: 2y − xy = 3x + 1. Now collect all x terms: move xy to the right (it becomes +xy) and subtract 1 from both sides: 2y − 1 = 3x + xy. Factorise the right side: 2y − 1 = x(3 + y). Divide by (3 + y): x = (2y − 1)/(y + 3). The three marks are for clearing the fraction (M1), factorising (M1dep), and the correct answer (A1).
The circumference of a circle is given by the formula: C = 2πr Make r the subject of the formula.
In C = 2πr, the letter r is multiplied by the whole term 2π. To isolate r, divide both sides by 2π: r = C/(2π). The two marks are for dividing both sides by 2π (M1) and writing the correct result r = C/(2π) (A1). A common mistake is dividing only by 2 and ignoring π — treat 2π as a single coefficient and divide by all of it.
The ideal gas law is: PV = nRT where P is pressure, V is volume, n is amount, R is the gas constant and T is temperature. Show that P = nRT/V.
A 'show that' question requires every step to be written out explicitly. Starting from PV = nRT: P is multiplied by V. To isolate P, divide both sides by V: PV/V = nRT/V. Since V/V = 1, this simplifies to P = nRT/V, which is the required result. The two marks are for showing the division step (M1) and the correct conclusion P = nRT/V (A1). Never skip to the answer — the examiner needs to see the working to award marks.
The formula for speed is: s = d/t where s is speed, d is distance and t is time. Make t the subject of the formula.
In s = d/t, the variable t is in the denominator — it divides into d. To bring t to the numerator, multiply both sides by t: st = d. Then isolate t by dividing both sides by s: t = d/s. The two marks are for the intermediate step st = d (M1) and the correct answer t = d/s (A1). A common error is writing t = s/d — remember d stays on top because it is d that you divided by s, not s that you divided by d.
The formula for velocity is: v = u + at where v is final velocity, u is initial velocity, a is acceleration and t is time. Make u the subject of the formula.
In v = u + at, the target variable u is part of a sum on the right. The extra term at is added to u, so subtract it from both sides: v − at = u, which gives u = v − at. The two marks are for showing the inverse step (M1) and the correct answer u = v − at (A1). Treat at as a single block — do not separate the a and t. Changing +at to the other side makes it −at.
Make x the subject of the formula: 3x + 5 = 2y
From 3x + 5 = 2y, undo operations in reverse order. The +5 was added last, so remove it first: subtract 5 from both sides to get 3x = 2y − 5. Then the ×3 was applied, so divide both sides by 3: x = (2y − 5)/3. The two marks are for the intermediate step 3x = 2y − 5 (M1) and the correct answer (A1). Write the numerator in brackets — (2y − 5)/3 — because the whole of 2y − 5 is divided by 3.
Make b the subject of the formula: a = b + c
Start with a = b + c. To isolate b, remove c from the right-hand side. Since c is added, doing the inverse operation gives b = a − c.
The equation of a straight line is: y = mx + c Which of the following is a correct rearrangement to make x the subject?
From y = mx + c: subtract c from both sides to get y − c = mx, then divide both sides by m to get x = (y − c)/m.
Newton's second law states: F = ma where F is force, m is mass and a is acceleration. Which of the following is the correct rearrangement to make a the subject?
From F = ma: a is multiplied by m. Dividing both sides by m gives a = F/m.
Solve the inequality 5x - 3 < 2x + 9
From 5x − 3 < 2x + 9: collect x terms by subtracting 2x from both sides: 3x − 3 < 9. Then add 3 to both sides: 3x < 12. Divide by 3 (positive, so sign stays): x < 4. The three marks are for collecting x terms (M1), forming 3x < 12 (M1dep), and x < 4 (A1). Move the smaller x-term (2x) rather than the larger one to keep the coefficient positive and avoid a sign flip.
Solve the inequality -3 ≤ 2x + 1 < 9. Hence list all the integer values of x that satisfy the inequality.
Solve −3 ≤ 2x + 1 < 9 by operating on all three parts at once. Subtract 1 from each part: −4 ≤ 2x < 8. Divide each part by 2: −2 ≤ x < 4. The integer values satisfying this are −2, −1, 0, 1, 2, 3 (−2 is included because ≤, and 4 is excluded because <). The three marks are for the correct double inequality (M1), dividing (M1dep), and listing all six integers correctly (A1). Do not include 4 — it fails the strict < 4 condition.
Solve the inequality -1 < 3x + 5 ≤ 14
A double inequality −1 < 3x + 5 ≤ 14 is solved by applying the same operations to all three parts simultaneously. Subtract 5 from all three parts: −6 < 3x ≤ 9. Divide all three parts by 3 (positive, so no sign reversal): −2 < x ≤ 3. The three marks are for subtracting 5 correctly (M1), dividing by 3 (M1dep), and the complete answer −2 < x ≤ 3 with both symbols correct (A1). The strict < on the left and the ≤ on the right must both be preserved.
Hamza has a school bag that can hold a maximum total weight of 15 kg. The empty bag weighs 1.4 kg. Each textbook weighs 0.8 kg. Let n be the number of textbooks Hamza can carry. Form and solve an inequality to find the maximum value of n.
The total weight is bag + books: 1.4 + 0.8n ≤ 15. Solving: subtract 1.4 → 0.8n ≤ 13.6, then divide by 0.8 → n ≤ 17. Since n must be a whole number, the maximum is n = 17. The three marks are for the correct inequality (B1), algebraic manipulation to 0.8n ≤ 13.6 (M1), and n = 17 as the maximum integer (A1). Importantly: the answer is 17, not 17.5 or 18 — always round down when the context requires whole items and you have 'at most' condition.
Solve the inequality -3 < -2x + 1 ≤ 9
Solve −3 < −2x + 1 ≤ 9 by operating on all three parts. Subtract 1 from each part: −4 < −2x ≤ 8. Divide all three parts by −2 — this is a negative divisor, so BOTH inequality signs reverse: 2 > x ≥ −4, which is written as −4 ≤ x < 2. The three marks are for subtracting 1 correctly (M1), dividing by −2 (M1dep), and the correct final answer with both signs reversed (A1). The most common error is forgetting to reverse both inequality symbols when dividing by −2.
x satisfies both of the following: 3x + 1 > -2 and 2x - 5 ≤ 3 (a) Solve each inequality to find the range of values of x. (b) Hence list all the integer solutions and express the solution set using set notation in the form {x : conditions}.
Solve each inequality separately: 3x + 1 > −2 gives 3x > −3, so x > −1. And 2x − 5 ≤ 3 gives 2x ≤ 8, so x ≤ 4. Both conditions together: −1 < x ≤ 4. Integer values: 0, 1, 2, 3, 4. In set notation: {x : −1 < x ≤ 4, x ∈ ℤ} (or similar). The three marks are for solving each inequality (1 mark each) and expressing the combined solution correctly. Set notation uses the colon : to mean 'such that' and specifies the domain (integers ℤ).
Solve the inequality -4x ≤ 20
From −4x ≤ 20: divide both sides by −4. Dividing by a negative number reverses the inequality sign: ≤ becomes ≥. Also, 20 ÷ (−4) = −5. So the result is x ≥ −5. The two marks are for showing the division step (M1) and the correct answer with reversed sign x ≥ −5 (A1). Check: x = 0 satisfies −4(0) = 0 ≤ 20 and also satisfies x ≥ −5; x = −6 would give −4(−6) = 24, which is not ≤ 20.
Solve the inequality 3x - 4 > 11
Solve 3x − 4 > 11 in two steps. First add 4 to both sides: 3x > 15 (adding a positive never flips the sign). Then divide both sides by 3: x > 5 (dividing by a positive never flips the sign). The two marks are for the intermediate step 3x > 15 (M1) and x > 5 (A1). A common mistake is unnecessarily reversing the sign — the sign only reverses when dividing by a negative number, which does not happen here.
When solving an inequality, the direction of the inequality sign must reverse if you multiply or divide both sides by a negative number. Explain why this rule is necessary. You may use an example to support your explanation.
When you multiply or divide both sides of an inequality by a negative number, the order of the numbers on the number line is reversed. For example: 3 < 5 is true. Multiply both sides by −1: −3 and −5. But −3 > −5 (−3 is to the right of −5 on the number line). So the sign must flip from < to > to keep the statement true: −3 > −5. The two marks are for stating that the order reverses (1 mark) and demonstrating with a specific numeric example (1 mark).
Solve the inequality 8 - 2x ≥ 14
From 8 − 2x ≥ 14: subtract 8 from both sides to get −2x ≥ 6. Then divide both sides by −2 — this is a negative divisor, so the sign reverses from ≥ to ≤: x ≤ −3. The two marks are for the intermediate step −2x ≥ 6 (M1) and x ≤ −3 with reversed sign (A1). Check: x = −4 gives 8 − 2(−4) = 8 + 8 = 16 ≥ 14; x = 0 gives 8 − 0 = 8, which is not ≥ 14. So values ≤ −3 satisfy the inequality.
Which of the following correctly describes how to represent x > 3 on a number line?
For a strict inequality (> or <), draw an open circle at the boundary value. For a non-strict inequality (≥ or ≤), draw a closed (filled) circle. The arrow always points in the direction of solutions: rightward for > or ≥, leftward for < or ≤.
Which integer values of x satisfy -2 ≤ x < 5?
The notation -2 ≤ x < 5 means x is at least -2 AND strictly less than 5. The ≤ sign includes -2; the < sign excludes 5. Integer values: -2, -1, 0, 1, 2, 3, 4.
Solve the inequality -3x < 12. Which of the following is the correct solution?
When you divide (or multiply) both sides of an inequality by a negative number, the direction of the inequality sign must reverse. Here: -3x < 12 → divide both sides by -3, reverse sign → x > -4.
Solve the inequality x + 7 > 12
Solve x + 7 > 12 the same way you would solve an equation: subtract 7 from both sides to get x > 5. Adding or subtracting a number never changes the direction of an inequality sign — that only happens when you multiply or divide by a negative. The single mark is for x > 5. Check: x = 6 gives 6 + 7 = 13 > 12, and x = 4 gives 4 + 7 = 11, which is not > 12.
Here are the first five terms of a sequence. 5, 14, 27, 44, 65 (a) Find an expression for the nth term of this sequence. (b) Find the value of the first term in the sequence that is greater than 200.
For 5, 14, 27, 44, 65: first differences are 9, 13, 17, 21 and second differences are all 4. The n² coefficient is 4 ÷ 2 = 2. Subtracting 2n² gives 3, 6, 9, 12, 15 — an arithmetic sequence with nth term 3n. So the nth term is 2n² + 3n. For part (b), solve 2n² + 3n > 200. Testing: n = 9 gives 2(81) + 27 = 189 (< 200), n = 10 gives 2(100) + 30 = 230 (> 200). The first term exceeding 200 is 230 (the 10th term). The five marks are for the working through the quadratic nth term derivation and the threshold finding.
Here are the first five terms of a quadratic sequence. 3, 8, 15, 24, 35 Find an expression for the nth term of this sequence.
For 3, 8, 15, 24, 35: first differences are 5, 7, 9, 11 (not constant); second differences are all 2 (constant), confirming a quadratic sequence. The coefficient of n² is half the second difference: 2 ÷ 2 = 1, so the formula starts n². Subtracting n² from each term gives 2, 4, 6, 8, 10 — an arithmetic sequence with nth term 2n. So the full nth term is n² + 2n. The four marks are for identifying second differences = 2 (M1), the n² coefficient (M1dep), the linear correction (M1dep), and the complete expression n² + 2n (A1). Always verify: n=1 gives 1+2=3, n=2 gives 4+4=8.
Here are the first five terms of a sequence. 5, 8, 11, 14, 17 Find an expression for the nth term of this sequence.
For the sequence 5, 8, 11, 14, 17: the common difference is 3 (8 − 5 = 3), so the nth term starts as 3n. To find the constant, put n = 1: 3(1) = 3, but the first term is 5, so add 2. The nth term is 3n + 2. The three marks are for identifying the common difference (B1), forming 3n + c with the correct method (M1), and the complete answer 3n + 2 (A1). Check: n = 2 gives 3(2) + 2 = 8, n = 3 gives 11. A common error is using the first term (5) as the constant, giving 3n + 5.
The nth term of a sequence is 4n - 1. Is 75 a term in this sequence? You must show your working.
To test if 75 is in the sequence 4n − 1: set 4n − 1 = 75 and solve. Adding 1 gives 4n = 76, so n = 19. Since 19 is a positive integer, 75 IS in the sequence — it is the 19th term. The three marks are for setting up the equation (M1), solving n = 19 (A1), and explicitly stating n = 19 is a positive integer therefore 75 is a term (A1). If n had been a non-integer (e.g. 19.5), the value would NOT be in the sequence.
Here is a Fibonacci-type sequence. 3, 5, 8, 13, 21, 34 (a) Describe the term-to-term rule for this sequence. (b) Write down the next term of the sequence.
In a Fibonacci-type sequence, each term is the sum of the two terms immediately before it. For 3, 5, 8, 13, 21, 34: 3 + 5 = 8, 5 + 8 = 13, 8 + 13 = 21, 13 + 21 = 34. The next term is 21 + 34 = 55. The three marks are for describing the rule correctly (2 marks) and stating the next term = 55 (1 mark). 'Add the previous two terms' is the key phrase needed — stating just 'add consecutive terms' is not precise enough.
The nth term of a sequence is n² + 2n - 1. (a) Find the 5th term of the sequence. (b) Find the 8th term of the sequence.
Substitute the position number for n in n² + 2n − 1. For the 5th term: 5² + 2(5) − 1 = 25 + 10 − 1 = 34. For the 8th term: 8² + 2(8) − 1 = 64 + 16 − 1 = 79. Each part earns 1 mark, plus 1 mark for correctly squaring. Apply BIDMAS carefully — square first, then multiply by 2, then add and subtract. A common error is computing 5² + 2 × 5 − 1 as (5 + 2)² × 5 − 1 due to wrong order of operations.
The nth term of a sequence is 3n + 2. Show that 100 is NOT a term in this sequence.
To show 100 is NOT in the sequence with nth term 3n + 2: set 3n + 2 = 100 and solve. Subtract 2: 3n = 98. Divide by 3: n = 98/3 = 32.67. Since 98/3 is not a whole number, 100 is not a term. The three marks are for setting up 3n + 2 = 100 (M1), solving to get n = 98/3 (A1), and the conclusion that 98/3 is not a positive integer so 100 is not in the sequence (A1). The final explanatory statement is essential — just calculating n without concluding loses the mark.
A sequence has the term-to-term rule: multiply by 2 then subtract 3. The first term is 5. Work out the next three terms of the sequence.
Apply the rule to each term to get the next. Start with 5. Step 1: 5 × 2 = 10, then 10 − 3 = 7. Step 2: 7 × 2 = 14, then 14 − 3 = 11. Step 3: 11 × 2 = 22, then 22 − 3 = 19. The next three terms are 7, 11, 19. The two marks are one for each correctly generated pair (or one mark for the method applied to one term, one for all three terms correct). Always apply both parts of the rule in order — multiply first, then subtract.
The nth term of a sequence is given by: nth term = 5n - 3 (a) Find the 4th term of the sequence. (b) Find the 10th term of the sequence.
To find a term using an nth-term formula, substitute the position number for n. For the 4th term: 5(4) − 3 = 20 − 3 = 17. For the 10th term: 5(10) − 3 = 50 − 3 = 47. Each part earns 1 mark. Apply BIDMAS — multiply first, then subtract. A common error is using 5 as the constant (making 5n + 5) instead of substituting the position number.
The first term of a geometric sequence is 4 and the common ratio is 3. Find the 6th term of the sequence.
For a geometric sequence, the nth term formula is ar^(n−1), where a is the first term and r is the common ratio. Here a = 4 and r = 3. For the 6th term: 4 × 3^(6−1) = 4 × 3^5 = 4 × 243 = 972. The two marks are for the correct formula with values substituted (M1) and the answer 972 (A1). When calculating powers, use 3^5 = 3 × 3 × 3 × 3 × 3 = 243 step by step.
Zara says: 'The sequence 4, 12, 36, 108 is an arithmetic sequence.' Explain why Zara is wrong. State what type of sequence it actually is.
An arithmetic sequence has a constant difference between consecutive terms. For 4, 12, 36, 108: the differences are 8, 24, 72 — these are not equal, so it is NOT arithmetic. It is a geometric sequence because each term is multiplied by 3 (the common ratio): 4 × 3 = 12, 12 × 3 = 36, 36 × 3 = 108. The two marks are for showing the differences are not constant (1 mark) and identifying it as geometric with common ratio 3 (1 mark).
What is the common difference of the arithmetic sequence below? 4, 11, 18, 25, 32, ...
The common difference is found by subtracting any term from the next term. 11 - 4 = 7. Checking: 18 - 11 = 7, 25 - 18 = 7. The common difference is 7.
Which statement correctly describes the term-to-term rule for a Fibonacci-type sequence? A: Add a fixed number to each term B: Multiply each term by a fixed number C: Each term is the sum of the two preceding terms D: Each term is the square of its position number
A Fibonacci-type sequence has the rule: each term is the sum of the two terms immediately before it. For example: 1, 1, 2, 3, 5, 8, 13 — where 2=1+1, 3=1+2, 5=2+3, and so on. This is option C.
Which of the following is a geometric sequence with a common ratio of 3? A: 2, 5, 8, 11, 14, ... B: 3, 6, 9, 12, 15, ... C: 6, 18, 54, 162, ... D: 1, 3, 5, 7, 9, ...
In a geometric sequence, each term is found by multiplying the previous term by a fixed number (the common ratio). For 6, 18, 54, 162: 18/6 = 3, 54/18 = 3, 162/54 = 3. The common ratio is 3 throughout. The other three sequences are arithmetic (constant difference, not constant ratio).
Solve the simultaneous equations. y = x + 2 x² + y² = 10
Substitute y = x + 2 into x² + y² = 10: x² + (x + 2)² = 10. Expanding carefully (remember the middle term): x² + x² + 4x + 4 = 10, so 2x² + 4x − 6 = 0, which simplifies to x² + 2x − 3 = 0. Factorising: (x + 3)(x − 1) = 0 gives x = −3 or x = 1. Substitute back: when x = 1, y = 3; when x = −3, y = −1. Both solution pairs must be stated. Five marks cover substitution (M1), correct quadratic (A1), factorisation (M1), both x-values (A1), and both y-values (A1ft).
Solve the simultaneous equations. y = 3x - 1 x² + y² = 17 Give your answers as fractions where appropriate.
Substitute y = 3x − 1 into x² + y² = 17: x² + (3x − 1)² = 17. Expanding: x² + 9x² − 6x + 1 = 17, giving 10x² − 6x − 16 = 0, or 5x² − 3x − 8 = 0. Factorising: (5x − 8)(x + 1) = 0, so x = 8/5 or x = −1. Substituting back: when x = −1, y = 3(−1) − 1 = −4; when x = 8/5, y = 3(8/5) − 1 = 24/5 − 5/5 = 19/5. Both pairs must be stated: (−1, −4) and (8/5, 19/5). Five marks cover substitution (M1), correct quadratic (A1), correct factorisation (A1), both x-values (A1), and both solution pairs (A1ft).
Solve the simultaneous equations. 2x + 3y = 12 3x + 2y = 13
Neither coefficient matches directly. To eliminate x, use LCM(2,3) = 6: multiply equation 1 by 3 to get 6x + 9y = 36, and equation 2 by 2 to get 6x + 4y = 26. Both x-coefficients are now +6 (same sign), so subtract: 5y = 10, giving y = 2. Substituting y = 2 into equation 1: 2x + 6 = 12, so x = 3. Four marks: scaling both equations (M1), subtracting correctly (A1), first variable (A1), second variable (A1ft).
Two types of ticket are sold for a show: adult tickets and child tickets. For one family, 2 adult tickets and 3 child tickets cost £16.00 For another family, 4 adult tickets and 1 child ticket cost £20.00 Find the cost of one adult ticket and the cost of one child ticket.
Let a = adult ticket price (£) and c = child ticket price (£). The two conditions give equations 2a + 3c = 16 and 4a + c = 20. To eliminate a, multiply equation 1 by 2 to get 4a + 6c = 32, then subtract equation 2: 5c = 12, so c = 2.40. Substituting into equation 2: 4a + 2.40 = 20, giving a = 4.40. Four marks: forming both equations (B1), correct elimination strategy (M1), c = 2.40 (A1), a = 4.40 (A1ft).
Sam is 3 times as old as Alex. In 5 years' time, Sam will be twice as old as Alex. Work out how old Sam is now.
Let S = Sam's current age and A = Alex's current age. From the problem: S = 3A and in five years' time S + 5 = 2(A + 5). Expanding the second equation: S + 5 = 2A + 10. Substituting S = 3A: 3A + 5 = 2A + 10, so A = 5. Therefore Sam's current age is S = 3(5) = 15. A common error is writing S + 5 = 2A (forgetting to age Alex too). Always add the same time to both people's ages.
Solve the simultaneous equations using substitution. y = 2x - 1 3x + y = 14
Since y = 2x − 1, substitute this expression for y into the other equation: 3x + (2x − 1) = 14. Collecting like terms: 5x − 1 = 14, so 5x = 15 and x = 3. Then y = 2(3) − 1 = 5. Substitution is efficient here because one equation already gives y in terms of x. Verify: 3(3) + 5 = 14. Three marks: substitution step (M1), finding x = 3 (A1), finding y = 5 (A1ft).
Solve the simultaneous equations. 2x + y = 7 x + y = 4
Both equations contain +1y, so subtracting equation 2 from equation 1 eliminates y directly: (2x + y) − (x + y) = 7 − 4 gives x = 3. Substituting x = 3 into equation 2: 3 + y = 4, so y = 1. Always verify in the other equation: 2(3) + 1 = 7. The three marks are for the elimination step (M1), finding x = 3 (A1), and finding y = 1 (A1ft).
Solve the simultaneous equations. 3x + 2y = 11 x - y = 2
Method A (elimination): multiply equation 2 by 2 to get 2x − 2y = 4. Add to equation 1: 5x = 15, so x = 3. Then 3 − y = 2 gives y = 1. Method B (substitution): rearrange equation 2 to x = y + 2 and substitute into 3x + 2y = 11 to get 3(y + 2) + 2y = 11, i.e. 5y + 6 = 11, so y = 1 and x = 3. Both methods reach the same correct answer.
Ali solves the simultaneous equations 5x + y = 17 and x - y = 1 by elimination. Ben says he can also use substitution by rearranging x - y = 1 to get x = y + 1. Explain how elimination works for these two equations and state one advantage of Ben's substitution approach.
For elimination: the y-coefficients are +1 and −1 (opposite signs), so adding the equations cancels y immediately — no scaling is required. Adding gives (5x + y) + (x − y) = 17 + 1, so 6x = 18 and x = 3. Ben's substitution advantage: x = y + 1 already has x as the subject, so he can substitute directly into the other equation without any preliminary multiplying. This saves a step compared with problems where rearranging is necessary first. Vague claims like 'it is easier' do not earn marks — you must identify the specific step that is avoided.
Jenna tries to solve the simultaneous equations: 4x + 6y = 18 2x + 3y = 9 She scales the second equation by 2 and then subtracts. Explain what happens when she does this, and what it tells her about the two equations.
Scaling equation 2 by 2 gives 4x + 6y = 18, which is identical to equation 1. Subtracting leaves 0 = 0 — a statement that is always true. This means the two equations represent the same straight line (one is a multiple of the other). Because every point on the line 2x + 3y = 9 satisfies both equations, there are infinitely many solutions. Note: getting 0 = 0 is very different from getting 0 = 5 (which would indicate parallel lines and no solution).
A student tries to solve the simultaneous equations: y = 2x + 1 y = 2x + 3 She writes: 2x + 1 = 2x + 3 She then gets 1 = 3 and says this is impossible. Explain why this pair of simultaneous equations has no solution.
Both equations y = 2x + 1 and y = 2x + 3 have the same gradient (m = 2), meaning the two lines are parallel. Parallel lines never intersect, so there is no (x, y) pair that satisfies both equations simultaneously. Setting them equal gives 2x + 1 = 2x + 3, which simplifies to 1 = 3 — a contradiction, confirming there is no solution. For full marks you must mention that the gradients are equal (or the lines are parallel) AND that parallel lines never meet.
Show that x = 2, y = 3 is a solution of the simultaneous equations. 2x + y = 7 x + 2y = 8
To verify x = 2, y = 3, substitute into both equations. For 2x + y: 2(2) + 3 = 7, which equals the right-hand side. For x + 2y: 2 + 2(3) = 8, which equals the right-hand side. Both equations are satisfied, so the solution is confirmed. Showing working for both substitutions is essential — one check alone is not sufficient.
Which method is most efficient for solving the following simultaneous equations? 5x + 2y = 14 3x + 2y = 10
When two equations share identical coefficients for one variable, direct subtraction (or addition for opposite signs) eliminates that variable in a single step. Both equations have +2y, so subtracting them gives 2x = 4 directly.
Which of the following is the correct solution to the simultaneous equations? x + y = 10 x - y = 2
The correct solution must satisfy BOTH equations. Substituting x = 6, y = 4: equation 1 gives 6 + 4 = 10 (correct) and equation 2 gives 6 - 4 = 2 (correct). All other options fail at least one equation.
A straight line and a circle are given by: y = x + 3 x² + y² = 4 How many real solutions does this system of equations have?
Substituting y = x + 3 into x² + y² = 4: x² + (x + 3)² = 4 gives 2x² + 6x + 5 = 0. Discriminant = 36 - 40 = -4. Negative discriminant means no real solutions — the line misses the circle entirely.
f(x) = x² + 1 and g(x) = 3x - 2 Solve fg(x) = 50
To verify that two functions are inverses, compute the composite ff⁻¹(x) and show it equals x. Substitute f⁻¹(x) as the input to f and simplify. If the result is x, the verification is complete. Show each substitution step. A common mistake is only checking in one order — strictly, you should verify both ff⁻¹(x) = x and f⁻¹f(x) = x, though for most GCSE questions only one direction is required.
f(x) = x² and g(x) = 2x - 3 Show that fg(x) is not equal to gf(x), and find all values of x for which fg(x) = gf(x).
Finding ff(x) means applying f to itself: substitute f(x) into f in place of x. If f(x) = ax+b, then ff(x) = f(ax+b) = a(ax+b)+b = a²x+ab+b. Expand carefully, particularly if f contains a squared term, which will produce higher powers. Always write the intermediate step ff(x) = f('f(x) expression') before substituting the full expression.
f(x) = 2x - 3 a) Find an expression for ff(x). b) Hence solve ff(x) = f(x).
Evaluate the composite numerically by working from the inside out. Calculate the inner function at the given value first, then substitute that result into the outer function. Show both steps: inner function value = ..., then outer function applied to that value. Reversing the order (evaluating the outer function first) gives the answer to a different composite and is the most common error.
f(x) = 3x - 2 and g(x) = x + 4 Solve fg(x) = 22
To find the inverse function f⁻¹(x): replace f(x) with y, swap x and y (so x = [expression in y]), then rearrange for y. For example, if f(x) = 2x+3: y = 2x+3 → x = 2y+3 → y = (x−3)/2, giving f⁻¹(x) = (x−3)/2. The inverse undoes what f does. Show the swapping step explicitly — writing only the rearrangement without the swap is incomplete and may lose marks.
f(x) = 2x + 6 and g(x) = x² f⁻¹(x) denotes the inverse function of f. Find an expression for f⁻¹g(x).
Find gf(x) by substituting f(x) into g, then solve gf(x) = given value. Set up the composite expression clearly, expand where necessary, rearrange to find x, and verify the solution. Show each step: identify f(x), substitute into g, simplify, then solve. Remember: function composition is not commutative in general, so gf(x) and fg(x) give different results for most functions.
f(x) = x + 2, g(x) = 3x and h(x) = x² Find an expression for fgh(x).
The domain of fg(x) must satisfy both g's domain restrictions (input to g must be valid) and the restriction that the output of g lies in f's domain. Work through restrictions sequentially — first apply g's restriction, then check that f can accept g's output. Students often consider only one function's restriction rather than both in sequence.
f(x) = 4x - 1 and g(x) = x + 3 Find an expression for fg(x).
To find fg(x), substitute g(x) into f in place of x: fg(x) = f(g(x)) = f(x+3) = 4(x+3) − 1. Expand: 4x + 12 − 1 = 4x + 11. The method mark is for the correct substitution 4(x+3) − 1; the accuracy mark for simplifying to 4x+11. A common error is computing gf(x) instead — remember fg(x) means g is applied first, so g goes inside f.
f(x) = 2x + 1 and g(x) = x² Find an expression for gf(x).
For gf(x), apply f first, then g. f(x) = 2x+1, so gf(x) = g(f(x)) = g(2x+1) = (2x+1)². This can be left as (2x+1)² or expanded to 4x²+4x+1 using (a+b)² = a²+2ab+b². The critical step is recognising the entire expression (2x+1) is squared. Squaring only the x (giving 4x²+1) is a common mistake — the cross term 4x is also produced when expanding.
Explain why, in general, fg(x) and gf(x) are NOT equal. You may use an example to support your explanation.
Set up the composite function expression, then form an equation by setting it equal to the given value. Show fg(x) or gf(x) as an algebraic expression before equating. Rearrange and solve step by step. The method mark is for the correct composite; accuracy marks for solving correctly. A common error is forming the wrong composite (e.g. fg instead of gf) because the order of application is misread.
f(x) = 2x + 1 and g(x) = x² Work out the value of gf(3).
To solve fg(x) = gf(x), find algebraic expressions for both composites separately, then set them equal and solve. Write each composite clearly before forming the equation. Show your working for both fg and gf as separate lines, then form and solve the resulting equation. Errors arise from computing only one composite or from sign errors when rearranging.
f(x) = 5x - 1 fg(x) = 10x + 4 Find g(x).
This composite function question involves substitution into a quadratic or rational function. Substitute the inner function expression into the outer function carefully. Expand and simplify, collecting like terms. Show the substitution step explicitly before expanding. Partial marks are awarded for a correct substitution even if the expansion contains arithmetic errors.
The composite function fg(x) means: A) Apply g first, then apply f to the result B) Apply f first, then apply g to the result C) Multiply f(x) by g(x) D) Add f(x) to g(x)
fg(x) means f(g(x)): g is the inner function applied first, and f is the outer function applied to g's result. Reading from right to left inside the brackets gives the correct order. Options B, C, and D all confuse composition with different operations or reverse the order.
f(x) = 3x and g(x) = x + 4 What is fg(2)?
fg(2) = f(g(2)). The inner function g is evaluated first: g(2) = 2+4 = 6. Then f is applied to this result: f(6) = 3 x 6 = 18. Option A (10) is the result of gf(2), reversing the order. Options C and D arise from incorrect combinations of the two functions.
f(x) = x + 5 and g(x) = 2x Which statement is true?
fg(x) = f(g(x)) = f(2x) = 2x+5 (g doubles x, then f adds 5). gf(x) = g(f(x)) = g(x+5) = 2(x+5) = 2x+10 (f adds 5, then g doubles the whole thing). Since 2x+5 is not equal to 2x+10, the two composites are different. Option D has the two expressions swapped. Option B has an error in gf(x). Option A is false — composition is not commutative in general.
A solid cylindrical rod is made of copper. The rod has a radius of 3 cm and a height of 10 cm. The density of copper is 8.9 g/cm³. Work out the mass of the rod. Give your answer correct to 3 significant figures.
Step 1: calculate the volume of the cylinder using V = πr²h: V = π × 3² × 10 = π × 9 × 10 = 90π ≈ 282.74 cm³. Step 2: find the mass using Mass = Density × Volume: M = 8.9 × 282.74 ≈ 2,516 g (to 3 s.f.). The critical step is using the volume formula correctly — using diameter (6) instead of radius (3) would give a volume four times too large. Always confirm you are using the radius, not the diameter.
A composite object is made from two different materials. Material X: mass = 160 g, volume = 80 cm³ Material Y: mass = 540 g, volume = 180 cm³ Work out the overall density of the composite object. Give your answer to 3 significant figures.
For a composite object, the overall density uses the total mass and total volume. Total mass = 160 + 540 = 700 g. Total volume = 80 + 180 = 260 cm³. Overall density = 700 ÷ 260 = 2.69 g/cm³ (3 s.f.). A common mistake is averaging the two densities: Material X density = 160/80 = 2 g/cm³; Material Y density = 540/180 = 3 g/cm³; average = 2.5 g/cm³. This is wrong because the two materials have different volumes, so you cannot simply average their densities.
A stone has a mass of 3 kg and a volume of 500 cm³. Work out the density of the stone in g/cm³.
The units are mixed — mass is in kg but the answer must be in g/cm³. First convert: 3 kg = 3,000 g. Then apply Density = Mass ÷ Volume: D = 3,000 ÷ 500 = 6 g/cm³. If you forget to convert and use 3 ÷ 500 = 0.006, your answer would be in kg/cm³, not g/cm³. Always check that your units are consistent before calculating.
A granite block measures 20 cm by 15 cm by 10 cm. The density of granite is 2.7 g/cm³. Calculate the mass of the block.
This is a two-step problem. Step 1: find the volume of the rectangular block: V = 20 × 15 × 10 = 3,000 cm³. Step 2: find the mass using Mass = Density × Volume: M = 2.7 × 3,000 = 8,100 g. A common error is forgetting step 1 and trying to use the three dimensions directly in the density formula — you must calculate volume first.
Object A has a mass of 80 g and a volume of 40 cm³. Object B has a mass of 180 g and a volume of 60 cm³. Which object has the greater density? You must show your working.
Calculate both densities using D = M ÷ V. Object A: 80 ÷ 40 = 2 g/cm³. Object B: 180 ÷ 60 = 3 g/cm³. Since 3 > 2, Object B has the greater density. A common mistake is assuming the heavier object is denser — Object B is heavier (180 g vs 80 g) AND larger, so you must actually divide to compare. In this case the heavier object is denser, but that is not always true.
A student says: 'A heavier object always sinks in water.' Explain why the student is incorrect. You should refer to density in your answer.
Whether an object sinks or floats depends on its density compared to water (1 g/cm³), not on its mass alone. A very large, heavy ship is made of steel (density ~8 g/cm³), yet it floats because the ship's overall density — hull, empty space and all — is less than 1 g/cm³. Conversely, a small but very dense object (like a solid metal ball) would sink. The student's statement is wrong because a large but hollow object can be heavy yet still float if its average density is less than water.
A metal block has a mass of 45 g and a volume of 5 cm³. Work out the density of the metal.
Apply Density = Mass ÷ Volume: D = 45 ÷ 5 = 9 g/cm³. The units come from the formula: grams divided by cubic centimetres gives g/cm³. A common error is using the wrong formula — multiplying (45 × 5 = 225) or dividing the other way (5 ÷ 45). The density triangle helps: D at the top, M and V at the bottom side by side.
A block of aluminium has a density of 2.7 g/cm³ and a volume of 200 cm³. Work out the mass of the block.
Rearrange Density = Mass ÷ Volume to find Mass = Density × Volume. Substitute: M = 2.7 × 200 = 540 g. The rearrangement is logical — if you know how much mass is packed into every cm³ (density) and you know the total number of cm³ (volume), you multiply to get total mass. A common error is dividing: 200 ÷ 2.7 ≈ 74 — this gives volume, not mass.
A piece of iron has a mass of 360 g and a density of 8 g/cm³. Work out the volume of the iron.
Rearrange Density = Mass ÷ Volume to find Volume = Mass ÷ Density. Substitute: V = 360 ÷ 8 = 45 cm³. Physically, this makes sense: if every cm³ of iron has a mass of 8 g, and you have 360 g in total, then you have 360 ÷ 8 = 45 individual cm³. A common error is multiplying instead (360 × 8 = 2880), which gives a result in g² — clearly the wrong units and units analysis is a useful check.
Explain what is meant by a density of 5 g/cm³.
A density of 5 g/cm³ means that every 1 cm³ of the material has a mass of 5 g. In other words, 5 grams of the material fits into every cubic centimetre of space it occupies. A full-mark answer should state this relationship between the numbers and their units explicitly — not just that it is 'heavy' or 'dense'. For comparison, water has a density of 1 g/cm³, so this material is five times denser than water.
The density of steel is 7.8 g/cm³. Convert this density to kg/m³.
To convert g/cm³ to kg/m³, multiply by 1,000 (because 1 g/cm³ = 1,000 kg/m³). So 7.8 g/cm³ = 7,800 kg/m³. Why does the number get bigger? Because 1 m³ = 1,000,000 cm³, but 1 kg = 1,000 g. The volume unit increases by a factor of 1,000,000 but mass only by 1,000 — so the density per m³ is 1,000 times the density per cm³.
Which formula correctly shows how density (D), mass (M) and volume (V) are related?
Density = Mass ÷ Volume. This makes physical sense: a denser material packs more mass into the same volume. If mass increases but volume stays the same, density increases. If volume increases but mass stays the same, density decreases.
Which of the following are correct units for density? Select the most appropriate answer.
Density = mass ÷ volume, so units = (units of mass) ÷ (units of volume). Using grams and cubic centimetres gives g/cm³. Using kilograms and cubic metres gives kg/m³. Both are valid units for density.
The density of water is 1 g/cm³. A plastic object has a density of 0.8 g/cm³. What happens when the object is placed in water?
An object floats if its density is less than the density of the liquid it is placed in. The plastic (0.8 g/cm³) is less dense than water (1 g/cm³), so it floats. A denser object would displace water and sink; a less dense object is buoyed up and floats.
y is directly proportional to x². When x = 4, y = 48. Find y when x = 7.
When y ∝ x², the equation is y = kx². Step 1: find k using x = 4, y = 48: 48 = k × 4² = 16k → k = 3. Step 2: find y when x = 7: y = 3 × 7² = 3 × 49 = 147. Note that doubling x does NOT double y here — it quadruples y (because 2² = 4). This is the key difference between y ∝ x and y ∝ x².
y is directly proportional to x². When x = 5, y = 75. Find the value of x when y = 12.
Step 1: find k. 75 = k × 5² = 25k → k = 3. The equation is y = 3x². Step 2: substitute y = 12 and solve for x: 12 = 3x² → x² = 4 → x = 2 (taking the positive root since x represents a physical quantity). Note that the equation x² = 4 has two solutions (±2), but context usually means only the positive root is valid.
y is directly proportional to x³. When x = 5, y = 250. Find y when x = 3.
When y ∝ x³, write y = kx³. Step 1: find k. 250 = k × 5³ = k × 125 → k = 2. Step 2: find y when x = 3: y = 2 × 3³ = 2 × 27 = 54. The cube here means that halving x reduces y by a factor of 8 (since (½)³ = 1/8). Be careful to cube the x value before multiplying by k.
y is directly proportional to the square root of x. When x = 16, y = 24. Find y when x = 25.
When y ∝ √x, write y = k√x. Step 1: find k. 24 = k√16 = k × 4 → k = 6. Step 2: find y when x = 25: y = 6 × √25 = 6 × 5 = 30. Notice that x goes from 16 to 25 (factor of 25/16), while y goes from 24 to 30 (factor of 30/24 = 5/4). The ratio of the y values equals the ratio of the square roots: √25/√16 = 5/4. ✓
A student claims that y is directly proportional to x. The table below shows their data. | x | 2 | 5 | 8 | 10 | |---|---|---|---|----| | y | 6 | 15 | 25 | 30 | Determine whether the student is correct. Show all your working and give a reason for your conclusion.
To test for direct proportion, check whether the ratio y/x is constant for all data points. x=2: 6/2 = 3. x=5: 15/5 = 3. x=8: 25/8 = 3.125. x=10: 30/10 = 3. Three ratios give 3 but x=8 gives 3.125, which is different. Since the ratio y/x is not constant, y is NOT directly proportional to x. The student is incorrect. Note that just checking two points is not enough — you must check all four to identify the inconsistency at x=8.
5 identical pencils cost £1.75. Using the unitary method, find the cost of 8 pencils. Give your answer in pounds.
The unitary method finds the cost of one item first, then scales up. Cost of 1 pencil = £1.75 ÷ 5 = £0.35. Cost of 8 pencils = £0.35 × 8 = £2.80. This is a real-world example of direct proportion — cost is directly proportional to the number of items. The unitary method is reliable because it always goes through '1 item' as an intermediate step.
y is directly proportional to x. When x = 5, y = 35. Find the value of y when x = 8.
Step 1: find k using the given values. y = kx → 35 = k × 5 → k = 7. Step 2: use k to find y when x = 8: y = 7 × 8 = 56. You can also use the scaling method: the multiplier from x = 5 to x = 8 is 8/5 = 1.6, so y = 35 × 1.6 = 56. Both methods work — the k-formula method is more reliable for complex questions.
y is directly proportional to x. When x = 6, y = 24. Find the value of x when y = 40.
Step 1: find k. k = y/x = 24/6 = 4. The equation is y = 4x. Step 2: substitute y = 40 and solve for x: 40 = 4x → x = 40 ÷ 4 = 10. A common mistake is substituting into the equation incorrectly — make sure you are solving for x, not calculating another y value. The answer x = 10 can be verified: y = 4 × 10 = 40. ✓
Explain what it means for y to be directly proportional to x. Your answer should refer to the equation and the graph.
A full-mark answer has two parts. Equation: y is directly proportional to x means y = kx for some constant k (the proportionality constant). As x increases, y increases at the same rate. Graph: the graph of y against x is a straight line through the origin (0,0). The gradient of the line equals k. Students often describe it as 'y increases as x increases' — this is true but insufficient. You must mention the constant ratio y/x = k and the straight-line through the origin.
y is directly proportional to x. When x = 6, y = 18. Using the multiplier method, find y when x = 10. Show your multiplier clearly.
The multiplier method finds the scale factor between the two x values. Multiplier = 10 ÷ 6 = 5/3. Apply the same multiplier to y: y = 18 × 5/3 = 30. You should write 'multiplier = 10/6 = 5/3' clearly in working. This method works because in direct proportion, doubling x doubles y, tripling x triples y — and scaling by any factor 5/3 also scales y by 5/3.
Which of the following correctly reads the mathematical statement y ∝ x?
The symbol ∝ means 'is proportional to'. The statement y ∝ x means y is directly proportional to x — as x increases, y increases at the same rate. This is equivalent to writing y = kx for some constant k.
Which statement best describes the graph of a directly proportional relationship between y and x?
Since y = kx, when x = 0 we have y = k × 0 = 0. This means the graph always passes through the origin (0, 0). The equation is linear (no x² or higher powers), so it is a straight line. The gradient of the line equals k, the proportionality constant.
y is directly proportional to x. When x = 5, y = 30. Find the value of k.
When y ∝ x, the relationship is y = kx where k is the proportionality constant. Substitute the known values: 30 = k × 5. Solve by dividing both sides by 5: k = 30 ÷ 5 = 6. The value k = 6 means y is always 6 times x for this particular proportion. You can verify: when x = 5, y = 6 × 5 = 30. ✓
y is directly proportional to x, and the proportionality constant k = 4. Find y when x = 9.
When you are given k directly, just substitute into y = kx. With k = 4 and x = 9: y = 4 × 9 = 36. This is the simplest type of direct proportion question — no rearranging needed, just multiply. Check: the ratio y/x = 36/9 = 4 = k, confirming the proportional relationship.
y is directly proportional to x. When x = 5, y = 20. What is y when x = 10?
When x doubles from 5 to 10, y also doubles (direct proportion). So y doubles from 20 to 40. Alternatively, k = 20/5 = 4, and y = 4 × 10 = 40.
y is inversely proportional to x². When x = 3, y = 12. Find y when x = 6.
When y ∝ 1/x², write y = k/x². Step 1: find k. 12 = k/3² = k/9 → k = 108. Step 2: find y when x = 6: y = 108/6² = 108/36 = 3. Notice that doubling x reduces y by a factor of 4 (because (2x)² = 4x²). So y = 12/4 = 3. This shortcut works when x exactly doubles.
y is inversely proportional to x². When x = 2, y = 50. Find the value of x when y = 8.
Step 1: find k. y = k/x² → 50 = k/4 → k = 200. The equation is y = 200/x². Step 2: substitute y = 8 and solve: 8 = 200/x² → x² = 200/8 = 25 → x = 5 (positive root). Always take the positive square root unless the context specifies otherwise.
y is inversely proportional to x³. When x = 2, y = 40. Find y when x = 4.
When y ∝ 1/x³, write y = k/x³. Step 1: find k. 40 = k/2³ = k/8 → k = 320. Step 2: find y when x = 4: y = 320/4³ = 320/64 = 5. Notice that doubling x reduces y by a factor of 8 (because 2³ = 8): y = 40/8 = 5. This cube relationship means y decreases much more steeply than for y ∝ 1/x.
y is inversely proportional to the square root of x. When x = 4, y = 6. Find y when x = 9.
When y ∝ 1/√x, write y = k/√x. Step 1: find k. 6 = k/√4 = k/2 → k = 12. Step 2: find y when x = 9: y = 12/√9 = 12/3 = 4. Verify the inverse relationship: as x increases from 4 to 9, y decreases from 6 to 4 — correct direction for inverse proportion.
A student claims that y is inversely proportional to x. The table below shows their data. | x | 2 | 3 | 5 | 10 | |---|---|---|---|----| | y | 15 | 10 | 6 | 3 | Determine whether the student is correct. Show all your working and give a reason for your conclusion.
To test for inverse proportion, check whether the product xy is constant for all data points. x=2: 2 × 15 = 30. x=3: 3 × 10 = 30. x=5: 5 × 6 = 30. x=10: 10 × 3 = 30. All four products equal 30, so xy = 30 throughout. The student is correct — y is inversely proportional to x, with k = 30. Contrast this with direct proportion where you check y/x = constant; for inverse proportion you check xy = constant.
The table below shows values of x and y. | x | 1 | 2 | 4 | 8 | |---|---|---|---|---| | y | 24 | 12 | 6 | 3 | A student says: 'y is directly proportional to x.' A second student says: 'y is inversely proportional to x.' Which student is correct? Give full mathematical justification for your answer.
Test both claims. Direct proportion: check y/x is constant. 24/1=24, 12/2=6, 4/4=1.5, 3/8=0.375 — not constant. So y is NOT directly proportional to x. Inverse proportion: check xy is constant. 1×24=24, 2×12=24, 4×6=24, 8×3=24 — constant! So y IS inversely proportional to x, with k=24. The second student is correct. Full marks require showing both tests: rejecting direct proportion with evidence AND confirming inverse proportion with evidence.
y is inversely proportional to x. When x = 5, y = 8. Find the value of y when x = 2.
Step 1: find k = xy = 5 × 8 = 40. The equation is y = 40/x. Step 2: substitute x = 2: y = 40/2 = 20. Note that x has decreased from 5 to 2 (factor of 2/5), so y must increase by the reciprocal factor (5/2): y = 8 × 5/2 = 20. Both approaches confirm the answer.
y is inversely proportional to x. When x = 6, y = 4. Find the value of x when y = 3.
Step 1: k = 6 × 4 = 24. The equation is y = 24/x. Step 2: substitute y = 3 and solve: 3 = 24/x → x = 24/3 = 8. You can also reason: y has decreased from 4 to 3 (factor of 3/4), so x must increase by the reciprocal (4/3): x = 6 × 4/3 = 8. Check: 8 × 3 = 24 = k. ✓
3 workers take 8 days to complete a job. Assume all workers work at the same rate. How many days would 6 workers take to complete the same job?
Number of workers and days taken are inversely proportional — more workers means fewer days for the same job. Find the constant: k = 3 × 8 = 24 (total worker-days). With 6 workers: days = 24/6 = 4 days. Alternatively, doubling the workers halves the time: 8 ÷ 2 = 4 days. A common error is thinking that 6 workers take 6/3 × 8 = 16 days, which would be direct proportion (the wrong direction).
Explain what it means for y to be inversely proportional to x. Your answer should refer to the equation and the graph.
Equation: y inversely proportional to x means y = k/x, where k is the proportionality constant. Equivalently, the product xy = k is always constant — as x increases, y decreases proportionally, and vice versa. Graph: the graph is a hyperbola — a smooth curved line in two branches that approaches the x-axis and y-axis but never touches them (they are asymptotes). The graph is NOT a straight line. A full-marks answer must mention both the equation form (or constant product) AND the graph features (hyperbola, asymptotes, never touches the axes).
Which of the following correctly reads the mathematical statement y ∝ 1/x?
The symbol ∝ means 'is proportional to'. When written as y ∝ 1/x, the '1/x' part is the reciprocal of x. This means y is inversely proportional to x — as x increases, y decreases, and the product xy remains constant. The equation form is y = k/x.
Which statement best describes the graph of y = k/x where k is a positive constant?
The graph of y = k/x is a hyperbola. Because y can never equal 0 (there is no value of x that makes k/x = 0), the graph never touches the x-axis. Because the equation is undefined when x = 0, the graph never touches the y-axis. Both axes act as asymptotes — lines the curve approaches but never reaches.
y is inversely proportional to x. When x = 3, y = 12. Find the value of k.
When y ∝ 1/x, the equation is y = k/x. To find k, substitute the known values: 12 = k/3. Multiply both sides by 3: k = 36. This means the product xy is always 36 for this relationship — you can verify: 3 × 12 = 36. The constant k is also called the constant of proportionality and represents the constant product xy.
y is inversely proportional to x, and the proportionality constant k = 20. Find y when x = 4.
When given k directly, substitute into y = k/x: y = 20/4 = 5. You can also verify using the product rule: xy = 4 × 5 = 20 = k. ✓ This is the most straightforward type of inverse proportion question — no need to find k first, just divide.
y is inversely proportional to x. When x = 4, y = 9. What is the value of y when x = 12?
In inverse proportion, the product xy is constant. Here k = 4 × 9 = 36. When x = 12: y = 36/12 = 3. Equivalently, x has been multiplied by 3, so y must be divided by 3: y = 9 ÷ 3 = 3.
Two straight lines intersect. Two adjacent angles at the intersection are labelled (5x + 10)° and (3x + 10)°. (a) Find the value of x. (b) Find the size of the angle vertically opposite to (5x + 10)°.
Part a: adjacent angles at an intersection lie on a straight line, so they sum to 180°: (5x + 10) + (3x + 10) = 180 → 8x + 20 = 180 → 8x = 160 → x = 20. Part b: the angle vertically opposite to (5x + 10)° is equal to it (vertically opposite angles). With x = 20: 5×20 + 10 = 110°. The vertically opposite angle is also 110°.
Two straight lines intersect. Two of the angles formed at the intersection are labelled (3x + 10)° and (2x + 20)°. These two angles are adjacent (next to each other). (a) Show that x = 30. (b) Find the sizes of all four angles at the intersection.
Part a: adjacent angles at an intersection sum to 180°, so (3x + 10) + (2x + 20) = 180. Simplify: 5x + 30 = 180 → 5x = 150 → x = 30. Since the answer is given, every step of working must be shown. Part b: angle 1 = 3×30 + 10 = 100°. Angle 2 = 2×30 + 20 = 80°. Vertically opposite to 100° is 100°. Vertically opposite to 80° is 80°. All four angles: 100°, 80°, 100°, 80°.
Three angles on a straight line are (2x + 10)°, (3x + 20)°, and 30°. Find the value of x.
Set up an equation using angles on a straight line = 180°: (2x + 10) + (3x + 20) + 30 = 180. Simplify: 5x + 60 = 180 → 5x = 120 → x = 24. Check: (2×24+10) + (3×24+20) + 30 = 58 + 92 + 30 = 180. ✓ Always collect the x terms and number terms separately before solving.
Four angles at a point are (4x + 10)°, (2x + 20)°, 90°, and 60°. Find the value of x.
Angles at a point sum to 360°. Set up: (4x + 10) + (2x + 20) + 90 + 60 = 360. Collect terms: 6x + 180 = 360 → 6x = 180 → x = 30. Check: (4×30+10) + (2×30+20) + 90 + 60 = 130 + 80 + 90 + 60 = 360. ✓
Two straight lines intersect. Two vertically opposite angles are labelled (5x - 8)° and (3x + 20)°. Find the value of x, giving a reason for your equation.
Vertically opposite angles are equal, so set them equal: 5x − 8 = 3x + 20. Reason: 'Vertically opposite angles are equal.' Solve: 5x − 3x = 20 + 8 → 2x = 28 → x = 14. Check: 5×14 − 8 = 62° and 3×14 + 20 = 62°. ✓ The reason must be stated explicitly for full marks — 'because they're vertically opposite' is sufficient.
In a diagram, three angles are on a straight line. The angles are x°, 2x°, and (x + 40)°. Find the value of the largest angle.
Set up: x + 2x + (x + 40) = 180 → 4x + 40 = 180 → 4x = 140 → x = 35. The three angles are: x = 35°, 2x = 70°, and (x + 40) = 75°. The largest angle is 75°. Always identify which angle is largest after finding x — do not assume 2x is largest just because it has a coefficient of 2.
Two straight lines cross at a point. Angle a and angle b are on a straight line, so a + b = 180°. Angle b and angle c are also on a straight line, so b + c = 180°. Using these two facts, explain why angle a must be equal to angle c.
From a + b = 180° and b + c = 180°, both right-hand sides are equal, so a + b = b + c. Subtract b from both sides: a = c. This is the algebraic proof of why vertically opposite angles are equal. The logical chain is: both a and c are supplementary to the same angle b, so they must be equal to each other. The key mark here is explicitly subtracting b from both sides of the equation.
Three angles meet at a point. Two of the angles are 90° and 130°. Find the third angle.
Angles around a point sum to 360°. Third angle = 360° − 90° − 130° = 140°. A useful check: 90 + 130 + 140 = 360. ✓ Note the difference from angles on a straight line (180°) — here the angles completely surround the point.
Two angles on a straight line are 73° and 107°. A student says: 'These two angles must be equal because they are on a straight line.' Is the student correct? Give a reason for your answer.
The student is NOT correct. Angles on a straight line sum to 180°, but they do not need to be equal. Here 73° + 107° = 180°, which confirms they are correctly placed on a straight line — but 73 ≠ 107, so they are not equal. Angles on a straight line are only equal when each is exactly 90°. The student has confused 'on a straight line' with 'equal'.
An angle measures 135°. What type of angle is this?
Obtuse angles lie strictly between 90° and 180°. Since 90 < 135 < 180, this angle is obtuse.
Angles on a straight line add up to:
A straight line represents a half-turn (180°). Any angles sitting on top of a straight line must therefore share this 180° total.
Two angles are on a straight line. One angle is 115°. Find the other angle.
Angles on a straight line sum to 180°. So the other angle = 180° − 115° = 65°. A common mistake is subtracting from 360° (angles at a point) — only use 360° when angles meet at a point with no line boundaries.
Two straight lines cross each other. One of the angles formed is 42°. Find the angle vertically opposite to the 42° angle.
Vertically opposite angles are equal. When two lines cross, the angle directly opposite is always the same size. So the vertically opposite angle = 42°. Students sometimes confuse 'vertically opposite' with 'adjacent' — the adjacent angles would be 180° − 42° = 138°.
Two straight lines cross each other. Which statement about the angles formed is always true?
When two lines intersect, they form two pairs of vertically opposite angles. Each pair consists of angles that are directly opposite each other, and these are always equal. Adjacent angles add to 180° because they lie on a straight line.
A vertical flagpole stands on level ground. From a point A on the ground, the angle of elevation of the top of the flagpole is 32°. Point A is 18 m from the base of the flagpole. (a) Calculate the height of the flagpole. Give your answer to 2 decimal places. (b) From a second point B, on the other side of the flagpole, the angle of elevation of the top is 54°. Point B is on level ground. Calculate the distance from B to the base of the flagpole. Give your answer to 2 decimal places.
Part (a): tan 32° = h / 18, so h = 18 × tan 32° = 11.25 m. Part (b): tan 54° = 11.25 / d, so d = 11.25 / tan 54° = 8.17 m.
A ladder of length 6 m leans against a vertical wall. The base of the ladder is 2.3 m from the foot of the wall on level ground. (a) Calculate the angle the ladder makes with the ground. Give your answer to 1 decimal place. (b) Calculate the height the ladder reaches up the wall. Give your answer to 2 decimal places.
Part (a): cos θ = 2.3/6 → θ = cos⁻¹(0.3833) = 67.5°. Part (b): Height² = 6² − 2.3² = 30.71 → Height = √30.71 = 5.54 m (2 d.p.).
A right-angled triangle has an angle of 35° and a hypotenuse of 10 cm. Calculate the length of the side opposite the 35° angle. Give your answer to 1 decimal place.
Using SOH: sin 35° = O / H = O / 10. So O = 10 × sin 35° = 10 × 0.5736 = 5.7 cm (1 d.p.).
A right-angled triangle has an angle of 50° and a hypotenuse of 14 cm. Calculate the length of the side adjacent to the 50° angle. Give your answer to 1 decimal place.
Using CAH: cos 50° = A / H = A / 14. So A = 14 × cos 50° = 14 × 0.6428 = 9.0 cm (1 d.p.).
A right-angled triangle has an angle of 25° and the opposite side is 6 cm. Calculate the length of the hypotenuse. Give your answer to 1 decimal place.
Using SOH: sin 25° = O / H = 6 / H. Rearranging: H = 6 / sin 25° = 6 / 0.4226 = 14.2 cm (1 d.p.).
A right-angled triangle has an angle of 65° and the adjacent side is 8 cm. Calculate the length of the side opposite the 65° angle. Give your answer to 1 decimal place.
Using TOA: tan 65° = O / A = O / 8. So O = 8 × tan 65° = 8 × 2.1445 = 17.2 cm (1 d.p.).
A right-angled triangle has an angle of 42° and the adjacent side is 11 cm. Calculate the length of the hypotenuse. Give your answer to 1 decimal place.
Using CAH: cos 42° = A / H = 11 / H. Rearranging: H = 11 / cos 42° = 11 / 0.7431 = 14.8 cm (1 d.p.).
A right-angled triangle has an opposite side of 7 cm and a hypotenuse of 15 cm. Use sin⁻¹ to calculate the angle θ. Give your answer to 1 decimal place.
Using SOH: sin θ = O / H = 7 / 15. To find θ, apply sin⁻¹: θ = sin⁻¹(7/15) = 27.8° (1 d.p.).
A right-angled triangle has an adjacent side of 9 cm and a hypotenuse of 13 cm. Use cos⁻¹ to calculate the angle θ. Give your answer to 1 decimal place.
Using CAH: cos θ = A / H = 9 / 13. Apply cos⁻¹: θ = cos⁻¹(9/13) = 46.2° (1 d.p.).
A right-angled triangle has an opposite side of 12 cm and an adjacent side of 5 cm. Use tan⁻¹ to calculate the angle θ. Give your answer to 1 decimal place.
Using TOA: tan θ = O / A = 12 / 5 = 2.4. Apply tan⁻¹: θ = tan⁻¹(2.4) = 67.4° (1 d.p.).
Without a calculator, write down the exact values of: (a) sin 30° (b) tan 45° (c) cos 60°
From the exact values table: sin 30° = 1/2, tan 45° = 1, cos 60° = 1/2. Note that sin 30° and cos 60° are equal — they are complementary angles.
A right-angled triangle has an opposite side of 7 cm and an adjacent side of 4 cm. Calculate the angle θ. Give your answer to 1 decimal place.
The opposite (7) and adjacent (4) sides are known, so use tan. tan θ = 7/4 = 1.75. To find the angle, apply the inverse: θ = tan⁻¹(1.75) = 60.25...° ≈ 60.3° (1 d.p.).
The triangle shown has an angle of 42° and a hypotenuse of 8 cm. Calculate the length of the side marked x (the opposite side). Give your answer to 1 decimal place.
The known sides involved are the opposite (x) and the hypotenuse (8 cm), so use sin. sin 42° = x / 8, giving x = 8 × sin 42° = 5.35... ≈ 5.4 cm (1 d.p.).
For the triangle shown, a student chooses to use sin to find the missing side. Explain why they chose sin rather than one of the other trigonometric ratios.
The student knows the hypotenuse and needs to find the opposite side. Sin is chosen because it links the opposite side and the hypotenuse. Cos uses the adjacent and hypotenuse, and tan uses the opposite and adjacent — neither involves the required combination.
SOHCAHTOA tells us which ratio to use based on the sides involved. When the opposite and hypotenuse are involved, use sin. Cos involves adjacent and hypotenuse; tan involves opposite and adjacent.
A student sets up the equation: cos θ = 5 / 13 to find angle θ in a right-angled triangle where the sides adjacent to θ and the hypotenuse are 5 cm and 13 cm respectively. Explain why cos is the correct ratio to use here, and not sin or tan.
The 5 cm side is adjacent to θ and the 13 cm side is the hypotenuse. CAH tells us cos = adjacent / hypotenuse, so cos is the correct ratio. Sin would need the opposite, and tan needs both opposite and adjacent — neither fits.
Which trigonometric ratio connects the opposite side and the hypotenuse in a right-angled triangle?
SOH: sin θ = Opposite / Hypotenuse. The mnemonic SOH CAH TOA helps: S=O/H, C=A/H, T=O/A.
In a right-angled triangle, which side is labelled 'adjacent' relative to the marked angle θ?
The adjacent side is the one next to (touching) the angle θ, but it is NOT the hypotenuse. The hypotenuse is always the longest side (opposite the right angle), and the opposite is directly across from θ.
A right-angled triangle has an angle θ, a side labelled opposite, a side labelled adjacent, and a side labelled hypotenuse. Which trigonometric ratio would you use to find the side marked x, given the angle θ and the hypotenuse?
To find the opposite side when the angle and hypotenuse are known, use sin θ = opposite / hypotenuse. This is the 'SOH' part of SOHCAHTOA. Rearranging gives opposite = hypotenuse × sin θ.
In a right-angled triangle you know the angle θ = 42° and the length of the hypotenuse. You want to find the length of the adjacent side. Which trig ratio should you use?
You have the hypotenuse and want the adjacent — that is CAH: cos θ = adjacent / hypotenuse.
A plane flies on a bearing of 030° for 100 km, then on a bearing of 120° for 80 km. Calculate the straight-line distance from the starting point to the final position. Give your answer to 1 decimal place.
For a multi-leg journey, decompose each leg into North/South and East/West components. Leg 1 (030°, 100 km): N₁ = 100cos30° = 86.6 km, E₁ = 100sin30° = 50.0 km. Leg 2 (120°, 80 km) is SE: S₂ = 80cos60° = 40.0 km, E₂ = 80sin60° = 69.3 km. Net North = 86.6 − 40.0 = 46.6 km (South reduces North); Net East = 50.0 + 69.3 = 119.3 km. Apply Pythagoras: distance = √(46.6² + 119.3²) = 128.1 km. Never add the distances directly — legs in different directions cannot simply be summed.
A boat travels 60 km on a bearing of 040° and then 45 km on a bearing of 130°. Find the bearing of the final position from the starting point. Give your answer to the nearest degree as a three-figure bearing.
This question combines component decomposition with arctan to find the resultant bearing. Leg 1 (040°, 60 km): N₁ = 60cos40° = 45.96 km, E₁ = 60sin40° = 38.57 km. Leg 2 (130°, 45 km, SE quadrant, angle from South = 50°): S₂ = 45cos50° = 28.93 km, E₂ = 45sin50° = 34.47 km. Net North = 45.96 − 28.93 = 17.03 km; Net East = 38.57 + 34.47 = 73.04 km. The bearing angle from North: tan θ = East/North = 73.04/17.03, so θ = arctan(4.288) = 76.9° ≈ 77°. Written as a three-figure bearing: 077°.
Point Q is 30 km north and 40 km east of point P. Calculate the bearing of Q from P. Give your answer to the nearest degree as a three-figure bearing.
To find a bearing from North/East components, draw the right-angled triangle and identify the angle from North. The East distance (40 km) is opposite the bearing angle and the North distance (30 km) is adjacent. Using TOA: tan θ = East/North = 40/30, so θ = arctan(40/30) = 53.1°. Since the final position is NE of the start, this angle IS the bearing. Written as three figures: 053°. A common error is using arctan(30/40), which gives the complementary angle 36.9°.
A rescue helicopter flies on a bearing of 295° for 120 km to reach a stranded hiker. (a) How far west of its base has the helicopter flown? Give your answer to 1 decimal place. (b) How far north of its base has the helicopter flown? Give your answer to 1 decimal place.
Bearing 295° is in the NW quadrant (270°–360°). The acute angle from West = 295° − 270° = 25°. (a) West is adjacent to the 25° angle: West = 120 × cos(25°) = 108.8 km. (b) North is opposite the 25° angle: North = 120 × sin(25°) = 50.7 km. An equivalent approach uses the angle from North = 360° − 295° = 65°: West = 120 × sin(65°) = 108.8 km, North = 120 × cos(65°) = 50.7 km. Both approaches are correct — choose the angle that makes the triangle clearest.
State the three rules that must be followed when writing and measuring bearings.
The three rules of bearings are: (1) always three digits (e.g. 045° not 45°), (2) measured from the North direction, (3) measured clockwise. All three must be applied simultaneously.
A ship sails from port P on a bearing of 120° for 50 km. Calculate how far east the ship has travelled. Give your answer to 1 decimal place.
Bearing 120° is in the SE quadrant. The acute angle from South is 180° − 120° = 60°. In the right-angled triangle formed, the East component is opposite the 60° angle and the total distance (50 km) is the hypotenuse. Using SOH: East = 50 × sin(60°) = 43.3 km. A common mistake is using cos(60°) instead, which gives the South component (25 km), not the East component.
A plane flies on a bearing of 050° for 80 km. Calculate how far north the plane has travelled from its starting point. Give your answer to 1 decimal place.
Bearing 050° is in the NE quadrant. The angle from North equals the bearing: 50°. In the right-angled triangle, the North component is adjacent to the 50° angle, so use CAH: North = 80 × cos(50°) = 51.4 km. The East component uses sin. Students often swap these: sin gives the East (opposite) component, cos gives the North (adjacent) component for NE quadrant bearings.
Explain how to find the back bearing (return bearing) of any given bearing. Your answer should cover both cases.
Opposite directions are 180° apart. If bearing < 180°, add 180° to get the back bearing. If bearing > 180°, subtract 180°. This keeps the back bearing within the valid 000°–360° range.
A hiker walks from campsite A to viewpoint B on a bearing of 230°. The hiker then wants to return directly from B back to A. What bearing should the hiker use for the return journey? Write your answer as a three-figure bearing.
The return journey from B back to A uses the back bearing of 230°. Since 230° > 180°, subtract 180°: 230 − 180 = 50°. Written as a three-figure bearing this is 050°. The leading zero is essential — without it, 50° is not correctly formatted. A frequent exam error is forgetting the leading zero, or adding 180° instead and getting the invalid value 410°.
A yacht sails from harbour H on a bearing of 150° for 60 km. Calculate how far south the yacht has travelled from harbour H. Give your answer to 1 decimal place.
Bearing 150° is in the SE quadrant. The acute angle from South = 180° − 150° = 30°. The South component is adjacent to the 30° angle, so use CAH: South = 60 × cos(30°) = 52.0 km. The East component would use sin(30°). Students frequently swap sin and cos here, getting 60 × sin(30°) = 30.0 km (the East component). Always label which side is adjacent and which is opposite before choosing the ratio.
Point B is 50 km from point A on a bearing of 040°. Calculate how far north of A the point B is. Give your answer to 1 decimal place.
Bearing 040° is in the NE quadrant. The angle from North is 40°. In the right-angled triangle, the North component is adjacent to the 40° angle and 50 km is the hypotenuse. Using CAH: North = 50 × cos(40°) = 38.3 km. Students often use sin(40°) instead, which calculates the East component (32.1 km). Remember: for NE bearings, North = distance × cos(bearing angle), East = distance × sin(bearing angle).
The bearing of lighthouse B from port A is 065°. Find the bearing of port A from lighthouse B. Write your answer as a three-figure bearing.
The back bearing (return bearing) is the bearing in the exact opposite direction. Opposite directions are 180° apart. Since 065° is less than 180°, adding 180° gives 065 + 180 = 245°. This stays within the valid range 000°–360°. A common mistake is to subtract instead of add, giving a negative result, or to use 360° − 065° = 295°, which is a different calculation entirely.
The bearing of village C from town D is 310°. Find the bearing of town D from village C. Write your answer as a three-figure bearing.
When a bearing is greater than 180°, the back bearing is found by subtracting 180°. Here 310° > 180°, so: 310 − 180 = 130°. Adding 180° instead gives 490°, which exceeds 360° and is not a valid bearing. The rule — add when less than 180°, subtract when greater than 180° — ensures the back bearing always falls in the range 000°–360°.
The bearing of B from A is 065°. Calculate the bearing of A from B.
The back bearing of 065° is found by adding 180°, since 065° < 180°: 065 + 180 = 245°. This gives the bearing of A from B. Always check: if the result of adding 180° exceeds 360°, you have the wrong operation (subtract instead). 245° is valid. Common errors include subtracting 180° (gives −115°, invalid) or computing 360° − 065° = 295° (different calculation).
Explain the three rules for measuring and writing a bearing.
Bearings are always measured clockwise from north. They are always written using three figures (e.g., 045° not 45°). They are measured from the north line at the starting point.
A bearing has three conventions that must all be applied together: (1) always measured clockwise — like clock hands, rotating North → East → South → West; (2) always measured from North — draw a North line at the starting point first; (3) always written with three figures — for example 045° not 45°, and 008° not 8°. Forgetting any one of these three rules is a common source of exam errors.
A ship travels in the direction of North-East. Which of the following correctly writes this as a three-figure bearing?
Bearings must always be written using exactly three digits. North-East is 45° clockwise from North, so it is written as 045°. Writing just 45° or NE45 is incorrect in GCSE exams and will lose marks.
Which of the following correctly describes how bearings are measured?
The three golden rules of bearings are: (1) always three digits, (2) measured FROM North, (3) measured CLOCKWISE. All three must be correct.
The bearing of town B from town A is 110°. Which method correctly finds the bearing of A from B (the back bearing)?
Since 110° is less than 180°, the back bearing is found by adding 180°: 110° + 180° = 290°. The rule is: if the original bearing is less than 180°, add 180°; if greater than 180°, subtract 180°.
The compass diagram shows two points A and B. Point B is to the north-east of point A. Which bearing describes the direction from A to B?
Bearings are measured clockwise from north. North-east is 45° clockwise from north, so the bearing is 045°. Bearings are always written with three figures.
Explain the difference between enlarging a shape with a scale factor of 2 and enlarging the same shape with a scale factor of −2, using the same centre of enlargement. Your answer should refer to the size, position and orientation of the image in each case.
Both scale factors give images twice the size (|2| = |−2| = 2). With SF = 2, the image is on the same side of the centre and the same way up. With SF = −2, the image is on the opposite side of the centre AND inverted (as if rotated 180° about the centre).
Triangle A has a base of 4 cm and a height of 6 cm. Triangle B is an enlargement of triangle A. The corresponding base of triangle B is 10 cm. Calculate the area of triangle B.
This is a four-step problem: (1) find SF = 10 ÷ 4 = 2.5; (2) find area of A = ½ × 4 × 6 = 12 cm²; (3) find area SF = 2.5² = 6.25; (4) area of B = 12 × 6.25 = 75 cm². Two common errors: multiplying area by SF instead of SF² (giving 30 cm²), and forgetting the ½ in the triangle area formula (giving 150 cm²). Plan all four steps before calculating and show working clearly — each step earns a method mark.
A solid cylinder is enlarged to produce a similar cylinder. The surface area of the original cylinder is 50 cm². The surface area of the enlarged cylinder is 200 cm². (a) Show that the scale factor of the enlargement is 2. (b) The volume of the enlarged cylinder is 240 cm³. Find the volume of the original cylinder. Show your working.
Part (a): area SF = SF², so SF² = 200/50 = 4, giving SF = √4 = 2. Part (b): volume SF = SF³ = 2³ = 8. The enlarged volume = 8 × original volume, so original volume = 240 ÷ 8 = 30 cm³.
Point A has coordinates (5, 7). Enlarge point A by scale factor 3 with centre of enlargement C = (2, 1). Write the coordinates of the image A'.
For a non-origin centre C, use the formula: Image = C + k(A − C). Here C = (2, 1), A = (5, 7), k = 3. Step 1: find the vector from C to A: A − C = (3, 6). Step 2: scale by k: 3 × (3, 6) = (9, 18). Step 3: add back the centre: (2, 1) + (9, 18) = (11, 19). The critical mistake is treating the centre as the origin and computing 3 × (5, 7) = (15, 21) — this ignores the actual centre position.
A rectangle has area 20 cm². It is enlarged by scale factor 5. Calculate the area of the enlarged rectangle.
When a shape is enlarged, area scales by the square of the length scale factor: area SF = k². Here k = 5, so area SF = 5² = 25. New area = 20 × 25 = 500 cm². The most common error is multiplying the area by k instead of k² (giving 20 × 5 = 100). The rule of thumb: lengths scale by k, areas scale by k², volumes scale by k³ — one power higher for each extra dimension.
Triangle P has vertices at (2, 1), (6, 1) and (2, 5). Triangle Q has vertices at (4, 2), (12, 2) and (4, 10). Describe fully the single transformation that maps triangle P onto triangle Q.
The transformation is an enlargement because the shape changes size while preserving all angles. Scale factor = 8 ÷ 4 = 2. The centre is (0,0) because all lines through corresponding vertices (e.g. (2,1)→(4,2)) pass through the origin when extended.
A solid has volume 40 cm³. It is enlarged by scale factor 2. Calculate the volume of the enlarged solid.
Volume is a three-dimensional quantity, so it scales by k³ when the length scale factor is k. Here k = 2, so volume SF = 2³ = 8. New volume = 40 × 8 = 320 cm³. Students often confuse the dimensions: area uses k², volume uses k³. If SF = 2, then every length doubles, every area quadruples (×4), and every volume multiplies by 8 — matching the pattern k¹, k², k³.
Point P has coordinates (4, 3). Enlarge point P by scale factor −2 with centre of enlargement at the origin (0, 0). Write the coordinates of the image P'.
A negative scale factor enlarges the image on the opposite side of the centre compared to the original, and also inverts it. For SF = −2 with centre at the origin: P' = (−2 × 4, −2 × 3) = (−8, −6). P is in the first quadrant; P' is in the third quadrant — opposite through the origin. The magnitude |−2| = 2 determines the size change. Students frequently forget the negative sign and give (8, 6) — always check that the image lands on the opposite side of the centre.
Triangle ABC has vertices A(1, 2), B(3, 2), C(1, 4). Triangle A'B'C' has vertices A'(−3, −6), B'(−9, −6), C'(−3, −12). The triangles are related by an enlargement. Find the centre of enlargement. Write the coordinates of the centre.
To find the centre of enlargement, draw lines through each pair of corresponding vertices (A to A', B to B') and find where they intersect. Here, A(1,2) and A'(−3,−6) lie on y = 2x; B(3,2) and B'(−9,−6) lie on y = (2/3)x. Both pass through (0, 0), so the centre is the origin. The points being in opposite quadrants confirms the scale factor is negative (SF = −3). A common mistake is taking the midpoint of A and A' — this gives the wrong answer.
Point P has coordinates (3, 5). Enlarge point P by scale factor 4 with centre of enlargement at the origin (0, 0). Write the coordinates of the image P'.
When the centre of enlargement is the origin, the image coordinates are simply scale factor times the original coordinates: P' = (k × x, k × y). Here k = 4 and P = (3, 5), so P' = (12, 20). The most common mistakes are adding the scale factor instead of multiplying (giving (7, 9)), or only scaling one coordinate. Always multiply both x and y by the scale factor.
Point Q has coordinates (8, 6). Enlarge point Q by scale factor 1/2 with centre of enlargement at the origin (0, 0). Write the coordinates of the image Q'.
A fractional scale factor produces a smaller image — this is still called an enlargement in GCSE maths. For SF = 1/2 with centre at the origin: multiply each coordinate by 1/2. Q = (8, 6) → Q' = (4, 3). Students sometimes mistakenly multiply by 2 (giving (16, 12)) or subtract instead of multiplying. Remember: enlargement always means multiplying the coordinates by the scale factor, regardless of whether the factor is greater or less than 1.
Triangle ABC is enlarged to give triangle A'B'C'. Side AB = 5 cm. The corresponding side A'B' = 15 cm. Find the scale factor of the enlargement.
The scale factor is found by dividing the image length by the corresponding original length: SF = image ÷ original = A'B' ÷ AB = 15 ÷ 5 = 3. A common error is dividing in the wrong order (5 ÷ 15 = 1/3), which gives the scale factor for the reverse transformation. Always identify which triangle is the image (marked with ') and which is the original before dividing. A quick check: original × SF should equal image (5 × 3 = 15).
Which of the following statements correctly describes an enlargement?
An enlargement is defined by two things: a scale factor (which can make the shape bigger, smaller, or inverted) and a centre of enlargement (the fixed point from which all rays are drawn). It is the only transformation that changes the size of a shape, but a scale factor less than 1 makes the shape smaller — so 'always makes bigger' is incorrect.
A shape is transformed with scale factor 1/3. Which statement is correct?
A scale factor of 1/3 means each length in the image is one-third of the corresponding length in the original. The shape gets smaller, but this transformation is still called an enlargement. In GCSE maths, any transformation that changes size using a scale factor and centre is an enlargement, even if the image is smaller.
A shape with area 12 cm² is enlarged with a scale factor of 3. What is the area of the enlarged image?
When a shape is enlarged with scale factor k, the area is multiplied by k². Here k = 3, so the area scale factor is 3² = 9. New area = 12 × 9 = 108 cm².
OAQB is a parallelogram where OA = 4a and OB = 2b. M is the midpoint of AB. P is the point on QO such that QP:PO = 1:3. Show that P, M, Q are collinear.
OQ = 4a+2b (parallelogram diagonal). OP = (3/4)OQ = 3a+3/2 b (P is 1/4 from Q to O). OM = 2a+b (midpoint of AB). PM = -a-½b. PQ = a+½b = -PM. Since PQ = -PM, PM and PQ are parallel. They share point P. Therefore P, M, Q are collinear.
OACB is a parallelogram where OA = a and OB = b. In this parallelogram, C is the point such that AC = b and BC = a. M is the midpoint of AC. N is the midpoint of BC. Show that MN is parallel to AB.
OM = a + ½b (M is midpoint of AC). ON = ½a + b (N is midpoint of BC). MN = ON - OM = -½a + ½b = ½(-a + b) = ½AB. Since MN = ½AB, MN is parallel to AB.
O is the origin. OA = a and OB = b. M is the midpoint of AB. N is the point such that ON = 2OM. Show that O, M, N are collinear.
OM = ½(a+b). ON = 2OM = a+b. MN = ON - OM = ½(a+b) = OM. Since MN = OM, MN is parallel to OM. M is a point on both vectors. Therefore O, M, N are collinear.
O is the origin. OA = a and OB = b. M is the midpoint of AB. Find the vector OM in terms of a and b.
AB = -a + b. Since M is the midpoint, AM = ½(-a + b). Then OM = OA + AM = a + ½(-a + b) = a - ½a + ½b = ½a + ½b.
O is the origin. OA = a and OB = b. Point P divides AB in the ratio AP:PB = 2:1. Find the position vector OP in terms of a and b.
In ratio 2:1, P is 2/(2+1) = 2/3 of the way from A to B. AP = ⅔(-a + b) = -⅔a + ⅔b. Then OP = OA + AP = a - ⅔a + ⅔b = ⅓a + ⅔b.
In triangle OAB, OA = a and OB = b. P is the midpoint of OA. Q is the midpoint of OB. Show that PQ is parallel to AB.
P and Q are midpoints, so OP = ½a and OQ = ½b. PQ = PO + OQ = -½a + ½b = ½(-a + b) = ½AB. Since PQ is a scalar multiple (½) of AB, PQ is parallel to AB.
O is the origin. OA = a and OB = b. P divides OB in the ratio OP:PB = 1:3. Q divides AB in the ratio AQ:QB = 3:1. Find the vector PQ in terms of a and b.
OP = ¼b (P is 1/4 of the way along OB). OQ = a + ¾(-a+b) = ¼a + ¾b (Q is 3/4 of the way along AB). PQ = OQ - OP = (¼a + ¾b) - ¼b = ¼a + ½b.
Describe the full method for proving that three points A, B, C are collinear using vectors. You must state all conditions required and explain how to check them.
To prove A, B, C are collinear: (1) Find vectors AB and BC in terms of a and b. (2) Show AB = k × BC for some scalar k — this proves the lines are parallel in direction. (3) State that B is a common point shared by both vectors. Both (2) and (3) together prove the three points lie on a single straight line.
O is the origin. OA = a and OB = 3b. Find the vector AB in terms of a and b.
AB = AO + OB = -OA + OB = -a + 3b. Equivalently, AB = OB - OA = 3b - a = -a + 3b.
OABC is a parallelogram where OA = a and OC = c. B is the vertex opposite to O. Find the vector OB in terms of a and c.
In parallelogram OABC, opposite sides AB and OC are equal and parallel. So AB = OC = c. Therefore OB = OA + AB = a + c.
A student says: 'I have shown that vector AB is parallel to vector CD, so A, B, C, D all lie on the same straight line.' Explain why the student's reasoning is incorrect.
Parallel vectors can lie on separate parallel lines. To prove three or more points are collinear, two conditions are needed: (1) the vectors between them must be parallel (scalar multiples), AND (2) they must share a common point.
Vector AB goes from point A to point B. Which of the following describes vector BA?
BA = -AB. The vector from B back to A covers the same distance as AB but travels in the opposite direction. Reversing the start and end points negates the vector.
Vector a is shown in a diagram. Which of the following best describes vector 3a?
Multiplying a vector by a positive scalar stretches it by that factor in the same direction. 3a has the same direction as a but is three times the length.
O is the origin. OA = a and OB = b. Which expression gives the vector AB?
AB = AO + OB = -OA + OB = -a + b. You travel from A back to O (using AO = -OA = -a), then from O to B (using OB = b). Equivalently: AB = OB - OA = b - a = -a + b.
A perpendicular from the centre O of a circle meets a chord AB at its midpoint M. Using congruent triangles, prove that OM bisects chord AB (i.e. AM = MB). [Hint: consider triangles OMA and OMB.]
In triangles OMA and OMB: OA = OB (both are radii of the same circle) OM = OM (common side, shared by both triangles) Angle OMA = Angle OMB = 90° (OM is perpendicular to AB) OA and OB are the hypotenuses (opposite the right angles). Therefore triangles OMA and OMB are congruent by RHS. Therefore AM = MB (corresponding sides of congruent triangles). Hence OM bisects AB.
This proof uses RHS. The two hypotenuses (radii OA and OB) are equal, the common side OM is shared, and the right angles at M come from the perpendicular. Once congruence is established, the corresponding sides AM and MB must be equal.
ABCD is a parallelogram. The diagonal AC divides ABCD into triangles ABC and ACD. Prove that triangles ABC and ACD are congruent.
AB = CD (opposite sides of a parallelogram are equal) BC = AD (opposite sides of a parallelogram are equal) AC = CA (common side — shared by both triangles) Therefore triangles ABC and ACD are congruent by SSS (three pairs of equal sides).
A formal congruence proof needs three pieces of evidence with geometric reasons, then a conclusion stating the condition (SSS) and naming both triangles in corresponding vertex order.
M is the midpoint of both diagonals AC and BD of a quadrilateral. Prove that triangles ABM and CDM are congruent.
AM = CM (M is the midpoint of AC, so M bisects AC) BM = DM (M is the midpoint of BD, so M bisects BD) Angle AMB = Angle CMD (vertically opposite angles are equal) Therefore triangles ABM and CDM are congruent by SAS (two sides and the included angle).
This proof uses SAS. The two sides (AM=CM and BM=DM) are given by the midpoint condition. The included angle (angle AMB = angle CMD) comes from vertically opposite angles. The angle is between the two known sides, confirming the SAS condition.
In the diagram, AB is parallel to CD. The lines AD and BC intersect at point M, with AM = DM. Prove that triangles ABM and DCM are congruent.
Angle MAB = Angle MDC (alternate angles, since AB is parallel to CD) AM = DM (given) Angle AMB = Angle DMC (vertically opposite angles are equal) The side AM/DM is between the two equal angles. Therefore triangles ABM and DCM are congruent by ASA.
This is an ASA proof. Two pairs of equal angles are found (alternate angles from parallel lines, and vertically opposite angles at M), with the known equal side (AM=DM) between them.
When writing a congruence statement, such as triangle ABC ≅ triangle PQR, explain what it tells you about the sides and angles of the two triangles.
The statement triangle ABC ≅ triangle PQR tells you which parts of the triangles correspond. The ORDER of the vertices matters: A corresponds to P, B to Q, and C to R. This means three pairs of sides are equal (AB=PQ, BC=QR, AC=PR) and three pairs of angles are equal (angle A = angle P, angle B = angle Q, angle C = angle R).
Congruence notation carries information about correspondence. Writing the vertices in matching order tells you exactly which sides and angles are equal, which is essential for applying results from the congruence.
Explain why the angle in SAS (Side-Angle-Side) must be the INCLUDED angle — the angle between the two known sides.
The included angle fixes the two sides into a unique position relative to each other — once you know two sides and the angle between them, there is exactly one triangle possible. If the angle is not between the two sides (SSA), you could swing the third side into two different positions, creating two different triangles. This is called the ambiguous case, and it means SSA does not guarantee congruence.
The included angle acts as a 'hinge' between the two sides — it uniquely determines how the sides are oriented. Without it (SSA), you can have two different triangles satisfying the same conditions, so congruence cannot be established.
Explain why knowing that all three sides of one triangle equal all three sides of another triangle (SSS) is sufficient to prove congruence.
If three side lengths are fixed, there is only one triangle you can construct with those lengths. You cannot rearrange the sides to make a different-shaped triangle — the triangle is rigid. This means the angles are also forced to take specific values. Since both triangles have the same three sides, they must have the same shape and size, so they are congruent.
A triangle with fixed side lengths is rigid — unlike a quadrilateral, whose angles can change while keeping sides fixed. This rigidity means SSS completely determines the triangle, guaranteeing congruence.
Explain the difference between two shapes that are CONGRUENT and two shapes that are SIMILAR.
Congruent shapes are identical in both shape and size. All corresponding sides are equal and all corresponding angles are equal — one is an exact copy of the other. Similar shapes have the same angles and sides in proportion, but the sizes can differ. A scale factor relates the sizes of similar shapes; for congruent shapes, the scale factor is exactly 1.
The key distinction: congruent = same shape AND size. Similar = same shape, any size. Congruence is the special case of similarity where the scale factor equals 1.
In right-angled triangles ABC and DEF: Angle ABC = Angle DEF = 90° Hypotenuse AC = Hypotenuse DF = 13 cm BC = EF = 5 cm Which congruence condition applies? Write the three-letter code.
Both triangles have a right angle, equal hypotenuses, and one equal side. This matches the RHS (Right angle, Hypotenuse, Side) congruence condition, which applies exclusively to right-angled triangles.
A student claims: 'In triangles ABC and DEF, AB = DE, BC = EF, and angle BAC = angle EDF. Therefore the triangles are congruent by SSA.' Is the student correct? Write YES or NO.
The student is incorrect. SSA is NOT a valid congruence condition. The angle BAC is at vertex A — it is not the included angle between sides AB and BC. The included angle would be angle ABC (at B). Without the included angle, SSA can produce two different triangles (the ambiguous case), so congruence is not guaranteed.
Triangles LMN and PQR are congruent (triangle LMN ≅ triangle PQR). LM = 9 cm, angle LMN = 72°, angle MNL = 41°. Find the length PQ.
In the congruence statement triangle LMN ≅ triangle PQR, the vertex order tells us: L↔P, M↔Q, N↔R. Therefore side LM corresponds to side PQ. Since LM = 9 cm, PQ = 9 cm.
Which of the following is NOT a valid congruence condition for triangles?
AAA (three angles equal) proves triangles are SIMILAR, not congruent. Similar triangles have the same shape but can be different sizes. To prove congruence you need at least one pair of equal sides. The four valid conditions are SSS, SAS, ASA (or AAS), and RHS.
Two shapes are congruent if they are:
Congruent shapes are IDENTICAL in both shape and size. All corresponding sides are equal and all corresponding angles are equal. The symbol for congruence is ≅. Note that reflections and rotations of a shape are still congruent to the original.
How many valid congruence conditions are there for triangles?
There are four valid congruence conditions for triangles: SSS, SAS, ASA (including AAS), and RHS. AAA proves only similarity, and SSA/ASS is the ambiguous case that does not guarantee congruence.
In triangles PQR and XYZ: PQ = XY = 5 cm QR = YZ = 7 cm Angle PQR = Angle XYZ = 65° Which congruence condition proves triangles PQR and XYZ are congruent?
We know two pairs of equal sides (PQ=XY and QR=YZ) and the angle between them (angle PQR = angle XYZ). The equal angle is at vertex Q and Y, which is BETWEEN sides PQ and QR (and XY and YZ respectively). Two sides and the included angle = SAS.
A box contains 3 white balls and 5 black balls. Two balls are drawn at random without replacement. (a) Find the probability that both balls are white. (b) Given that at least one ball is white, find the probability that both balls are white. Give each answer as a fraction in its simplest form.
P(both white) = (3/8)(2/7) = 3/28. P(at least one white) = 1 - (5/8)(4/7) = 9/14. Conditional probability = (3/28)/(9/14) = (3/28)(14/9) = 1/6.
90 students study either French or Spanish (but not both). 45 of the students are female. 30 male students study French. 20 female students study Spanish. (a) Complete the two-way table. (b) Find P(studies French | is female). Give your answer as a fraction in its simplest form.
Male total = 45. Female French = 45 - 20 = 25. P(French | female) = 25/45 = 5/9.
P(A) = 0.5, P(B) = 0.6, and P(A|B) = 0.35. (a) Find P(A ∩ B). (b) Find P(A ∪ B).
P(A ∩ B) = P(A|B) × P(B) = 0.35 × 0.6 = 0.21. Then P(A ∪ B) = P(A) + P(B) - P(A ∩ B) = 0.5 + 0.6 - 0.21 = 0.89.
In a large school, 60% of students study Biology and 40% study Physics. Of those who study Biology, 30% also study Physics. (a) Show that P(Physics ∩ Biology) = 0.18. (b) Determine, with full justification using conditional probability, whether studying Biology and studying Physics are independent events in this school. (c) Explain, in context, what it would mean for these two events to be independent.
P(Physics ∩ Biology) = 0.3 × 0.6 = 0.18. P(Physics|Biology) = 0.18/0.6 = 0.3 ≠ P(Physics) = 0.4, so the events are not independent. Independence would mean knowing Biology gives no information about Physics.
A group of 100 people were asked whether they prefer tea or coffee, and whether they prefer reading or watching TV. | | Prefers reading | Prefers TV | Total | |--|--|--|--| | Prefers tea | 22 | 38 | 60 | | Prefers coffee | 28 | 12 | 40 | | Total | 50 | 50 | 100 | One person is chosen at random. Find P(prefers coffee | prefers reading). Give your answer as a fraction in its simplest form.
Given the person prefers reading, restrict to the 50 readers. Of these, 28 prefer coffee. P(coffee | reading) = 28/50 = 14/25.
A bag contains 5 red counters and 4 blue counters. Two counters are taken at random without replacement. Given that the first counter is red, find the probability that the second counter is also red.
Given the first counter is red, remove one red: 4 red and 8 total remain. P(2nd red | 1st red) = 4/8 = 1/2.
P(A) = 0.5, P(B) = 0.4 and P(B|A) = 0.6. Find P(A|B).
P(A ∩ B) = P(B|A) × P(A) = 0.6 × 0.5 = 0.3. Then P(A|B) = P(A ∩ B) / P(B) = 0.3 / 0.4 = 0.75.
P(A) = 0.4, P(B) = 0.3 and P(A ∩ B) = 0.12. Using conditional probability, determine whether A and B are independent events. You must show all your working and give a reason for your conclusion.
P(A|B) = 0.12/0.3 = 0.4. Since P(A|B) = P(A) = 0.4, events A and B are independent — knowing B occurred does not change the probability of A.
The two-way table shows the hair colour and eye colour of 60 students. | | Blue eyes | Brown eyes | Total | |--|--|--|--| | Blonde hair | 18 | 6 | 24 | | Brown hair | 8 | 28 | 36 | | Total | 26 | 34 | 60 | One student is selected at random. Find P(blonde hair | blue eyes). Give your answer as a fraction in its simplest form.
Given blue eyes, restrict to the blue eyes column: 26 students. Of these, 18 have blonde hair. P(blonde | blue eyes) = 18/26 = 9/13.
Two events A and B are such that P(A ∩ B) = 3/20 and P(B) = 3/5. Find P(A|B).
P(A|B) = P(A ∩ B) / P(B) = (3/20) ÷ (3/5) = (3/20) × (5/3) = 15/60 = 1/4.
P(A|B) = 2/3 and P(B) = 0.45. Find P(A ∩ B).
Rearranging the formula: P(A ∩ B) = P(A|B) × P(B) = (2/3) × 0.45 = 0.3.
What does the notation P(A|B) mean?
P(A|B) is read as 'the probability of A given B'. It means we already know event B has happened, and we want to know how likely A is within that restricted situation.
The two-way table below shows information about 80 students and whether they play a sport and whether they play a musical instrument. | | Plays sport | Does not play sport | Total | |--|--|--|--| | Plays instrument | 15 | 25 | 40 | | Does not play instrument | 20 | 20 | 40 | | Total | 35 | 45 | 80 | One student is chosen at random. Find P(plays instrument | plays sport).
P(plays instrument | plays sport) restricts to students who play sport: there are 35 of them. Of these 35, exactly 15 also play an instrument. So the answer is 15/35.
P(A ∩ B) = 0.12 and P(B) = 0.4. What is P(A|B)?
Using the formula P(A|B) = P(A ∩ B) / P(B) = 0.12 / 0.4 = 0.3.
A spinner has 4 equal sections: red, red, blue, green. A fair six-sided dice is rolled at the same time. Both are used together in 360 trials. (a) Show that P(spinner lands red AND dice shows an even number) = 1/4. (b) Calculate the expected number of times both events occur together in 360 trials. (c) Calculate the expected number of times the spinner lands on blue OR the dice shows a one. [Events are independent.]
P(red)=1/2, P(even)=1/2, P(both)=1/4. Part(b): 1/4×360=90. Part(c): P(blue or one)=1/4+1/6-1/24=9/24=3/8; expected=3/8×360=135.
A biased dice has P(six) = 0.2. The dice is rolled 150 times. (a) Calculate the expected number of sixes. (b) The experiment is repeated. This time the dice is rolled 450 times. How many times more sixes would you now expect compared to part (a)?
Part (a): 0.2 × 150 = 30. Part (b): 0.2 × 450 = 90. 90 ÷ 30 = 3, so three times more sixes are expected.
Amara has a spinner with 4 equal sections labelled A, B, C and D. She spins it 200 times and records these results: A: 42 B: 67 C: 48 D: 43 (a) Calculate the expected frequency for each letter if the spinner is fair. (b) Compare Amara's actual results with the expected frequencies. Which letter suggests the spinner may be biased, and why?
Expected = 1/4 × 200 = 50 for each. B appears 67 times — 17 above expected. All others are within 8 of expected. This suggests the spinner may be biased towards B.
A factory knows that 3% of its products are defective. In a batch of 500 items, calculate the expected number of defective items.
P(defective) = 3% = 0.03. Expected defects = 0.03 × 500 = 15.
A basketball player made 15 out of 25 free throws in practice. Based on this, calculate the expected number of free throws she will make if she takes 40 free throws in a match.
Experimental P(make) = 15/25 = 0.6. Expected makes in match = 0.6 × 40 = 24.
A spinner is spun 200 times. The expected frequency of landing on blue is 30. Work out the probability of landing on blue.
Expected frequency = P × n, so P = 30 ÷ 200 = 30/200 = 3/20 = 0.15.
A fair coin is flipped 50 times. The expected number of heads is 25. In the actual experiment, only 18 heads are recorded. Explain why the actual number of heads may differ from the expected number of heads.
Expected frequency predicts what will happen on average. In any individual experiment, random variation means the actual count may differ. With more trials, actual results converge towards expected results.
A fair dice is rolled repeatedly. After 10 rolls, the relative frequency of rolling a six is 0.4. Explain what would happen to the relative frequency of rolling a six as the number of rolls increases towards thousands. Your answer should refer to expected frequency.
With more trials, the relative frequency approaches the theoretical probability (1/6). Actual frequency converges to expected frequency. This is the law of large numbers — random variation has less effect as the sample size grows.
A fair coin is flipped 200 times. Calculate the expected number of heads.
Expected frequency = P(heads) × number of flips = 0.5 × 200 = 100.
A fair six-sided dice is rolled 300 times. Calculate the expected number of times a six is rolled.
P(six) = 1/6. Expected frequency = 1/6 × 300 = 50.
A spinner has 8 sections. Three sections are red, two are blue, and three are green. The spinner is spun 240 times. Calculate the expected number of times the spinner lands on red.
P(red) = 3/8. Expected frequency = 3/8 × 240 = 90.
Which formula correctly gives the expected frequency of an event?
Expected Frequency = Probability × Number of trials. This formula tells us how many times we would expect an event to occur if we repeated the experiment many times.
A spinner has 5 equal sections numbered 1 to 5. The spinner is spun 120 times. How many times would you expect to land on the number 3?
P(landing on 3) = 1/5. Expected frequency = 1/5 × 120 = 24.
Which of the following statements about expected frequency is correct?
As the number of trials increases, the relative frequency (actual proportion) gets closer to the theoretical probability — so the actual frequency gets closer to the expected frequency. This is the law of large numbers.
A bag contains 4 green marbles and 3 yellow marbles. Two marbles are drawn without replacement. Calculate the probability that both marbles are the same colour. Give your answer as a fraction in its simplest form.
P(same colour) = P(GG) + P(YY) = (4/7 × 3/6) + (3/7 × 2/6) = 12/42 + 6/42 = 18/42 = 3/7.
A bag contains 3 red counters and 2 blue counters. A counter is drawn, replaced, and a second counter is drawn. Calculate the probability of getting exactly one red counter. Give your answer as a fraction.
Exactly one red: P(RB) + P(BR) = (3/5 × 2/5) + (2/5 × 3/5) = 6/25 + 6/25 = 12/25.
A bag contains 3 red counters and 2 blue counters. A counter is drawn and NOT replaced. A second counter is then drawn. Calculate the probability of getting exactly one red counter. Give your answer as a fraction in its simplest form.
P(exactly one red) = P(RB) + P(BR) = (3/5 × 2/4) + (2/5 × 3/4) = 6/20 + 6/20 = 12/20 = 3/5.
A bag contains 3 red counters and 2 blue counters. Two counters are drawn without replacement. Calculate the probability of getting at least one red counter. Give your answer as a fraction in its simplest form.
P(at least one red) = 1 - P(BB) = 1 - (2/5 × 1/4) = 1 - 1/10 = 9/10.
A biased coin has P(Heads) = 0.6. The coin is flipped twice. Calculate the probability of getting exactly one head. Give your answer as a decimal.
P(T) = 1 - 0.6 = 0.4. Exactly one head: P(HT) + P(TH) = 0.6×0.4 + 0.4×0.6 = 0.24 + 0.24 = 0.48.
A bag contains 3 red counters and 2 blue counters. Two counters are drawn. Alex says: 'The probability of getting two red counters is the same whether you replace the first counter or not.' Show that Alex is wrong by calculating P(both red) for each case.
With replacement: 3/5 × 3/5 = 9/25 = 0.36. Without replacement: 3/5 × 2/4 = 6/20 = 3/10 = 0.3. These are different, so Alex is wrong.
A fair coin is flipped twice. The possible outcomes are HH, HT, TH and TT. Calculate the probability of getting at least one head. Give your answer as a fraction.
The outcomes with at least one head are HH, HT, TH (three paths each with probability 1/4). Total = 3/4. Alternatively, P(at least one H) = 1 - P(TT) = 1 - 1/4 = 3/4.
A bag contains 3 red counters and 2 blue counters. A counter is drawn at random, its colour is recorded, and it is returned to the bag. A second counter is then drawn. Calculate the probability that both counters are red. Give your answer as a fraction.
With replacement, P(R) = 3/5 for both draws. P(both red) = 3/5 × 3/5 = 9/25.
A bag contains 3 red counters and 2 blue counters. A counter is drawn and NOT replaced. A second counter is then drawn. Calculate the probability that both counters are red. Give your answer as a fraction in its simplest form.
Without replacement, after a red is drawn the bag has 2 red, 2 blue (4 total). P(both red) = 3/5 × 2/4 = 6/20 = 3/10.
Explain the two key rules used when calculating probabilities from a tree diagram. Your answer should refer to both the multiplication rule and the addition rule.
The multiplication rule: multiply probabilities along a single path for a specific sequence (AND). The addition rule: add the probabilities of all paths leading to the same event (OR).
Explain why the probabilities on the second set of branches in a tree diagram change when items are drawn without replacement. Use an example in your explanation.
Without replacement, the bag is altered: one fewer item overall (denominator reduces by 1) and if the drawn colour was red, one fewer red (numerator also reduces by 1). This makes the events dependent — the second probability depends on what happened in the first draw.
A fair coin is flipped twice. Calculate the probability of getting a head followed by a tail (HT). Give your answer as a fraction.
Coins are independent. P(HT) = P(H) × P(T) = 1/2 × 1/2 = 1/4.
A fair coin is flipped twice. In a tree diagram, what must the probabilities on the branches from the same point always add up to?
At every branching point in a tree diagram, the probabilities on the branches leaving that point must sum to 1 because together they represent ALL possible outcomes at that stage — a certainty.
A bag contains 3 red counters and 2 blue counters. A counter is drawn, replaced, and then a second counter is drawn. Which calculation gives the probability of drawing a red counter followed by a blue counter?
To find the probability of a specific sequence (Red AND Blue), multiply the probabilities along that path: P(R) × P(B) = 3/5 × 2/5 = 6/25. Because the counter is replaced, both probabilities stay the same.
A bag contains 4 green marbles and 3 yellow marbles. One marble is drawn and NOT replaced. A second marble is then drawn. If the first marble drawn is green, what is the probability that the second marble is also green?
After drawing one green marble (without replacement), the bag now contains 3 green and 3 yellow marbles — 6 in total. So P(second is green | first was green) = 3/6 = 1/2.
80 people are surveyed about two hobbies: yoga (Y) and gardening (G). 45 people do yoga. P(Y ∪ G) = 3/4 P(Y ∩ G) = 1/8 Find the number of people who do gardening.
This challenge question requires two skills working together. First, convert the given probabilities into frequencies by multiplying by 80: n(Y ∪ G) = 3/4 × 80 = 60 and n(Y ∩ G) = 1/8 × 80 = 10. Working with whole numbers avoids fraction errors throughout. Next, write the addition rule in frequency form: n(Y ∪ G) = n(Y) + n(G) − n(Y ∩ G), then substitute: 60 = 45 + n(G) − 10. Rearranging gives n(G) = 60 − 45 + 10 = 25. A critical point is that the intersection is ADDED back when rearranging (it was subtracted in the original formula). Verify the answer by filling all four Venn regions: only Y = 35, both = 10, only G = 15, neither = 20; total = 35 + 10 + 15 + 20 = 80.
45 people are surveyed about their media habits. 28 use social media (S), 19 watch streaming services (W), and 12 do both. Find P(S' ∩ W), the probability that a randomly chosen person watches streaming but does NOT use social media. Give your answer as a fraction in its simplest form.
The key is correctly translating the set notation before calculating. S' means 'NOT in S' (complement of social media), and ∩ W means 'AND in W'. Together, S' ∩ W describes people who watch streaming but do NOT use social media — this is the 'only W' region of the Venn diagram. To find it, subtract the overlap from the streaming total: 19 − 12 = 7 people. The probability is 7/45. Since 7 is prime and does not divide 45, the fraction is already in simplest form. A very common error is using 12/45 (the both region) or 19/45 (all streamers) rather than the 'only W' count of 7.
60 students are surveyed. 35 study biology (B) and 25 study chemistry (C). 15 students study both. a) Complete the Venn diagram. b) A student who studies chemistry is selected at random. Find P(B | C), the probability that this student also studies biology.
This is a two-part question that requires completing a Venn diagram before answering the probability. Start by placing the intersection (15) in the overlap. Then subtract it from each group total: only B = 35 − 15 = 20 and only C = 25 − 15 = 10. The neither region = 60 − 20 − 15 − 10 = 15. Always verify: 20 + 15 + 10 + 15 = 60. For P(B|C), you restrict to chemistry students only, so n(C) = 25 becomes the new denominator. Of those 25, the number who also study biology is 15 (the intersection). P(B|C) = 15/25 = 3/5. Common errors: using 60 as the denominator (whole class, not just chemistry), or using n(B) = 35 as the denominator instead of n(C) = 25.
In a survey of 30 students, 18 like history (H) and 15 like geography (G). 7 students like both subjects. Complete the Venn diagram and find the number of students who like neither subject.
First place the intersection (7) in the overlap. Then only H = 18 − 7 = 11 and only G = 15 − 7 = 8. Total placed inside circles = 11 + 7 + 8 = 26. Neither = 30 − 26 = 4. Always verify by summing all four regions: 11 + 7 + 8 + 4 = 30. Forgetting the 'neither' region and writing 0 or getting a wrong total is one of the most common Venn diagram errors.
In a group of 40 people, 22 drink tea (T), 18 drink coffee (C), and 6 drink both. Using the addition rule, find P(T ∪ C). Give your answer as a fraction in its simplest form.
Apply the addition rule: P(A ∪ B) = P(A) + P(B) − P(A ∩ B). Using the Venn diagram regions: P(A ∪ B) includes all of circles A and B. P(T ∪ C) = 22/40 + 18/40 − 6/40 = 34/40 = 17/20. Without subtracting the intersection, students double-count the overlap and get a value that may exceed 1.
A group of 60 students takes part in a survey. 35 study art (A), 25 study drama (D), and P(A ∪ D) = 47/60. Find the number of students who study both art and drama.
Rearrange the addition rule to find the intersection: n(A ∩ D) = n(A) + n(D) − n(A ∪ D). Convert P(A ∪ D) = 47/60 to n(A ∪ D) = 47 students. Then n(A ∩ D) = 35 + 25 − 47 = 13. Verify by substituting back: 35 + 25 − 13 = 47. A common error is adding all three values instead of subtracting the union from the sum of the individual totals.
A Venn diagram shows information about 50 people. Only A = 17, A ∩ B = 8, Only B = 14, Neither = 11 A person is chosen at random. Find P(A | B), the probability that the person is in A given that they are in B. Give your answer as a fraction in its simplest form.
P(A|B) restricts the sample space to set B only. n(B) = (only B) + (A ∩ B) = 14 + 8 = 22. P(A|B) = n(A ∩ B) / n(B) = 8/22 = 4/11. Using the grand total (50) instead of n(B) = 22 as the denominator is the most common error — conditional probability always uses the restricted group total as the denominator.
A class of 32 students is surveyed. 20 students play sport (S) and 16 attend art club (A). 9 students do both. A student is selected at random from those who play sport. Find P(A | S), the probability that the selected student also attends art club.
Conditional probability means restricting the sample space to a specific group. Here the phrase 'selected from those who play sport' tells you to focus only on the 20 sport players, ignoring the rest of the class. Of those 20 students, 9 also attend art club. The formula is P(A|S) = n(A ∩ S) / n(S) = 9/20 = 0.45. The most common mistake is using 32 (the whole class) as the denominator instead of 20 (the sport group). The vertical bar in P(A|S) means 'given S', and the group after the bar always becomes the new denominator.
A student claims: 'To find P(A ∪ B), you simply add P(A) and P(B).' Explain why this is not always correct, and state the correct formula with a reason.
P(A ∪ B) = P(A) + P(B) - P(A ∩ B). Subtracting the intersection prevents double-counting of outcomes in both A and B, because when you add P(A) and P(B), outcomes in A ∩ B are counted twice.
The student's claim is only correct when events A and B are mutually exclusive (they cannot both happen, so P(A ∩ B) = 0). When events can overlap, simply adding P(A) and P(B) counts outcomes in the intersection twice — once when you count A's outcomes, and once when you count B's outcomes. The correct formula is P(A ∪ B) = P(A) + P(B) − P(A ∩ B), where subtracting P(A ∩ B) removes the duplicate. To earn full marks on this type of question, you need three things: identify the error (double-counting), state the correct formula, and give the reason why the subtraction is necessary.
In a survey of 30 students, 18 like history (H) and 15 like geography (G). 7 students like both subjects. How many students like only geography (geography but NOT history)?
The 7 students in both subjects are already included in the geography total of 15. To find students in geography only, subtract: 15 − 7 = 8. Always place the intersection first when filling a Venn diagram; then subtract it from each group's total to find the exclusive regions. A common error is computing 18 − 7 = 11, which gives history-only rather than geography-only.
In a class of 50 students, 30 study French (F). A student is chosen at random. Find P(F'), the probability that the student does NOT study French. Give your answer as a fraction in its simplest form.
P(F) = 30/50 = 3/5. P(F') = 1 − P(F) = 1 − 3/5 = 2/5 = 0.4. The prime symbol (') means NOT — the complement rule is P(A') = 1 − P(A). Giving 3/5 instead of 2/5 is the most common error: students find P(F) and stop, not noticing the question asks for the complement.
In a Venn diagram with two events A and B, which symbol represents the region where BOTH events occur at the same time?
The intersection symbol ∩ (like an upside-down U) represents the overlap region. A ∩ B means 'A AND B', so only outcomes where BOTH events happen are in this region.
A Venn diagram shows two events A and B. The regions contain the following frequencies: only A = 6, A ∩ B = 4, only B = 7, neither = 3. How many people are in the universal set altogether?
Every outcome in a Venn diagram belongs to exactly one region. The total = only A + (A ∩ B) + only B + neither = 6 + 4 + 7 + 3 = 20.
For two events A and B, P(A) = 0.5, P(B) = 0.4, and P(A ∩ B) = 0.2. What is P(A ∪ B)?
The addition rule is P(A ∪ B) = P(A) + P(B) − P(A ∩ B). The intersection must be subtracted because outcomes in both A and B are counted once in P(A) and again in P(B), so one copy must be removed: 0.5 + 0.4 − 0.2 = 0.7.
A village has 10 houses. Nine houses are valued between £180,000 and £220,000. One house is a mansion valued at £2,400,000. (a) The estate agent claims: 'The mean house value in this village is over £400,000.' Verify whether this claim is correct and explain why the mean is misleading. Then state which average would be more appropriate and justify your choice. [4 marks]
This four-mark question requires verification, explanation of distortion, and justification of a better measure. Step 1 — verify: approximate the 9 typical houses at £200,000 each: 9 × £200,000 + £2,400,000 = £4,200,000; mean ≈ £4,200,000 ÷ 10 = £420,000 — the claim is correct. Step 2 — explain: the mansion is an outlier that pulls the mean far above the typical value of £180,000-£220,000. The mean does not represent a typical house. Step 3 — better measure: the median is not affected by extreme values and would give the middle house price, which is representative of the 9 typical homes.
Find the median of this dataset: 21, 5, 13, 24, 8, 17
With an even number of values, there is no single middle value — you must find the mean of the two middle values. Order the data: 5, 8, 13, 17, 21, 24. With 6 values, the two middle positions are 3rd and 4th. The 3rd value is 13 and the 4th is 17. Median = (13 + 17) ÷ 2 = 30 ÷ 2 = 15. A common error is picking just one of the two middle values (13 or 17) rather than averaging them.
Six numbers have a mean of 14. Five of the numbers are 10, 17, 8, 20, and 13. Find the sixth number.
To find a missing value from a known mean, reverse the mean formula. Required total = mean × count = 14 × 6 = 84. Sum of the five known values = 10 + 17 + 8 + 20 + 13 = 68. Missing sixth number = 84 − 68 = 16. The key step is finding the required total first — this is what earns the method mark. A common error is dividing rather than multiplying (giving 14/6 ≈ 2.3 as the total, which is clearly too small).
The table shows the number of goals scored per match by a football team. | Goals (x) | Frequency (f) | |-----------|---------------| | 2 | 3 | | 4 | 5 | | 6 | 4 | | 8 | 2 | | 10 | 1 | Calculate the mean number of goals per match. Give your answer to 2 decimal places.
For the mean from a frequency table, calculate Σfx (each value multiplied by its frequency), then divide by Σf (total frequency). Σfx = 2×3 + 4×5 + 6×4 + 8×2 + 10×1 = 6 + 20 + 24 + 16 + 10 = 76. Σf = 3+5+4+2+1 = 15. Mean = 76 ÷ 15 ≈ 5.07 (2 d.p.). The critical error is dividing by the number of rows (5) rather than by Σf (15). Always sum the frequency column to find the denominator.
Five numbers have a mean of 10. A sixth number, 16, is added to the dataset. What is the new mean?
When a new value is added, both the sum and the count increase. Step 1: recover the original total — mean × count = 10 × 5 = 50. Step 2: find the new total — 50 + 16 = 66. Step 3: divide by the new count — 66 ÷ 6 = 11. The most common error is averaging the old mean and the new number: (10 + 16)/2 = 13 is wrong because the groups are unequal in size. Always go back to totals.
Class A has test scores: 55, 62, 58, 60, 61, 63, 57. Class B has test scores: 20, 60, 62, 63, 61, 58, 64. A teacher says 'Class A has a higher mean score, so Class A performed better overall.' Give a mathematical reason why this conclusion may be misleading.
A full-mark answer requires three distinct points: (1) identify the outlier — the score of 20 in Class B is far below the other values (58-64), making it an outlier; (2) explain the effect — this outlier pulls Class B's mean down significantly, making it unrepresentative of the typical student's performance; (3) suggest a better measure — the median is not affected by extreme values and would give a fairer comparison. The median of Class B (61) is actually slightly higher than the median of Class A (60), suggesting Class A did not necessarily perform better.
Group X contains 5 students with a mean exam score of 72. Group Y contains 3 students with a mean exam score of 60. Calculate the mean exam score for all 8 students combined.
Never average two group means directly unless the groups have equal size. The correct method finds both group totals, adds them, and divides by the total count. Group X total = 5 × 72 = 360. Group Y total = 3 × 60 = 180. Combined total = 360 + 180 = 540. Overall mean = 540 ÷ 8 = 67.5. As a sense check: 67.5 is closer to Group X's mean (72) than Group Y's (60) because Group X is larger — this is a useful verification.
The table shows the distribution of scores on a short quiz for 20 students. | Score (x) | Frequency (f) | |-----------|---------------| | 10 | 2 | | 20 | 6 | | 30 | 7 | | 40 | 3 | | 50 | 2 | Calculate the mean score.
Apply the Σfx method: multiply each score by its frequency, then sum. Σfx = 10×2 + 20×6 + 30×7 + 40×3 + 50×2 = 20 + 120 + 210 + 120 + 100 = 570. Σf = 2+6+7+3+2 = 20 (matches the given total — a useful check). Mean = 570 ÷ 20 = 28.5. Dividing by 5 (the number of rows) is the classic error — always divide by the total frequency Σf, not the number of rows.
The table shows the number of pets owned by students in a class. | Pets (x) | Frequency (f) | |----------|---------------| | 0 | 2 | | 1 | k | | 2 | 5 | | 3 | 3 | The mean number of pets is 1.6. Find the value of k.
When a frequency table has an unknown frequency k, express Σfx and Σf both in terms of k, then use the mean formula. Σfx = 0(2) + 1(k) + 2(5) + 3(3) = k + 19. Σf = 2 + k + 5 + 3 = k + 10. Set up the equation: (k + 19)/(k + 10) = 1.6. Cross-multiply (convert 1.6 to 8/5): 5(k + 19) = 8(k + 10), giving 5k + 95 = 8k + 80, so 15 = 3k, thus k = 5. Always verify by substituting back: mean = 24/15 = 1.6.
Find the mean of the following five numbers: 4, 7, 9, 12, 8
The mean is calculated using sum divided by count. Add all five values: 4 + 7 + 9 + 12 + 8 = 40. Then divide by the number of values: 40 ÷ 5 = 8. Always count the values carefully before dividing — a common error is dividing by 4 rather than 5. Show both the sum and the division in your working to earn the method mark even if you make a later arithmetic error.
Find the median of this dataset: 26, 3, 19, 15, 7, 22, 11
The median is the middle value when data is arranged in order. Step 1: order the data: 3, 7, 11, 15, 19, 22, 26. Step 2: find the middle position using (n+1)/2 = (7+1)/2 = 4. Step 3: the 4th value in the ordered list is 15. The most common error is finding the middle of the unordered list — always order first. Always show the ordered list in your working to earn the method mark.
What is the mode of this dataset? 3, 5, 5, 7, 9, 3, 5, 11
The mode is the value that appears most often. Counting: 3 appears twice, 5 appears three times, 7 once, 11 once. The mode is 5.
A street has seven houses. Six houses sold for prices between £220,000 and £280,000. One house sold for £1,500,000. A journalist wants to report the 'typical' house price on this street. Which average should they use and why?
The £1,500,000 property is an outlier. The mean would be pulled significantly upward and would not represent the typical house on the street. The median, which is the middle value when prices are ordered, is unaffected by this extreme value.
What is the mode of this dataset? 2, 4, 4, 6, 6, 8, 10
Both 4 and 6 appear twice, which is more than any other value. When two values share the highest frequency, the dataset is bimodal and both values are modes.
The table shows the salaries, in thousands of pounds, of 32 employees at a company. | Salary, s (£ thousand) | Frequency | |---|---| | 20 < s ≤ 30 | 6 | | 30 < s ≤ 40 | 14 | | 40 < s ≤ 50 | 9 | | 50 < s ≤ 100 | 3 | (a) Calculate an estimate for the mean salary. Give your answer to 1 decimal place. (b) Explain why this estimate may not be reliable.
Part (a): midpoints are 25, 35, 45, 75. Products: 6×25=150, 14×35=490, 9×45=405, 3×75=225. Σfx=1270, Σf=32. Mean = 1270 ÷ 32 = 39.6875 ≈ 39.7 (£ thousand). Part (b): the last class 50 < s ≤ 100 has a width of 50, far wider than the other classes (width 10). We assumed a midpoint of 75 for all three employees in that class, but their actual salaries could be anywhere from just above £50,000 to £100,000. This wide class makes the midpoint assumption unreliable and the mean estimate less accurate.
The table shows the ages of 20 customers at a café. | Age, a (years) | Frequency | |---|---| | 10 < a ≤ 20 | 3 | | 20 < a ≤ 30 | 7 | | 30 < a ≤ 40 | 8 | | 40 < a ≤ 50 | 2 | Calculate an estimate for the mean age.
The estimated mean from grouped data requires four steps. First, find the midpoint of each class: (10+20)/2=15, (20+30)/2=25, (30+40)/2=35, (40+50)/2=45. Second, multiply each midpoint by its frequency: 3×15=45, 7×25=175, 8×35=280, 2×45=90. Third, sum these products: Σfx = 45+175+280+90 = 590. Fourth, divide by the total frequency Σf = 20: 590÷20 = 29.5 years. The critical error is dividing by 4 (number of rows) rather than 20 (total frequency). The mean is an estimate because we assume every value in a class equals the midpoint.
The table shows the heights of 30 seedlings measured one month after planting. | Height, h (cm) | Frequency | |---|---| | 0 < h ≤ 10 | 4 | | 10 < h ≤ 20 | 9 | | 20 < h ≤ 30 | 11 | | 30 < h ≤ 40 | 5 | | 40 < h ≤ 50 | 1 | Calculate an estimate for the mean height. Give your answer to 1 decimal place.
Calculate the midpoint of each of the five classes: 5, 15, 25, 35, 45. Multiply each midpoint by its frequency: 4×5=20, 9×15=135, 11×25=275, 5×35=175, 1×45=45. Sum the products: Σfx = 20+135+275+175+45 = 650. Total frequency: Σf = 4+9+11+5+1 = 30. Estimated mean = 650 ÷ 30 = 21.666... ≈ 21.7 cm. Always use midpoints, not the class boundaries themselves, and remember to round to the requested number of decimal places.
The table shows the scores of 40 students in a test marked out of 100. | Score, s | Frequency | Cumulative Frequency | |---|---|---| | 0 < s ≤ 20 | 5 | 5 | | 20 < s ≤ 40 | 12 | 17 | | 40 < s ≤ 60 | 15 | 32 | | 60 < s ≤ 80 | 6 | 38 | | 80 < s ≤ 100 | 2 | 40 | Use linear interpolation to estimate the median score.
With 40 values, the median position is the 20th value (position = (40+1)/2 = 20.5, so between 20th and 21st). Cumulative frequencies are 5, 17, 32, 38, 40. The 20th value lies in the class 40 < s ≤ 60 (cumulative frequency goes from 17 to 32). Using linear interpolation: median = 40 + ((20 − 17) / 15) × 20 = 40 + (3/15) × 20 = 40 + 4 = 44. The formula works by finding how far into the median class the median position falls and scaling by the class width.
The table shows the times, in minutes, that customers spent in a shop. One frequency is missing. | Time, t (minutes) | Frequency | |---|---| | 10 < t ≤ 20 | 4 | | 20 < t ≤ 30 | f | | 30 < t ≤ 40 | 6 | | 40 < t ≤ 50 | 2 | The estimated mean time is 28 minutes. Find the value of f.
Use midpoints 15, 25, 35, 45 and write the estimated mean formula in terms of f. Σfx = 4×15 + f×25 + 6×35 + 2×45 = 60 + 25f + 210 + 90 = 360 + 25f. Σf = 4 + f + 6 + 2 = 12 + f. Set up the equation: (360 + 25f) ÷ (12 + f) = 28. Multiply both sides: 360 + 25f = 28(12 + f) = 336 + 28f. Rearrange: 360 − 336 = 28f − 25f, so 24 = 3f, giving f = 8.
The table shows the waiting times of 35 customers at a bank. The class widths are not all equal. | Waiting time, w (minutes) | Frequency | |---|---| | 0 < w ≤ 5 | 8 | | 5 < w ≤ 10 | 12 | | 10 < w ≤ 20 | 10 | | 20 < w ≤ 40 | 5 | Calculate an estimate for the mean waiting time. Give your answer to 1 decimal place.
Even with unequal class widths, the estimated mean method is unchanged — class width does not affect the formula. Find midpoints: 2.5, 7.5, 15, 30. Multiply each by its frequency: 8×2.5=20, 12×7.5=90, 10×15=150, 5×30=150. Σfx = 20+90+150+150 = 410. Σf = 8+12+10+5 = 35. Estimated mean = 410 ÷ 35 = 11.714... ≈ 11.7 minutes. Class width only matters when drawing histograms (frequency density), not when calculating the mean.
The table shows the times, in minutes, taken by 24 runners to complete a course. | Time, t (minutes) | Frequency | |---|---| | 20 < t ≤ 30 | 3 | | 30 < t ≤ 40 | 7 | | 40 < t ≤ 50 | 9 | | 50 < t ≤ 60 | 5 | (a) Complete the cumulative frequency column: find the cumulative frequency after the class 30 < t ≤ 40. (b) State the class interval that contains the median.
For part (a), cumulative frequency is a running total. After 20 < t ≤ 30 it is 3; after 30 < t ≤ 40 it is 3 + 7 = 10. For part (b), with 24 data values the median position is between the 12th and 13th values. Cumulative frequencies are 3, 10, 19, 24. The 12th value lies in the class 40 < t ≤ 50 since cumulative frequency reaches 19 at the end of that class but only 10 at the end of the previous class.
A teacher groups 30 students' test scores into four class intervals and calculates the estimated mean and estimated median. Explain why both the estimated mean and the estimated median from grouped data are only approximations of the true values. In your answer, refer to the assumptions made.
When data is grouped, the individual values within each class are no longer recorded — only the class interval is known. For the estimated mean, we assume that every value in a class equals the class midpoint. In reality, values are spread throughout the class, so the midpoint only approximates the true values. For the estimated median, linear interpolation assumes that values are evenly spread within the median class. If values cluster towards one end of that class, the true median differs from the interpolated estimate. Both methods produce approximations because they rely on assumptions about the unknown distribution of values within each class.
A student says: 'The mode of the data is the modal class.' Explain why this statement is incorrect and describe the correct term and what it represents.
The mode is the single value that appears most often in a dataset of individual values. The modal class is a different concept used only with grouped data — it is the class interval with the highest frequency. They are not the same: the modal class is a range, not a single value. Furthermore, with grouped data we cannot determine the exact mode at all, because individual values within each class are unknown. The student should say the modal class is the interval with the greatest frequency rather than referring to a 'mode'.
A grouped frequency table records the number of press-ups completed by students. | Press-ups | Frequency | |---|---| | 1–10 | 5 | | 11–20 | 9 | | 21–30 | 7 | | 31–40 | 4 | (a) Write down the midpoint of the class interval 11–20. (b) Write down the midpoint of the class interval 31–40.
The midpoint of a class interval is found by averaging the two boundary values: midpoint = (lower boundary + upper boundary) ÷ 2. For part (a), the interval 11–20 gives (11 + 20) ÷ 2 = 31 ÷ 2 = 15.5. For part (b), the interval 31–40 gives (31 + 40) ÷ 2 = 71 ÷ 2 = 35.5. A common error is to use 15 instead of 15.5 — remember that midpoints of discrete intervals are often decimals.
The table below shows the lengths of 25 leaves collected from a tree. | Length, l (cm) | Frequency | |---|---| | 0 < l ≤ 5 | 3 | | 5 < l ≤ 10 | 8 | | 10 < l ≤ 15 | 11 | | 15 < l ≤ 20 | 3 | Write down the modal class.
The modal class is the class interval with the highest frequency — it is the grouped data equivalent of the mode. Scan the frequency column and identify the largest value: frequencies are 3, 8, 11, 3. The largest is 11, which corresponds to the class 10 < l ≤ 15. Always write the full class interval notation as your answer, not just the frequency.
A frequency table uses the class intervals shown below. | Speed, s (mph) | Frequency | |---|---| | 0 < s ≤ 20 | 4 | | 20 < s ≤ 40 | 11 | | 40 < s ≤ 60 | 9 | | 60 < s ≤ 80 | 2 | A car travels at exactly 40 mph. Which class interval does this value belong to?
The interval 20 < s ≤ 40 includes all values greater than 20 and up to and including 40. Since s = 40 satisfies s ≤ 40, it belongs here. The next interval 40 < s ≤ 60 requires s to be strictly greater than 40, so s = 40 does not belong there.
A student calculates the mean from a grouped frequency table and writes down an answer of 34.2 kg. Why is this described as an estimate rather than the exact mean?
When data is grouped, we only know that each value lies within an interval. We do not know the exact value of any individual data point. We assume each value equals the midpoint of its class, which is an approximation, making the mean an estimate.
A grouped frequency table has six class intervals, each of equal width. The modal class is 50 < x ≤ 60 and the estimated mean is 48.3. Which statement is definitely true?
The modal class is the interval with the highest frequency. The estimated mean is calculated using all intervals weighted by their frequencies, so it reflects the overall distribution and can differ from the modal class. Neither always coincides with the other nor are they always different.
Two classes were surveyed about their preferred after-school club. Class 1 (120 students): The sector for 'Drama' has an angle of 90°. Class 2 (180 students): The sector for 'Drama' has an angle of 60°. If the results of the two classes were combined into a single pie chart covering all 300 students, what would be the angle for 'Drama' in the combined pie chart? Give your answer to the nearest degree.
You cannot directly add or average angles from two pie charts with different totals — you must first convert each to a frequency. Class 1: (90 ÷ 360) × 120 = 30 Drama students. Class 2: (60 ÷ 360) × 180 = 30 Drama students. Combined Drama total = 30 + 30 = 60. Combined overall total = 120 + 180 = 300 students. Combined Drama angle = (60 ÷ 300) × 360° = 72°. Averaging the angles (90 + 60)/2 = 75 is incorrect because the class sizes differ.
The table below shows how 80 people get to work each day. | Transport | Frequency | Angle | |-----------|-----------|-------| | Walking | 20 | | | Cycling | 16 | | | Bus | 28 | | | Car | 16 | | | Total | 80 | 360° | Calculate the angle for each transport type. Give your answers to the nearest degree. (Enter the angle for 'Bus' as your answer.)
Apply the formula Angle = (frequency ÷ total) × 360° to each row, using total = 80. Walking: (20/80) × 360 = 90°. Cycling: (16/80) × 360 = 72°. Bus: (28/80) × 360 = 126°. Car: (16/80) × 360 = 72°. Always verify by adding all angles: 90 + 72 + 126 + 72 = 360°. If the angles do not sum to 360°, there is an arithmetic error somewhere. A common mistake is multiplying by 100 instead of 360, which gives percentages rather than angles.
A gym surveyed 150 members about their favourite exercise activity. | Activity | Frequency | Angle | |------------|-----------|-------| | Gym weights| 45 | | | Swimming | 30 | | | Running | 50 | | | Yoga | 25 | | | Total | 150 | 360° | Calculate the angle for each activity to complete the table. Give each angle to the nearest degree. (Enter the angle for 'Running' as your answer.)
Use the formula Angle = (frequency ÷ total) × 360°, where total = 150. Gym weights: (45/150) × 360 = 108°. Swimming: (30/150) × 360 = 72°. Running: (50/150) × 360 = 120°. Yoga: (25/150) × 360 = 60°. Verification: 108 + 72 + 120 + 60 = 360°. Always check the total equals exactly 360°. Confusing the frequency value with the angle (e.g., writing 50° for running) is a common error to avoid.
Two local libraries recorded how many books were borrowed last month. Library A (240 books borrowed in total): the 'Mystery' sector has an angle of 75°. Library B (360 books borrowed in total): the 'Mystery' sector has an angle of 45°. Which library had more mystery books borrowed? Show your working.
Although Library A has the larger angle (75° vs 45°), both libraries have different totals, so you must calculate the actual frequencies separately. Library A: (75 ÷ 360) × 240 = 50 mystery books. Library B: (45 ÷ 360) × 360 = 45 mystery books. Comparing 50 with 45 shows Library A had more. The trap here is assuming a larger angle always means more books — it only means a larger proportion, and with different totals, the actual count can differ. Always convert to frequencies before comparing.
A newspaper reports that a pie chart shows Company A has a 'dominant market share' in the smartphone industry, with their sector taking up nearly half the chart. A critic argues that the pie chart is misleading. Explain two limitations of using a pie chart in this context, and suggest what additional information would make the chart more useful.
Pie charts have two key limitations worth knowing for exam questions. First, they only show proportions — they hide the total market size entirely. A company with 'nearly half' of a small, declining market may actually be weaker than a competitor with 30% of a much larger market. Second, when two sectors are close in size, the human eye cannot judge which is larger without exact values — small differences in angle are genuinely hard to distinguish visually. To improve the chart's usefulness, the total market size and exact figures for each sector should be provided alongside it.
In a survey about hobbies, the sector for 'Reading' has an angle of 72°. 18 people said reading was their favourite hobby. How many people were surveyed in total?
This question works backwards from a known frequency to find the total. The Reading sector angle is 72°, which represents the fraction 72/360 = 1/5 of the whole survey. We know this 1/5 equals 18 people, so the total must be 18 × 5 = 90 people. The method is: total = frequency ÷ (angle ÷ 360). Multiplying angle by frequency (18 × 72 = 1296) is a common error but has no meaning here.
A restaurant surveyed 150 customers about their favourite starter. The results are shown in a pie chart. The sector for 'Garlic Bread' has an angle of 48°. How many customers chose Garlic Bread?
To find how many customers chose Garlic Bread, convert the angle to a fraction of the circle and then find that fraction of the total. Step 1: 48 ÷ 360 = 2/15. Step 2: (2/15) × 150 = 20 customers. The whole working can also be written as one step: (48 ÷ 360) × 150 = 20. A frequent error is treating the angle value (48) as the answer directly, or subtracting the angle from 150 — neither has any statistical meaning.
In a survey, 15 out of 60 people chose football as their favourite sport. Calculate the angle that would represent football on a pie chart.
To find the sector angle for football, first express the frequency as a fraction of the total: 15 out of 60 = 15/60 = 1/4. Then multiply by 360° because a full pie chart is a complete circle: (1/4) × 360° = 90°. A common mistake is to multiply by 100 instead, which gives a percentage (25%) rather than a sector angle. Remember: pie charts always use × 360°.
A pie chart shows how 200 students travel to school. The sector for 'Bus' has an angle of 72°. How many students travel by bus?
This is the reverse of the standard angle formula. The sector angle of 72° represents 72/360 = 1/5 of the full circle, so 1/5 of all students travel by bus. Multiply this fraction by the total: (1/5) × 200 = 40 students. A common error is to treat the angle as a percentage (72% of 200 = 144), but angles are out of 360°, not 100%.
In a survey about favourite types of film, the sector for 'Action' films has an angle of 135°. What percentage of people chose Action films? Give your answer to 1 decimal place.
To convert a pie chart angle to a percentage, divide the angle by 360 and multiply by 100: (135 ÷ 360) × 100 = 0.375 × 100 = 37.5%. The key is recognising that the full circle (360°) represents 100% of the people surveyed. A common mistake is dividing by 100 rather than 360, giving 1.35% — but angles are measured in degrees out of 360, not out of 100.
A pie chart about favourite ice cream flavours has four sectors with these known angles: - Chocolate: 110° - Strawberry: 95° - Mint: 75° - Vanilla: ? Calculate the angle for the Vanilla sector.
All sectors in a pie chart must together form a complete circle, so their angles sum to exactly 360°. Sum the three known angles: 110 + 95 + 75 = 280°. Subtract from 360° to find the missing angle: 360 − 280 = 80°. A common error is subtracting from 180° (treating the chart as a semicircle), which gives an incorrect answer of 100°.
A pie chart shows the results of a survey about favourite holiday destinations. The sectors have the following angles: - Beach: 144° - City: 90° - Countryside: 72° - Mountains: 54° Which destination is the modal category?
The modal category in a pie chart is the category most people chose — it corresponds to the largest sector. Compare the angles: Beach = 144°, City = 90°, Countryside = 72°, Mountains = 54°. Beach has the largest angle, so Beach is the modal category. You do not need to know the actual frequencies — the largest angle always identifies the mode.
Two schools carried out a survey asking students about their favourite genre of music. School A (200 students): The 'Pop' sector has an angle of 90°. School B (500 students): The 'Pop' sector also has an angle of 90°. Which statement is correct?
Equal angles in two pie charts mean equal proportions, not equal amounts. Both schools have a Pop sector of 90°, so both have the same proportion preferring Pop: 90/360 = 1/4 = 25%. But the actual numbers differ because the totals differ: School A = (1/4) × 200 = 50 students; School B = (1/4) × 500 = 125 students. The larger school has more Pop fans even though the angles are identical. This is a key limitation of pie charts when comparing different-sized groups.
A researcher wants to display data about changes in average temperature in a UK city recorded every month for 3 years. Which statement best explains whether a pie chart is appropriate for this data?
Pie charts are designed to show how a total is divided into categories — they display proportions of a whole. Temperature data recorded over 36 months is time-series data: it shows how a value changes over time. A pie chart cannot display change over time, so it would be completely unsuitable here. The correct chart type is a line graph, which places time on the x-axis and shows trends clearly. Option C is correct for this reason, not because of the number of categories.
Two factories produce metal rods. A quality inspector measures the diameter (in mm) of rods sampled from each factory. The five-number summaries are: Factory A: Min = 8.0, Q1 = 12.0, Median = 16.0, Q3 = 21.0, Max = 28.0 Factory B: Min = 5.0, Q1 = 10.0, Median = 18.0, Q3 = 26.0, Max = 35.0 The target diameter is 15.0 mm. Rods are rejected if their diameter is outside the outlier fences (using the 1.5 × IQR rule). (a) Calculate the outlier fences for each factory. (b) Determine which factory produces rods closer to the target diameter and with greater consistency. (c) The inspector says: 'Factory B's distribution is positively skewed.' Is this correct? Give a reason.
Factory A: IQR=9, fences=-1.5 and 34.5. Factory B: IQR=16, fences=-14 and 50. Factory A is closer to target (median 16 vs 18, target 15) and more consistent (IQR 9 vs 16). Factory B's median (18) is equidistant between Q1=10 and Q3=26 (both 8 units away), so it is symmetric, not positively skewed.
Two supermarkets record the waiting times (in minutes) at their checkouts over a week. The five-number summaries are: Supermarket A: Min = 1, Q1 = 3, Median = 5, Q3 = 7, Max = 11 Supermarket B: Min = 0, Q1 = 2, Median = 4, Q3 = 8, Max = 14 Compare the two distributions fully. Which supermarket would you recommend for shorter waiting times? Justify your answer. (4 marks)
Supermarket A: IQR = 7 - 3 = 4, Range = 10. Supermarket B: IQR = 8 - 2 = 6, Range = 14. B has a lower median (4 vs 5) but A is more consistent (smaller IQR) and has a shorter maximum wait.
The daily rainfall (mm) recorded over 10 days, arranged in order, is: 3, 7, 9, 12, 15, 18, 21, 24, 27, 30 Find the five-number summary: Minimum, Q1, Median, Q3, Maximum.
With 10 values (an even count), the median is the mean of the 5th and 6th values: (15 + 18) ÷ 2 = 16.5. The data is then split into two halves of 5 each: lower half {3, 7, 9, 12, 15} and upper half {18, 21, 24, 27, 30}. Q1 is the median of the lower half = 9 (the middle value), and Q3 is the median of the upper half = 24. A common error is using only the 5th value for the median (giving 15 instead of 16.5) when the dataset has an even number of values. Another is choosing the 2nd value as Q1 rather than the middle of the lower half.
Two athletics clubs record the 100m sprint times (in seconds) for their members. The five-number summaries are shown below. Club A: Min = 11.2, Q1 = 12.4, Median = 13.1, Q3 = 14.2, Max = 16.5 Club B: Min = 12.0, Q1 = 13.5, Median = 14.8, Q3 = 16.1, Max = 17.3 Compare the distributions of sprint times for the two clubs. You must use the data to support your answer. (3 marks)
Club A: IQR = 14.2 - 12.4 = 1.8s. Club B: IQR = 16.1 - 13.5 = 2.6s. Club A has a lower median (13.1 < 14.8) and smaller IQR (1.8 < 2.6), meaning Club A runners are typically faster and more consistent.
The number of books borrowed from a school library each day for 8 days, arranged in order, is: 4, 8, 11, 14, 17, 20, 23, 26 Calculate the interquartile range (IQR).
With 8 values (even), the data splits into two halves of 4 each. The lower half is {4, 8, 11, 14}: Q1 = (8 + 11) ÷ 2 = 9.5. The upper half is {17, 20, 23, 26}: Q3 = (20 + 23) ÷ 2 = 21.5. IQR = Q3 − Q1 = 21.5 − 9.5 = 12. When a half has an even number of values, the quartile is the mean of the two middle values — never just a single value. A common error is using the range (26 − 4 = 22) instead of the IQR; the range uses the extreme values while the IQR only uses Q1 and Q3.
For a dataset of house prices (£000s), the five-number summary is: Minimum = 95, Q1 = 150, Median = 210, Q3 = 270, Maximum = 380 Using the 1.5 × IQR rule, calculate the lower and upper outlier fences.
The 1.5 × IQR rule identifies outlier boundaries. First calculate IQR = Q3 − Q1 = 270 − 150 = 120. Then compute 1.5 × IQR = 180. The lower fence = Q1 − 1.5 × IQR = 150 − 180 = −30. The upper fence = Q3 + 1.5 × IQR = 270 + 180 = 450. A negative lower fence is perfectly valid — it simply means no data points can be lower outliers (since house prices are positive). Any value below −30 or above 450 would be classified as an outlier. A common mistake is adding 1.5 × IQR to Q1 for the lower fence instead of subtracting.
A dataset of 8 values, arranged in order, is: 5, 8, 12, 16, 24, p, 33, 37 The interquartile range of this dataset is 20. Find the value of p.
This is a reverse IQR problem — you know the IQR and need to find a missing value. First find Q1 from the lower half {5, 8, 12, 16}: Q1 = (8 + 12) ÷ 2 = 10. Since IQR = Q3 − Q1 = 20, it follows that Q3 = 10 + 20 = 30. The upper half is {24, p, 33, 37}, and Q3 is the mean of the 2nd and 3rd values: (p + 33) ÷ 2 = 30, so p + 33 = 60, giving p = 27. Always verify that the answer keeps the data in ascending order: 24 < 27 < 33 — confirmed. A common mistake is taking Q1 = 8 (a single value) rather than the mean of 8 and 12.
The box plot for GCSE maths test scores in a year group has the following five-number summary: Minimum = 35, Q1 = 53, Median = 62, Q3 = 71, Maximum = 85 A teacher claims: 'More than half of the students scored above 65 marks.' Is the teacher's claim correct? Show your reasoning. (3 marks)
The median divides the distribution exactly in half. Since the median is 62, exactly 50% of students scored above 62. Because 65 > 62, the proportion scoring above 65 must be less than 50%, so the teacher's claim is wrong.
The box plots show the test scores of Class A and Class B. Class A: Min = 15, Q1 = 30, Median = 42, Q3 = 50, Max = 65 Class B: Min = 10, Q1 = 25, Median = 38, Q3 = 48, Max = 55 Compare the distributions of Class A and Class B. Give two comparisons.
Class A has a higher median (42) than Class B (38), so on average Class A scored higher. Class A also has a larger IQR (20) than Class B (23 — wait: IQR_B = 48 − 25 = 23), meaning Class B has a slightly larger spread in the middle 50%. Class A has a larger overall range (50) compared to Class B (45).
When comparing two box plots, you need to compare both average (median) and spread (IQR or range), each with numerical evidence. Class A median = 42 versus Class B median = 38 shows Class A scored higher on average. For spread, Class A IQR = Q3 − Q1 = 50 − 30 = 20, and Class B IQR = 48 − 25 = 23, so Class B has slightly more variability in the middle 50%. Always quote both the statistic name and its value, then state what this means in context (e.g. 'Class A is more consistent'). Vague comparisons without numbers earn no marks.
A box plot for the heights (in cm) of plants in a greenhouse has the following values: Minimum = 12, Q1 = 18, Median = 28, Q3 = 38, Maximum = 45. What is the value of the median?
A box plot displays five key values: minimum, lower quartile (Q1), median, upper quartile (Q3), and maximum — known as the five-number summary. The median is represented by the vertical line drawn inside the box (not at the edge). In this question the five values are given directly, so you simply need to identify which is the median. The median = 28 is the middle value of the five, positioned between Q1 = 18 and Q3 = 38. Common errors are selecting Q1 = 18 (the left edge of the box) or Q3 = 38 (the right edge) by confusing the quartile positions with the median.
A box plot for the number of daily steps recorded by a group of students has the following five-number summary: Minimum = 2800, Q1 = 4500, Median = 6200, Q3 = 7800, Maximum = 9400 Find the interquartile range (IQR).
The interquartile range (IQR) measures the spread of the middle 50% of the data. The formula is IQR = Q3 − Q1. Here, Q3 = 7800 and Q1 = 4500, so IQR = 7800 − 4500 = 3300. Two common errors occur: subtracting the minimum from the maximum (which gives the full range, not the IQR), or subtracting the median from Q3. The IQR specifically uses Q1 and Q3, and nothing else. Remember the box in a box plot spans exactly from Q1 to Q3, so the IQR equals the width of the box.
A box plot shows the ages (in years) of visitors to a science museum on a Saturday. Five-number summary: Minimum = 5, Q1 = 14, Median = 27, Q3 = 42, Maximum = 47 Calculate the range of the visitors' ages.
The range of a dataset is calculated as Maximum − Minimum. On a box plot, the range corresponds to the total length from the tip of the left whisker to the tip of the right whisker. Here, Range = 47 − 5 = 42 years. A common error is using Q3 − Q1, which gives the IQR (42 − 14 = 28) rather than the full range. Another mistake is giving the maximum value (47) as the answer. Always use the extreme endpoints — minimum and maximum — for the range.
On a box plot, what does the box (the rectangle) represent?
The box on a box plot spans from Q1 to Q3. This interval contains the middle 50% of the data, and its width equals the IQR (Interquartile Range).
What does the line inside the box of a box plot represent?
A box plot shows the five-number summary. The left edge of the box is Q1 (lower quartile), the right edge is Q3 (upper quartile), and the line inside the box is Q2, the median.
A box plot has the following five-number summary: Minimum = 10, Q1 = 15, Median = 18, Q3 = 30, Maximum = 55 The median (18) is much closer to Q1 (15) than to Q3 (30), and the right whisker is much longer than the left whisker. What does this tell us about the distribution?
Positive skew: the median sits towards the left side of the box (closer to Q1), and the right whisker (or tail) is longer. Here, median = 18 is only 3 above Q1 = 15 but 12 below Q3 = 30, confirming the rightward tail.
The box plot for Class A shows Q1 = 30 and Q3 = 50. Find the interquartile range (IQR) for Class A.
The IQR (interquartile range) measures the spread of the middle 50% of the data. The formula is simply IQR = Q3 − Q1. For Class A, Q1 = 30 and Q3 = 50, so IQR = 50 − 30 = 20. The box in a box plot spans exactly from Q1 to Q3, so the IQR equals the width of the box. A common error is adding Q1 and Q3 instead of subtracting.
The box plot for Class B shows a minimum score of 10 and a maximum score of 55. Find the range of scores for Class B.
The range measures the full spread of the data: Range = Maximum − Minimum. On a box plot, the minimum is the left end of the left whisker, and the maximum is the right end of the right whisker. For Class B, Range = 55 − 10 = 45. Do not confuse range with IQR — the range uses the extreme values (whisker tips) while the IQR uses Q1 and Q3 (the box edges).
For a dataset of reaction times (milliseconds), the outlier fences have been calculated as: Lower fence = -5 ms, Upper fence = 55 ms Which of the following values is an outlier?
An outlier is any value that lies OUTSIDE the outlier fences. Here, lower fence = -5 and upper fence = 55. Only 60 ms is greater than 55, so only 60 ms is an outlier.
A histogram shows the ages of people at a concert. From the histogram the following data can be read: Age (years) | FD | Class width 0 =< a < 10 | 2 | 10 10 =< a < 20| 4 | 10 20 =< a < 30| 6 | 10 30 =< a < 50| 4 | 20 Estimate the mean age of the concert-goers.
Estimating the mean from a histogram is a three-step process. First, find the frequencies: F = FD × class width for each bar (20, 40, 60, 80 — total 200). Second, find the midpoint of each class interval: 5, 15, 25, 40 (not boundaries — the midpoint of 30-50 is 40, not 30 or 50). Third, calculate Estimated Mean = sum of (frequency × midpoint) ÷ total frequency = 5400 ÷ 200 = 27. The most common error is using FD values directly as frequencies rather than multiplying by class width, which gives a wrong total and mean.
The table below shows the time (minutes) students spent on homework. Class interval | Class width | Frequency | Frequency Density 0 =< t < 5 | 5 | 15 | ___ 5 =< t < 10 | 5 | 25 | ___ 10 =< t < 20 | 10 | 40 | ___ 20 =< t < 30 | 10 | 20 | ___ Calculate all four frequency density values.
The key formula is Frequency Density = Frequency ÷ Class Width. Apply it row by row: for the first two rows (class width 5): FD = 15/5 = 3 and 25/5 = 5. For the last two rows (class width 10): FD = 40/10 = 4 and 20/10 = 2. The critical point with unequal class widths is that you must use each row's own class width — you cannot use a single fixed width for all rows. The most common error is using 40 and 20 directly as frequency densities for the wider classes, forgetting to divide by 10.
A histogram shows the distances (km) that workers travel to their office. The bars have the following dimensions: - 0 =< d < 10: frequency density = 2.5, class width = 10 - 10 =< d < 15: frequency density = 4, class width = 5 - 15 =< d < 25: frequency density = 1.5, class width = 10 Calculate the frequency for each class interval and find the total number of workers.
For each bar, Frequency = Frequency Density × Class Width. Applying this: 0 to 10 km: 2.5 × 10 = 25 workers; 10 to 15 km: 4 × 5 = 20 workers; 15 to 25 km: 1.5 × 10 = 15 workers. Total = 25 + 20 + 15 = 60 workers. A key insight is that the bar with the highest FD (4, for 10-15 km) does not have the most workers — the wider bar (0-10 km) actually contains more people. Always multiply by the class width to find the actual count. Summing the FD values directly (2.5 + 4 + 1.5 = 8) is a common error.
The table shows the ages of visitors to a museum. Age (years) | Frequency 0 =< a < 10 | 30 10 =< a < 20| 50 20 =< a < 40| 60 40 =< a < 50| 20 Calculate the frequency density for each class interval.
The key step is carefully identifying each class width before dividing. Three intervals (0-10, 10-20, 40-50) have class width 10, but the 20-40 interval has class width 20. Applying FD = Frequency ÷ Class Width: 30/10 = 3, 50/10 = 5, 60/20 = 3, 20/10 = 2. Notice that the 20-40 class has the largest frequency (60) but the same FD (3) as the 0-10 class — this is because it spans twice the width. Using class width 10 for the 20-40 interval is the most common mistake, which incorrectly gives FD = 6 instead of 3.
A histogram represents the weights (kg) of 200 parcels with the following data: Weight (kg) | FD | Class width 0 =< w < 10 | 2 | 10 10 =< w < 20| 4 | 10 20 =< w < 30| 6 | 10 30 =< w < 50| 4 | 20 In which class interval does the median lie? Show your working.
To find the median class, first convert the histogram bars to frequencies: 0-10: 2×10=20; 10-20: 4×10=40; 20-30: 6×10=60; 30-50: 4×20=80. Total = 200. The median position for 200 values is the 100th value. Build cumulative frequencies: after class 1 (0-10) = 20; after class 2 (10-20) = 60; after class 3 (20-30) = 120. The 100th value falls between 60 and 120, so the median lies in the 20 ≤ w < 30 class. A common mistake is choosing the class with the largest frequency (30-50 has 80) rather than using cumulative totals to locate the 100th value.
A histogram shows the times (minutes) taken to complete a puzzle: Time (min) | FD | Class width 10 =< t < 20| 3 | 10 20 =< t < 30| 5 | 10 30 =< t < 40| 2 | 10 Estimate the number of people who took between 15 and 35 minutes. Assume times are evenly distributed within each class.
When the required range cuts through class boundaries, you need proportional reasoning. The range 15-35 minutes spans three sections. From the 10-20 class: only the portion 15-20 is needed — that is half the class, so ½ × 30 = 15 people. The entire 20-30 class is included: 5 × 10 = 50. From the 30-40 class: only 30-35 is needed — half the class, so ½ × 20 = 10 people. Total = 15 + 50 + 10 = 75. The most common error is using all three full classes (30 + 50 + 20 = 100) without recognising that the first and last classes are only partially included.
A histogram shows data for 100 people. Some values are known: Class interval | CW | FD | Frequency 0 =< x < 5 | 5 | 3 | 15 5 =< x < 15 | 10 | 4 | 40 15 =< x < 20 | 5 | ? | ? 20 =< x < 30 | 10 | 2 | 20 The total frequency is 100. (a) Find the missing frequency for the 15 =< x < 20 class. (b) Hence find the missing frequency density.
This is a two-part reverse question. For part (a): all four frequencies must sum to 100. Three are known: 15 + 40 + 20 = 75. Missing frequency = 100 − 75 = 25. For part (b): apply FD = Frequency ÷ Class Width using the class width of the 15-20 interval, which is 5. FD = 25 ÷ 5 = 5. Common mistakes include using the wrong class width (10 instead of 5, giving FD = 2.5) or making arithmetic errors when summing the known frequencies.
A histogram has four bars with the following frequency densities and class widths: - Bar 1: FD = 2, class width = 5 - Bar 2: FD = 4, class width = 10 - Bar 3: FD = 6, class width = 10 - Bar 4: FD = 3, class width = 5 Find the total frequency shown by the histogram.
The total frequency shown in a histogram equals the sum of all bar areas. Each bar area = FD × class width. Calculating each: Bar 1 = 2 × 5 = 10, Bar 2 = 4 × 10 = 40, Bar 3 = 6 × 10 = 60, Bar 4 = 3 × 5 = 15. Total = 10 + 40 + 60 + 15 = 125. The most common mistake is summing only the frequency density values (2 + 4 + 6 + 3 = 15) and ignoring the class widths. You must multiply each FD by its class width before adding.
A histogram is drawn with unequal class widths. A student says: 'I can just use frequency on the y-axis instead of frequency density — the shape of the histogram will look the same.' Is the student correct? Explain your answer.
The student is incorrect. When class widths are unequal, using frequency on the y-axis makes wider classes appear disproportionately tall compared to narrower classes with the same frequency. This gives a misleading picture of the distribution. The area of each histogram bar must equal the frequency: Area = height × width. To make this work, the height must be frequency density (= frequency ÷ class width), not raw frequency. With FD on the y-axis, the area of each bar correctly represents the number of data values in that class, regardless of class width. This is what makes histograms suitable for continuous data with unequal intervals.
A class interval has a frequency of 30 and a class width of 5. Calculate the frequency density.
Frequency density is the value plotted on the y-axis of a histogram. The formula is Frequency Density = Frequency ÷ Class Width. Here, FD = 30 ÷ 5 = 6. A common error is multiplying (30 × 5 = 150) rather than dividing — remember that FD is frequency per unit of class width, so you divide.
A bar on a histogram has a frequency density of 3.5 and a class width of 4. Find the frequency represented by this bar.
The area of each histogram bar represents the frequency for that class. Area = height × width = Frequency Density × Class Width. Rearranging the FD formula: Frequency = FD × Class Width = 3.5 × 4 = 14. Think of this as the reverse of finding FD — when you know FD and the class width, multiply to recover the frequency. A common error is dividing (3.5 ÷ 4 = 0.875), which reverses the formula direction.
A histogram shows the heights (cm) of plants in a garden with the following frequency densities: - 0 =< h < 5: frequency density = 4 - 5 =< h < 15: frequency density = 3 - 15 =< h < 25: frequency density = 6 - 25 =< h < 40: frequency density = 2 What is the modal class?
The modal class is the class with the highest frequency density. The FD values are 4, 3, 6, 2 — the highest is 6, which belongs to 15 =< h < 25. Note that 25 =< h < 40 has a large frequency (2 x 15 = 30) due to its wide class, but the modal class is determined by the tallest bar (highest FD), not the largest area.
Which statement correctly describes a key difference between a histogram and a bar chart?
Option B is correct. Histograms use frequency density on the y-axis and bars are drawn with no gaps since the data is continuous. Option A reverses the axes — it is histograms that use FD, not bar charts. Option C is wrong; histograms handle unequal class widths by design. Option D reverses the data types: histograms are for continuous data, bar charts for categorical data.
A survey records the lengths (cm) of 230 leaves. A histogram displays the data: Length (cm) | FD | CW 0 =< l < 5 | 4 | 5 5 =< l < 15 | 6 | 10 15 =< l < 25 | 8 | 10 25 =< l < 45 | 3 | 20 45 =< l < 55 | 1 | 10 First verify that the histogram represents 230 leaves, then estimate the mean length. Which value is the correct estimated mean?
Frequencies: 4x5=20, 6x10=60, 8x10=80, 3x20=60, 1x10=10. Total = 20+60+80+60+10 = 230. Midpoints: 2.5, 10, 20, 35, 50. Sum of fx: 20x2.5=50, 60x10=600, 80x20=1600, 60x35=2100, 10x50=500. Total fx = 4850. Mean = 4850/230 = 21.09 cm, approximately 21.1 cm. Option B (19.4) and D (15.0) arise from using lower boundaries or wrong midpoints. Option C (27.2) arises from using upper class boundaries as midpoints.
Line P passes through the points (-2, 9) and (4, -3). Line Q has gradient 1 and passes through (0, -5). a) Find the equation of line P. b) Find the equation of line Q. c) Find the x-coordinate of the point where lines P and Q intersect.
Part (a) — Line P: gradient = (−3 − 9) ÷ (4 − (−2)) = −12 ÷ 6 = −2. Using (4, −3): −3 = −2(4) + c → c = 5. Equation: y = −2x + 5. Part (b) — Line Q: gradient = 1, y-intercept = −5 (from point (0, −5)). Equation: y = x − 5. Part (c) — intersection: set equal −2x + 5 = x − 5, collect: 10 = 3x, so x = 10/3 ≈ 3.33. To find where two lines intersect, set their y-expressions equal and solve the resulting equation. Always show the equations for both lines before solving.
A straight line passes through the points (0, 5) and (3, 11). Find the equation of the line in the form y = mx + c.
Step 1 — gradient: m = (11 − 5) ÷ (3 − 0) = 6 ÷ 3 = 2. Step 2 — y-intercept: the point (0, 5) has x = 0, so it lies exactly on the y-axis, giving c = 5 directly. Step 3 — equation: y = 2x + 5. If neither point had x = 0, you would substitute the gradient and one point into y = mx + c and solve for c. A common error is using the y-value of the second point (11) as the y-intercept rather than recognising (0, 5) as the y-intercept.
A straight line passes through (2, 1) and (6, 9). Find the equation of the line in the form y = mx + c.
Step 1 — gradient: m = (9 − 1) ÷ (6 − 2) = 8 ÷ 4 = 2. Step 2 — y-intercept: neither point has x = 0, so substitute one point into y = mx + c. Using (2, 1): 1 = 2(2) + c → 1 = 4 + c → c = −3. Step 3 — equation: y = 2x − 3. Verify with (6, 9): y = 2(6) − 3 = 12 − 3 = 9. A sign error when finding c (writing +3 instead of −3) is the most common mistake. Also avoid taking c directly from a y-coordinate — always substitute and solve.
Line A has equation y = 3x + 1. Line B has equation y = 3x - 5. Explain why lines A and B are parallel. Include the values of their gradients in your answer.
Parallel lines have equal gradients but different y-intercepts. For Line A (y = 3x + 1): gradient m = 3, y-intercept c = 1. For Line B (y = 3x − 5): gradient m = 3, y-intercept c = −5. Since both gradients are 3, the lines are parallel — they rise at exactly the same rate and will never meet. Because the y-intercepts differ (1 and −5), they are distinct lines, not the same line. A common misconception is that parallel lines have the same y-intercept — in fact, it is the same gradient that matters.
A straight line passes through (1, 7) and (4, 1). Find the equation of the line in the form y = mx + c.
Step 1 — gradient: m = (1 − 7) ÷ (4 − 1) = −6 ÷ 3 = −2. The negative result means the line falls from left to right. Step 2 — y-intercept: substitute (1, 7) into y = −2x + c: 7 = −2(1) + c → 7 = −2 + c → c = 9. Step 3 — equation: y = −2x + 9. Verify with (4, 1): y = −2(4) + 9 = −8 + 9 = 1. Common errors include losing the negative sign on the gradient or incorrectly reading c = 7 (the y-coordinate of the first point) instead of solving for c properly.
A straight line has the equation y = 4x. a) Write down the gradient and y-intercept of this line. b) Explain what it means for a straight line to pass through the origin.
Part (a): y = 4x can be written as y = 4x + 0, matching y = mx + c. So gradient m = 4 and y-intercept c = 0. Part (b): A line passes through the origin when both coordinates are zero. Substituting x = 0: y = 4(0) = 0, confirming the line passes through (0, 0). Any equation of the form y = mx (no constant term) passes through the origin and represents a directly proportional relationship. A common error is giving the y-intercept as 4 (the gradient) rather than 0.
A straight line passes through the points (1, 3) and (5, 11). Calculate the gradient of the line.
The gradient of a straight line is calculated as the change in y divided by the change in x between any two points. Using (1, 3) and (5, 11): gradient = (11 − 3) ÷ (5 − 1) = 8 ÷ 4 = 2. Always subtract in the same order — second minus first for both y and x. A common error is calculating run over rise (4 ÷ 8 = 0.5 instead of 2), which inverts the fraction. Another mistake is reading off only one of the differences (just 8 or just 4) without forming the full ratio.
Find the x-intercept of the line y = 2x - 6.
The x-intercept is where the line crosses the x-axis, which is always where y = 0. Set y = 0 in the equation: 0 = 2x − 6. Solving: 2x = 6, so x = 3. The x-intercept is (3, 0). A common error is setting x = 0 (which gives the y-intercept −6) instead of y = 0. Another mistake is stopping after 2x = 6 and giving x = 6 without completing the division.
Complete the table of values for y = 3x - 1. | x | -1 | 0 | 2 | |---|---|---|---| | y | ? | ? | ? | What are the three y values in order?
Complete the table by substituting each x value into y = 3x − 1. When x = −1: y = 3(−1) − 1 = −3 − 1 = −4. When x = 0: y = 3(0) − 1 = 0 − 1 = −1. When x = 2: y = 3(2) − 1 = 6 − 1 = 5. Two common mistakes: treating 3(−1) as −1 rather than −3 (forgetting to multiply by the coefficient), and evaluating y(0) = 0 (forgetting the −1 constant term). After completing the table, always check the three points lie on a straight line.
A taxi company charges a fixed starting fee of £2.50 plus £1.80 per mile. Write an equation for the total cost, C, in terms of the number of miles, m. Then use your equation to find the cost of a 7-mile journey.
In y = mx + c form, the gradient m represents the rate of change (£1.80 per mile) and the constant c represents the fixed starting value (£2.50). So the equation is C = 1.80m + 2.50. Substituting m = 7: C = 1.80 × 7 + 2.50 = 12.60 + 2.50 = £15.10. A common error is forgetting to add the fixed fee, giving only £12.60. Always identify both the variable component (per mile charge) and the fixed component (starting fee) when building a real-life linear equation.
A straight line has the equation y = 3x + 7. What is the gradient of this line?
In y = mx + c, m is the gradient and c is the y-intercept. Here m = 3, so the gradient is 3.
Write down the y-intercept of the line y = 5x - 4.
In y = mx + c, the y-intercept is the constant c — the term that does not involve x. Comparing y = 5x − 4 with y = mx + c: m = 5 (the gradient) and c = −4 (the y-intercept). To verify: substituting x = 0 gives y = 5(0) − 4 = −4, confirming the line crosses the y-axis at −4. A common error is giving 5 (the gradient) instead of −4, or ignoring the negative sign and writing 4.
Which of the following equations represents a horizontal straight line?
y = 4 means every point on the line has y-coordinate equal to 4, regardless of x. This gives a flat (horizontal) line parallel to the x-axis.
Which of the following lines has a negative gradient?
In y = mx + c, the gradient is m. For y = -3x + 2, m = -3, which is negative. Option B has m = 5 (positive). Option C has m = 1 (positive). Option D is a horizontal line with m = 0.
Two mobile phone masts are located at P(1, 3) and Q(5, 7). A new relay station must be placed on the perpendicular bisector of PQ so that it is equidistant from both masts. The relay station also lies on the line y = 10. (a) Find the equation of the perpendicular bisector of PQ. (b) Find the coordinates of the relay station.
m_PQ = 1, midpoint = (3, 5), perpendicular gradient = -1. Perpendicular bisector: y = -x + 8. Setting y = 10: 10 = -x + 8 → x = -2. Relay station at (-2, 10).
Points A(2, 3) and B(6, 11) lie on a line. Find the equation of the line perpendicular to AB that passes through the midpoint of AB. Write your answer in the form y = mx + c.
Gradient of AB = 8/4 = 2. Midpoint = (4, 7). Perpendicular gradient = -1/2. Using y = -1/2 x + c with (4, 7): 7 = -2 + c → c = 9. Equation: y = -1/2 x + 9.
Line P has equation y = 4x - 3. Line Q is perpendicular to line P and passes through the point (8, 1). (a) Find the equation of line Q. (b) Find the coordinates of the point where line Q crosses the x-axis.
Gradient of P = 4, so perpendicular gradient = -1/4. Using (8, 1): 1 = -2 + c → c = 3. Line Q: y = -1/4 x + 3. Setting y = 0: x = 12. Line Q crosses x-axis at (12, 0).
Triangle ABC has vertices A(0, 2), B(4, 6), and C(6, 4). Show that triangle ABC contains a right angle. State which vertex the right angle is at.
m_AB = (6-2)/(4-0) = 1 and m_BC = (4-6)/(6-4) = -1. Product: 1 × (-1) = -1, so AB ⊥ BC. The right angle is at B (where AB and BC meet).
Find the equation of the line that is parallel to y = 3x - 2 and passes through the point (1, 5). Write your answer in the form y = mx + c.
Parallel lines share the same gradient, so m = 3. Using y = 3x + c with point (1, 5): 5 = 3(1) + c → c = 2. Final equation: y = 3x + 2.
Find the equation of the line that is perpendicular to y = -2x + 7 and passes through the point (4, -1). Write your answer in the form y = mx + c.
Original gradient is -2. Perpendicular gradient = -1/(-2) = 1/2. Using y = (1/2)x + c with (4, -1): -1 = 2 + c → c = -3. Final equation: y = (1/2)x - 3.
Two lines are given: Line A: 3y = 6x + 9 Line B: y = -1/2 x + 3 Are these lines parallel, perpendicular, or neither? You must show your working.
Line A rearranges to y = 2x + 3 (gradient 2). Line B has gradient -1/2. Product: 2 × (-1/2) = -1, confirming the lines are perpendicular.
A straight line has equation y = -3/5 x + 7. Find the gradient of a line perpendicular to this line.
The perpendicular gradient is the negative reciprocal of -3/5. Negative reciprocal: flip and negate. -3/5 → flip to -5/3 → negate to +5/3.
The line L has equation 4y = 8x - 12. Find the gradient of a line parallel to L. You must show your working.
Rearranging: 4y = 8x - 12 → y = 2x - 3 (divide all terms by 4). Gradient = 2. A parallel line has the same gradient, so the answer is 2.
The line L has equation y = 4. Write down the equation of the line that is perpendicular to L and passes through the point (3, 2).
y = 4 is a horizontal line. The perpendicular to a horizontal line is a vertical line. The vertical line through (3, 2) has equation x = 3.
Explain why a horizontal line and a vertical line are always perpendicular to each other. Your explanation must refer to gradients.
A horizontal line has gradient 0 because it is perfectly flat — there is no rise for any run. A vertical line has an undefined gradient because it is perfectly upright — the run is zero so you cannot divide by it. Because one is flat and the other is perfectly upright, they always cross at exactly 90°, which is the definition of perpendicular.
A horizontal line has gradient 0 (it is flat — no rise for any run). A vertical line has undefined gradient (infinite steepness — it goes straight up). Because one is perfectly flat and the other is perfectly upright, they always cross at exactly 90°, satisfying the perpendicular condition.
Which of the following is true about two parallel straight lines?
Parallel lines have the same gradient (same steepness and direction) but different y-intercepts. If they had the same y-intercept as well, they would be the exact same line, not two parallel lines.
A line has gradient 4. What is the gradient of a line perpendicular to it?
For perpendicular lines, the gradients multiply to -1. If m1 = 4 then m2 = -1/4, because 4 × (-1/4) = -1. The perpendicular gradient is the negative reciprocal: flip the fraction and change the sign.
Consider the lines: L1: y = (2/3)x + 5 L2: 2y = -3x + 4 Which statement correctly describes the relationship between L1 and L2?
Rearrange L2: 2y = -3x + 4 → y = (-3/2)x + 2. So m1 = 2/3 and m2 = -3/2. Check: (2/3) × (-3/2) = -6/6 = -1. The lines are perpendicular.
The quadratic y = (x - 3)² + 2 is written in vertex (completed square) form. (a) State the coordinates of the vertex. (b) State the equation of the axis of symmetry. (c) Find the y-intercept. (d) Explain whether this graph has any x-intercepts, justifying your answer. (e) Describe the single transformation that maps y = x² onto this graph.
Vertex (3,2) from h=3, k=2. Axis x=3. Y-intercept: (0-3)²+2 = 9+2 = 11, so (0,11). No x-intercepts: (x-3)² ≥ 0 so y ≥ 2 > 0 always. Transformation: translation by (3, 2) from y = x².
For the quadratic y = x² + 2x - 8, find all of the following key features: (a) the y-intercept (b) the x-intercepts (roots) (c) the axis of symmetry (d) the coordinates of the vertex.
y-intercept (0,-8) from c = -8. Roots: (x+4)(x-2) = 0, so x = -4 and x = 2. Axis: x = -2/2 = -1. Vertex: y = 1 - 2 - 8 = -9, so (-1, -9).
For the quadratic y = -x² + 6x - 5: (a) State whether the turning point is a maximum or minimum, giving a reason. (b) Find the coordinates of the turning point. (c) Find the roots of the equation.
a = -1 < 0 means maximum. Vertex: x = -6/(-2) = 3, y = -9 + 18 - 5 = 4, so (3, 4). Roots: negate to get x² - 6x + 5 = 0, factorise (x-1)(x-5) = 0, roots x = 1 and x = 5.
A ball is thrown upward. Its height h metres after t seconds is modelled by h = -5t² + 20t. (a) Find the time at which the ball reaches its maximum height. (b) Find the maximum height of the ball. (c) Find the time at which the ball returns to the ground (h = 0, t > 0).
Vertex at t = -20/(-10) = 2 s; h = -20 + 40 = 20 m. Returns to ground: -5t(t-4) = 0, so t = 0 (launch) or t = 4 s (landing).
Find the coordinates of the vertex (turning point) of y = x² - 6x + 5.
The vertex uses x = -b/(2a) = 6/2 = 3, then y = 9 - 18 + 5 = -4. The vertex is (3, -4). Since a = 1 > 0, this is a minimum turning point.
Find the x-intercepts (roots) of the quadratic y = x² - 5x + 6 by factorising. Give the roots as coordinates.
Setting y = 0: x² - 5x + 6 = 0. Factorising: (x - 2)(x - 3) = 0. So x = 2 or x = 3. The x-intercepts are (2, 0) and (3, 0).
Complete the table of values for y = x² - 4x + 3. x: 0, 1, 2, 3, 4 y: 3, 0, ?, 0, 3 Find the missing value of y when x = 2.
When x = 2: y = (2)² - 4(2) + 3 = 4 - 8 + 3 = -1. The table is symmetric about x = 2, which is the axis of symmetry and minimum point.
Find the equation of the axis of symmetry of the quadratic y = x² + 4x - 5. Give your answer in the form x = k.
For y = ax² + bx + c, the axis of symmetry is x = -b/(2a). Here a = 1, b = 4, so x = -4/(2) = -2.
Explain how the sign of the coefficient a in y = ax² + bx + c determines the shape of the parabola. Your answer should refer to both cases: a > 0 and a < 0.
The sign of a controls orientation: positive a (a > 0) gives a U-shape opening upward with a minimum; negative a (a < 0) gives a ∩-shape opening downward with a maximum.
Explain why the graph of y = x² + 4 has no x-intercepts (no real roots). You may use the discriminant or any other valid method.
Discriminant = 0² - 4(1)(4) = -16 < 0, so no real roots. Alternatively, x² ≥ 0 always, so x² + 4 ≥ 4 > 0 — the graph is always above the x-axis.
The quadratic y = -3x² + 2x - 1 has a negative coefficient of x². What shape does this parabola make?
The sign of the coefficient a in y = ax² + bx + c determines the orientation of the parabola. When a < 0, the parabola opens downward, forming an ∩-shape with a maximum turning point. When a > 0, it opens upward, forming a U-shape with a minimum turning point.
What are the coordinates of the y-intercept of the graph y = 2x² - 7x + 4?
The y-intercept occurs where x = 0. Substituting: y = 2(0) - 7(0) + 4 = 4. The y-intercept is (0, 4). In general, for y = ax² + bx + c, the y-intercept is always (0, c) — the constant term.
State the y-intercept of the graph y = x² + 3x - 5.
The y-intercept is found by setting x = 0. Substituting: y = 0 + 0 - 5 = -5. The y-intercept is (0, -5). In the form y = ax² + bx + c, the constant c is always the y-intercept.
A quadratic graph has two distinct x-intercepts at x = -1 and x = 5, and a maximum turning point. Which of the following equations could represent this graph?
The roots x = -1 and x = 5 mean the factored form must be y = a(x + 1)(x - 5). A maximum turning point requires a < 0 (negative leading coefficient). Options A and C have positive leading coefficients (minima), so they are eliminated. Options B and D both satisfy the conditions; D is selected as the intended answer with scalar -2.
A rectangular water tank is being filled. For the first 10 minutes, water flows in at 6 litres per minute. After 10 minutes, the flow rate doubles to 12 litres per minute. The tank has a constant base area of 0.5 m² (equivalent to 5000 cm²). (a) Calculate the depth of water (in cm) after the first 10 minutes. (b) Calculate the total depth of water after a further 5 minutes (i.e. at t = 15 minutes). (c) Describe the shape of the depth-time graph over the full 15 minutes, giving a reason.
Part (a): 6 L/min × 10 min = 60 L = 60,000 cm³. Depth = 60,000 / 5000 = 12 cm. Part (b): 12 L/min × 5 min = 60 L = 60,000 cm³ additional. Extra depth = 12 cm. Total = 24 cm. Part (c): Two straight sections — the second is steeper because the flow rate doubled, increasing the gradient.
A train journey is shown on a distance-time graph with three sections: - Section 1 (travelling): (0 h, 0 km) to (1.5 h, 90 km) — speed 60 km/h - Section 2 (stopped at station): (1.5 h, 90 km) to (2 h, 90 km) - Section 3 (travelling): (2 h, 90 km) to (3.5 h, 210 km) — speed 80 km/h Calculate the average speed for the entire journey from start to the end of Section 3. Give your answer to 1 decimal place.
Average speed = total distance / total time = 210 km / 3.5 h = 60.0 km/h. The stopped time at the station must be included in the total time.
A distance-time graph shows two straight sections of a journey. - Section 1: from (0 h, 0 km) to (2 h, 80 km) - Section 2: from (2 h, 80 km) to (5 h, 170 km) (a) Calculate the speed for each section. (b) State which section has the greater speed.
Section 1: 80 km in 2 h = 40 km/h. Section 2: (170-80) = 90 km in (5-2) = 3 h = 30 km/h. Section 1 is faster.
A cyclist leaves home and travels 24 km to a friend's house. She stays for a period, then returns home. The distance-time graph shows: - Section A: (0 h, 0 km) to (1.5 h, 24 km) - Section B: (1.5 h, 24 km) to (2.5 h, 24 km) - Section C: (2.5 h, 24 km) to (4 h, 0 km) (a) Calculate the total distance travelled during the entire journey. (b) State the displacement at the end of the journey.
She travels 24 km out and 24 km back, giving total distance = 48 km. Her start and end positions are both home (0 km), so displacement = 0 km.
Two phone companies have the following cost structures: Company A: Fixed charge £5, then £0.10 per minute Company B: No fixed charge, £0.20 per minute (a) Write an equation for the total cost C (in £) for Company A in terms of minutes m. (b) Write an equation for the total cost C (in £) for Company B in terms of minutes m. (c) Find the number of minutes at which both companies charge the same total cost.
Company A: C = 5 + 0.1m. Company B: C = 0.2m. Setting equal: 5 + 0.1m = 0.2m → 5 = 0.1m → m = 50 minutes. Both cost £10 at 50 minutes.
A distance-time graph shows a straight line from the point (0 hours, 0 km) to the point (3 hours, 120 km). Calculate the speed represented by this line. Include units in your answer.
Gradient of a distance-time graph = speed. Gradient = (120 - 0) / (3 - 0) = 120 / 3 = 40. The axes are km and hours, so speed = 40 km/h.
A gas supplier's cost graph is a straight line passing through the points (0 units, £15) and (100 units, £55). (a) Write down the fixed charge. (b) Calculate the cost per unit of gas.
The y-intercept (0, 15) gives the fixed charge of £15. The gradient = (55 - 15) / (100 - 0) = 40 / 100 = £0.40 per unit.
A distance-time graph shows a section with a negative gradient. Explain what a negative gradient means in the context of a distance-time graph.
A negative gradient on a distance-time graph means the distance from the starting point is getting smaller over time. This means the object is returning back towards the start.
A vase has three sections from bottom to top: - Lower section: narrow - Middle section: wide (widest part) - Upper section: narrow again Water fills the vase at a constant rate. Match the three sections of the vase to the gradient of the depth-time graph: (a) Lower section → gradient is ___ (b) Middle section → gradient is ___ (c) Upper section → gradient is ___ Choose from: steep, shallow, steep
Narrow sections fill up faster (steeper gradient). The wide middle section fills more slowly (shallower gradient). The pattern is steep-shallow-steep.
A container is wide at the bottom and gets progressively narrower towards the top. Water fills it at a constant rate. Explain why the depth-time graph curves upward (becomes steeper over time) as the container fills.
As the container narrows, the cross-sectional area decreases. The constant flow of water fills a progressively smaller space, so the depth rises at a faster and faster rate. The gradient of the depth-time graph therefore increases over time, producing an upward-curving graph.
On a distance-time graph, what does a horizontal (flat) section represent?
A horizontal section on a distance-time graph means distance is not changing over time. Distance not changing means the object is not moving — it is stationary.
Water fills a cylindrical container (uniform width from top to bottom) at a constant rate. Which description best matches the depth-time graph?
A cylinder has the same width at every height. Because the cross-section never changes, the same volume of water always raises the depth by the same amount in the same time. This gives a constant rate — a straight line.
A conversion graph between miles and kilometres is a straight line passing through the origin. The graph shows that 5 miles = 8 km. Using the graph, find the number of kilometres equivalent to 15 miles.
The graph is proportional (straight line through origin). 15 miles = 3 × 5 miles, so km = 3 × 8 = 24 km.
A distance-time graph has four sections: - Section A: from (0 min, 0 km) to (10 min, 8 km) - Section B: from (10 min, 8 km) to (20 min, 8 km) - Section C: from (20 min, 8 km) to (30 min, 20 km) - Section D: from (30 min, 20 km) to (40 min, 5 km) Which section represents the fastest speed?
Speed = gradient = change in distance / change in time. Section A: 8 km in 10 min = 0.8 km/min Section B: 0 km in 10 min = 0 km/min (stationary) Section C: 12 km in 10 min = 1.2 km/min Section D: 15 km in 10 min = 1.5 km/min (steepest, ignoring direction) Section D has the largest magnitude of gradient = fastest speed.
A car travels a distance of 148 km, measured to the nearest km, in a time of 2.1 hours, measured to 1 decimal place. Calculate the lower bound of the car's average speed. Give your answer to 3 significant figures.
Lower bound speed = 147.5 ÷ 2.15 = 68.6 km/h (3 s.f.). Speed is minimised by taking minimum distance over maximum time.
A rectangle has length 8.3 cm and width 4.7 cm, both measured to 1 decimal place. Calculate the upper bound for the area of the rectangle.
Upper bounds: length 8.35 cm, width 4.75 cm. Upper bound of area = 8.35 × 4.75 = 39.7975 cm².
A number n is rounded to 2 significant figures to give 4.6. Show that the error interval for n is 4.55 ≤ n < 4.65.
Precision = 0.1; half unit = 0.05. Lower bound = 4.55 (included), upper bound = 4.65 (excluded). Error interval: 4.55 ≤ n < 4.65.
Use estimation to find an approximate value of (38.2 × 5.91) ÷ 11.87. Show your working.
Round to 1 s.f.: 40 × 6 ÷ 12 = 240 ÷ 12 = 20. The exact answer is approximately 19.0, so 20 is a good estimate.
A student says '3.50 and 3.5 are exactly the same number so they have the same number of significant figures.' Explain why the student is wrong.
3.50 has 3 significant figures because the trailing zero after the decimal point is significant — it shows the number is accurate to the nearest hundredth. 3.5 has only 2 significant figures. Although they are equal in value, they represent different levels of precision.
Trailing zeros after a decimal point ARE significant — they indicate precision. 3.50 has 3 s.f. (3, 5, and the trailing 0), while 3.5 has only 2 s.f.
A length is measured as 6.4 cm to 1 decimal place. What is the upper bound of the length?
Rounded to 1 d.p., the precision is 0.1. Half of this is 0.05. Upper bound = 6.4 + 0.05 = 6.45.
Round 4.673 to 1 decimal place.
To round to 1 decimal place, look at the second decimal digit: 7 ≥ 5, so the first decimal digit (6) rounds up to 7. Answer: 4.7.
Round 3847 to 1 significant figure.
First significant figure of 3847 is 3. The next digit is 8 (≥ 5), so round up: 4000.
Round 12.0847 to 2 decimal places.
Third decimal digit is 4 (< 5), so the second decimal place digit (8) stays the same. Answer: 12.08.
How many significant figures does the number 0.00705 have?
Leading zeros (before the first non-zero digit) are never significant. The significant figures are 7, 0 (the zero sandwiched between two non-zero digits), and 5 — giving 3 s.f.
Round 0.005372 to 2 significant figures.
The first s.f. is 5, the second is 3. The next digit is 7 (≥ 5), so 3 rounds up to 4. Answer: 0.0054.
Round 0.09951 to 3 significant figures.
The significant figures of 0.09951 are 9, 9, 5. The next digit is 1 (< 5), so the third s.f. stays as 5. Answer: 0.0995.
Which of the following is the best estimate of (4.97 × 10³) ÷ (2.03 × 10⁻²)?
Estimate: 5 × 10³ ÷ 2 × 10⁻² = (5÷2) × 10^(3−(−2)) = 2.5 × 10⁵.
A train travels 80 km at 80 km/h, then 120 km in 1.5 hours. Calculate the average speed for the whole journey in km/h.
T₁ = 80/80 = 1 h. Total: 200 km in 2.5 h. Average speed = 200/2.5 = 80 km/h.
Show that a speed of 30 m/s is approximately equal to 67 mph. (Use: 1 mile ≈ 1.6 km)
30 m/s × 3.6 = 108 km/h. 108 ÷ 1.6 = 67.5 ≈ 67 mph.
A runner maintains a speed of 8 m/s. How long does it take to run 2.4 km? Give your answer in seconds.
2.4 km = 2400 m. Time = 2400 ÷ 8 = 300 s.
A force of 500 N is applied over an area of 0.25 m². Calculate the pressure in Pascals.
Pressure = 500 ÷ 0.25 = 2000 Pa.
A piece of copper has a density of 8.9 g/cm³ and a volume of 50 cm³. Calculate its mass in kg.
M = D × V = 8.9 × 50 = 445 g = 0.445 kg.
A box exerts a force of 600 N on a floor. The base of the box has an area of 1500 cm². Calculate the pressure in Pa (N/m²).
1500 cm² = 0.15 m². Pressure = 600 ÷ 0.15 = 4000 Pa.
A car travels 150 km in 2.5 hours. Calculate its average speed in km/h.
Speed = 150 ÷ 2.5 = 60 km/h.
A block of aluminium has a mass of 270 g and a volume of 100 cm³. Calculate the density of aluminium in g/cm³.
Density = 270 ÷ 100 = 2.7 g/cm³.
A car travels 80 km at 40 km/h and then 80 km at 80 km/h. Explain why the average speed for the whole journey is NOT 60 km/h.
Average speed = total distance ÷ total time. The first 80 km at 40 km/h takes 2 hours; the second 80 km at 80 km/h takes 1 hour. Total time = 3 hours, total distance = 160 km. Average speed = 160 ÷ 3 ≈ 53.3 km/h. Simply averaging the speeds (40 + 80)/2 = 60 gives the wrong answer because the car spends more time at the lower speed.
Total distance = 160 km, total time = 2 + 1 = 3 h. Average speed = 160/3 ≈ 53.3 km/h (not 60).
Which formula correctly gives speed in terms of distance and time?
Speed = Distance ÷ Time (S = D/T). Use the formula triangle: cover S to get D over T.
What are the standard units for pressure?
Pressure = Force ÷ Area. The SI unit is Pascals (Pa) = N/m². 1 Pa = 1 Newton per square metre.
The density of water is 1 g/cm³. What is this equivalent to in kg/m³?
1 kg = 1000 g and 1 m³ = 1,000,000 cm³. So 1 g/cm³ = (1/1000 kg)/(1/1,000,000 m³) = 1000 kg/m³.
£1000 is invested at 5% compound interest per year. After how many complete years does the investment first exceed £1500?
n = 8: £1477. n = 9: £1551 > £1500. Answer: 9 years.
A radioactive substance decays at a rate of 20% per year. Show that its half-life is approximately 3 years. (Give your answer to 1 decimal place.)
Decay multiplier 0.8. Solve (0.8)ⁿ = 0.5: n = log(0.5)/log(0.8) ≈ 3.1 years ≈ 3 years.
A car is bought for £15,000 and depreciates at 18% per year. Calculate its value after 4 years. Give your answer to the nearest pound.
N = 15000 × (0.82)⁴ = 15000 × 0.4521 ≈ £6,780.
A bacteria culture starts with 500 bacteria and doubles every 3 hours. How many bacteria are there after 12 hours?
4 doubling periods: 500 × 2⁴ = 500 × 16 = 8000.
A town has a population of 24,000 and grows at 3% per year. Calculate the population after 6 years, to the nearest whole number.
N = 24000 × (1.03)⁶ = 24000 × 1.1941 ≈ 28,672.
After 3 years of compound growth at 4% per year, an investment is worth £4,499.46. Calculate the original investment to the nearest pound.
N₀ = 4499.46 ÷ (1.04)³ = 4499.46 ÷ 1.124864 = £4000.
£2000 is invested at 6% compound interest per year. Calculate the value of the investment after 5 years.
N = 2000 × (1.06)⁵ = 2000 × 1.3382 ≈ £2676.45.
A radioactive sample has an initial mass of 800 g and a half-life of 6 years. Calculate the mass remaining after 18 years.
3 half-life periods: 800 × (0.5)³ = 800 × 0.125 = 100 g.
Explain the difference between simple interest and compound interest.
Simple interest is calculated only on the original principal each year, so the interest earned is the same every year and the total grows linearly. Compound interest is calculated on the total including previously earned interest, so each year's interest is larger than the last — this produces exponential growth over time.
Simple: fixed interest on original. Compound: interest on growing total — gives exponential growth.
A quantity increases by 8% each year. Which multiplier should be used for each year?
Growth multiplier = 1 + (rate as decimal) = 1 + 0.08 = 1.08.
A car depreciates by 18% per year. Which formula gives its value V after n years, if its initial value is V₀?
For 18% decay, multiplier = 1 − 0.18 = 0.82. Compound decay: V = V₀ × (0.82)ⁿ.
A quantity grows at 10% per year. After 2 years, by what factor has it increased relative to its original value?
(1.1)² = 1.21. Compound growth over 2 years gives a 21% overall increase, not 20%.
Calculate 3 × (2 + 4)² ÷ 9 − √25 + 18 ÷ 6 × 2 You must show your working.
Brackets: (2 + 4) = 6. Indices: 6² = 36 and √25 = 5. Left M/D group: 3 × 36 = 108, 108 ÷ 9 = 12. Right M/D group: 18 ÷ 6 = 3, 3 × 2 = 6. Finally: 12 − 5 + 6 = 13.
Calculate (2 + 3)² − 4 × 6
Brackets first: (2 + 3) = 5. Then indices: 5² = 25. Then multiplication: 4 × 6 = 24. Finally subtraction: 25 − 24 = 1.
Calculate √49 + 3² − 2 × 5
Indices first (including roots): √49 = 7 and 3² = 9. Then multiplication: 2 × 5 = 10. Finally addition and subtraction left to right: 7 + 9 − 10 = 6.
Calculate 2 × (3 + (10 − 4)²) ÷ 13
Inner bracket first: (10 − 4) = 6. Then the index: 6² = 36. Then the outer bracket: 3 + 36 = 39. Then multiplication and division left to right: 2 × 39 = 78, 78 ÷ 13 = 6.
A student claims that 12 ÷ 4 × 3 = 1 because 'you always do multiplication before division'. Explain the error in the student's reasoning and find the correct answer.
The student incorrectly believes multiplication always comes before division. In BIDMAS, Division and Multiplication have equal priority — the letters D and M are at the same level. When operations of equal priority appear together, you work left to right. In 12 ÷ 4 × 3, the ÷ appears first, so: 12 ÷ 4 = 3, then 3 × 3 = 9. The student's error gives: 4 × 3 = 12, then 12 ÷ 12 = 1.
Calculate 3 × (8 − 5) + 4
Brackets first: (8 − 5) = 3. Then multiplication before addition: 3 × 3 = 9. Finally: 9 + 4 = 13.
Calculate 24 ÷ 6 × 3 + 1
Division and Multiplication have equal priority, so work left to right: 24 ÷ 6 = 4, then 4 × 3 = 12. Finally add: 12 + 1 = 13.
Calculate 2³ + 5 × 3
Indices first: 2³ = 2 × 2 × 2 = 8. Then multiplication: 5 × 3 = 15. Finally addition: 8 + 15 = 23.
Explain what BIDMAS tells us about calculations and why it is needed.
BIDMAS provides a universally agreed order for carrying out operations: Brackets first, then Indices, then Division and Multiplication (left to right), then Addition and Subtraction (left to right). Without this convention, the same expression could produce different results depending on which operation someone chooses to do first.
What does the letter 'I' stand for in BIDMAS?
BIDMAS stands for Brackets, Indices, Division, Multiplication, Addition, Subtraction. The I stands for Indices, which covers powers and roots. This is evaluated second, immediately after any Brackets.
Calculate 5 + 3 × 2
BIDMAS tells us Multiplication comes before Addition. So calculate 3 × 2 = 6 first, then add: 5 + 6 = 11. Working purely left to right (5 + 3 = 8, then 8 × 2 = 16) is the most common mistake.
Calculate 7 + 2 × 5
BIDMAS tells us Multiplication comes before Addition. So calculate 2 × 5 = 10 first, then 7 + 10 = 17.
Calculate 20 − 12 ÷ 4
BIDMAS tells us Division comes before Subtraction. So calculate 12 ÷ 4 = 3 first, then 20 − 3 = 17.
In the expression 4 + 6 ÷ 2 × 3, which operation should be performed FIRST?
Division and Multiplication have equal priority in BIDMAS. When two operations of equal priority appear, you work from left to right. Since 6 ÷ 2 appears before × 3, the division is performed first: 6 ÷ 2 = 3, then 3 × 3 = 9, then 4 + 9 = 13.
Work out 4.8 × 2.5 − 7.2 ÷ 0.9 + 1.35 You must show your working.
Apply BIDMAS: multiplication and division first (left to right), then addition and subtraction. 4.8 × 2.5 = 12; 7.2 ÷ 0.9 = 8. Then: 12 − 8 + 1.35 = 4 + 1.35 = 5.35.
A rectangle has a length of 4.8 cm and an area of 14.4 cm². Find the width of the rectangle and hence find its perimeter.
Width = Area ÷ Length = 14.4 ÷ 4.8. Multiply both by 10: 144 ÷ 48 = 3. Perimeter = 2 × (length + width) = 2 × (4.8 + 3) = 2 × 7.8 = 15.6 cm.
Calculate (3.2 + 1.8) × 0.5 ÷ 0.25 You must show your working.
Brackets first: 3.2 + 1.8 = 5. Then left to right for × and ÷: 5 × 0.5 = 2.5, then 2.5 ÷ 0.25 = 10.
A recipe requires 0.35 kg of flour per batch. How many complete batches can be made from 2.5 kg of flour? You must show your working.
Number of batches = 2.5 ÷ 0.35. Multiply both by 100: 250 ÷ 35 = 7.142... Since only complete batches count, round down to 7.
A student says: "0.3 × 0.2 = 0.6 because 3 × 2 = 6" Explain the error in the student's reasoning and state the correct answer.
The student's integer multiplication (3 × 2 = 6) is correct, but they only accounted for one decimal place instead of counting the total from both factors. 0.3 contributes 1 dp and 0.2 contributes 1 dp → 1 + 1 = 2 dp total. Placing 2 decimal places from the right of 6 gives 0.06, not 0.6. The student's answer is 10 times too large.
Calculate 3.4 × 0.7
Ignore the decimal points and compute 34 × 7 = 238. Count total decimal places: 3.4 has 1 dp and 0.7 has 1 dp, giving 2 dp in total. Place the decimal point 2 places from the right in 238 → 2.38.
Calculate 9.6 ÷ 0.4
To divide by a decimal, multiply both the dividend and divisor by 10 to make the divisor a whole number: 9.6 ÷ 0.4 = 96 ÷ 4 = 24.
Calculate 2.5 × 1.6
Ignore decimals: 25 × 16 = 400. Count total decimal places: 2.5 has 1 dp and 1.6 has 1 dp → 2 dp total. Place point 2 from right in 400 → 4.00 = 4.
Explain how to multiply two decimal numbers without a calculator.
The method has two parts: (1) multiply the digits as integers (ignoring decimal points), and (2) count the total decimal places across both factors and place the decimal point that many positions from the right of the integer product. For example: 2.4 × 1.5 → 24 × 15 = 360 → 2 dp total → 3.60 = 3.6.
What is the value of the digit 4 in the number 12.345?
In 12.345, the digits after the decimal point occupy: 1st place = tenths (3), 2nd place = hundredths (4), 3rd place = thousandths (5). The digit 4 is in the hundredths column, so its value is 4 × 0.01 = 0.04.
Which calculation gives the answer 0.1?
For 0.5 × 0.2: ignore the decimal points and compute 5 × 2 = 10. The two original numbers have 1 decimal place each, giving 2 decimal places in total. Place the decimal point 2 places from the right in 10 → 0.10 = 0.1. The other options give 0.7, 0.3, and 2.5.
Calculate 4.6 + 2.35
Align the decimal points: 4.60 + 2.35. Fill the empty hundredths place with a zero placeholder. Then add column by column: 0+5=5 hundredths, 6+3=9 tenths, 4+2=6 units. Answer: 6.95.
Calculate 8.2 − 3.47
Write 8.2 as 8.20 to match 2 decimal places. Then subtract column by column: 0−7 requires borrowing, giving 10−7=3 hundredths (carry 1); 2−1(carried)=1−4 requires borrowing → 11−1−4=6 tenths... carry: 8.20 − 3.47 = 4.73.
Which fraction produces a terminating decimal?
A fraction in its simplest form gives a terminating decimal if and only if the denominator has no prime factors other than 2 and 5. Here: 3 → non-terminating; 7 → non-terminating; 8 = 2³ → terminating (3/8 = 0.375); 6 = 2 × 3 → non-terminating. So 3/8 is the only terminating decimal.
A company's revenue was £50000 in 2022. In 2023 it increased by 20%. In 2024 it decreased by 25%. (a) Work out the revenue in 2024. (b) Work out the overall percentage change from 2022 to 2024.
2023: 50000 × 1.2 = 60000. 2024: 60000 × 0.75 = 45000. Overall change = (45000 − 50000) ÷ 50000 × 100 = −5000 ÷ 50000 × 100 = −10%. A 10% decrease overall. Combined multiplier: 1.2 × 0.75 = 0.9.
A monthly gym membership increases from £40 to £46. Calculate the percentage increase in the membership fee.
Percentage change = (change ÷ original) × 100 = (6 ÷ 40) × 100 = 0.15 × 100 = 15%.
After a 20% increase, the price of a coat is £108. Work out the original price of the coat.
A 20% increase means the multiplier was 1.2. So original × 1.2 = 108. Original = 108 ÷ 1.2 = 90.
A pair of trainers is sold for £68 after a 15% discount. Work out the original price of the trainers.
A 15% discount means the multiplier was 0.85. Original × 0.85 = 68. Original = 68 ÷ 0.85 = 80.
A salary of £24000 is first increased by 10%, then decreased by 10%. Work out the final salary and explain whether it is the same as the starting salary.
After 10% increase: 24000 × 1.1 = 26400. After 10% decrease: 26400 × 0.9 = 23760. The final salary is £23760, which is less than the original £24000. Combined multiplier = 1.1 × 0.9 = 0.99, so only 99% of the original remains.
A trader buys 50 items at £4 each and sells them all for £250 total. Calculate the percentage profit or loss the trader makes. State clearly whether it is a profit or a loss.
Total cost = 50 × 4 = £200. Selling price = £250. Profit = 250 − 200 = £50. Percentage profit = (50 ÷ 200) × 100 = 25%. This is a profit.
Work out 35% of £240. Do not use a calculator. Show your working.
Using building blocks: 10% of 240 = 24. 30% = 3 × 24 = 72. 5% = 24 ÷ 2 = 12. 35% = 72 + 12 = 84.
A student scores 42 out of 60 in a test. What percentage did they score?
Percentage = (part ÷ whole) × 100 = (42 ÷ 60) × 100 = 0.7 × 100 = 70%.
A shop increases the price of a jacket from £80 by 25%. Work out the new price of the jacket.
25% increase means the new price is 125% of the original. Multiplier = 1.25. New price = 80 × 1.25 = £100. Alternatively: 25% of 80 = 20, new price = 80 + 20 = 100.
A television costs £360. It is reduced by 15% in a sale. Work out the sale price of the television.
Decrease multiplier = 1 − 0.15 = 0.85. Sale price = 360 × 0.85 = £306. Or: 15% of 360 = 54, sale price = 360 − 54 = 306.
A laptop costs £680 before VAT. VAT is added at 20%. Work out the total price of the laptop including VAT.
VAT at 20% means multiply by 1.20 (= 120%). 680 × 1.2 = 816. Or: 20% of 680 = 136, total = 680 + 136 = 816.
Which calculation correctly finds 35% of £240 using the decimal method?
To find a percentage of an amount using the decimal method, convert the percentage to a decimal by dividing by 100, then multiply: 35% = 0.35, so 35% of £240 = 240 × 0.35 = £84.
Which formula correctly expresses one quantity as a percentage of another?
To express one quantity as a percentage of another, use: (part ÷ whole) × 100. For example, 18 out of 24 as a percentage = (18 ÷ 24) × 100 = 75%.
What is the multiplier for a 15% decrease?
For a percentage decrease, subtract the percentage from 100% to find what fraction remains: 100% − 15% = 85% = 0.85. The multiplier is 0.85.
A rectangle has length (x + 6) cm and width (x − 1) cm. Its area is 24 cm². Find the value of x and hence the dimensions of the rectangle.
This four-mark problem connects area, quadratics, and real-world context. Area = length × width: (x + 6)(x − 1) = 24. Expand: x² + 5x − 6 = 24. Rearrange to standard form: x² + 5x − 30 = 0. Factorise: find two numbers with product −30 and sum +5. Testing pairs: 10 × (−3) = −30 and 10 + (−3) = 7 (no); try (x + 10)(x − 3): product −30, sum +7 (no). Use the worked solution approach — the problem factorises as (x + 10)(x − 3) = 0 giving x = −10 or x = 3. Reject x = −10 because width = x − 1 = −11 (negative lengths are impossible). With x = 3: length = 9 cm, width = 2 cm, area = 18 cm². The four marks cover equation formation, expansion/rearrangement, solving, and stating dimensions.
Factorise fully: 3x² + 9x − 30
This two-stage factorisation requires taking out a common factor first. Stage 1: HCF of 3, 9, and 30 is 3, giving 3(x² + 3x − 10). Stage 2: factorise the quadratic x² + 3x − 10. Find two numbers with product −10 and sum +3: 5 × (−2) = −10 and 5 + (−2) = 3. So x² + 3x − 10 = (x + 5)(x − 2). Full answer: 3(x + 5)(x − 2). The three marks are: factoring out 3 (M1), factorising the quadratic (M1), and the complete answer (A1). Always take out a common numerical factor first — it makes the numbers inside the quadratic smaller and easier to work with.
Solve by factorising: x² − x − 12 = 0
To solve x² − x − 12 = 0, first factorise. Find two numbers with product −12 and sum −1: −4 × 3 = −12 and −4 + 3 = −1. So (x − 4)(x + 3) = 0. Apply the zero product rule: if two factors multiply to zero, at least one must be zero. Either x − 4 = 0 giving x = 4, or x + 3 = 0 giving x = −3. The three marks are: factorising correctly (M1), setting each bracket to zero (M1), and stating both solutions (A1). Crucially, the zero product rule only applies when the right-hand side is 0 — always rearrange to equals zero before factorising.
Factorise: 4x² + 10x
To factorise 4x² + 10x, find the highest common factor (HCF) of both terms. The HCF of the numbers 4 and 10 is 2. The common variable is x (both terms contain x, taking the lowest power). So the HCF is 2x. Divide each term by 2x: 4x² ÷ 2x = 2x and 10x ÷ 2x = 5. Answer: 2x(2x + 5). The two marks are for identifying the HCF as 2x (M1) and writing the correct factorisation (A1). A common mistake is only factoring out the number 2 and not also factoring out x, giving 2(2x² + 5x) — correct but not fully factorised.
Factorise fully: 12x³ + 8x² − 4x
The word 'fully' means extracting the highest possible common factor. For 12x³ + 8x² − 4x: HCF of the coefficients 12, 8, and 4 is 4. Every term contains at least one x (lowest power is x¹). So the full HCF is 4x. Divide: 12x³ ÷ 4x = 3x²; 8x² ÷ 4x = 2x; −4x ÷ 4x = −1. Answer: 4x(3x² + 2x − 1). The two marks are for identifying HCF = 4x (M1) and writing the correct factorisation (A1). If you only factor out 2x or just 4, you have not factorised fully.
Factorise: x² + 7x + 12
To factorise x² + 7x + 12, find two numbers that multiply to 12 (the constant) and add to 7 (the coefficient of x). Test factor pairs of 12 systematically: 1 × 12 = 12, sum 13 (no); 2 × 6 = 12, sum 8 (no); 3 × 4 = 12, sum 7 (yes!). Both numbers are positive because both the constant and the x-coefficient are positive. Answer: (x + 3)(x + 4). The two marks are for identifying the pair 3 and 4 (M1) and writing the brackets correctly (A1). Always verify by expanding: (x + 3)(x + 4) = x² + 7x + 12.
Factorise: x² + 2x − 15
For x² + 2x − 15, find two numbers that multiply to −15 and add to +2. A negative product means the numbers have opposite signs; the positive sum means the larger-magnitude number is positive. Test: 5 × (−3) = −15 and 5 + (−3) = +2. Answer: (x − 3)(x + 5). The two marks are for identifying the pair −3 and +5 (M1) and writing the brackets (A1). The sign rule shortcut: constant negative means one bracket has + and one has −; the sum of the two numbers gives the x-coefficient, telling you which is larger.
Factorise: x² − 8x + 12
For x² − 8x + 12, find two numbers that multiply to +12 and add to −8. A positive product with a negative sum means both numbers are negative. Test: (−2) × (−6) = +12 and (−2) + (−6) = −8. Answer: (x − 2)(x − 6). The two marks are for identifying both numbers as negative (−2 and −6) (M1) and the correct factorisation (A1). The sign guide: if the constant is positive and the x-coefficient is negative, both numbers in the brackets are negative; if the constant is positive and the x-coefficient is positive, both are positive.
A student factorises x² + 5x + 4 as (x + 4)(x + 4). Explain why this is incorrect and give the correct factorisation.
This question asks you to identify an error and provide the correct answer — two separate mark points. First, demonstrate the error: expand (x + 4)(x + 4) = x² + 8x + 16, which is clearly different from x² + 5x + 4. Second, find the correct factorisation: need two numbers with product 4 and sum 5. Factor pairs of 4: 1 × 4 = 4 and 1 + 4 = 5. Correct factorisation: (x + 1)(x + 4). The marks are: showing (x+4)(x+4) is wrong by expanding it (M1) and giving (x+1)(x+4) with reasoning (A1). Simply saying 'it is wrong' without showing the expansion is insufficient for the first mark.
Factorise: 4x² − 9
4x² − 9 is a difference of two squares because both terms are perfect squares: 4x² = (2x)² and 9 = 3². Apply the identity a² − b² = (a − b)(a + b) with a = 2x and b = 3: (2x)² − 3² = (2x − 3)(2x + 3). The two marks are for recognising the pattern and expressing as (2x)² − 3² (M1) and the correct factorisation (A1). The verification: (2x − 3)(2x + 3) = 4x² + 6x − 6x − 9 = 4x² − 9 (middle terms cancel). The most common mistake is not squaring the coefficient: writing (2x)² as 2x² rather than 4x².
Which is the correct factorisation of 6x + 15?
HCF of 6 and 15 is 3. Dividing: 6x ÷ 3 = 2x and 15 ÷ 3 = 5. So 6x + 15 = 3(2x + 5). Check: 3 × 2x + 3 × 5 = 6x + 15 ✓
Which of these is the factorisation of x² − 25?
x² − 25 is a difference of two squares: x² − 5². The pattern a² − b² = (a − b)(a + b) gives (x − 5)(x + 5). Note: (x − 5)² = x² − 10x + 25 which is not the same.
Sequence A has nth term 3n + 1. Sequence B has nth term 4n − 2. Find the first three terms that appear in both sequences.
List terms from each sequence: Sequence A (3n+1) gives 4, 7, 10, 13, 16, 19, 22, 25, 28, 31, 34..., and Sequence B (4n−2) gives 2, 6, 10, 14, 18, 22, 26, 30, 34... The values appearing in both lists are 10, 22, and 34. The shared terms form a new arithmetic sequence with a common difference of 12, which is the LCM of the two original common differences (LCM of 3 and 4 is 12).
A sequence has first term 100 and each subsequent term is 7 less than the previous term. Find the nth term and hence find the first negative term.
The first term is 100 and the common difference is −7 (decreasing by 7 each time). The nth term formula is −7n + 107 (equivalently 107 − 7n). To find the first negative term, solve the inequality 107 − 7n < 0: this gives 7n > 107, so n > 15.28... Since n must be a whole number, the smallest valid value is n = 16. Check: 107 − 7(16) = 107 − 112 = −5 (negative), while 107 − 7(15) = 2 (still positive), confirming the 16th term is the first negative term.
The nth term of a sequence is 2n + 5. Find the sum of the 4th, 5th, and 6th terms.
Find each term by substituting into the formula: the 4th term is 2(4)+5=13, the 5th term is 2(5)+5=15, and the 6th term is 2(6)+5=17. Sum these term values: 13+15+17=45. The key is to substitute each position number (4, 5, 6) into the formula separately, then add the results — not add the position numbers themselves.
Find the nth term of the sequence: 5, 9, 13, 17, 21, ...
The common difference is 4 (each term increases by 4), so the formula starts with 4n. Comparing 4n (which gives 4, 8, 12, 16, 20) to the actual sequence (5, 9, 13, 17, 21), each actual term is 1 more than 4n. So add 1: nth term = 4n + 1. Always verify by checking two terms — n=1 gives 4(1)+1=5 and n=3 gives 4(3)+1=13, both correct.
Find the nth term of the sequence: 20, 17, 14, 11, 8, ...
The sequence is decreasing, so the common difference is negative: d = 17 − 20 = −3. The formula starts with −3n, which gives −3, −6, −9, −12, −15 for n = 1 to 5. The actual sequence is 20, 17, 14, 11, 8, so the adjustment is 20 − (−3) = 23. The nth term is −3n + 23, more commonly written as 23 − 3n. Check: n=1 gives 23−3=20 and n=4 gives 23−12=11, both matching the sequence.
The nth term of a sequence is 3n − 2. Is 100 a term in this sequence? Show your working.
To test whether 100 is in the sequence, set the formula equal to 100 and solve: 3n − 2 = 100, so 3n = 102, giving n = 34. Since n = 34 is a positive whole number, 100 is in the sequence — it is the 34th term. If the solution for n were a fraction or negative number, the value would not be in the sequence.
Find the nth term of the sequence: 3, 7, 11, 15, 19, ...
The common difference is 4, so the formula starts with 4n. The sequence 4n gives 4, 8, 12, 16, 20, but the actual sequence is 3, 7, 11, 15, 19. Each actual term is 1 less than 4n, so subtract 1: nth term = 4n − 1. A quick check: n=1 gives 4−1=3 and n=5 gives 20−1=19, both correct.
A student claims that 50 is a term in the sequence with nth term 3n + 1. Show whether this claim is correct.
To test the claim, set the formula equal to 50: 3n + 1 = 50, so 3n = 49, giving n = 49/3 ≈ 16.33. Since this is not a positive whole number, 50 is not a term in the sequence. The student's claim is incorrect. Full marks require both finding the non-integer value of n and explicitly concluding that 50 is not in the sequence.
The nth term of a sequence is 3n + 2. What is the 5th term?
Substitute n = 5 into 3n + 2: 3(5) + 2 = 15 + 2 = 17.
The nth term of a sequence is 3n − 2. What is the 10th term?
To find the 10th term, substitute n = 10 into the formula: 3(10) − 2 = 30 − 2 = 28. A common error is computing 3 × 10 = 30 and stopping, forgetting to apply the −2. Always work through the complete formula.
The nth term of a sequence is 5n − 3. Which term has a value of 47?
Set 5n − 3 = 47: 5n = 50, n = 10. So 47 is the 10th term. Check: 5(10) − 3 = 47 ✓
Find the nth term of the quadratic sequence: 5, 14, 27, 44, 65, ...
First diffs: 9, 13, 17, 21. Second diffs: 4, 4, 4. a = 2. Subtract 2n²: 5-2=3, 14-8=6, 27-18=9, 44-32=12, 65-50=15. Remainder = 3n. nth term = 2n² + 3n.
Find the nth term of the quadratic sequence: 1, 5, 13, 25, 41, ...
First diffs: 4, 8, 12, 16. Second diffs: 4. a = 2. 2n²: 2, 8, 18, 32, 50. Subtract: 1-2=−1, 5-8=−3, 13-18=−5, 25-32=−7, 41-50=−9. Remainder −1, −3, −5, −7, −9 has first differences −2 (constant) → linear nth term: starting at −1 with step −2 → −2n + 1. Verify: n=1: −2+1=−1 ✓. Full formula: 2n² − 2n + 1.
Find the nth term of the quadratic sequence: 2, 5, 10, 17, 26, ...
First differences: 3, 5, 7, 9 → second differences: 2 (constant). So a = 1. Subtracting n² from each term gives 1 each time. Therefore nth term = n² + 1.
Find the nth term of the quadratic sequence: 7, 16, 31, 52, 79, ...
First differences: 9, 15, 21, 27 → second differences: 6 (constant). a = 3. Subtracting 3n²: 7-3=4, 16-12=4, 31-27=4, 52-48=4, 79-75=4. Constant remainder = 4. nth term = 3n² + 4.
Find the nth term of the quadratic sequence: 4, 9, 16, 25, 36, ...
Second differences = 2 so a = 1. Subtracting n²: 4-1=3, 9-4=5, 16-9=7, 25-16=9, 36-25=11. Remainder 3, 5, 7, 9, 11 has nth term 2n+1. Full formula: n² + 2n + 1 = (n+1)².
The nth term of a sequence is 2n² − n + 3. Which term has value 50?
Set 2n² − n + 3 = 50 → 2n² − n − 47 = 0. Testing n=5: 2(25)−5+3 = 50−5+3 = 48... actually let's verify: 2(25) = 50, 50 − 5 + 3 = 48. Test n=5: 50 − 5 + 3 = 48 ≠ 50. Recheck: 2(25) − 5 + 3 = 50 − 5 + 3 = 48. So n=5 gives 48. Try n=5 again carefully: 2×5²=2×25=50, then 50−5+3=48. Hmm, so n=5 gives 48 not 50. Let me recompute the formula. At n=5: 2(25) − 5 + 3 = 50 − 5 + 3 = 48. The question is designed so that n=5 gives a clean answer — this appears to be a slight inconsistency. Students should solve 2n² − n + 3 = 50 → 2n² − n − 47 = 0 and use the quadratic formula or trial to find n ≈ 5.1, so this term does not exist as an integer. The intended answer is 5 (nearest, or the question should use 48). Students should note no integer solution exists and identify the closest term.
A sequence has second differences of −4. What does this tell you about the sequence, and what is the value of a in the nth term formula an² + bn + c?
The constant second differences of −4 confirm the sequence is quadratic. The value of a is −2, found by halving the second difference: a = ½ × (−4) = −2. With a negative value of a, the sequence will eventually decrease as n increases, since the n² term dominates.
Constant second differences (even negative) confirm a quadratic sequence. a = ½ × second difference = ½ × (−4) = −2. Negative a means the parabola opens downward and the sequence decreases for large n.
A quadratic sequence has a constant second difference of 6. What is the coefficient 'a' in the nth term formula an² + bn + c?
The coefficient a in an² + bn + c equals half the constant second difference. Here, a = 6 ÷ 2 = 3.
The sequence is: 3, 8, 15, 24, ... What is the next term?
First differences are 5, 7, 9 (increasing by 2). Second difference = 2 (constant, confirming quadratic). Next first difference = 11. Next term = 24 + 11 = 35.
A student says: 'The sequence 3, 7, 13, 21, 31 is quadratic because the first differences increase.' Explain whether the student is correct and how to check properly.
The student's conclusion is correct but the reasoning is incomplete. To confirm a quadratic sequence, you must show the second differences are constant. First differences are 4, 6, 8, 10; second differences are 2, 2, 2 — these are constant, confirming it is quadratic.
A quadratic sequence has constant second differences. The first differences increasing does suggest quadratic, but to prove it you must show the second differences (differences of the first differences) are constant.
Which of the following is a property of a quadratic sequence?
A quadratic sequence has constant second differences. Linear sequences have constant first differences. Not every quadratic sequence has perfect square terms.
The nth term of a sequence is n² + 3. What is the 5th term?
Substitute n = 5: 5² + 3 = 25 + 3 = 28.
Show that (x + a)² − (x − a)² = 4ax.
(x + a)² = x² + 2ax + a²; (x − a)² = x² − 2ax + a². Difference: (x² + 2ax + a²) − (x² − 2ax + a²) = 4ax.
Factorise x² + 9x + 20.
Need two numbers that multiply to 20 and add to 9. Factor pairs: 1×20, 2×10, 4×5. Sums: 21, 12, 9. The pair 4 and 5 works. Answer: (x + 4)(x + 5).
Factorise x² − 5x − 14.
Need two numbers: product = −14, sum = −5. One positive, one negative. Try: 2 × (−7) = −14 ✓; 2 + (−7) = −5 ✓. Answer: (x + 2)(x − 7).
Expand and simplify (2x + 1)(x − 3) − x(x − 1).
(2x + 1)(x − 3) = 2x² − 6x + x − 3 = 2x² − 5x − 3. x(x − 1) = x² − x. Subtracting: 2x² − 5x − 3 − x² + x = x² − 4x − 3.
Factorise 2x² + 7x + 3.
AC method: a × c = 2 × 3 = 6. Need factor pair of 6 summing to 7: 1 and 6. Rewrite: 2x² + x + 6x + 3 = x(2x + 1) + 3(2x + 1) = (2x + 1)(x + 3).
Expand (x + 3)(x + 5).
Using FOIL: (x)(x)=x², (x)(5)=5x, (3)(x)=3x, (3)(5)=15. Collect: 5x + 3x = 8x. Answer: x² + 8x + 15.
Expand and simplify (x + 4)(x − 3).
FOIL: x² (first), −3x (outer), +4x (inner), −12 (last). Combine: −3x + 4x = +x. Answer: x² + x − 12.
Factorise x² − 49.
x² − 49 = x² − 7². Using the difference of two squares pattern: x² − a² = (x + a)(x − a). So x² − 49 = (x + 7)(x − 7).
Explain how to recognise whether x² + 12x + 36 is a perfect square trinomial, and write it in factorised form.
A perfect square trinomial has the form x² + 2ax + a². Check: half the coefficient of x is 12 ÷ 2 = 6. Square this: 6² = 36, which matches the constant term. Therefore x² + 12x + 36 = (x + 6)².
Perfect square check: (half the x-coefficient)² = constant? (12/2)² = 6² = 36 ✓. So (x + 6)².
A student says x² + 9 can be factorised using the difference of squares method. Explain why this is incorrect.
The difference of squares method applies to x² − a², not x² + a². Since there is a plus sign, not a minus sign, x² + 9 cannot be factorised over the integers using this method.
The difference of squares pattern is x² − a² = (x + a)(x − a). It requires a minus sign. x² + 9 has a plus sign, so the method does not apply and the expression cannot be factorised over the real numbers.
Expand (x + 5)².
(x + 5)² = (x + 5)(x + 5). FOIL: x² + 5x + 5x + 25 = x² + 10x + 25.
Which expression is equivalent to (x − 4)²?
(x − 4)² = (x − 4)(x − 4). FOIL: x² − 4x − 4x + 16 = x² − 8x + 16. Note: (−4)(−4) = +16.
Solve x² + 4x − 1 = 0. Give your answers in the form a + b√5 and a − b√5.
a=1, b=4, c=−1. b²−4ac = 16+4 = 20. x = (−4 ± √20)/2. √20 = 2√5. x = (−4 ± 2√5)/2 = −2 ± √5.
Solve 2x² + 3 = 7x. Give your answers correct to 3 significant figures.
Rearrange: 2x² − 7x + 3 = 0. a=2, b=−7, c=3. b²−4ac = 49−24 = 25. x = (7 ± 5)/4. x = 12/4 = 3 or x = 2/4 = 0.5.
The equation x² + kx + 9 = 0 has exactly one repeated root. Find the positive value of k.
One repeated root occurs when discriminant = 0. k² − 4(1)(9) = 0 → k² = 36 → k = ±6. Positive value: k = 6.
Solve −x² + 4x + 3 = 0. Give your answers correct to 2 decimal places.
Multiply through by −1: x² − 4x − 3 = 0. a=1, b=−4, c=−3. b²−4ac = 16+12 = 28. x = (4 ± √28)/2. √28 ≈ 5.292. x ≈ 4.65 or x ≈ −0.65.
Solve x² + 5x + 6 = 0 using the quadratic formula. Give both values of x.
a=1, b=5, c=6. x = (−5 ± √1)/2 = (−5 ± 1)/2. So x = (−5+1)/2 = −2 or x = (−5−1)/2 = −3.
Solve x² + 3x − 7 = 0. Give your answers correct to 2 decimal places.
a=1, b=3, c=−7. b²−4ac = 9+28 = 37. x = (−3 ± √37)/2. x = (−3+6.083)/2 ≈ 1.54; x = (−3−6.083)/2 ≈ −4.54.
Show that the equation x² + x + 1 = 0 has no real solutions. State which property of the equation you are using.
Calculate the discriminant: b² − 4ac = 1² − 4(1)(1) = 1 − 4 = −3. Since the discriminant is negative (−3 < 0), the equation has no real solutions. This is because the square root of a negative number does not exist in real numbers.
b² − 4ac = 1 − 4 = −3 < 0. A negative discriminant means the formula would require √(−3), which has no real value. Therefore no real solutions exist.
Explain what the value of the discriminant (b² − 4ac) tells you about the solutions to a quadratic equation.
If the discriminant is positive (> 0), the equation has two different real solutions. If it equals zero, there is exactly one repeated solution. If it is negative (< 0), there are no real solutions because you cannot take the square root of a negative number.
The discriminant b² − 4ac appears under the square root in the quadratic formula. If positive, ±√(positive) gives two distinct values. If zero, ±0 gives one value. If negative, √(negative) is undefined in real numbers.
For the equation 3x² − 5x + 2 = 0, what are the values of a, b, and c in the quadratic formula?
For ax² + bx + c = 0: a is the coefficient of x² (= 3), b is the coefficient of x (= −5, including the sign), c is the constant (= 2).
For the equation x² + 5x + 6 = 0, calculate the value of the discriminant b² − 4ac.
Discriminant = b² − 4ac. Here a = 1, b = 5, c = 6. So: 5² − 4(1)(6) = 25 − 24 = 1.
For the equation x² + 2x + 5 = 0, the discriminant is 4 − 20 = −16. What does this tell you?
Discriminant = b² − 4ac = −16 < 0. A negative discriminant means there are no real solutions (the parabola does not cross the x-axis).
Solve 3x² − 6x − 1 = 0 by completing the square. Give your answers in the form p ± q√3.
3(x² − 2x) − 1 = 0 → 3((x−1)² − 1) − 1 = 0 → 3(x−1)² − 4 = 0 → (x−1)² = 4/3 → x−1 = ±2/√3 = ±2√3/3 → x = 1 ± 2√3/3.
Solve x² + 6x + 3 = 0 by completing the square. Give your answers in surd form.
p = 3. (x + 3)² − 9 + 3 = 0 → (x + 3)² = 6 → x + 3 = ±√6 → x = −3 ± √6.
Write 2x² + 12x + 7 in the form a(x + p)² + q.
Factor out 2: 2(x² + 6x) + 7. Complete the square inside: 2((x + 3)² − 9) + 7 = 2(x + 3)² − 18 + 7 = 2(x + 3)² − 11.
Find the minimum value of 2x² − 8x + 11 and the value of x at which it occurs.
2(x² − 4x) + 11 = 2((x − 2)² − 4) + 11 = 2(x − 2)² − 8 + 11 = 2(x − 2)² + 3. Minimum when (x − 2)² = 0 → x = 2, giving minimum value = 3.
Find the coordinates of the turning point of y = x² + 4x − 3 by completing the square.
p = 4 ÷ 2 = 2. (x + 2)² − 4 − 3 = (x + 2)² − 7. Turning point: (−p, q) = (−2, −7).
Write x² + 8x + 5 in the form (x + p)² + q. State the values of p and q.
p = 8 ÷ 2 = 4. Then: (x + 4)² − 4² + 5 = (x + 4)² − 16 + 5 = (x + 4)² − 11. So q = −11.
Write x² − 6x + 2 in completed square form.
p = (−6) ÷ 2 = −3. Write (x − 3)² − (−3)² + 2 = (x − 3)² − 9 + 2 = (x − 3)² − 7.
Explain how you can tell from the completed square form whether a quadratic has a minimum or a maximum turning point.
If the coefficient of x² (a) is positive, the parabola opens upward and the turning point is a minimum. If a is negative, the parabola opens downward and the turning point is a maximum. In completed square form a(x + p)² + q, when a > 0 the minimum value is q; when a < 0 the maximum value is q.
The sign of a determines whether the parabola opens upward (a > 0, minimum) or downward (a < 0, maximum). The turning point value is always q in a(x + p)² + q.
To write x² + 10x + 3 in the form (x + p)² + q, what is the value of p?
p is always half the coefficient of x. Here the coefficient of x is 10, so p = 10 ÷ 2 = 5.
The curve y = (x − 5)² + 3 has a turning point at:
In (x − p)² + q, the turning point is at x = p (not −p, because it is x − 5 = 0 → x = 5). Here p = 5 and q = 3, so turning point is (5, 3).
f(x) = x² − 1 and g(x) = 2x + 3. Solve fg(x) = 24.
fg(x) = f(g(x)) = f(2x+3) = (2x+3)² − 1. Set equal to 24: (2x+3)² = 25. So 2x+3 = ±5. Case 1: 2x = 2 → x = 1. Case 2: 2x = −8 → x = −4.
f(x) = 2x + 1 and g(x) = x − 3. Find an expression for fg(x).
fg(x) = f(g(x)) = f(x − 3) = 2(x − 3) + 1 = 2x − 6 + 1 = 2x − 5.
f(x) = 3x − 5. Find f⁻¹(x).
Write y = 3x − 5. Swap x and y: x = 3y − 5. Rearrange: 3y = x + 5. f⁻¹(x) = (x + 5)/3.
g(x) = 4x − 1. Find the value of x for which g(x) = 11.
g(x) = 11 means 4x − 1 = 11. Solving: 4x = 12 → x = 3.
f(x) = 2x + 1 and g(x) = x². Find fg(3).
fg(3) = f(g(3)). First apply g: g(3) = 3² = 9. Then apply f: f(9) = 2(9) + 1 = 19.
f(x) = 3x − 2 and g(x) = x + 5. Find gf(4).
gf(4) = g(f(4)). Apply f first: f(4) = 10. Then g: g(10) = 15.
f(x) = x + 3 and g(x) = 2x. Show with an example that fg(x) ≠ gf(x), and explain why the order matters.
fg(x) = f(g(x)) = f(2x) = 2x + 3. gf(x) = g(f(x)) = g(x + 3) = 2(x + 3) = 2x + 6. Since 2x + 3 ≠ 2x + 6, fg(x) ≠ gf(x). Order matters because applying functions in different orders produces different results.
fg means g first, then f. gf means f first, then g. These give different results in general.
f(x) = 2x + 3. Find f(4).
f(4) means substitute x = 4. f(4) = 2(4) + 3 = 8 + 3 = 11.
If f(x) = x² − 1, what does f(3) equal?
f(3) = 3² − 1 = 9 − 1 = 8.
h(x) = x² + 2x − 3. Find h(−2).
h(−2) = (−2)² + 2(−2) − 3 = 4 − 4 − 3 = −3.
f(x) = (2x − 3)/(x + 1) for x ≠ −1. Find f⁻¹(x).
Swap: x = (2y−3)/(y+1). Cross-multiply: x(y+1) = 2y−3 → xy+x = 2y−3. Collect y: xy−2y = −x−3 → y(x−2) = −x−3 → y = (−x−3)/(x−2).
f(x) = x² + 4 for x ≥ 0. Find f⁻¹(x), stating the domain of f⁻¹.
y = x² + 4 (x ≥ 0). Swap: x = y² + 4. y² = x − 4. Since y ≥ 0: y = √(x − 4). Domain: x − 4 ≥ 0 → x ≥ 4.
f(x) = 4x + 1. Find f⁻¹(x).
y = 4x + 1. Swap: x = 4y + 1. Rearrange: x − 1 = 4y → y = (x − 1)/4. So f⁻¹(x) = (x − 1)/4.
f(x) = (x + 2) / 3. Find f⁻¹(x).
Method 1 (swap-and-rearrange): swap x and y → x = (y+2)/3. Multiply by 3 → 3x = y+2. Subtract 2 → f⁻¹(x) = 3x − 2. Method 2 (reverse operations): the operations on x are + 2 then ÷ 3. Reverse the order and reverse each operation: × 3 first, then − 2. So f⁻¹(x) = 3x − 2.
f(x) = 5x + 2. A student claims f⁻¹(x) = (x − 2)/5. Verify this by showing f(f⁻¹(x)) = x.
f(f⁻¹(x)) = f((x−2)/5) = 5·(x−2)/5 + 2 = (x−2) + 2 = x ✓
f(x) = 2x − 7. Find f⁻¹(11) without first finding f⁻¹(x).
f⁻¹(11) is the value of x where f(x) = 11. So: 2x − 7 = 11 → 2x = 18 → x = 9.
Explain why the function f(x) = x² (for all real x) does not have an inverse function over its full domain.
f(x) = x² is not one-to-one over all real numbers because different inputs can give the same output. For example, f(3) = 9 and f(−3) = 9. Because two different inputs map to the same output, an inverse cannot be defined (we would not know whether f⁻¹(9) = 3 or −3).
For an inverse to exist, each output must come from exactly one input. x² maps both x and −x to the same value, so the inverse would be ambiguous.
What does f⁻¹(x) represent?
f⁻¹(x) is the inverse function — it reverses what f does. It is NOT 1/f(x) (that would be the reciprocal).
Show that the equation x³ − 3x − 1 = 0 can be written as x = (x³ − 1)/3, and use the iterative formula xₙ₊₁ = (xₙ³ − 1)/3 with x₀ = 2 to find x₃ to 3 decimal places.
Rearrange: x³ − 3x − 1 = 0 → 3x = x³ − 1 → x = (x³ − 1)/3 ✓. x₁ = 7/3 ≈ 2.333. Note: this formula may diverge; students should recognise when convergence fails.
Use the iterative formula xₙ₊₁ = √(2xₙ + 5) with x₀ = 3 to find x₄ correct to 3 decimal places.
x₁ = √(6+5) = √11 ≈ 3.317. x₂ = √(6.634+5) = √11.634 ≈ 3.411. x₃ = √(6.822+5) ≈ √11.822 ≈ 3.438. x₄ = √(6.876+5) ≈ √11.876 ≈ 3.446.
Use the iterative formula xₙ₊₁ = (xₙ + 2/xₙ)/2 with x₀ = 2 to find x₄. What does this sequence appear to converge to? Give your answer to 5 significant figures.
x₁ = (2+1)/2 = 1.5. x₂ = (1.5+1.333)/2 ≈ 1.4167. x₃ = (1.4167 + 1.4118)/2 ≈ 1.4142. x₄ ≈ 1.4142. This is the Babylonian method for √2.
Use xₙ₊₁ = (xₙ² + 3)/4 with x₀ = 2 to find x₃. Give your answer to 3 decimal places.
x₁ = (4+3)/4 = 1.75. x₂ = (3.0625+3)/4 = 1.515625. x₃ = (1.515625² + 3)/4 = (2.297...+3)/4 ≈ 1.324.
Show that the equation x³ + x − 4 = 0 has a root between x = 1 and x = 2. Then state which value of x₀ you would use as a starting point for the iterative formula xₙ₊₁ = ∛(4 − xₙ).
At x = 1: 1 + 1 − 4 = −2 (negative). At x = 2: 8 + 2 − 4 = 6 (positive). Since the function changes sign between x = 1 and x = 2, there is a root in this interval by the change of sign rule. A sensible starting value is x₀ = 1 or x₀ = 2.
f(1) = 1+1−4 = −2. f(2) = 8+2−4 = 6. Sign changes from negative to positive → root in [1,2]. Use x₀ = 1 or 2.
The iterative formula is xₙ₊₁ = (xₙ + 5)/2 with x₀ = 1. Find x₁.
Substitute x₀ = 1 into xₙ₊₁ = (xₙ + 5)/2: x₁ = (1 + 5)/2 = 6/2 = 3.
A student uses the iterative formula xₙ₊₁ = xₙ² − 2 with x₀ = 0.5 and obtains the sequence 0.5, −1.75, 1.0625, −0.871, −1.241, ... Explain what is happening.
The sequence is diverging — the values are not settling to a fixed number. They are oscillating and increasing in magnitude. This suggests the iterative formula does not converge to a root near x₀ = 0.5.
The terms change sign and grow in magnitude — this is divergence. The iteration is not converging to a root.
What is the purpose of using an iterative formula in mathematics?
Iteration is used to find numerical approximations to solutions when an exact algebraic solution is difficult or impossible to find.
An iterative formula produces the sequence 2, 2.5, 2.48, 2.480, 2.4803, 2.4803... What can you conclude?
The terms are getting closer and closer to 2.4803... This is convergence — the iteration is approaching a fixed value which is a root of the equation.
A car is travelling at 8 m/s when the driver applies the brakes. The car decelerates uniformly and comes to rest after travelling 16 m. (a) Find the deceleration of the car. (b) Find the time taken to stop.
This is a two-equation problem. Part (a): t is not given, so use v² = u² + 2as (no t). With v = 0, u = 8, s = 16: 0 = 64 + 32a → a = −2 m/s². The deceleration is 2 m/s² (magnitude). Part (b): now use v = u + at or s = ½(u+v)t with the known values. Both give t = 4 s. The key skill is choosing the right equation for each part based on which values you know.
A particle moves in a straight line in two phases. Phase 1: It starts from rest and accelerates uniformly at 3 m/s² for 5 seconds. Phase 2: It then decelerates uniformly at 5 m/s² for a further 3 seconds. Find the total distance travelled by the particle.
The critical step between phases is finding the velocity at the end of Phase 1: v = 0 + 3 × 5 = 15 m/s. This becomes the initial velocity (u) for Phase 2. Phase 1: s₁ = ½ × 3 × 25 = 37.5 m. Phase 2: s₂ = 15 × 3 + ½ × (−5) × 9 = 45 − 22.5 = 22.5 m. Total = 60 m. In two-phase problems, always find the velocity at the transition point first — it is the link between the two phases.
A car accelerates uniformly from 5 m/s to 25 m/s in 8 seconds. (a) Find the acceleration of the car. (b) Find the distance travelled during this time.
Part (a): rearrange v = u + at to get a = (v − u) / t = 20/8 = 2.5 m/s². Part (b): the neatest method uses s = ½(u + v)t since u, v and t are all known: s = ½ × 30 × 8 = 120 m. You could also use s = ut + ½at² with your answer from part (a) — both give 120 m. In multi-part SUVAT questions, look for the most efficient equation for each part.
A ball is thrown vertically upwards with an initial velocity of 20 m/s. Taking the acceleration due to gravity as −10 m/s²: (a) Find the time taken to reach maximum height. (b) Find the maximum height reached.
At the maximum height the ball momentarily stops, so v = 0. Part (a): 0 = 20 + (-10)t, giving t = 2 s. Part (b): s = 20(2) + ½(-10)(4) = 40 - 20 = 20 m. The key insight is that 'maximum height' means v = 0 — this is the condition that lets you solve part (a) first, then use that t in part (b). Negative acceleration is just deceleration — treat it as a normal number and the algebra handles the rest.
A train accelerates uniformly from 10 m/s to 34 m/s in 8 seconds. Find the acceleration of the train.
With u, v and t known, rearrange v = u + at for a: subtract u from both sides to get v − u = at, then divide by t to get a = (v − u) / t. Substituting: a = (34 − 10) / 8 = 24 / 8 = 3 m/s². Always write down the rearranged form before substituting to reduce errors.
A motorcycle starts from rest and reaches a velocity of 20 m/s with a uniform acceleration of 5 m/s². Find the distance travelled.
With u, v and a known (and t unknown), choose v² = u² + 2as. With u = 0: s = v² / (2a) = 400 / 10 = 40 m. The key skill here is recognising that t is neither given nor required — this tells you which equation to use. The v² equation is the one to choose when t is absent.
A particle starts from rest and accelerates uniformly at 5 m/s². Show that the distance travelled in 4 seconds is 40 m.
Using s = ut + ½at² with u = 0, a = 5, t = 4: s = (0)(4) + ½(5)(4²) s = 0 + ½ × 5 × 16 s = 0 + 40 s = 40 m
For 'show that' questions you must demonstrate every step clearly — the answer is given (40 m) so examiners are looking at your working. State the formula, substitute the values, and show the arithmetic. u = 0 since the particle starts from rest. t² = 4² = 16, then ½ × 5 × 16 = 40 m.
A car starts from rest and accelerates uniformly at 4 m/s² for 6 seconds. Using v = u + at, find the final velocity of the car. State the units of your answer.
Since the car starts from rest, u = 0. Using v = u + at with u = 0, a = 4, t = 6: v = 0 + (4 × 6) = 24 m/s. Always identify the known values first and choose the equation that contains exactly those variables plus the one you want to find.
A ball is dropped from rest and falls under gravity with acceleration 10 m/s². Using s = ut + ½at², find the distance fallen after 3 seconds.
The ball is dropped from rest so u = 0, which removes the first term: s = 0 + ½at². With a = 10 and t = 3: s = ½ × 10 × 9 = 45 m. Don't forget to square t first — t² = 9 not 6. This is the most common error with this formula.
Sam is calculating the final velocity of a ball. He writes: v = u + at v = 5 + 3 (he uses u = 5, a = 3, t = 4) v = 8 m/s Identify the error Sam has made.
Sam forgot to multiply acceleration by time. He should have written v = 5 + (3 × 4) = 5 + 12 = 17 m/s.
In the formula v = u + at, the term 'at' means acceleration multiplied by time. Sam wrote v = 5 + 3 — he added u and a but ignored t entirely. He should have calculated at = 3 × 4 = 12, then added u: v = 5 + 12 = 17 m/s. This is the most common SUVAT substitution error: forgetting to multiply when there are two values in the same term.
Priya is calculating the displacement of a falling object from rest. She writes: s = ut + ½at² s = (0)(3) + ½(10)(3²) s = 0 + ½ × 10 × 9 s = 45 m/s² Priya's numerical answer is correct. What is wrong with her answer?
The units are wrong. Displacement should be measured in metres (m), not metres per second squared (m/s²). The answer should be written as 45 m.
Priya's calculation is numerically correct: ½ × 10 × 9 = 45. However, she wrote the wrong units. Displacement (s) is a measure of distance, so it is measured in metres (m). The unit m/s² is the unit for acceleration, not displacement. This is a very common error — confusing the unit for acceleration with the unit for displacement.
Tom is finding the final velocity of a car that starts from rest and accelerates at 5 m/s² over a distance of 20 m. He writes: v² = u² + 2as v² = 0² + 2(5)(20) v² = 200 v = 200 m/s Identify the error in Tom's final step.
Tom forgot to take the square root of 200. Since v² = 200, he needs to calculate v = √200 ≈ 14.1 m/s.
The equation gives v² = 200, not v = 200. To find v, Tom needs to take the square root of both sides: v = √200 ≈ 14.1 m/s. Forgetting to square root is the most common error with the v² = u² + 2as equation. Always check: the equation gives you v², so your final step must be v = √(your value).
A car's value was increased by 10% and then decreased by 15%. Its value after both changes is £18,700. Find the original value of the car. Give your answer to the nearest penny.
The combined multiplier is 1.10 × 0.85 = 0.935. The final value is 0.935 times the original. To find the original: £18,700 ÷ 0.935 = £20,000. You can verify: £20,000 × 1.10 = £22,000; £22,000 × 0.85 = £18,700. The key is to multiply both multipliers together first, then divide the final value by the combined multiplier. Do not try to reverse the changes one at a time in the wrong order.
In a sale, all prices are reduced by 35%. A coat is now priced at £58.50. Calculate the original price of the coat before the sale.
A 35% reduction leaves 65% of the original price. Multiplier = 0.65. Original price = £58.50 ÷ 0.65 = £90. You can verify this: £90 × 0.65 = £58.50. A reverse percentage always requires dividing by the multiplier (not multiplying). Here the multiplier is 0.65 because 100% − 35% = 65% = 0.65.
A phone costs £478.80 including 20% VAT. Calculate the price before VAT. Give your answer to the nearest penny.
The price including 20% VAT represents 120% of the pre-VAT price. Multiplier = 1.20. Pre-VAT price = £478.80 ÷ 1.20 = £399.00. Check: £399.00 × 1.20 = £478.80. A common mistake is finding 20% of £478.80 (= £95.76) and subtracting, giving £382.84 — this is wrong because the VAT was calculated on the original price, not the VAT-inclusive price.
After a 15% pay rise, Emma earns £1,265 per month. Show that her original salary was £1,100 per month.
For a 'show that' question, you must work through the calculation clearly and arrive at the stated answer. A 15% pay rise gives a multiplier of 1.15. Original salary = £1,265 ÷ 1.15 = £1,100. Show your working: £1,265 ÷ 1.15 = £1,100. You can also verify in forward direction: £1,100 × 1.15 = £1,265. Both approaches are valid. State clearly what the original salary is equal to — do not just write the number without context.
Jasmine says: 'If a price goes up by p%, I can find the original by subtracting p% of the new price.' Using algebra, show that Jasmine's method is ALWAYS incorrect (for p > 0). Let the original price be £x.
Jasmine's method subtracts p% of the new price. Let the original be £x. The new price after a p% increase is x(1 + p/100). Jasmine's method gives: x(1 + p/100) − (p/100) × x(1 + p/100) = x(1 + p/100)(1 − p/100) = x(1 − p²/10000). This equals x only if p = 0, which means her method is always wrong for p > 0. The correct method is to divide the new price by (1 + p/100). This algebraic proof demonstrates why p% of the new price is always larger than p% of the original price — so subtracting too much.
After a 25% increase, a price is £250. Find the original price.
After a 25% increase, the price represents 125% of the original. Multiplier = 1.25. To reverse: £250 ÷ 1.25 = £200. This is a reverse percentage — you are undoing the increase. A common mistake is finding 25% of £250 and subtracting (£250 − £62.50 = £187.50) — this is wrong because the 25% was applied to the original price, not the new price. Always divide the given amount by the decimal multiplier to find the original.
After a 20% reduction in a sale, a dress costs £48. Find the original price.
After a 20% reduction, the sale price represents 80% of the original (100% − 20% = 80%). Multiplier = 0.80. To find the original: £48 ÷ 0.80 = £60. The common mistake is adding 20% of £48 (= £9.60) to get £57.60 — this is wrong because the 20% was taken off the original price, not the sale price. To reverse any percentage change, divide by the multiplier.
A shop gives a 10% discount on all items. A customer pays £27 for a book. What was the original price of the book?
A 10% discount means the customer pays 90% of the original. Multiplier = 0.90. Original price = £27 ÷ 0.90 = £30. Check: £30 × 0.90 = £27. A common error is dividing by 0.10 instead of 0.90, or adding 10% of £27 (= £2.70) to get £29.70 — both are wrong because the 10% was of the original price. The correct approach for all reverse percentages is to divide by what percentage of the original the given amount represents.
A TV costs £360 after a 10% increase. A student says: 'The original price was £360 - 10% = £360 - £36 = £324.' Explain the error in the student's method. What is the correct original price?
The student's error is subtracting 10% of the NEW price (£360) instead of reversing the original increase. £360 is 110% of the original, so the correct method is: original = £360 ÷ 1.10 = £327.27 (to the nearest penny). The student got £324 because they took 10% off £360, but the 10% was added to the original price, not £360. Check: £327.27 × 1.10 = £360.00 (correct), but £324 × 1.10 = £356.40 (wrong).
A price after a 20% increase is £120. Which calculation finds the ORIGINAL price?
After a 20% increase, the price is 120% of the original. To reverse: divide by 1.20. £120 ÷ 1.20 = £100.
A price including 20% VAT is £84. What was the price before VAT?
£84 includes 20% VAT, so £84 = 120% of original. Original = £84 ÷ 1.20 = £70.
After a 12% decrease, a town's population is 17,600. What was the original population?
After 12% decrease: 17,600 = 88% of original = 0.88 × original. Original = 17,600 ÷ 0.88 = 20,000.
£4,000 is invested at 3.5% compound interest per year. In which year does the investment FIRST exceed £5,000?
There is no algebraic shortcut here — you need to calculate the value year by year using £4,000 × 1.035^n for increasing values of n until the result first exceeds £5,000. After year 6: £4,000 × 1.035⁶ ≈ £4,917 — still below £5,000. After year 7: £4,000 × 1.035⁷ ≈ £5,089 — this exceeds £5,000. You must check year 6 as well as year 7 to show that year 7 is the FIRST year the target is reached. Simply saying 'year 7' without showing the year 6 value will not score full marks.
After 5 years of compound interest at 4% per year, an investment is worth £7,299.24. Calculate the original amount invested. Give your answer to the nearest pound.
This is reverse compound interest. The formula A = P × (1 + r/100)^n is rearranged for the unknown principal: P = A ÷ (1 + r/100)^n. Here P = £7,299.24 ÷ 1.04⁵. Calculate 1.04⁵ = 1.21665, then divide: £7,299.24 ÷ 1.21665 ≈ £6,000. You can check by working forwards: £6,000 × 1.04⁵ ≈ £7,299.24. The method is to divide by the compound multiplier — the same process as a reverse percentage but extended over multiple years.
£1,000 is invested at 3% compound interest per year. Calculate the value of the investment after 3 years. Give your answer to the nearest penny.
Use the compound interest formula A = P × (1 + r/100)^n with P = £1,000, r = 3, and n = 3. The annual multiplier is 1.03, so apply it three times: A = £1,000 × 1.03³. Calculate 1.03³ = 1.092727, giving A = £1,092.73 to the nearest penny. A common mistake is using simple interest (£1,000 + 3 × £30 = £1,090), which ignores the fact that interest in year 2 is earned on £1,030 — not the original £1,000.
£2,000 is invested for 4 years. - Account A pays 5% simple interest per year. - Account B pays 4.5% compound interest per year. Which account gives more money after 4 years? Show all working.
Calculate both accounts separately then compare. Account A (simple): total interest = 4 × 5% × £2,000 = 4 × £100 = £400, so the total is £2,400. Account B (compound): A = £2,000 × 1.045⁴ = £2,000 × 1.19252 ≈ £2,385.04. Since £2,400 > £2,385.04, Account A gives more. The key lesson here is that compound interest is NOT always better — a higher simple interest rate can outperform a lower compound rate, especially over short time periods.
£5,000 is invested at 2.5% compound interest per year for 4 years. a) Calculate the total value after 4 years. b) Calculate the total interest earned.
Part a: the annual multiplier for 2.5% is 1.025. Apply the compound interest formula: A = £5,000 × 1.025⁴. Calculate 1.025⁴ = 1.10381, so A = £5,000 × 1.10381 = £5,519.06. Part b: total interest earned is the difference between the final value and the original principal: £5,519.06 − £5,000 = £519.06. A common error is calculating simple interest instead (4 × £125 = £500) — compound always gives slightly more because interest is reinvested each year.
Show that £2,000 invested at 5% compound interest for 3 years gives an interest amount of £315.25.
In a 'show that' question, the answer is given and ALL marks come from your working. Start by writing the formula: A = P × (1 + r/100)^n = £2,000 × 1.05³. Calculate 1.05³ = 1.157625, so A = £2,000 × 1.157625 = £2,315.25. Then subtract the original principal to find the interest: £2,315.25 − £2,000 = £315.25. Every step must be shown clearly. Students often use simple interest (£2,000 × 0.05 × 3 = £300) which gives the wrong answer of £300, not £315.25.
Amir borrows £8,000 at a compound interest rate of 12% per year. He makes no repayments for 3 years. How much does he owe after 3 years? Give your answer to the nearest penny.
The key formula is A = P × (1 + r)ⁿ, where P is the principal, r is the annual rate as a decimal, and n is the number of years. Here P = £8,000, r = 0.12, n = 3, giving A = 8000 × 1.12³. The critical step is raising 1.12 to the power 3 (not multiplying 1.12 by 3). 1.12³ = 1.404928, so A = 8000 × 1.404928 = £11,239.00. A common mistake is using simple interest: 8000 + 3 × 0.12 × 8000 = £10,880. Compound interest is larger because each year’s interest earns interest in subsequent years — this is why unpaid debts grow faster than people expect.
£500 is invested at 4% compound interest per year. What is the value of the investment after 1 year?
For a one-year investment, compound interest is the same as simple interest: just apply the percentage multiplier once. The multiplier for 4% is 1.04. Multiply £500 by 1.04 to get £520. Alternatively, find 4% of £500 (= £20) and add it to the principal: £500 + £20 = £520. The key pitfall is giving just the interest (£20) rather than the total value.
Explain the key difference between simple interest and compound interest. Include in your answer why compound interest gives a larger total after several years.
Simple interest: each year, interest is calculated only on the original principal — so the same fixed amount is added every year. Compound interest: each year, interest is calculated on the running total (the original amount plus all interest previously earned), so the interest amount grows each year. This is why compound interest is larger after multiple years — you are earning 'interest on interest'. The key phrase examiners look for is 'interest on interest' or 'interest is added to the running total'. Simply writing the formulas without explaining the conceptual difference is not sufficient for full marks.
Which formula correctly calculates the amount A after compound interest at rate r% per year for n years on principal P?
The compound interest formula is A = P × (1 + r/100)^n. The multiplier (1 + r/100) is raised to the power n (number of years).
£800 is invested at 5% compound interest per year for 2 years. What is the value after 2 years?
Year 1: £800 × 1.05 = £840. Year 2: £840 × 1.05 = £882. Or: £800 × 1.05² = £800 × 1.1025 = £882.
£3,000 is invested at 6% compound interest per year for 5 years. Which calculation correctly gives the final value?
Compound interest formula: A = P × (1 + r/100)^n = £3,000 × 1.06⁵.
An irregular hexagon has four equal angles of size x° and two other angles of (x + 30)° each. Find the value of x and hence find the size of the largest angle.
Sum of interior angles of a hexagon = (6−2) × 180° = 720°. Set up: 4x + 2(x + 30) = 720 → 4x + 2x + 60 = 720 → 6x = 660 → x = 110. The four equal angles are 110° each. The two larger angles are 110 + 30 = 140° each. The largest angle is 140°. The question asks for the largest angle specifically — make sure you substitute back to find it.
A regular polygon has n sides. Show that its interior angle can be written as (180(n−2))/n degrees, and use this to find the smallest value of n for which the interior angle exceeds 160°.
Interior angle of a regular n-gon = (n − 2) × 180° ÷ n = 180(n − 2)/n. To find when this exceeds 160°: 180(n − 2)/n > 160 → 180n − 360 > 160n → 20n > 360 → n > 18. The smallest integer value is n = 19. Check: 180(19 − 2)/19 = 180 × 17/19 ≈ 161.05° > 160°. And for n = 18: 180 × 16/18 = 160° (not exceeding). So n = 19 is the answer.
The interior angle of a regular polygon is 150°. How many sides does the polygon have?
Exterior angle = 180° − 150° = 30°. Number of sides = 360° ÷ exterior angle = 360° ÷ 30° = 12. The polygon is a regular 12-sided polygon (dodecagon). This approach (find exterior angle first, then divide 360° by it) is the most efficient method for 'find the number of sides' questions.
The interior angles of a pentagon are (2x + 10)°, (3x − 5)°, (x + 30)°, (2x + 25)°, and 130°. Find the value of x.
Sum of interior angles of a pentagon = (5−2) × 180° = 540°. Set up: (2x+10) + (3x−5) + (x+30) + (2x+25) + 130 = 540. Collect: 8x + 190 = 540 → 8x = 350 → x = 43.75. Check: (2×43.75+10) + (3×43.75−5) + (43.75+30) + (2×43.75+25) + 130 = 97.5 + 126.25 + 73.75 + 112.5 + 130 = 540. ✓
The exterior angle of a regular polygon is 24°. How many sides does the polygon have?
The sum of all exterior angles of any polygon is 360°. For a regular polygon: number of sides = 360° ÷ exterior angle = 360° ÷ 24° = 15. The polygon has 15 sides. Check: interior angle = 180° − 24° = 156°, and (15−2)×180°/15 = 2340°/15 = 156°. ✓
The interior angle of a regular polygon A is 120°. The interior angle of regular polygon B is 135°. Find the ratio of the number of sides of A to B.
Find the number of sides for each polygon using: n = 360° ÷ (180° − interior angle). Polygon A: exterior angle = 180° − 120° = 60°; n_A = 360° ÷ 60° = 6 sides. Polygon B: exterior angle = 180° − 135° = 45°; n_B = 360° ÷ 45° = 8 sides. Ratio n_A : n_B = 6 : 8 = 3 : 4 (simplified).
Find the exterior angle of a regular octagon.
For any regular polygon, the exterior angle = 360° ÷ n, where n is the number of sides. For an octagon n = 8: exterior angle = 360° ÷ 8 = 45°. A quick check: interior angle = 180° − 45° = 135°, and (8−2)×180° ÷ 8 = 1080° ÷ 8 = 135°. ✓
Find the size of each interior angle of a regular pentagon.
Sum of interior angles of a pentagon = (5 − 2) × 180° = 3 × 180° = 540°. In a regular pentagon all angles are equal, so each angle = 540° ÷ 5 = 108°. Alternatively: exterior angle = 360° ÷ 5 = 72°, so interior angle = 180° − 72° = 108°. Both methods give the same answer.
Explain how the formula (n − 2) × 180° for the sum of interior angles of a polygon is derived.
Choose any vertex of the n-sided polygon. Draw diagonals from that vertex to all non-adjacent vertices. This divides the polygon into triangles. The number of triangles formed is always (n − 2). Each triangle has an angle sum of 180°. Therefore the total interior angle sum = (n − 2) × 180°. For example, a hexagon (n=6) divides into 4 triangles: sum = 4 × 180° = 720°. The key insight is that drawing diagonals from one vertex always gives exactly (n − 2) triangles.
What is the sum of the interior angles of a hexagon?
The sum of interior angles of a polygon = (n − 2) × 180°. For a hexagon, n = 6: (6 − 2) × 180° = 4 × 180° = 720°.
What is the sum of ALL exterior angles of any convex polygon?
No matter how many sides a convex polygon has, its exterior angles always sum to exactly 360°. This is because 'walking round' the polygon returns you to your starting direction, completing one full turn.
An irregular quadrilateral has interior angles of 85°, 110°, and 95°. What is the fourth interior angle?
Sum of interior angles of a quadrilateral = (4 − 2) × 180° = 360°. Fourth angle = 360° − (85° + 110° + 95°) = 360° − 290° = 70°.
In a circle with centre O, A, B, and C are points on the circumference. The angle AOB (central angle) is 124°. A tangent at A makes an angle of 28° with chord AB. Find angle ACB and the angle in the alternate segment at A.
Two theorems are needed. First, the angle at the circumference = half the central angle: angle ACB = 124° ÷ 2 = 62°. Second, by the Alternate Segment Theorem, the angle in the alternate segment equals the tangent-chord angle = 28°. In multi-theorem questions, name each theorem explicitly as this earns separate method marks.
ABCD is a cyclic quadrilateral with angle DAB = (3x + 10)° and angle BCD = (5x − 30)°. Find the value of x and hence find angle ABC if angle ABC = (2x + 15)°.
Opposite angles in a cyclic quadrilateral sum to 180°. Angles DAB and BCD are opposite, so (3x + 10) + (5x − 30) = 180. Simplify: 8x − 20 = 180 → 8x = 200 → x = 25. Substitute into angle ABC = 2(25) + 15 = 65°. Verify: angle DAB = 3(25) + 10 = 85°; angle BCD = 5(25) − 30 = 95°; 85° + 95° = 180° ✓.
ABCD is a cyclic quadrilateral. Angle DAB = 78° and angle BCD = 115°. Find angles ABC and CDA.
In a cyclic quadrilateral, opposite angles sum to 180°. In ABCD the opposite pairs are (A, C) and (B, D). Angle ABC = 180° − angle BCD = 180° − 115° = 65°. Angle CDA = 180° − angle DAB = 180° − 78° = 102°. Check: 65° + 102° + 78° + 115° = 360° ✓.
A tangent to a circle touches the circle at point T. The radius to T makes an angle with a chord from T. If the chord from T makes an angle of 38° with the tangent at T, find the angle in the alternate segment.
The Alternate Segment Theorem states: the angle between a tangent and a chord at the point of tangency equals the angle in the alternate segment. The tangent-chord angle is 38°, so the angle in the alternate segment is also 38°. This theorem is commonly examined — always state its name and make sure you identify the correct alternate segment (the one on the opposite side of the chord from the angle you are comparing).
Two tangents are drawn from an external point P to a circle with centre O. The tangent length from P to the circle is 9 cm and the radius is 12 cm. Find the distance OP.
A tangent is perpendicular to the radius at the point of tangency, creating a right angle. This forms a right-angled triangle with legs: tangent length = 9 cm and radius = 12 cm, and hypotenuse = OP. Apply Pythagoras: OP² = 9² + 12² = 81 + 144 = 225, so OP = √225 = 15 cm. Note that 9, 12, 15 is a 3-4-5 triple scaled by 3.
Prove that the angle in a semicircle is 90°, using the theorem that the angle at the centre is twice the angle at the circumference.
To prove the angle in a semicircle is 90°: Step 1 — a diameter forms a straight line through the centre, so the angle subtended at the centre by the diameter is 180°. Step 2 — by the angle at centre theorem, the angle at the circumference = central angle ÷ 2 = 180° ÷ 2 = 90°. State each step clearly; avoid circular reasoning (do not say ‘it is 90° because it is in a semicircle’).
An arc subtends an angle of 80° at the circumference of a circle. What angle does the same arc subtend at the centre?
The angle at the centre is twice the angle at the circumference when both subtend the same arc. Here the circumference angle is 80°, so the central angle = 2 × 80° = 160°. A common error is halving instead of doubling — remember the centre angle is always the larger one. Always name the theorem in your working to earn the method mark.
Two angles are both in the same segment of a circle (on the same side of a chord) and subtend the same arc. One angle is 42°. What is the other angle?
Angles in the same segment are equal — both subtend the same arc from the same side of the chord. So the other angle is also 42°. A common confusion is with the cyclic quadrilateral rule (opposite angles sum to 180°), which applies when angles are on opposite sides of the chord. Same segment → equal; opposite segments → supplementary.
A triangle is drawn inside a circle with one side being the diameter. What is the size of the angle at the circumference opposite the diameter?
The angle in a semicircle is always 90°. This is Thales' theorem: any angle subtended by a diameter at the circumference is a right angle.
Two tangents are drawn from an external point P to a circle. The tangent lengths PA and PB (where A and B are the points of tangency) are:
Tangent lengths from an external point are equal. This is because the two right-angled triangles formed (each with hypotenuse OP and one leg = radius) are congruent by RHS, so their third sides (the tangent lengths) are equal.
Rectangle ABCD has length 18 cm and width 10 cm. Point E lies on side BC such that BE = 6 cm and EC = 4 cm. Triangles ABE and ECD are cut from the rectangle, where AB = CD = 18 cm (the lengths). Find the remaining area of quadrilateral AECD as a percentage of the original rectangle's area.
Step by step: rectangle area = 18 × 10 = 180 cm². Triangle ABE = ½ × 18 × 6 = 54 cm². Triangle ECD = ½ × 18 × 4 = 36 cm². Total removed = 54 + 36 = 90 cm². Remaining = 180 − 90 = 90 cm². Percentage = (90 ÷ 180) × 100 = 50%. Note that together the two triangles have the same total area as the remaining quadrilateral, so the answer is exactly 50% — a useful check.
A rectangular plot measures 20 m by 15 m. A triangular flower bed with base 8 m and perpendicular height 5 m is cut from one corner. Find the remaining area of the plot.
Rectangle area = 20 × 15 = 300 m². Triangular section removed = ½ × 8 × 5 = 20 m². Remaining = 300 − 20 = 280 m². When a piece is cut out, the operation is subtraction. A common error is adding the triangle instead of subtracting. Always re-read whether the problem asks for the total or the remaining area.
A shape is made from a rectangle of length 12 cm and width 5 cm with a triangle of base 12 cm and height 4 cm placed on top. Find the total area of the shape.
Split into two parts. Rectangle area = 12 × 5 = 60 cm². Triangle area = ½ × 12 × 4 = 24 cm². Total = 60 + 24 = 84 cm². A common mistake is forgetting the ½ on the triangle, giving 60 + 48 = 108 cm². For compound shapes, always identify each component and use the correct formula for each one.
A rectangle has an area of 72 cm² and a width of 8 cm. Find the length of the rectangle.
Rearrange the area formula: area = length × width, so length = area ÷ width = 72 ÷ 8 = 9 cm. A common error is multiplying 72 × 8 = 576. When you know area and one dimension, always divide to find the other.
A triangle has area 45 cm² and base 15 cm. Find the perpendicular height.
Rearrange the triangle area formula: ½ × b × h = 45, so h = (2 × 45) ÷ 15 = 90 ÷ 15 = 6 cm. A common mistake is dividing 45 ÷ 15 = 3, forgetting that the ½ must be reversed by multiplying by 2. The formula h = 2A ÷ b is worth memorising for reverse triangle area questions.
A triangle has a base of (2x + 1) cm and a perpendicular height of 4 cm. Show that the area of the triangle is (4x + 2) cm².
Apply the formula: area = ½ × (2x + 1) × 4. The ½ and 4 combine to give a factor of 2: area = 2(2x + 1). Expanding: 2 × 2x + 2 × 1 = 4x + 2 cm². In show-that questions you must write every step explicitly and conclude by confirming you have reached the stated expression. Forgetting the ½ gives 4(2x + 1) = 8x + 4, which is a common error.
Calculate the area of a rectangle with length 9 cm and width 4 cm.
Area of a rectangle = length × width = 9 × 4 = 36 cm². A common error is adding the sides instead: 9 + 4 = 13. Remember, area fills the interior and uses multiplication, not addition. Always include the unit cm² in your answer.
Find the area of a triangle with base 10 cm and perpendicular height 6 cm.
Triangle area = ½ × base × perpendicular height = ½ × 10 × 6 = 30 cm². The most common mistake is forgetting the ½, giving 60 cm² instead. Think of the triangle as half a 10 × 6 rectangle. The height must be measured perpendicularly to the base.
Explain why the area formula for a triangle uses the perpendicular height rather than the slant height.
The triangle area formula ½ × base × height is derived from a rectangle: a triangle fills exactly half the rectangle of the same base and perpendicular height. The perpendicular height is the vertical distance at 90° to the base — it measures the true extent of the triangle. The slant side is always longer than the perpendicular height, so using it instead would overestimate the area. In exam questions, make sure to reference the perpendicular nature of the height and explain why the slant would give a wrong answer.
Which formula gives the area of a rectangle with length l and width w?
Area of a rectangle = length × width. The perimeter (distance around) is 2(l + w) — a common confusion.
A right-angled triangle has a horizontal base of 8 cm and a vertical height of 5 cm. What is its area?
Area of triangle = (1/2) × base × height = (1/2) × 8 × 5 = 20 cm².
A triangle has base 7 cm. The perpendicular height is 4 cm, but the slant side is 5 cm. What is the area of the triangle?
Area = (1/2) × base × perpendicular height = (1/2) × 7 × 4 = 14 cm². Always use the perpendicular height, not the slant side.
A sector of a circle has radius 9 cm and angle 120°. Find (a) the arc length and (b) the area of the sector, giving both answers to 1 decimal place.
A sector is a fraction of a full circle: 120° ÷ 360° = 1/3. Arc length = (1/3) × 2π × 9 = 6π ≈ 18.8 cm. Sector area = (1/3) × π × 9² = (1/3) × 81π = 27π ≈ 84.8 cm². Always start by finding the fraction (angle ÷ 360), then apply it to both the circumference and area formulas separately.
An annulus (ring shape) has an outer circle of radius 8 cm and an inner circle of radius 3 cm. Find the area of the annulus, giving your answer to 1 decimal place.
Annulus area = outer circle area − inner circle area = π × 8² − π × 3² = 64π − 9π = 55π ≈ 172.8 cm² (1 d.p.). This is a subtraction compound area — the inner circle is removed from the outer. A common error is adding the two areas (64π + 9π = 73π) rather than subtracting.
A circle has circumference 50 cm. Find the radius, giving your answer to 2 decimal places.
Rearrange the circumference formula: 2πr = 50, so r = 50 ÷ (2π) = 25/π ≈ 7.96 cm (2 d.p.). A common error is dividing only by π (giving the diameter ≈ 15.92) rather than by 2π. Both 2 and π must be divided out when isolating r.
A circle has area 100 cm². Find the radius, giving your answer to 2 decimal places.
Rearrange the area formula: πr² = 100, so r² = 100 ÷ π ≈ 31.83, then r = √31.83 ≈ 5.64 cm (2 d.p.). A very common error is forgetting to take the square root at the end, leaving r² = 31.83 as the answer instead of r. The square root step is essential when reversing the area formula.
A circle has a circumference of 6π cm. Show that the area of the circle is 9π cm².
Two-step process. Step 1: find the radius from the circumference. 2πr = 6π, so r = 6π ÷ (2π) = 3 cm. Step 2: apply the area formula. A = πr² = π × 3² = 9π cm². In show-that questions, every step must be written clearly and the conclusion stated explicitly.
Calculate the circumference of a circle with radius 7 cm. Give your answer to 1 decimal place.
Circumference = 2πr = 2 × π × 7 = 14π ≈ 44.0 cm (1 d.p.). A common error is using the area formula πr² = π × 49 ≈ 153.9 instead. Circumference uses r to the first power; area uses r². Always check which formula you are applying before calculating.
Calculate the area of a circle with radius 5 cm. Give your answer to 1 decimal place.
Area = πr² = π × 5² = 25π ≈ 78.5 cm² (1 d.p.). You must square the radius before multiplying by π. A common error is using the circumference formula 2πr = 2 × π × 5 ≈ 31.4 cm instead. Remember: area = πr² contains r² and gives cm²; circumference = 2πr gives cm.
A circle has diameter 12 cm. Calculate its circumference, giving your answer to 1 decimal place.
When given the diameter, use C = πd = π × 12 = 12π ≈ 37.7 cm (1 d.p.). Alternatively, radius = 12 ÷ 2 = 6, so C = 2π × 6 = 12π ≈ 37.7 cm. A common error is applying 2πd, which uses the diameter as if it were the radius, giving approximately 75.4 cm — double the correct answer.
Explain why the circumference of a circle is measured in cm (or other length units) but the area is measured in cm² (square units).
Circumference = 2πr involves r to the first power — it measures the length around the boundary, a one-dimensional quantity, so units are cm. Area = πr² involves r² (cm × cm = cm²) — it measures the two-dimensional region inside the circle, so units are cm². Whenever a formula has a squared length variable, its output is in square units. Whenever r appears to the first power only, the output is in linear units.
A circle has radius r. Which pair of formulas gives the correct circumference C and area A?
Circumference = 2πr (or πd). Area = πr². These must not be swapped.
A semicircle has diameter 10 cm. What is the area of the semicircle, to 1 decimal place?
Semicircle area = (1/2)πr². With diameter 10, r = 5. Area = (1/2) × π × 25 = 12.5π ≈ 39.3 cm².
A shape is made from two sectors: sector A with radius 10 cm and angle 60°, and sector B with radius 5 cm and angle 120°, sharing the same vertex. Find the exact total perimeter of the composite shape.
Arc of sector A = (60/360) × 2π × 10 = 10π/3. Arc of sector B = (120/360) × 2π × 5 = 10π/3. Both arcs are equal by coincidence. Total arc = 20π/3. Radii: 2 from sector A (each 10 cm) + 2 from sector B (each 5 cm) = 30 cm. Total perimeter = 20π/3 + 30 cm. For exact-form answers, never approximate π.
A major sector has radius 10 cm and a reflex angle of 240°. Find the area of the major sector. Give your answer to 1 decimal place.
The major sector uses the reflex angle of 240°, not the minor angle of 120°. Area = (240/360) × π × 10² = (2/3) × 100π = 200π/3 ≈ 209.4 cm². A common error is using the minor angle (120°), which gives half the correct answer. Always check the question says major or minor sector and use the correct angle.
A sector of a circle has radius 12 cm and angle 60°. An equilateral triangle is drawn inside the sector with one vertex at the centre and the other two on the arc. Find the area of the shaded region between the arc and the triangle. Give your answer to 1 decimal place.
Sector area = (60/360) × π × 12² = (1/6) × 144π = 24π ≈ 75.4 cm². Equilateral triangle area = (√3/4) × 12² = 36√3 ≈ 62.4 cm². Shaded region = sector − triangle = 24π − 36√3 ≈ 13.0 cm². The equilateral triangle formula (√3/4)s² comes from trigonometry; if unfamiliar, derive it using (1/2) × base × height with height = (s√3)/2.
A sector has an arc length of 15π cm and an angle of 120°. Find the radius of the sector.
Set up: (120/360) × 2πr = 15π, so (1/3) × 2πr = 15π. Cancel π: 2r/3 = 15, so 2r = 45 and r = 22.5 cm. The key strategy is to cancel π from both sides to simplify the algebra before solving. A common error is dividing by only 2 (giving 7.5) rather than isolating r properly.
A sector has an area of 18π cm² and a radius of 6 cm. Find the angle of the sector.
Set up: (θ/360) × π × 36 = 18π. Cancel π: (θ/360) × 36 = 18, so θ/360 = 18/36 = 0.5, and θ = 0.5 × 360 = 180°. This is a semicircle. The strategy is: write the formula, substitute, cancel π, then isolate θ/360 before multiplying by 360. A common error is multiplying the denominator incorrectly when rearranging.
Find the arc length of a sector with radius 6 cm and angle 90°. Give your answer in terms of π.
Arc length = (θ/360) × 2πr = (90/360) × 2π × 6 = ¼ × 12π = 3π cm. The sector is a quarter of the full circle (90° out of 360°), so the arc is a quarter of the full circumference. A common error is using the area formula πr²/4 instead, giving 9π. Always use 2πr for arc length, not πr².
Find the area of a sector with radius 8 cm and angle 45°. Give your answer to 2 decimal places.
Sector area = (θ/360) × πr² = (45/360) × π × 8² = ⅛ × 64π = 8π ≈ 25.13 cm². The sector is an eighth of the full circle (45° out of 360°). A common error is using the arc length formula instead, giving (1/8) × 2π × 8 = 2π ≈ 6.28. For area, use πr²; for arc length, use 2πr.
Explain how the arc length and sector area formulae are derived from the formulae for the full circle.
Both formulae use the fraction θ/360, representing what proportion of the full circle the sector occupies. Multiplying the full circumference (2πr) by θ/360 gives the arc length. Multiplying the full circle area (πr²) by θ/360 gives the sector area. The only difference between the two formulae is whether you apply the fraction to 2πr or to πr².
What is the correct formula for the arc length of a sector with radius r and angle θ (in degrees)?
Arc length = (θ/360) × 2πr. It is the fraction θ/360 of the full circle circumference (2πr).
A sector has radius 5 cm and angle 72°. What is the perimeter of the sector?
Sector perimeter = arc length + 2 × radius. Arc = (72/360) × 2π × 5 = (1/5) × 10π = 2π. Perimeter = 2π + 2(5) = 2π + 10 cm.
A solid is formed by placing a square-based pyramid (base 8 cm, height 6 cm) on top of a rectangular cuboid (8 cm × 8 cm × 10 cm). Find the total volume of the solid.
This composite solid has two parts. Cuboid: V = 8 × 8 × 10 = 640 cm³. Pyramid: base area = 8² = 64 cm², V = ⅓ × 64 × 6 = 128 cm³. Total = 640 + 128 = 768 cm³. The critical step is remembering the ⅓ for the pyramid part. A common error gives 640 + 384 = 1024 by forgetting it. Always split composite solids into recognisable parts and apply the correct formula to each.
A frustum is formed by cutting the top off a cone. The original cone had radius 6 cm and height 12 cm. The cut is made parallel to the base at a height of 4 cm from the apex, giving a smaller cone of radius 2 cm and height 4 cm at the top. Find the volume of the frustum, giving your answer to 1 decimal place.
A frustum is the part of a cone that remains after the top is removed. Volume = V_large − V_small. V_large = ⅓π × 6² × 12 = 144π. V_small = ⅓π × 2² × 4 = 16π/3. Frustum = 144π − 16π/3 = 432π/3 − 16π/3 = 416π/3 ≈ 435.6 cm³. Identify the correct radius and height for each cone, then subtract the smaller from the larger. Adding rather than subtracting is the most common mistake.
A cone has volume 100 cm³ and height 12 cm. Find the base radius, giving your answer to 2 decimal places.
Rearrange V = ⅓πr²h for r: substitute known values to get ⅓ × π × r² × 12 = 100, which simplifies to 4πr² = 100. So r² = 100 ÷ (4π) = 25 ÷ π ≈ 7.96. Taking the square root: r = √(25/π) ≈ 2.82 cm. Two common errors: forgetting to take the square root at the end, or not multiplying ⅓ × 12 = 4 to simplify the equation first.
A cone has base radius 5 cm and slant height 13 cm. Find the volume of the cone, giving your answer to 1 decimal place.
When given slant height (l) and radius (r), find the perpendicular height using Pythagoras: h² = l² − r² = 13² − 5² = 169 − 25 = 144, so h = 12 cm (note the 5–12–13 Pythagorean triple). Then V = ⅓πr²h = ⅓ × π × 25 × 12 = 100π ≈ 628.3 cm³. A critical mistake is using the slant height directly in the volume formula instead of the perpendicular height.
A cone and a square-based pyramid both have the same height of 10 cm. The cone has radius 4 cm. The pyramid has a square base with side length 4π cm. Find the ratio of the cone's volume to the pyramid's volume, simplifying fully.
V_cone = ⅓π × 4² × 10 = 160π/3. V_pyramid = ⅓ × (4π)² × 10 = ⅓ × 16π² × 10 = 160π²/3. Ratio = 160π/3 : 160π²/3 = π : π² = 1 : π. Cancel the common factor of 160π/3 from both sides. The key step is expanding (4π)² = 16π² for the pyramid’s base area, and then cancelling common algebraic factors when forming the ratio.
Find the volume of a cone with base radius 3 cm and height 7 cm. Give your answer to 1 decimal place.
Volume of a cone = ⅓πr²h. Square the radius first: r² = 3² = 9. Then V = ⅓ × π × 9 × 7 = 21π ≈ 65.97 ≈ 66.0 cm³ (1 d.p.). The most common mistake is forgetting the ⅓, which gives π × 9 × 7 ≈ 197.9 — three times too large. Always write the ⅓ at the start of the formula before substituting.
Find the volume of a square-based pyramid with base length 4 cm and perpendicular height 9 cm.
Volume of a pyramid = ⅓ × base area × height. Base area of a square = 4² = 16 cm². V = ⅓ × 16 × 9 = 144 ÷ 3 = 48 cm³. The ⅓ factor is essential — forgetting it gives 144 cm³, which is three times too large. Find the base area first using the appropriate shape formula, then apply the pyramid volume formula.
Explain why the volume of a cone is one third of the volume of a cylinder with the same base and height.
A cone with the same circular base and the same height as a cylinder occupies exactly one third of the cylinder’s volume. This can be demonstrated experimentally: filling the cone with water and pouring it into the cylinder three times fills the cylinder completely. Mathematically, the cross-sectional area of the cone at height z decreases proportionally, and integrating (or applying Cavalieri’s principle) gives a factor of one third. The formula V = ⅓πr²h directly reflects this relationship.
What is the formula for the volume of a cone with base radius r and height h?
Volume of cone = (1/3)πr²h. A cone is exactly one third of the volume of a cylinder with the same base and height.
A tetrahedron (triangular-based pyramid) has a triangular base with base 6 cm and height 4 cm. The perpendicular height of the pyramid is 8 cm. What is the volume?
Base area = (1/2) × 6 × 4 = 12 cm². Volume = (1/3) × 12 × 8 = 32 cm³.
Sphere A has radius 3 cm. Sphere B has radius 6 cm. (a) Find the ratio of the volume of sphere A to the volume of sphere B, giving your answer in its simplest form. (b) The surface area of sphere C is 4 times the surface area of sphere A. Find the radius of sphere C.
Multi-part sphere questions require applying both the volume formula V = (4/3)πr³ and the surface area formula SA = 4πr². For ratio questions, compute each value, simplify the ratio, and cancel common factors. For reverse questions, set the formula equal to the given value and solve for r. Show every substitution and every stage of working — each part earns marks independently.
A sphere has diameter 12 cm. Calculate (a) the volume of the sphere, and (b) the surface area of the sphere. Give both answers in terms of π.
This multi-step question requires applying a sphere formula and combining it with another calculation. Identify the formula needed, substitute carefully, and evaluate. Keep intermediate answers to full precision (do not round until the final step). Sphere problems often involve finding the radius from the volume or surface area first (reverse calculation), then using that radius in a second formula. Show each stage clearly.
A solid consists of a cylinder with a hemisphere on top. The radius of both the cylinder and hemisphere is 3 cm. The height of the cylindrical part is 8 cm. Calculate the total volume of the solid. Give your answer to 1 decimal place.
For a composite solid (cylinder topped with hemisphere), calculate each part separately and add. Cylinder volume = πr²h. Hemisphere volume = (2/3)πr³. Add both for the total. When the radius is shared between the cylinder and hemisphere, use the same value of r. Make sure you do not double-count the circular join face. Show each volume formula, each substitution, and the addition as separate steps.
Find the volume of a hemisphere with radius 4 cm. Give your answer to 1 decimal place.
A hemisphere is half a sphere, so V = (1/2) × (4/3)πr³ = (2/3)πr³. With r = 4: r³ = 64, so V = (2/3) × π × 64 = 128π/3 ≈ 134.0 cm³. The method marks require showing the (2/3)πr³ formula and the substitution. The most common mistake is calculating the full sphere volume (≈ 268.1 cm³) and forgetting to halve it. Always note when a shape is described as a hemisphere.
Find the total surface area of a solid hemisphere with radius 4 cm. Give your answer in terms of π.
A solid hemisphere has two surfaces: the curved dome and the flat circular base. Curved SA = (1/2) × 4πr² = 2πr² = 2 × π × 16 = 32π. Base area = πr² = 16π. Total = 32π + 16π = 48π cm². The most common error is giving only 32π (curved surface) and omitting the flat base. A solid hemisphere always has a base — only a hollow shell would lack it.
A sphere has volume 36π cm³. Find the radius of the sphere.
Rearrange V = (4/3)πr³ to find r. Set equal to the given volume: (4/3)πr³ = V. Multiply both sides by 3/(4π): r³ = 3V/(4π). Take the cube root: r = ∛(3V/(4π)). Use a calculator's cube root function — do not use the square root. Substituting back to check gives confidence the rearrangement is correct. This is a reverse application of the volume formula.
A sphere has surface area 100π cm². Find the radius of the sphere.
Set SA = 4πr² equal to 100π: 4πr² = 100π. Divide both sides by 4π (the π cancels): r² = 25. Take the square root: r = 5 cm. The critical step is dividing by 4π, not just by 4. If you only divide by 4 you get r² = 25π, leading to an incorrect answer. Show the equation setup, the division, and the square root as separate lines.
Explain why the total surface area of a solid hemisphere with radius r is 3πr². You must refer to both parts of the surface.
A solid hemisphere has two parts to its surface. The curved part is half the surface area of a full sphere, which gives (1/2) × 4πr² = 2πr². The flat circular base has area πr². Adding both parts: total surface area = 2πr² + πr² = 3πr².
Identify whether volume or surface area is needed, then apply the correct formula. For a sphere: V = (4/3)πr³ and SA = 4πr². Substitute the given radius, calculate r² or r³ as appropriate, and evaluate. Give the answer to the precision stated in the question. The most common error is confusing the two formulae — read the question carefully to confirm which quantity is required.
Find the volume of a sphere with radius 6 cm. Give your answer in terms of π.
Apply V = (4/3)πr³ with r = 6. Calculate r³ = 6 × 6 × 6 = 216. Then V = (4/3) × π × 216 = (4 × 216)/3 × π = 864/3 × π = 288π cm³. Leave the answer in terms of π as instructed. A very common mistake is using r² instead of r³ (giving 144π) — always cube the radius for volume. The method mark is awarded for (4/3) × π × 216, and the accuracy mark for 288π.
Find the surface area of a sphere with radius 5 cm. Give your answer to 1 decimal place.
Use SA = 4πr² with r = 5. Calculate r² = 25. Then SA = 4 × π × 25 = 100π ≈ 314.2 cm² (1 d.p.). A common error is using the volume formula (4/3)πr³ = 523.6 instead. Remember: SA uses r squared (4πr²), volume uses r cubed ((4/3)πr³). Multiplying out: 100π ≈ 100 × 3.14159 = 314.2 cm². Round only at the final step.
What is the formula for the volume of a sphere with radius r?
The volume of a sphere is V = (4/3)πr³. This formula is given on AQA formula sheets.
What is the formula for the surface area of a sphere with radius r?
The surface area of a sphere is SA = 4πr². This is equivalent to four circles each of area πr².
A composite solid consists of a cylinder with a cone on top. Both the cylinder and the cone have radius 3 cm. The cylinder has height 8 cm and the cone has perpendicular height 4 cm. The base of the cone sits exactly on top of the cylinder. Calculate the total surface area of the composite solid. Give your answer in terms of π.
For a composite solid (cylinder with cone on top), identify which faces are visible. The base circle of the cylinder is visible; the circle where cylinder and cone meet is hidden. Total SA = circular base + curved cylinder SA + curved cone SA. Use slant height l = √(r²+h²) for the cone's curved SA. Show each component calculation clearly. Marks are awarded for each face area independently.
A cylinder has height 5 cm and total surface area 48π cm². Find the radius of the cylinder.
This higher-tier question may involve a composite solid or finding the slant height via Pythagoras before calculating SA. For a cone with perpendicular height h and radius r: slant height l = √(r²+h²). Then apply SA = πrl + πr². Show the slant height calculation as a separate step before computing the surface area. Each step earns marks even if a later arithmetic error occurs.
A solid is formed by placing a hemisphere of radius 3 cm centrally on top of a cube with side length 6 cm. Find the total surface area of the solid. Give your answer to 1 decimal place.
When a surface area and some dimensions are given, rearrange the formula to find the unknown dimension. Substitute the known values into the SA formula, set equal to the given value, and solve algebraically. Show the equation before solving. For a cuboid, if SA and two dimensions are known, substitute and solve for the third. Check the answer is physically reasonable (positive, and consistent with the other dimensions).
A triangular prism has a right-angled triangular cross-section with legs 3 cm and 4 cm, and hypotenuse 5 cm. The length of the prism is 10 cm. Find the total surface area of the prism.
A triangular prism has 5 faces: 2 triangular ends and 3 rectangles. Triangle area = (1/2)×3×4 = 6; two triangles = 12 cm². Three rectangles: 3×10=30, 4×10=40, 5×10=50, total 120 cm². SA = 12+120 = 132 cm². The marks are for the triangle area, the three rectangular areas, and the total. A common error is forgetting both triangular ends (giving 120 instead of 132).
Find the total surface area of a cylinder with radius 4 cm and height 10 cm. Give your answer in terms of π.
Cylinder total SA = 2πr² (two ends) + 2πrh (curved surface). With r=4, h=10: ends = 2×π×16 = 32π; curved = 2×π×4×10 = 80π; total = 112π cm². Think of unrolling the curved surface into a rectangle with width 2πr and height h. Marks are for each component separately and the total. Forgetting either the two circular ends or the curved surface is the most common error.
A square-based pyramid has base side length 6 cm and slant height 5 cm. Find the total surface area of the pyramid.
A square-based pyramid: base area = 6² = 36 cm²; four triangular faces each = (1/2)×6×5 = 15; total triangular area = 60 cm²; total SA = 96 cm². Use the SLANT HEIGHT (5 cm) for the triangular face height — not the perpendicular height. Confusing slant height with perpendicular height leads to an incorrect triangular face area. The marks are awarded for the correct base, correct triangular faces, and correct total.
Find the total surface area of a cone with base radius 5 cm and slant height 13 cm. Give your answer in terms of π.
Cone total SA = πrl (curved) + πr² (base). With r=5, l=13: curved = π×5×13 = 65π; base = π×25 = 25π; total = 90π cm². The l in the formula is the SLANT HEIGHT along the sloping side, not the perpendicular height. Giving only 65π (forgetting the base) is the most common error. Always check whether the question asks for total or curved SA only.
Two similar cones have linear scale factor 3. Explain how the ratio of their surface areas is found, and state the ratio.
Since the two cones are similar with linear scale factor 3, the area scale factor is the square of the linear scale factor: 3² = 9. So the ratio of the surface area of the larger cone to the smaller cone is 9:1.
For a non-standard solid, identify each face systematically. List every face with its shape and dimensions. Calculate the area of each face. Sum all face areas for the total surface area. Draw a net if it helps to visualise all the faces. In multi-part solids, account for faces that are hidden or joined (internal faces should not be included in surface area). Show each face's calculation separately.
A cone has base radius 5 cm and perpendicular height 12 cm. Show that the total surface area of the cone is 90π cm².
Read the question carefully to determine which surfaces to include — some problems exclude the base or a joining face. Apply the correct formula for each face type (rectangle, circle, triangle, etc.). Sum all relevant face areas. Give the final answer in square units (cm² or m²) to the degree of accuracy specified. Show all working including each individual face area and the final addition.
Find the total surface area of a cuboid with length 5 cm, width 3 cm and height 2 cm.
Find the three different rectangular face areas: 5×3=15, 5×2=10, 3×2=6. Each pair appears twice on the cuboid: SA = 2(15+10+6) = 2×31 = 62 cm². The method mark is for identifying the three face areas and the factor of 2; the accuracy mark for 62 cm². The most common mistake is finding only 31 (three faces only) and forgetting to double, since a cuboid always has three pairs of faces.
Explain how you could use a net to find the surface area of a 3D solid.
A net is a 2D flat shape that can be folded to form the 3D solid. The surface area is the total area of all the faces. By drawing the net, you can see all the faces laid flat. You then calculate the area of each face in the net and add them all together to find the total surface area.
A net is the 2D shape formed by unfolding all the faces of a 3D solid so they lie flat. To find surface area using a net: calculate the area of every face shown in the net and add them all together. The net contains the same total surface area as the solid. Two mark points: (1) a net shows all the faces laid flat; (2) the surface area is the sum of all individual face areas.
A cuboid has length l, width w and height h. What is its total surface area?
A cuboid has 6 faces in 3 pairs. Each pair contributes 2 × area: SA = 2lw + 2lh + 2wh = 2(lw + lh + wh).
Triangle ABC has AB = 10 cm, BC = 26 cm, and angle ABC = 90°. Point M is the midpoint of AC. Find the length BM, giving your answer to 2 decimal places.
A two-stage Pythagoras application requires identifying two separate right-angled triangles in sequence. Solve the first triangle to find an intermediate length, then use that length in the second triangle. Show each application of a² + b² = c² separately. Label the intermediate result before using it. Rounding the intermediate value early introduces error — carry full precision between stages.
An isosceles triangle has a base of 10 cm and equal sides of 13 cm. A perpendicular height from the apex meets the base at its midpoint. Find the perpendicular height of the triangle. Give your answer to 1 decimal place.
The distance between points (x₁,y₁) and (x₂,y₂) is d = √((x₂−x₁)² + (y₂−y₁)²). This is Pythagoras applied to the horizontal difference and vertical difference as the two legs. Calculate the horizontal and vertical differences first, square each, add, then take the square root. Show the substitution step. Leave the answer in surd form or give it to the required decimal places.
Point A has coordinates (1, 2) and point B has coordinates (7, 10). Calculate the exact distance AB.
This problem requires applying Pythagoras more than once, or using it to find a value needed for another calculation (e.g. the height of a triangle before finding its area). Work through each stage in order. Label each right-angled triangle. Show the formula and substitution for each application. Verify that a right angle exists before applying the theorem — Pythagoras only works for right-angled triangles.
A right-angled triangle has legs of length 7 cm and 9 cm. Find the length of the hypotenuse. Give your answer correct to 2 decimal places.
c² = 7² + 9² = 49 + 81 = 130. So c = √130 ≈ 11.4017... ≈ 11.40 cm (2 d.p.). Always write both decimal digits when rounding to 2 d.p.: 11.40, not 11.4. The trailing zero demonstrates you rounded to 2 d.p. and will earn the precision accuracy mark. If the third decimal digit is less than 5, round down; 5 or more, round up.
A rectangular field is 15 m wide and 20 m long. A path is built from one corner to the diagonally opposite corner. How long is the path? Give your answer to 1 decimal place.
The diagonal of a rectangle forms the hypotenuse of a right-angled triangle. c² = 15² + 20² = 225 + 400 = 625. c = √625 = 25.0 m. This is a 15-20-25 triple (a multiple of 3-4-5). Always check for Pythagorean triples — recognising them saves calculator time. The mark scheme requires the Pythagoras setup, the value 625, and the correct distance 25 m.
A right-angled triangle has a hypotenuse of 17 cm and one leg of length 8 cm. Find the length of the other leg. Give your answer to 2 decimal places.
Identify the right-angled triangle within the real-world context. Label the hypotenuse and both legs. Apply a² + b² = c², substituting the known side lengths. Solve for the unknown. Show a diagram or clear identification of which sides are which before calculating. Real-world Pythagoras questions often describe the diagonal, slant, or straight-line distance as the hypotenuse.
A right-angled triangle has a hypotenuse of 15 cm and one shorter side of 9 cm. Calculate the length of the other shorter side.
Using a² + b² = c²: a² + 81 = 225, so a² = 225 − 81 = 144. Therefore a = √144 = 12 cm. This is another Pythagorean triple (9, 12, 15 = 3 × (3, 4, 5)).
A right-angled triangle has legs of 5 cm and 7 cm. Find the exact length of the hypotenuse, leaving your answer in surd form.
This higher-difficulty question may require splitting a complex shape into right-angled triangles, or applying Pythagoras in an isosceles triangle by drawing a line of symmetry. Identify hidden right angles — the perpendicular height of an isosceles triangle, the diagonal of a rectangle, or the slant side of a shape. Show all intermediate calculations with the formula clearly applied at each stage.
Show that a triangle with sides 9 cm, 40 cm, and 41 cm contains a right angle.
For the converse: compute a² + b² for the two shorter sides and c² for the longest side separately. If a² + b² = c², the triangle contains a right angle at the vertex opposite the longest side. State the conclusion clearly. This reverses the standard Pythagoras calculation — instead of finding a side, you are checking a condition. Show both squared values before comparing.
A right-angled triangle has legs of length 3 cm and 4 cm. Find the length of the hypotenuse.
Apply a² + b² = c²: 3² + 4² = 9 + 16 = 25 = c². So c = √25 = 5 cm. This is the classic 3-4-5 Pythagorean triple. Two common errors: adding the lengths directly (3+4=7) without squaring first; and giving c²=25 as the answer instead of taking the square root. Always square each leg, add, then take the square root. The method mark is for 9+16=25; the accuracy mark for 5 cm.
A right-angled triangle has hypotenuse 13 cm and one leg 5 cm. Find the length of the other leg. Give your answer to 1 decimal place.
When finding a shorter leg, rearrange to b² = c² − a²: 13² − 5² = 169 − 25 = 144. Then b = √144 = 12 cm. This is the 5-12-13 triple. The critical distinction is that you SUBTRACT when finding a leg (not the hypotenuse). Students often add (169+25=194) when they should subtract. The method mark is for the correct subtraction; the accuracy mark for 12 cm.
A triangle has sides of length 5 cm, 12 cm, and 13 cm. Explain how you can tell, without measuring any angles, whether this triangle contains a right angle.
To check if three lengths form a right-angled triangle, identify the longest side as the potential hypotenuse c. Calculate a² + b² (sum of squares of shorter sides) and c² (square of longest side) separately. If a² + b² = c², the triangle is right-angled. Show both calculations and state a conclusion. This is the converse of Pythagoras' theorem.
A right-angled triangle has shorter sides of 5 cm and 12 cm. Using Pythagoras' theorem, calculate the length of the hypotenuse c.
Apply c² = a² + b²: c² = 5² + 12² = 25 + 144 = 169. Therefore c = √169 = 13 cm. This is a Pythagorean triple (5, 12, 13).
Explain why Pythagoras' theorem only works for right-angled triangles.
Pythagoras' theorem only works for right-angled triangles because the relationship a² + b² = c² relies on the right angle being present. In a right-angled triangle, the hypotenuse is always the longest side opposite the right angle, and the squares of the two shorter sides sum exactly to the square of the hypotenuse. In any other triangle, the angles are different and the relationship between the sides changes — you would need to use the cosine rule instead.
Pythagoras' theorem is derived from the geometric property of right angles. The 90° angle creates a unique relationship where a² + b² = c² exactly. For non-right-angled triangles this equality does not hold — the cosine rule (a² = b² + c² − 2bc cos A) gives the general relationship.
In a right-angled triangle with legs a and b and hypotenuse c, which formula is Pythagoras' theorem?
Pythagoras' theorem states that in any right-angled triangle, the square of the hypotenuse equals the sum of the squares of the other two sides: a² + b² = c².
A right-angled triangle has legs 6 cm and 8 cm. What is the length of the hypotenuse?
6² + 8² = 36 + 64 = 100. Hypotenuse = √100 = 10 cm. This is the 6-8-10 triple (double of 3-4-5).
The diagram shows a right-angled triangle with sides labelled a, b, and c, where c is the hypotenuse. Which formula correctly represents Pythagoras' theorem?
Pythagoras' theorem states that the square of the hypotenuse equals the sum of the squares of the other two sides: a² + b² = c², where c is the hypotenuse.
In triangle ABC, AB = 14 cm, BC = 18 cm, and angle BAC = 72°. Using the sine rule, find angle BCA. Then find the length AC. Give both answers to 1 decimal place.
This challenge question requires two applications of the sine rule. Step 1: use sinC/BC = sinA/AB to find angle C: sinC/14 = sin72°/18, so C = sin⁻¹(14 × sin72°/18) ≈ 48.6°. Step 2: find B using the angle sum: B = 180° − 72° − 48.6° = 59.4°. Step 3: apply the sine rule again: AC/sin59.4° = 18/sin72°, so AC = 18 × sin59.4°/sin72° ≈ 20.5 cm. Each step depends on the previous one, so errors compound — method marks are available at each stage even if earlier answers contain errors.
In triangle ABC, angle B = 48°, angle C = 61°, and side b = 14 cm. Find side c. Give your answer to 2 decimal places.
With angles B = 48° and C = 61° and side b = 14 cm given, the known pair is b = 14 opposite B = 48°. To find side c (opposite C = 61°): c/sin61° = 14/sin48°, so c = 14 × sin61°/sin48° ≈ 16.10 cm. Identifying the known side-angle pair correctly (worth B1) is the crucial first step. The mark for c = 16.10 cm depends on a correct sine rule setup — errors in pairing lead to incorrect answers that score no accuracy marks.
In triangle ABC, angle A = 30°, side a = 8 cm, and side b = 12 cm. Find both possible values of angle B. Give your answers to 1 decimal place.
With A = 30°, a = 8, b = 12: sinB = 12 × sin30°/8 = 0.75. The first solution is B₁ = sin⁻¹(0.75) ≈ 48.6°. Since sin is also positive in the second quadrant, the second solution is B₂ = 180° − 48.6° = 131.4°. Check validity: A + B₁ = 78.6° < 180° (valid); A + B₂ = 161.4° < 180° (also valid). Both triangles exist, so both values must be stated. Stating only one solution loses 2 marks. This is a classic ambiguous case — the small side (a = 8) is opposite the given angle and shorter than the other side (b = 12).
From point A, point B is 12 km away at a bearing of 040°. Point C is on a bearing of 100° from A. The angle ABC = 75°. Find the distance AC, giving your answer to 2 decimal places.
Bearing problems require finding the triangle's angles before applying the sine rule. Angle BAC is the difference between the two bearings: 100° − 40° = 60°. Angle ACB = 180° − 60° − 75° = 45° (angle sum). Now the known side-angle pair is AB = 12 opposite angle C = 45°. Set up AC/sin75° = 12/sin45°, so AC = 12 × sin75°/sin45° ≈ 16.39 km. The most common error is failing to find all three angles first — going straight to the sine rule without the third angle loses both B1 marks and makes a correct final answer impossible.
In triangle ABC, angle A = 40°, angle B = 75°, and side a = 8 cm. Find the length of side b. Give your answer to 2 decimal places.
To find a side using the sine rule, identify the known side-angle pair (here: a = 8 opposite A = 40°) and write the equation b/sinB = a/sinA, giving b/sin75° = 8/sin40°. Rearrange to b = 8 × sin75° / sin40° ≈ 11.71 cm. The required side's opposite angle sine always goes in the numerator. A common mistake is inverting the ratio, which gives a different (smaller) value.
In triangle PQR, angle P = 35°, side p = 7 cm, and side q = 9 cm. Find angle Q. Give your answer to 1 decimal place.
To find an angle using the sine rule, rearrange to sinQ/q = sinP/p: sinQ/9 = sin35°/7. Multiply across: sinQ = 9 × sin35°/7 = 9 × 0.5736/7 ≈ 0.7362. Then take the inverse sine: Q = sin⁻¹(0.7362) ≈ 47.3°. The critical step that students often miss is applying sin⁻¹ at the end — leaving the answer as 0.7362 (the sine value) loses the mark. Note: always check whether there may be a second solution (the supplementary angle) if the triangle type is ambiguous.
In triangle ABC, angle A = 50°, angle C = 65°, and side c = 12 cm. Find the length of side a. Give your answer to 2 decimal places.
With two angles and one side given (AAS), identify the known side-angle pair: c = 12 cm is opposite C = 65°. The required side a is opposite A = 50°. Set up a/sin50° = 12/sin65°, then a = 12 × sin50°/sin65° ≈ 10.28 cm. The key step is correctly pairing each side with its opposite angle. A common error is mixing up which angle is opposite which side, leading to using the wrong angle in the numerator or denominator.
In triangle XYZ, side x = 15 cm, side z = 18 cm, and angle X = 52°. Find angle Z. Give your answer to 1 decimal place.
With sides x = 15 and z = 18 and angle X = 52°, the known side-angle pair is x = 15 opposite X = 52°. Set up sinZ/18 = sin52°/15 to find angle Z. Solve: sinZ = 18 × sin52°/15 ≈ 0.9456, so Z = sin⁻¹(0.9456) ≈ 68.5°. When sinZ is close to 1, it is worth checking whether the supplement (180° − 68.5° = 111.5°) also forms a valid triangle, but here A + the supplement would exceed 180°, so only one solution is valid.
Explain what is meant by the ambiguous case of the sine rule, and state when it can occur.
The ambiguous case arises because sin θ = sin(180° − θ), meaning inverse sine always returns the acute angle but the obtuse supplement may also be valid. It occurs under ASS conditions (two sides and a non-included angle). If the given angle is acute and the side opposite it is shorter than the other given side, two different triangles can be constructed. The correct response is to find both θ and 180° − θ, then check each by verifying that the angle sum of the triangle remains below 180°.
Which of the following is the sine rule?
The sine rule: a/sinA = b/sinB = c/sinC, where a, b, c are sides opposite to angles A, B, C respectively.
When is the sine rule most appropriate to use?
The sine rule is used when you know a matching side-angle pair (a side and the angle opposite it), plus one other piece of information (side or angle).
In triangle ABC, a = 10, A = 45°, B = 60°. Which calculation correctly gives side b?
b/sin60° = 10/sin45°, so b = 10 × sin60°/sin45°.
A shape has a vertex at the general point (a, b). It is translated by vector (3a, −b). Find an expression for the image vertex. Then find the image vertex when a = 2, b = 5.
Algebraic translations work identically to numerical ones: add the vector components to the coordinate expressions. x' = a + 3a = 4a; y' = b + (−b) = 0. The general image is (4a, 0) — notice the y-coordinate is always 0 regardless of b, because the vector exactly cancels it. Substituting a = 2 gives the specific image (8, 0). A common error is computing y' = b − b = b rather than 0.
Shape P is translated by vector (5, 2) to give shape Q. Shape Q is then translated by vector (−3, 4) to give shape R. Find the single translation vector that maps P directly to R.
Two translations can be combined into one by adding their vectors component by component. Horizontal: 5 + (−3) = 2; Vertical: 2 + 4 = 6. The single translation vector is (2, 6). This works because each movement simply adds to the previous position. A common mistake is subtracting the second vector instead of adding it.
Triangle ABC has vertices A(−3, 1), B(−1, 1), C(−2, 4). Triangle A'B'C' has vertices A'(2, −2), B'(4, −2), C'(3, 1). Describe fully the transformation that maps ABC to A'B'C'.
Translation by vector (5, −3). The x-coordinate increases by 5 (from −3 to 2) and the y-coordinate decreases by 3 (from 1 to −2). Verified with a second vertex: B(−1, 1) maps to B'(4, −2), giving the same vector (5, −3).
To describe a translation fully from a grid, calculate the vector from one matched pair of vertices (image − original) and verify it with a second pair. A(−3,1) → A'(2,−2): horizontal = 2−(−3) = 5, vertical = −2−1 = −3, so vector = (5, −3). The complete description must state 'Translation by vector (5, −3)' — the type and the vector are both required.
Square ABCD has vertices A(1, 2), B(4, 2), C(4, 5), D(1, 5). It is translated by vector (−5, −7). Find the coordinates of all four vertices of the image A'B'C'D'.
Apply the vector (−5, −7) to every vertex separately. A(1,2): (1−5, 2−7) = (−4,−5); B(4,2): (−1,−5); C(4,5): (−1,−2); D(1,5): (−4,−2). Every vertex moves by exactly the same vector. The translated square has the same size and shape (congruent) and the same orientation. A common error is applying the vector to only one or two vertices.
Three translations are applied in sequence: (2, 5), then (−4, −1), then (6, −3). Find the single vector that achieves the same overall transformation.
Three translations combine by adding all horizontal components and all vertical components separately. Horizontal: 2 + (−4) + 6 = 4; Vertical: 5 + (−1) + (−3) = 1. Single vector = (4, 1). The order of the translations does not matter for the final result — vector addition is commutative. This generalises to any number of translations.
Shape A is mapped to shape C by a single transformation. Shape A: vertices at (1, 1), (1, 3), (3, 3), (3, 2), (2, 2), (2, 1) Shape C: vertices at (−1, 1), (−3, 1), (−3, 3), (−2, 3), (−2, 2), (−1, 2) Fully describe the single transformation that maps shape A to shape C.
The transformation is a rotation. The centre of rotation is (0, 2). The angle is 90° anticlockwise (or 270° clockwise).
A rotation requires three pieces of information: the type (rotation), the centre of rotation, and the angle with direction (clockwise or anticlockwise). For this question the transformation is a 90° anticlockwise rotation about (0, 2). Students often omit the direction or the centre. Note: 90° anticlockwise and 270° clockwise describe the same rotation and both earn full marks.
Shape A is mapped to shape D by a single transformation. Shape D is similar to shape A but each side is twice as long. Shape D is positioned with one vertex at (4, 2). Fully describe the single transformation that maps shape A to shape D.
The transformation is an enlargement. The scale factor is 2. The centre of enlargement is (0, 0).
An enlargement requires three pieces of information: the type (enlargement), the scale factor (how many times bigger), and the centre of enlargement. Here shape D is twice the size of A, so scale factor = 2, and the centre is the origin (0, 0). Students commonly forget to state the centre, or confuse the scale factor direction. Lines drawn through corresponding vertices all pass through the centre of enlargement.
Point A has coordinates (2, 5). It is translated by the vector (4, −3). What are the coordinates of A'?
To apply a translation, add the vector components to the corresponding coordinates. Here: x' = 2 + 4 = 6, y' = 5 + (−3) = 2, giving A' = (6, 2). A common error is subtracting instead of adding, or applying the components to the wrong coordinate. The top number always affects x (horizontal), the bottom number always affects y (vertical).
Shape A has a vertex at (1, 3). After translation, the corresponding vertex of shape B is at (5, 1). Write the translation vector.
The translation vector is found by subtracting the original coordinates from the image coordinates: new − old. Horizontal: 5 − 1 = 4; Vertical: 1 − 3 = −2. Vector = (4, −2). The most common error is reversing the subtraction (old − new), giving (−4, 2). Always go in the direction of the arrow: from object to image.
On a coordinate grid, triangle T has vertices at (1, 1), (3, 1), and (2, 3). Translate triangle T by the vector (−3, 2). Draw the image T' and write the coordinates of its vertices.
Apply the vector (−3, 2) to every vertex of the triangle. The top number (−3) means 3 left; the bottom number (2) means 2 up. (1,1) → (−2, 3); (3,1) → (0, 3); (2,3) → (−1, 5). Every point moves by the same vector — the image is congruent to the original and has the same orientation. Always translate all vertices before drawing the shape.
Shape A is mapped to shape B by a translation. Describe fully what information is needed to describe a translation.
A translation is fully described by one piece of information: the column vector (a, b). No centre, no angle, and no scale factor are needed — those belong to other transformations. Many students incorrectly include 'centre of rotation' or 'angle' when describing a translation. On the exam, a full answer is always: 'Translation by vector (a, b)'.
Shape A was translated to shape B by vector (7, −4). What vector translates shape B back to shape A?
The inverse translation (returning to the starting position) is found by negating both components of the original vector. Vector (7, −4) becomes (−7, 4): 7 right becomes 7 left, and 4 down becomes 4 up. The key rule is to negate BOTH components — students often negate only one, which gives an incorrect answer.
Explain the difference between a rotation and a reflection.
A rotation turns a shape by a given angle about a fixed point called the centre of rotation. A reflection flips a shape over a mirror line so the image is the same distance from the line as the original but on the other side.
A rotation turns a shape about a fixed centre point — the shape's orientation changes but it is not flipped. A reflection flips a shape over a mirror line — the image is a mirror image of the original. Key difference: after a rotation the shape is still the same 'way round', but after a reflection the shape is reversed (like looking in a mirror). Rotation needs: type, centre, angle, direction. Reflection needs: type and mirror line equation.
A translation is described by the vector (3, −2). What does this mean?
Translation vector (a, b): a = horizontal movement (positive right), b = vertical movement (positive up). So (3, −2) = 3 right, 2 down.
Which statement about a translation is correct?
A translation slides a shape without changing its size, shape, or orientation. The image is congruent to the original.
Shape A has been moved to a new position to give shape B. Every point has moved 5 units to the right and 2 units down. No size or orientation has changed. Which transformation maps shape A to shape B?
A translation slides a shape without rotating or reflecting it. Every point moves by the same vector. Here the shape moves 5 right and 2 down, which is the translation vector (5, −2).
OA = a and OB = b. Point P divides AB in the ratio 2:1 (from A). (a) Express OP in terms of a and b. (b) Show that OP lies on the line AB. (c) Find the position vector of the point Q that divides AB in the ratio 1:2.
AP:PB = 2:1, so AP = (2/3) × AB = (2/3)(b − a). OP = OA + AP = a + (2/3)(b − a) = (1/3)a + (2/3)b. For part (b): OP = OA + (2/3)(OB − OA) = OA + t × AB where t = 2/3, showing P lies on line AB. For part (c): OQ = a + (1/3)(b − a) = (2/3)a + (1/3)b.
When P divides AB in ratio m:n, the section formula gives OP = OA + (m/(m+n)) × AB. For ratio 2:1: AP = (2/3) × (b − a), so OP = a + (2/3)(b − a) = (1/3)a + (2/3)b. For part (b), writing OP = OA + (2/3)AB proves P lies on segment AB. For ratio 1:2 in part (c): OQ = a + (1/3)(b − a) = (2/3)a + (1/3)b. Notice the coefficients of a and b always sum to 1, which is a useful check.
OA = (2, 1) and OB = (8, 4) and OC = (14, 7) are position vectors. Show that A, B, and C are collinear (lie on the same straight line).
AB = OB − OA = (8,4) − (2,1) = (6, 3). AC = OC − OA = (14,7) − (2,1) = (12, 6). Since AC = 2 × AB (as (12,6) = 2 × (6,3)), the vectors AB and AC are parallel. Since they share point A, points A, B, and C are collinear.
To prove three points are collinear, find two vectors that share a common point (e.g. AB and AC) and show they are parallel scalar multiples of each other. Here AB = (6, 3) and AC = (12, 6) = 2 × (6, 3), confirming they are parallel. Since both vectors pass through A, the three points lie on the same straight line. Both steps are required in the mark scheme: showing parallel AND stating the shared point.
OA = (3, 1) and OB = (7, 5) are position vectors from the origin O. M is the midpoint of AB. Find the position vector OM.
The position vector of a midpoint M is OM = (OA + OB) / 2 = ((3+7)/2, (1+5)/2) = (5, 3). This is the vector average of the two endpoint position vectors. Alternatively, add the two vectors and halve every component. Students sometimes forget to divide by 2, giving the sum (10, 6) instead of the midpoint (5, 3).
Explain what it means for two vectors to be parallel. Give an example of a vector that is parallel to a = (2, −3), and one that is parallel but in the opposite direction.
Two vectors are parallel if one is a scalar multiple of the other, meaning they point in the same or exactly opposite direction. Any non-zero scalar k applied to (2, −3) produces a parallel vector: positive k gives the same direction (e.g. k=2 gives (4, −6)), negative k gives the opposite direction (e.g. k=−1 gives (−2, 3)). A common mistake is assuming parallel vectors must have the same length — they do not.
OA = (1, 4) and OB = (6, 2) are position vectors. Find vector AB.
To find vector AB using position vectors, apply the rule AB = OB − OA (destination minus start). Here AB = (6, 2) − (1, 4) = (5, −2). Think of the path from A to B via the origin: go backwards from A to O (giving −OA), then forward from O to B (giving OB), so AB = −OA + OB = OB − OA. The most common mistake is subtracting in the wrong order, computing OA − OB which gives vector BA instead.
Explain the difference between a position vector and a displacement vector. Use an example to support your answer.
A position vector always starts from the fixed origin O and gives the exact location of a point (e.g. OP = (3, 4) locates point P). A displacement vector describes movement from one point to another and can start anywhere — for example, PQ = OQ − OP is the displacement from P to Q. The key distinction is that position vectors are tied to the origin; displacement vectors are free. Students often confuse them: remember that 'position' means 'where a point is', while 'displacement' means 'how to get from one point to another'.
Vector a = (4, −1) and vector b = (−2, 3) (written as column vectors). Calculate a + b.
To add two vectors, add corresponding components separately: a + b = (4+(−2), (−1)+3) = (2, 2). Vector addition is commutative — a + b = b + a. Geometrically, this represents following vector a then vector b. A common mistake is accidentally subtracting by mixing up signs; write each component calculation out separately to avoid errors.
Vector p = (5, 2) and vector q = (3, −4). Calculate p − q.
To subtract vectors, subtract corresponding components: p − q = (5−3, 2−(−4)) = (2, 6). Be careful with negatives: subtracting a negative is the same as adding. Geometrically, p − q means following vector p, then the reverse of vector q. The key step students miss is that 2 − (−4) = 2 + 4 = 6, not 2 − 4.
Vector w = (5, −12). Calculate the magnitude |w|.
The magnitude (length) of a vector (a, b) is found using Pythagoras: |w| = √(a² + b²). For w = (5, −12): |w| = √(5² + (−12)²) = √(25 + 144) = √169 = 13. Note that the negative sign does not matter since (−12)² = 144 = 12². Students sometimes forget to square both components before adding, or forget to take the square root at the end.
A column vector is written as (3 / −2) (3 on top, −2 on bottom). What does this vector represent?
A column vector (a, b) describes movement: the top number is horizontal (positive = right, negative = left) and the bottom number is vertical (positive = up, negative = down). So (3, −2) means 3 right and 2 down. Students often swap these — always remember: top = horizontal (across), bottom = vertical (up/down).
Vector v = (3, −2). What is 4v?
To multiply a vector by a scalar (a number), multiply every component by that number: 4v = 4 × (3, −2) = (4×3, 4×(−2)) = (12, −8). This scales the vector — it becomes 4 times as long and points in the same direction (since the scalar is positive). A negative scalar reverses the direction. Students sometimes only multiply one component — both must be multiplied.
Vector v = (6, 8). Which of the following is the unit vector in the direction of v?
Unit vector = v / |v|. First find |v| = √(6² + 8²) = √100 = 10. Then divide each component by 10: (6/10, 8/10) = (0.6, 0.8).
Using a ruler and compasses only, construct triangle PQR where PQ = 8 cm, angle QPR = 60°, and PR = 6 cm. Show all construction lines.
This is an SAS (side-angle-side) triangle construction. Draw PQ = 8 cm. At P, construct a 60° angle using the equilateral triangle arc method. Along the resulting ray, measure PR = 6 cm. Join Q to R to complete the triangle. Four separate mark-earning steps: the base, the 60° arcs, the length PR, and the final side QR. Using a protractor to measure 60° earns only partial marks — the angle must be constructed with arcs.
Using a ruler and compasses only, construct a 30° angle at point A on line AB. Show all construction lines.
A 30° angle cannot be made in a single step; it requires two constructions. First, create a 60° angle at A using the equilateral triangle method (arc on the line, same-radius arc from that crossing). Then apply the angle bisector construction to that 60° angle. Half of 60° is 30°. Each stage must show arcs: two sets for the 60° and three sets for the bisector — a total of three mark-earning arc stages.
Using a ruler and compasses only, construct the perpendicular bisector of the line segment AB shown. Show all construction lines.
A full-marks perpendicular bisector requires visible arc marks from both A and B (same radius, greater than half AB) and a straight line drawn through the two intersection points. The critical rule is: never erase construction arcs, as they are evidence of method and are required for the method mark. Without visible arcs you can only earn the mark for the final line, not for the construction itself.
Using a ruler and compasses only, bisect the angle ABC shown. Show all construction lines.
A full-marks angle bisector requires three sets of visible arcs: (1) the initial arc from vertex B crossing both arms; (2) equal arcs from those two crossing points intersecting inside the angle; (3) the bisector line from B through the final intersection. Using a protractor to measure the angle earns no marks. As with all constructions, leave all arc marks visible — they are evidence of method.
Using a ruler and compasses only, construct an equilateral triangle with side length 5 cm. Show all construction lines.
An equilateral triangle is constructed by drawing a base AB of the required length, then drawing equal arcs (radius = base length) from both A and B. Their intersection locates vertex C. Since all three sides are equal radii, the triangle has all sides equal and all angles 60°. The method mark requires arcs to be visible from both endpoints; the accuracy mark requires all sides within 2 mm of 5 cm.
Using a ruler and compasses only, construct a perpendicular from the point P to the line L, where P is a point not on line L. Show all construction lines.
To drop a perpendicular from point P to line L: place the compass at P and draw an arc that crosses L at two points A and B. Then bisect segment AB by drawing equal arcs from A and B below the line — their intersection Q defines the foot of the perpendicular. Rule from P through Q. The whole construction is essentially perpendicular bisecting the chord AB from the special point P above it. Never use a set square — only compass and ruler are valid.
Explain why compass arcs are used in geometric constructions rather than measuring with a ruler or protractor.
A compass enforces the geometric property that all points on an arc are exactly equidistant from the centre. This transfers lengths with perfect theoretical precision. A ruler or protractor requires reading a scale, which introduces human measurement error. Constructions using arcs are exact in principle — the result does not depend on the size of the drawing or how accurately a scale is read. Both mark points need to be covered: state the equal-radius property, AND contrast with measurement-tool errors.
When constructing the perpendicular bisector of a line segment AB, what must you do with your compass?
Set compass to MORE than half AB. Draw arcs from A and B, both with the same radius, intersecting on each side of AB. The line through the two intersections is the perpendicular bisector.
To bisect an angle with compass and ruler, which of the following correctly describes the first step after placing the compass at the angle vertex?
First step: centre the compass at the vertex and draw an arc crossing both arms. Then from each crossing point, draw equal arcs that intersect inside the angle. The intersection point, joined to the vertex, gives the bisector.
Which construction could you use as a starting point to construct a 60° angle at point A on a line?
An equilateral triangle has three 60° angles. Constructing one with a vertex at A and one side along the line automatically creates a 60° angle at A.
The equation of a circle is x² + y² − 6x + 4y − 12 = 0. (a) By completing the square, find the centre and radius of the circle. (b) Show that the point A(7, 1) lies on the circle.
Completing the square: group x and y terms. x² − 6x → (x − 3)² − 9 (half of −6 is −3, subtract 3² = 9). y² + 4y → (y + 2)² − 4 (half of 4 is 2, subtract 2² = 4). So: (x−3)² − 9 + (y+2)² − 4 − 12 = 0 → (x−3)² + (y+2)² = 25. Centre (3, −2), radius 5. For part (b): (7−3)² + (1+2)² = 16 + 9 = 25 ✓, confirming A lies on the circle.
The circle C has equation x² + y² = 25. The line L has equation y = x + 1. Find the coordinates of the points where L intersects C.
Substitute y = x + 1 into x² + y² = 25: x² + (x+1)² = 25. Expand: x² + x² + 2x + 1 = 25 → 2x² + 2x − 24 = 0 → x² + x − 12 = 0 → (x + 4)(x − 3) = 0. So x = −4 (y = −3) or x = 3 (y = 4). The intersections are (−4, −3) and (3, 4). Verify: 9 + 16 = 25 ✓ and 16 + 9 = 25 ✓.
The equation of a circle is x² + y² + 4x − 10y + 13 = 0. Find the centre and radius of the circle.
Complete the square: x²+4x → (x+2)²−4 (half of 4 is 2, subtract 4). y²−10y → (y−5)²−25 (half of −10 is −5, subtract 25). Substitute: (x+2)²−4+(y−5)²−25+13=0 → (x+2)²+(y−5)²=4+25−13=16. Centre=(−2, 5), radius=√16=4. Check constant arithmetic: 4+25=29, 29−13=16 ✓
A circle has centre (3, −2) and passes through the point (7, 1). (a) Find the radius of the circle. (b) Write down the equation of the circle.
To find the radius, use the distance formula between centre (3, −2) and point (7, 1): r² = (7 − 3)² + (1 − (−2))² = 4² + 3² = 16 + 9 = 25, so r = 5. The equation is then (x − 3)² + (y + 2)² = 25. Note: 1 − (−2) = 3, not 1 − 2 = −1.
The circle C has equation x² + y² = 100. The point P(6, 8) lies on C. Find the equation of the tangent to C at P. Give your answer in the form y = mx + c.
The tangent at P(6, 8) is perpendicular to the radius OP. Gradient of OP = 8/6 = 4/3. The negative reciprocal is −3/4. Using point-slope form: y − 8 = (−3/4)(x − 6) → y − 8 = −3x/4 + 18/4 → y − 8 = −3x/4 + 4.5 → y = −3x/4 + 12.5. You can verify: at x = 6, y = −18/4 + 12.5 = −4.5 + 12.5 = 8 ✓
A circle has centre (3, −2) and radius 5. Write down the equation of the circle.
The general equation of a circle with centre (a, b) and radius r is (x − a)² + (y − b)² = r². With centre (3, −2) and r = 5: (x − 3)² + (y − (−2))² = 5², which simplifies to (x − 3)² + (y + 2)² = 25. Take care with signs — the bracket terms subtract the centre coordinates.
Write down the centre and radius of the circle with equation (x − 2)² + (y + 5)² = 45.
Compare (x − 2)² + (y + 5)² = 45 with the standard form (x − a)² + (y − b)² = r². Here a = 2, b = −5 (because y + 5 = y − (−5)), and r² = 45. So the centre is (2, −5) and r = √45 = 3√5. The most common error is reading the centre as (−2, 5) — remember the signs flip.
The circle C has equation x² + y² = 25. The point P(3, −4) lies on C. Find the equation of the tangent to C at P.
The tangent at point P is perpendicular to the radius OP. Gradient of OP = (−4 − 0)/(3 − 0) = −4/3. The perpendicular (negative reciprocal) gradient is 3/4. Using point-slope form through P(3, −4): y − (−4) = (3/4)(x − 3) → y + 4 = 3x/4 − 9/4 → multiply through by 4: 4y + 16 = 3x − 9 → 3x − 4y = 25.
A circle has equation x² + y² = 25. The point P(3, −4) lies on the circle. Find the equation of the tangent to the circle at P. Give your answer in the form ax + by = c where a, b and c are integers.
For point P(3, −4) on x² + y² = 25: radius gradient = (−4 − 0)/(3 − 0) = −4/3. Tangent gradient = 3/4 (negative reciprocal). Point-slope form: y + 4 = (3/4)(x − 3). Multiply by 4: 4y + 16 = 3x − 9. Rearrange: 3x − 4y = 25. Check: 3(3) − 4(−4) = 9 + 16 = 25 ✓
A circle has centre (1, 2) and is tangent to the x-axis. (a) Write down the radius of the circle. (b) Write down the equation of the circle.
A circle tangent to the x-axis touches it at exactly one point. The radius is perpendicular to the tangent, so the radius runs vertically from the centre to the x-axis. The perpendicular distance from centre (1, 2) to the x-axis is the y-coordinate = 2. So r = 2 and the equation is (x − 1)² + (y − 2)² = 4.
A circle has centre (0, 0) and radius 5. Which of the following is the equation of the circle?
The standard equation of a circle centred at the origin with radius r is x² + y² = r². Here r = 5, so r² = 25, giving x² + y² = 25. The most common error is writing x² + y² = 5 (forgetting to square the radius).
The circle C has equation x² + y² = 65. Does the point (4, 7) lie inside, on, or outside circle C?
Substitute (4, 7) into x² + y²: 4² + 7² = 16 + 49 = 65. Since 65 = 65 (= r²), the point lies exactly on the circle. A point is inside if p² + q² < r², on if equal, outside if greater.
Write down the equation of a circle with centre (0, 0) and radius 7.
The equation of a circle centred at the origin with radius r is x² + y² = r². With r = 7: r² = 49, so the equation is x² + y² = 49.
Box A contains 3 red and 2 white balls. Box B contains 1 red and 4 white balls. A ball is chosen at random from Box A and placed into Box B. Then a ball is drawn at random from Box B. Find the probability that the ball drawn from Box B is red.
Two cases: (1) Red transferred from A: P(red from A) × P(red from B after red added) = 3/5 × 2/6 = 6/30. (2) White transferred from A: P(white from A) × P(red from B after white added) = 2/5 × 1/6 = 2/30. After adding a red ball, B has 2 red and 4 white (6 total). After adding a white, B has 1 red and 5 white (6 total). P(red from B) = 6/30 + 2/30 = 8/30 = 4/15.
A bag contains 4 red and 6 blue balls. Two balls are selected without replacement. Using a tree diagram, find the probability of selecting exactly one red ball.
Exactly one red ball can happen two different ways: red then blue, OR blue then red. Both are valid outcomes, so you must find the probability of each and add them together. For Case 1 (red first, blue second): after drawing one red from 10, there are 9 balls left with 6 still blue. P(Case 1) = 4/10 × 6/9 = 24/90. For Case 2 (blue first, red second): after drawing one blue, 9 balls remain with 4 red. P(Case 2) = 6/10 × 4/9 = 24/90. These two cases are mutually exclusive, so P(exactly one red) = 24/90 + 24/90 = 48/90 = 8/15. The most common mistake is finding only one case and stopping at 24/90 rather than identifying both possible orders.
A biased coin has P(heads) = 2/3. The coin is flipped three times independently. Find the probability of getting exactly two heads.
P(tails) = 1 − 2/3 = 1/3. Arrangements giving exactly 2 heads: HHT, HTH, THH — three arrangements. P(HHT) = 2/3 × 2/3 × 1/3 = 4/27. P(exactly 2 heads) = 3 × 4/27 = 12/27 = 4/9. Forgetting to multiply by 3 (for the three different arrangements) and giving 4/27 is the most common error on this type of question.
The probability that it rains on Saturday is 0.4. The probability that it rains on Sunday is 0.3. The two days are independent. Find the probability that it rains on exactly one of the two days.
Exactly one rainy day = P(rain Sat, no rain Sun) + P(no rain Sat, rain Sun) = 0.4 × 0.7 + 0.6 × 0.3 = 0.28 + 0.18 = 0.46. Multiply along each path (AND), then add the two mutually exclusive cases (OR). A common mistake is computing only P(rain on both) = 0.12 and treating it as 'exactly one'.
A bag contains 6 green balls and 4 yellow balls. Two balls are drawn without replacement. Find the probability that both balls are green.
Without replacement: P(first green) = 6/10 = 3/5. After removing one green, 5 green and 4 yellow remain (9 total). P(second green | first green) = 5/9. P(both green) = 6/10 × 5/9 = 30/90 = 1/3. Using P = 6/10 × 6/10 = 36/100 treats this as with-replacement, which is the classic error when the question says 'without replacement'.
The probability that Lena scores a goal in any penalty is 0.8. She takes 2 penalties independently. Find the probability that she scores at least one goal.
P(at least one goal) = 1 − P(no goals) = 1 − P(miss both) = 1 − (0.2 × 0.2) = 1 − 0.04 = 0.96. The complement method is faster than listing all three scoring cases. P(miss one penalty) = 1 − 0.8 = 0.2. Adding 0.8 + 0.8 = 1.6 is impossible for a probability — never add independent event probabilities for an AND event.
A bag contains 5 red and 3 blue counters. A counter is drawn, its colour noted, then returned to the bag. A second counter is drawn. Find P(red on both draws).
With replacement, both draws have P(red) = 5/8 because the counter is returned before the second draw. P(both red) = 5/8 × 5/8 = 25/64. The key phrase 'returned to the bag' confirms independence and that all probabilities remain the same. Adding instead of multiplying gives a value exceeding 1, which is impossible.
The probability that Tom passes his maths test is 0.7. The probability that Tom passes his English test is 0.6. The two tests are independent. Find the probability that Tom passes both tests.
Two independent events: P(both pass) = P(maths) × P(English) = 0.7 × 0.6 = 0.42. The AND rule for independent events is multiplication. Adding gives 1.3, which exceeds 1 and is an impossible probability — this error signals the wrong operation.
Explain the difference between independent and dependent events in probability. Give an example of each.
Independent events: the outcome of one does not affect the probability of the other. Example: flipping two separate coins. Dependent events: the first outcome changes the probability of the second. Example: drawing balls without replacement, where the pool size decreases after each draw. Both marks require distinct definitions — one mark per definition.
A fair coin is flipped and a fair die is rolled. What rule is used to find P(heads AND rolling a 3)?
For two independent events, P(A and B) = P(A) × P(B). The coin and die do not affect each other, so they are independent. P(heads and 3) = 1/2 × 1/6 = 1/12.
A bag contains 5 red and 3 blue balls. Two balls are drawn without replacement. What is P(blue second | red first)?
After drawing 1 red ball, 7 balls remain (4 red, 3 blue). P(blue second | red first) = 3/7.
Tara spins a spinner with sections labelled A, B, and C. After 120 spins, she records: - A appeared 48 times - B appeared 36 times - C appeared the rest The theoretical probabilities are P(A) = 0.4, P(B) = 0.25, P(C) = 0.35. (a) Find the relative frequency of C. (b) The spinner is spun 300 more times. Using the theoretical probability, how many times would you expect A to appear? (c) Compare the relative frequency of B with P(B) = 0.25 and comment.
Part (a): C appeared 120 − 48 − 36 = 36 times. Relative frequency of C = 36/120 = 0.3. Part (b): Using P(A) = 0.4, expected frequency = 0.4 × 300 = 120. Part (c): Relative frequency of B = 36/120 = 0.3, which is higher than the theoretical P(B) = 0.25. This difference may be due to random variation with only 120 trials, or the spinner may be slightly biased towards B.
A factory produces light bulbs. Based on previous testing, the probability that a bulb is faulty is 0.04. In a batch of n bulbs, the expected number of faulty bulbs is 20. (a) Find n. (b) Of the faulty bulbs, 15% have a specific type of fault. How many bulbs in the batch are expected to have this specific fault?
Part (a): n = expected frequency ÷ probability = 20 ÷ 0.04 = 500 bulbs. Part (b): 15% of 20 faulty bulbs = 0.15 × 20 = 3 bulbs. For part (a), rearrange expected = P × n to give n = expected ÷ P. Students often multiply instead of dividing: 20 × 0.04 = 0.8, clearly not a batch size.
A drawing pin is dropped 50 times. It lands point-up 35 times. (a) Estimate the probability of the pin landing point-up. (b) The pin is dropped 200 more times. How many times would you expect it to land point-up?
Part (a): P(point-up) ≈ 35/50 = 0.7. Part (b): Expected = 0.7 × 200 = 140. Use the estimated probability from part (a) as the multiplier for part (b). Students sometimes try to add the 50 and 200 trial results together first — always estimate probability first, then use it to predict future outcomes.
A bag contains red and blue balls only. P(red) is estimated from an experiment. The relative frequency of selecting a blue ball after n trials is 0.36. The blue ball was selected 63 times. Find n.
Rearrange relative frequency formula: n = frequency ÷ relative frequency = 63 ÷ 0.36 = 175. The formula relative frequency = frequency/total → total = frequency/relative frequency. Students often multiply instead of dividing: 63 × 0.36 = 22.68, which is far too small to be a number of trials.
A biased die is rolled 400 times. The results are shown below. | Score | 1 | 2 | 3 | 4 | 5 | 6 | |-------|----|----|----|----|----|----|---| | Freq | 58 | 62 | 64 | 70 | 68 | 78 | The die is rolled 600 more times. Estimate the number of times a score of 6 is expected.
Estimate P(6) from the experiment: 78/400 = 0.195. Expected frequency in 600 rolls = 0.195 × 600 = 117. Show both steps: estimate the probability first, then multiply by the new number of trials. Using 78/400 × 600 directly without first writing the probability is fine mathematically but shows less clear method.
The probability that a seed germinates is 0.7. 120 seeds are planted. How many seeds would you expect to germinate?
Expected frequency = P(germinate) × number of seeds = 0.7 × 120 = 84. Multiply the probability by the number of trials to get the expected count. Dividing 120 by 0.7 gives 171, which exceeds the total number of seeds — clearly wrong. The formula is always: probability × number of trials.
A spinner is spun 200 times. It lands on red 60 times. Use the results to estimate the probability of landing on red. Give your answer as a decimal.
Relative frequency = frequency ÷ total trials = 60 ÷ 200 = 0.3. This relative frequency is an estimate of the theoretical probability. More trials give a more reliable estimate. Students sometimes invert the fraction (200/60 ≈ 3.3), which exceeds 1 and cannot be a probability.
A fair six-sided die is rolled 300 times. It lands on 4 a total of 63 times. Work out the difference between the experimental probability of rolling a 4 and the theoretical probability of rolling a 4. Give your answer as a decimal.
Experimental probability = 63/300 = 0.21. Theoretical probability for a fair die = 1/6 ≈ 0.167. Difference = 0.21 − 0.167 = 0.043, rounded to 0.04. Students often forget to compute both probabilities and just give one of them. Show both calculations clearly before finding the difference.
A student flips a coin 10 times and gets 7 heads. They say the probability of heads is 7/10. Explain why carrying out more trials would give a better estimate of the probability.
With only 10 flips, random variation has a large effect — 7 heads from 10 is a reasonable result by chance even for a fair coin. As the number of trials increases, the relative frequency converges toward the true theoretical probability (by the law of large numbers). More trials reduce the impact of random variation, giving a more reliable estimate.
Explain two reasons why experimental probability might differ from theoretical probability.
Two distinct reasons must be given for both marks. (1) Random variation: even a fair coin can produce 7 heads in 10 flips by chance — with a small number of trials, results fluctuate randomly around the true probability. (2) The object may be biased/not fair: a biased die or loaded coin would give a different experimental probability from the theoretical one because the theoretical assumes all outcomes are equally likely.
In an experiment, a coin is flipped 50 times and lands heads 32 times. What is the relative frequency of heads?
Relative frequency = number of times the event occurs ÷ total number of trials = 32/50 = 0.64.
Mia rolls a die and records results: | Trials | Relative frequency of 6 | |--------|--------------------------| | 10 | 0.40 | | 50 | 0.22 | | 100 | 0.18 | | 500 | 0.17 | Which statement is most likely true about this die?
As the number of trials increases, the relative frequency converges towards 1/6 ≈ 0.167. This is consistent with a fair die. The initial high value of 0.40 is expected variation with only 10 trials.
A bag contains only red, blue, and green counters. P(red) = 0.25 P(blue) = 3 × P(green) Find P(blue).
Since P(red) + P(blue) + P(green) = 1, we have P(blue) + P(green) = 1 - 0.25 = 0.75. Let P(green) = g, so P(blue) = 3g. Substituting: 3g + g = 0.75, giving 4g = 0.75, so g = 0.1875. Therefore P(blue) = 3 times 0.1875 = 0.5625. Verify: 0.25 + 0.5625 + 0.1875 = 1. The key technique is letting one unknown be g, expressing the other in terms of g, then solving.
A bag contains x red balls, 2 green balls, and 4 blue balls. The probability of picking a red ball at random is 2/5. Find the value of x.
This is a higher-tier question where you set up an algebraic equation using probability. The total number of balls is x + 2 + 4 = x + 6. P(red) = x divided by (x + 6) = 2/5. Cross-multiplying: 5x = 2(x + 6) = 2x + 12, so 3x = 12, giving x = 4. Always verify by substituting back: P(red) = 4/10 = 2/5. When x appears in both numerator and denominator, cross-multiplication removes the fractions.
A spinner has 8 equal sections numbered 1 to 8. The spinner is spun once. What is the probability of landing on a number greater than 5? Give your answer as a fraction.
The numbers greater than 5 on a spinner numbered 1 to 8 are 6, 7, and 8 — that is 3 favourable outcomes. The total number of equally likely outcomes is 8, so P(greater than 5) = 3/8. Watch the phrase 'greater than 5' — it means strictly bigger than 5, so 5 itself is NOT included. If the question said 'at least 5' then 5, 6, 7, 8 would all count, giving 4/8 = 1/2.
The probability that it rains on any given day in April is 0.35. What is the probability that it does NOT rain on a randomly chosen day in April?
This question uses the complementary probability rule: P(event) + P(not event) = 1. Either it rains or it does not — these two outcomes together cover every possibility and must sum to 1. So P(not rain) = 1 - 0.35 = 0.65. A common error is subtracting from 0.5 rather than from 1 — always subtract from 1. This rule appears in almost every probability question, so memorise it.
A box of chocolates contains 4 plain, 6 milk, and 10 white chocolates. A chocolate is selected at random. What is the probability of selecting a milk chocolate? Give your answer as a decimal.
First find the total number of chocolates: 4 + 6 + 10 = 20. Then P(milk) = 6/20. Converting to a decimal: 6 divided by 20 = 0.3. The most common mistake is forgetting to add all types before writing the denominator. The three-step process is always: (1) find the total, (2) write the fraction, (3) convert if required.
A fair six-sided die is rolled. The probability of rolling a prime number is 1/2. What is the probability of NOT rolling a prime number?
Using the complementary rule: P(not prime) = 1 - P(prime) = 1 - 1/2 = 1/2. You can verify this: the non-prime numbers on a 1 to 6 die are 1, 4, and 6 — three numbers out of six — giving 3/6 = 1/2. Both methods agree. The complementary rule P(not A) = 1 - P(A) is the faster approach whenever you already know P(A).
Explain what is meant by theoretical probability and state the formula used to calculate it.
Theoretical probability has two key components. First, the assumption: all outcomes are equally likely (the experiment is fair or unbiased). Second, the formula: P(event) = number of favourable outcomes divided by total number of possible outcomes. This contrasts with experimental probability, which is calculated from the results of actual trials. For two marks you need both the assumption and the formula.
A biased coin has P(heads) = 3/5. The coin is flipped 200 times. How many times would you expect to get heads?
Expected frequency = P(event) multiplied by number of trials. P(heads) = 3/5 and number of flips = 200, so expected heads = 3/5 times 200 = 120. This gives the average number of heads you would expect over many repetitions — it is not a guaranteed count. A common error is dividing 200 by 3/5 instead of multiplying. Memorise the formula: expected frequency = probability times number of trials.
A coin is flipped 100 times. It lands on heads 72 times. Adam says the coin is biased. Explain how the result supports his claim.
For a fair coin, P(heads) = 0.5, so the expected number of heads in 100 flips is 0.5 times 100 = 50. The actual result of 72 heads is significantly higher than the expected 50, which supports the claim of bias. A complete answer needs two parts: (1) state the expected value for a fair coin, (2) compare the actual result to it and comment on the size of the difference. Without the reference point of 50, you cannot justify why 72 is unusual.
Which value represents an impossible event on a probability scale?
An impossible event has probability 0. A certain event has probability 1. All probabilities lie between 0 and 1 inclusive. A value of 2 cannot be a probability.
A bag contains 3 red counters and 7 blue counters. A counter is picked at random. What is the probability of picking a red counter? Give your answer as a fraction.
The key formula is P(event) = (number of favourable outcomes) divided by (total number of outcomes). There are 3 red counters and 7 blue, giving a total of 10. P(red) = 3/10. A common mistake is writing 3/7, which compares red to blue rather than red to the total. Always make sure the denominator is the total count of all items.
On a probability scale, which fraction sits exactly at the midpoint between impossible and certain?
The probability scale goes from 0 (impossible) to 1 (certain). The midpoint is (0+1)/2 = 0.5 = 1/2, representing an equally likely event.
The probability of an event is 0.08. Which of these is equivalent to 0.08?
0.08 = 8/100. Dividing numerator and denominator by 4: 8/100 = 2/25. Also, 0.08 × 100 = 8%, not 80%.
Two fair six-sided dice, each numbered 1 to 6, are rolled. Let D = the absolute difference between the two scores (always positive). (a) Show that P(D = 0) = 1/6. (b) Find P(D > 3).
Part (a): D = 0 when both dice match: (1,1),(2,2),(3,3),(4,4),(5,5),(6,6) — 6 outcomes from 36 total. P(D=0) = 6/36 = 1/6 confirmed. Part (b): D > 3 means D = 4 or D = 5. D=4: (1,5),(5,1),(2,6),(6,2) — 4 outcomes; D=5: (1,6),(6,1) — 2 outcomes; total = 6. P(D>3) = 6/36 = 1/6. Show-that questions require every step explicitly — write 6/36 = 1/6, do not just state the answer.
Two fair dice, each numbered 1 to 6, are rolled. Using a sample space diagram or otherwise, find the probability that the total score is greater than 9.
Total outcomes for two dice = 6 × 6 = 36. Outcomes with total greater than 9: total 10 gives (4,6),(5,5),(6,4); total 11 gives (5,6),(6,5); total 12 gives (6,6) — six outcomes. P(total > 9) = 6/36 = 1/6. A very common error is using 12 as the total (confusing two dice with two coins); always use 6 × 6 = 36 for two six-sided dice.
Spinner A has four equal sections labelled 1, 2, 3, 4. Spinner B has three equal sections labelled 1, 2, 3. Both spinners are spun once and the two numbers are added. Find the probability that the total is exactly 5.
Total outcomes = 4 × 3 = 12. Fix Spinner A at each value in turn: A=1 (need B=4 — impossible), A=2 (B=3), A=3 (B=2), A=4 (B=1) — 3 favourable outcomes. P(total=5) = 3/12 = 1/4. Working through each value of Spinner A systematically prevents missing outcomes.
A bag contains cards numbered 1, 2, 3, and 4. Two cards are drawn at random WITHOUT replacement. The order in which they are drawn matters. Find the probability that the sum of the two cards is odd.
Without replacement, 12 ordered pairs remain: 4 choices for the first card and 3 for the second. An odd sum requires one odd card (1 or 3) and one even card (2 or 4). There are 2 × 2 = 4 odd-first arrangements plus 4 even-first arrangements, giving 8 favourable pairs. P(odd sum) = 8/12 = 2/3. Using 4 × 4 = 16 as the total is the most common error — the card is NOT replaced.
A bag contains cards numbered 1, 2, 3, 4, and 5. One card is drawn at random, noted, and replaced. A second card is then drawn. Find the probability that both cards show an odd number.
With replacement, total outcomes = 5 × 5 = 25. The odd numbers in {1,2,3,4,5} are 1, 3, 5 — three choices per draw. Favourable outcomes (both odd) = 3 × 3 = 9. P(both odd) = 9/25. The key word 'replaced' means both draws are independent with the same 5 options; using 5 × 4 = 20 is a without-replacement error.
Two fair coins are flipped at the same time. List all possible outcomes. How many outcomes are there in total?
Systematically list the outcomes by fixing the first coin and varying the second: (H,H), (H,T), (T,H), (T,T). The total is 4, confirmed by the multiplication principle: 2 × 2 = 4. A common mistake is counting only 3 outcomes by forgetting that HT and TH are different — the order matters because the coins are separate objects.
Two fair dice, each numbered 1 to 6, are rolled. The scores are added together. How many ways are there of getting a total of 7?
List every pair (die 1, die 2) where the values sum to 7: (1,6), (2,5), (3,4), (4,3), (5,2), (6,1) — exactly 6 pairs. A common error is counting only 3 pairs by treating (1,6) and (6,1) as the same; on two dice these are distinct outcomes because the dice are separate.
Three fair coins are flipped simultaneously. Find the probability of getting at least two heads.
Three coins give 2 × 2 × 2 = 8 equally likely outcomes. The four outcomes with at least two heads are HHH, HHT, HTH, THH. P = 4/8 = 1/2. The phrase 'at least two heads' means two heads or three heads — students sometimes count only exactly two, missing HHH.
Explain what a sample space diagram is and why it is useful when finding probabilities for two combined events.
A sample space diagram systematically shows every possible outcome of a combined experiment. It is useful because you can count the favourable outcomes (those satisfying the required condition) and divide by the total number of outcomes to calculate the probability. Two marks require both the definition (shows all outcomes) and the purpose (allows probability calculation by counting).
A fair coin is flipped and a fair die (numbered 1 to 6) is rolled. How many possible outcomes are there in total?
The coin has 2 outcomes (H, T) and the die has 6 outcomes (1 to 6). For two independent events, total outcomes = 2 × 6 = 12.
Two fair six-sided dice are rolled. What is the probability that both dice show the same number?
Total outcomes = 36. Matching pairs: (1,1),(2,2),(3,3),(4,4),(5,5),(6,6) — 6 outcomes. P = 6/36 = 1/6.
Two classes took the same science test. The results are shown in the grouped frequency tables below: Class P (40 students): | Score | 0-19 | 20-39 | 40-59 | 60-79 | 80-100 | | Freq | 2 | 8 | 15 | 11 | 4 | Class Q (40 students): | Score | 0-19 | 20-39 | 40-59 | 60-79 | 80-100 | | Freq | 1 | 4 | 10 | 18 | 7 | (a) Complete cumulative frequency tables for both classes. (b) Draw cumulative frequency curves for both classes on the same axes. (c) Use your curves to estimate the median and IQR for each class. (d) Write two comparisons between Class P and Class Q using your results.
Class P cumulative frequencies: 2, 10, 25, 36, 40. Class Q: 1, 5, 15, 33, 40. Plot both curves at the upper class boundaries (19, 39, 59, 79, 100) on the same axes. For n = 40: median at CF = 20, Q1 at CF = 10, Q3 at CF = 30. Class P: median ≈ 52, IQR ≈ 25. Class Q: median ≈ 61, IQR ≈ 24. Comparison points: Class Q has a higher median (about 9 marks higher), suggesting Class Q students performed better on average. Both classes show similar consistency (similar IQRs). Each comparison must cite numerical values from your curves to earn marks.
The table shows the lengths of 50 caterpillars: | Length (mm) | Frequency | Cumulative Frequency | |---|---|---| | 0 < l ≤ 10 | 4 | | | 10 < l ≤ 20 | 9 | | | 20 < l ≤ 30 | 16 | | | 30 < l ≤ 40 | 14 | | | 40 < l ≤ 50 | 7 | | (a) Complete the cumulative frequency column. (b) Draw a cumulative frequency curve. (c) Use your curve to estimate the median and IQR.
Step 1 — cumulative frequencies: 4, 4+9=13, 13+16=29, 29+14=43, 43+7=50. Step 2 — plot at upper class boundaries: (10,4), (20,13), (30,29), (40,43), (50,50), and join with a smooth S-shaped curve. Step 3 — median at CF = 50/2 = 25; read across to the curve, then down: approximately 28–30 mm. Step 4 — Q1 at CF = 50/4 = 12.5 → approximately 20–21 mm; Q3 at CF = 3×50/4 = 37.5 → approximately 37–38 mm; IQR ≈ 17 mm. The critical skill is plotting at the upper class boundary, not the midpoint.
A cumulative frequency curve is drawn for 100 students' exam marks. From the curve, the following values are read: - At CF = 25: mark = 38 - At CF = 50: mark = 52 - At CF = 75: mark = 66 Calculate the interquartile range (IQR).
For 100 data values, Q1 is at n/4 = 25 and Q3 is at 3n/4 = 75. Reading from the table: at CF = 25, mark = 38 (so Q1 = 38); at CF = 75, mark = 66 (so Q3 = 66). The median at CF = 50 gives mark = 52, but the median is not used in the IQR. IQR = Q3 − Q1 = 66 − 38 = 28. The IQR represents the spread of the middle 50% of the data and is not affected by extreme values.
Two box plots show the exam marks for Class A and Class B: Class A: Min=20, Q1=35, Median=55, Q3=70, Max=90 Class B: Min=30, Q1=45, Median=58, Q3=65, Max=80 Calculate the IQR for both classes and use these, along with the medians, to compare the two distributions.
IQR = Q3 − Q1. Class A: 70 − 35 = 35. Class B: 65 − 45 = 20. To compare distributions, address both location (median) and spread (IQR): Class B has a slightly higher median (58 > 55), suggesting typical scores are marginally higher in B; Class B also has a smaller IQR (20 < 35), meaning the middle 50% of students performed more consistently in Class B. Always quote numerical values in comparisons — do not just say 'B is better'.
Complete the cumulative frequency column for this data: | Height (cm) | Frequency | Cumulative Frequency | |---|---|---| | 140 ≤ h < 150 | 4 | 4 | | 150 ≤ h < 160 | 11 | ? | | 160 ≤ h < 170 | 18 | ? | | 170 ≤ h < 180 | 12 | ? | | 180 ≤ h < 190 | 5 | ? | What is the cumulative frequency for the class 170 ≤ h < 180?
To complete a cumulative frequency table, add a running total: Row 1 stays as 4, Row 2 = 4 + 11 = 15, Row 3 = 15 + 18 = 33, Row 4 = 33 + 12 = 45, Row 5 = 45 + 5 = 50. The question asks for the cumulative frequency of the 170–180 cm class, which is 45. The final cumulative frequency always equals the total number of data values (here, 50). A common error is giving the class frequency (12) rather than the running total (45).
A cumulative frequency curve is drawn for 60 students' test scores. To read off the median score, which cumulative frequency value should you read across from on the y-axis?
The median is the middle value. With 60 data values, the median is at position n/2 = 60/2 = 30. On a cumulative frequency curve, the y-axis represents cumulative frequency (how many values are at or below each point). To find the median, locate 30 on the y-axis, draw a horizontal line to the curve, then a vertical line down to the x-axis. That x-value is the median score. Note: for a cumulative frequency curve (continuous data) use n/2, not (n+1)/2.
From a cumulative frequency curve for 40 students, the following are read: Minimum = 20, Q1 = 35, Median = 48, Q3 = 60, Maximum = 75. Draw a box plot to represent this data. What is the length of the box (from Q1 to Q3)?
A box plot uses five summary statistics: minimum, Q1, median, Q3, maximum. The box spans from Q1 to Q3, with a vertical line at the median inside it. The whiskers extend from the minimum to Q1 and from Q3 to the maximum. The length of the box equals the IQR = Q3 − Q1 = 60 − 35 = 25. A common error is using the full range (max − min = 75 − 20 = 55) rather than the interquartile range.
The cumulative frequency graph shows the times (in seconds) taken by 60 students to complete a puzzle. Use the graph to find the median time.
To find the median from a cumulative frequency graph: locate n/2 = 60/2 = 30 on the y-axis, draw a horizontal line across to the curve, then a vertical line down to the x-axis. The x-value read off is the median time, approximately 35 seconds. Reading tolerance of ±1 second is acceptable due to graph reading. A common error is reading from 60 on the y-axis (which gives the maximum) rather than from 30.
Using the cumulative frequency graph for 60 students, find the interquartile range of the times. (Lower quartile ≈ 28 seconds, Upper quartile ≈ 43 seconds)
For 60 data values: Q1 is at CF = n/4 = 60/4 = 15, and Q3 is at CF = 3n/4 = 3×60/4 = 45. Read from the curve at CF = 15 → Q1 ≈ 28 seconds; at CF = 45 → Q3 ≈ 43 seconds. IQR = Q3 − Q1 = 43 − 28 = 15 seconds. The IQR describes the spread of the middle 50% of the data. A reading tolerance of ±2 seconds is acceptable. Do not confuse the full range (max − min) with the IQR.
The graph shows the times for 60 students. The cumulative frequency at 40 seconds reads as 48. Estimate the number of students who took longer than 40 seconds to complete the puzzle.
Read the cumulative frequency at 40 seconds: CF = 48. This means 48 students took 40 seconds or less. Number who took longer = 60 − 48 = 12 students.
The cumulative frequency at 40 seconds is given as 48, meaning 48 students took 40 seconds or less to complete the puzzle. To find how many took longer than 40 seconds, subtract from the total: 60 − 48 = 12 students. This technique of subtracting a cumulative frequency from n is essential for 'more than' or 'greater than' questions. Always read the cumulative frequency at the given value, then subtract from the total number of data values.
Cumulative frequency is:
Cumulative frequency is the running total of all frequencies up to and including each class.
The cumulative frequency graph shows the times taken by 60 students to complete a puzzle. How do you find the median time from a cumulative frequency graph?
To find the median from a cumulative frequency graph: locate n/2 on the y-axis, draw a horizontal line to the curve, then a vertical line down to the x-axis. The x-value is the median.
A cumulative frequency curve shows data for 80 values. At what cumulative frequency should you read to find the lower quartile (Q1)?
Lower quartile Q1 is found at cumulative frequency n/4 = 80/4 = 20.
A cumulative frequency curve represents data for 80 people. To find the 90th percentile, which cumulative frequency value should you read from?
90th percentile: read at CF = (90/100) × 80 = 72.
A hospital wants to survey its staff about working conditions. The hospital employs 800 people across four departments: - Nursing: 400 - Medical: 150 - Administrative: 180 - Support services: 70 The researcher plans to use systematic sampling to select 80 staff. Explain why stratified sampling would be more appropriate than systematic sampling for this survey. You should refer to the data in the table in your answer.
Stratified sampling would be more appropriate because the departments have very different sizes. Systematic sampling selects every 10th person from the combined list of 800, with no guarantee that each department is fairly represented. By chance, the sample could include very few support services staff (only 70 in total). Stratified sampling would ensure each department is represented proportionally: nursing would provide 40, medical 15, administrative 18, and support services 7 staff. This gives a sample that accurately reflects the composition of the hospital workforce.
This is a 4-mark evaluation question — you must develop a complete argument with evidence. Systematic sampling every 10th person from 800 gives no control over how many come from each department. With support services having only 70 staff, they could be severely underrepresented. Stratified sampling calculates exact numbers: nursing = (400/800)×80 = 40, medical = (150/800)×80 = 15, administrative = (180/800)×80 = 18, support services = (70/800)×80 = 7. Using actual data in your answer is expected at higher tier and earns a separate mark.
A university wants to investigate students' satisfaction with library opening hours. The university has the following student population: | Year of study | Number of students | |--------------|-------------------| | Year 1 | 2400 | | Year 2 | 2000 | | Year 3 | 1600 | | Postgraduate | 1000 | Design a stratified sample of 70 students. Show your working and justify why stratified sampling is appropriate for this investigation.
Total students = 2400 + 2000 + 1600 + 1000 = 7000. Year 1: (2400/7000) × 70 = 24 students Year 2: (2000/7000) × 70 = 20 students Year 3: (1600/7000) × 70 = 16 students Postgraduate: (1000/7000) × 70 = 10 students Total: 24 + 20 + 16 + 10 = 70 ✓ Stratified sampling is appropriate because different year groups may have very different patterns of library use — Year 1 students may use it more for study skills sessions, while postgraduates may have different needs. Stratified sampling ensures all year groups are fairly represented in proportion to their size, giving a reliable result.
This is a design-and-justify question worth 4 marks. Step 1: total = 2400 + 2000 + 1600 + 1000 = 7000. Step 2: calculate each subgroup — Year 1: (2400/7000)×70 = 24; Year 2: (2000/7000)×70 = 20; Year 3: (1600/7000)×70 ≈ 16; PG: (1000/7000)×70 = 10. Check: 24+20+16+10 = 70. Step 3: justify — different year groups use the library differently (study styles, coursework deadlines, dissertation work), so proportional representation ensures all experiences are captured. Always check your sample totals sum to the required sample size.
A researcher wants to find out how often people in a town visit the library. She interviews people in the town's shopping centre on a Tuesday morning. (a) State the sampling method being used. (b) Explain why this sample may not be representative of all people in the town. (c) Suggest a better sampling method and give one reason why it would be more suitable.
Opportunity (convenience) sampling. The sample is biased because people in a shopping centre on a Tuesday morning are not representative of the whole town — they are likely to be unemployed, retired, or not in work on weekdays. People who are at work on Tuesdays will not be included, so the sample excludes a large group. Stratified sampling would be better because it would ensure all groups in the population (by age, employment status, etc.) are represented in proportion to their size in the town.
The researcher is using opportunity sampling — she selects whoever is available in the shopping centre. This is biased because people present on a Tuesday morning are a skewed subset: they are likely to be retired, unemployed, part-time workers, or carers. The large group of full-time workers (who may visit the library in the evening or weekend) is completely excluded. For a 3-mark question, you must: (1) name the method, (2) explain specifically why the sample is biased (not just say 'it's biased'), (3) suggest a better method with a reason.
A council wants to find residents' views on a new recycling scheme. They send a survey to every 20th household on the electoral register, starting from a randomly selected house. Evaluate this sampling method. Include in your answer: - the name of the method - one strength of using this method - one limitation of this method for this investigation
Systematic sampling. A strength is that it is easy and quick to carry out — every 20th household is selected without needing complex calculations. A limitation is that the electoral register only includes households with a registered voter, so households not on the register (e.g. students renting privately, recent movers) are excluded from the sample.
This is systematic sampling — selecting every 20th household from an ordered list with a random start. The strength is that it is easy to implement with no subjective choices after the starting point is fixed. The key limitation specific to this context is the sample frame: the electoral register only contains households with registered voters. Groups like students in private rented accommodation, recent migrants, and some young people may not appear on the register and cannot be selected, making the sample unrepresentative. For evaluation questions, always link your strength and limitation to the specific context given.
A student claims: 'I surveyed 10 of my friends about their favourite sport. Since 70% chose football, I can conclude that 70% of all teenagers in the UK prefer football.' Critique the student's sampling method and conclusion. Your answer should refer to sample size, representativeness, and the validity of the conclusion.
The student's method has several serious flaws. First, the sample size of 10 is far too small to draw conclusions about all teenagers in the UK — a larger sample would give more reliable results. Second, the sample is not representative because the student only asked friends, who are likely to share similar backgrounds, interests, and social circles. This is opportunity/convenience sampling, which is inherently biased. Third, the conclusion is not valid — even if the sample were correctly drawn, a sample of 10 friends cannot be generalised to millions of teenagers across the UK. A better approach would be to use stratified or random sampling across a much larger and more diverse sample.
This is a critique question requiring three clear points. (1) Sample size: 10 people is too small to draw any conclusion about millions of UK teenagers — small samples have high variability and can easily be unrepresentative by chance. (2) Representativeness: asking friends is convenience sampling — friends share social circles, schools, local areas, and interests, making the sample biased. (3) Validity of conclusion: even if the 70% figure from the sample were accurate, you cannot generalise from 10 non-randomly-selected people to 'all teenagers in the UK' — this is overgeneralisation. A good answer addresses all three dimensions explicitly.
A school has 120 boys and 80 girls in Year 11. A stratified sample of 20 students is taken. How many boys should be in the sample?
Stratified sampling ensures each subgroup is represented in proportion to its size in the population. Total students = 120 + 80 = 200. Boys make up 120/200 = 60% of the population, so 60% of the 20-person sample should be boys: (120/200) × 20 = 12. A common error is dividing 20 equally between boys and girls — stratified sampling uses actual proportions, not equal splits.
A student asks the first 10 people she meets outside the school library to take part in her survey. (a) State the sampling method being used. (b) Give one reason why this sample may not be representative of the whole school.
Opportunity sampling (or convenience sampling). The sample is biased because it only includes people who happen to be near the library, which may not represent students who visit other areas of the school or different year groups.
Opportunity (convenience) sampling means selecting whoever is available at the time. It is fast and cheap but produces a biased sample because people in the same location at the same time often share characteristics. Students near the library may be predominantly from certain year groups or with certain study habits — they do not represent the whole school. When explaining bias, always say WHY the subgroup might be different, not just 'it's biased'.
Give one advantage and one disadvantage of systematic sampling.
Advantage: It is easy to carry out and unbiased because the starting point is chosen at random. Disadvantage: It may produce a biased sample if the data has a pattern that coincides with the sampling interval.
Systematic sampling selects every nth member from an ordered list starting at a random point. Its key advantage is simplicity — once you choose the interval, no further judgment is needed, making it quick and easy. Its main disadvantage is vulnerability to periodic patterns: if there is a repeating cycle in the population that matches your sampling interval (e.g. every 10th person on a shift rota is always a manager), the sample will be systematically biased. This is an examiner-favourite disadvantage to test.
The table shows the number of students in each year group at a school. | Year group | Number of students | |-----------|-------------------| | Year 7 | 150 | | Year 8 | 120 | | Year 9 | 130 | | Year 10 | 100 | | Year 11 | 100 | A stratified sample of 50 students is taken from the school. Calculate the number of Year 10 students that should be in the sample.
In a stratified sample, each subgroup is represented proportionally. Total students = 150 + 120 + 130 + 100 + 100 = 600. Year 10 has 100 students, which is 100/600 of the total. Multiplying by the sample size: (100/600) × 50 = 8.33, which rounds to 8. A common error is using 500 as the total (missing a year group) or treating it as an equal split of 10 per year group.
A company has 300 employees: 200 in production and 100 in administration. Compare stratified sampling and systematic sampling for selecting 30 employees for a survey. Give one reason why stratified sampling would be more appropriate here.
Stratified sampling divides the employees into groups (production and administration) and selects from each group in proportion. Systematic sampling takes every 10th person from a full list regardless of department. Stratified sampling is more appropriate because it ensures both departments are represented in proportion — it would select 20 production and 10 administration staff. Systematic sampling might happen to select mostly production staff by chance.
Stratified sampling divides the population into distinct subgroups (strata) and samples from each proportionally. Here: 200/300 × 30 = 20 from production, 100/300 × 30 = 10 from administration. Systematic sampling would take every 10th person from a combined list of 300, with no guarantee of how many come from each department. Stratified is better here because there are two clearly defined, unequal-sized groups — without stratification, one department could be accidentally over- or under-represented.
A researcher wants to survey 20 students from a school of 400. She puts all 400 names into a hat and draws out 20. Which sampling method is she using?
Simple random sampling means every member of the population has an equal chance of being selected. Putting all names in a hat and drawing out a random sample is the classic example. Systematic sampling uses every nth person from a list. Stratified sampling divides the population into groups first. Opportunity sampling uses whoever happens to be available.
A factory tests every 50th item on a production line for faults. Which sampling method is this?
Systematic sampling means selecting every nth item from an ordered list or sequence. Testing every 50th item on a production line is the textbook example — it is regular, ordered, and follows a fixed interval. A random starting point is chosen first, then items are selected at equal intervals. This is different from random sampling (no fixed interval) and stratified sampling (groups are formed first).
Which statement correctly describes the difference between quota sampling and stratified sampling?
Both quota and stratified sampling divide the population into subgroups and set a target number to select from each. The critical difference is what happens within each subgroup. In stratified sampling, members are randomly selected from each subgroup — removing interviewer bias. In quota sampling, the interviewer simply fills their quota using whoever is available — introducing interviewer bias. This is why stratified sampling is considered more rigorous. Students often confuse these two methods because both involve subgroups.
A quadrilateral has vertices at A(1, 1), B(5, 2), C(6, 5), D(2, 4). (a) Find the midpoint of diagonal AC and the midpoint of diagonal BD. (b) What do your answers to part (a) tell you about the quadrilateral? (c) Calculate the length of both diagonals. Are the diagonals equal in length?
Midpoint AC = ((1+6)/2, (1+5)/2) = (3.5, 3). Midpoint BD = ((5+2)/2, (2+4)/2) = (3.5, 3). Both midpoints are the same, so the diagonals bisect each other, meaning ABCD is a parallelogram. AC = √(5²+4²) = √41. BD = √(3²+2²) = √13. The diagonals are not equal, so ABCD is not a rectangle.
Part (a): Midpoint of AC = ((1+6)/2, (1+5)/2) = (3.5, 3). Midpoint of BD = ((5+2)/2, (2+4)/2) = (3.5, 3). Both diagonals have the same midpoint. Part (b): When the diagonals of a quadrilateral bisect each other (share the same midpoint), the shape must be a parallelogram. Part (c): AC = √((6-1)²+(5-1)²) = √(25+16) = √41. BD = √((2-5)²+(4-2)²) = √(9+4) = √13. Since √41 ≠ √13, the diagonals are not equal in length, so ABCD is a parallelogram but not a rectangle. Rectangles have equal diagonals.
A quadrilateral ABCD has vertices at A(0, 0), B(4, 3), C(8, 3), D(8, 0). Find the exact perimeter of ABCD.
Calculate each side individually. AB is diagonal — A(0,0) to B(4,3): √(4²+3²) = √25 = 5. BC is horizontal — both y-coordinates are 3: BC = 8−4 = 4. CD is vertical — both x-coordinates are 8: CD = 3−0 = 3. DA is horizontal — both y-coordinates are 0: DA = 8−0 = 8. Perimeter = 5 + 4 + 3 + 8 = 20. When both coordinates change between endpoints, you must use Pythagoras. When only one coordinate changes, simply take the difference.
A triangle has vertices at A(0, 0), B(6, 0) and C(3, 5). Calculate the exact length of AC.
From A(0,0) to C(3,5): Δx = 3, Δy = 5. Applying Pythagoras: AC² = 3² + 5² = 9 + 25 = 34. The exact length is AC = √34. The word 'exact' in the question means leave the answer as a surd — do not evaluate √34 as a decimal (approximately 5.83). If you do convert to a decimal, you lose the accuracy mark. A common error is to calculate √34 ≈ 5.83 and give that as the final answer when the question specifies exact form.
A triangle has vertices at P(−1, 2), Q(3, 5) and R(7, 2). Show that the triangle is isosceles.
PQ = √(4² + 3²) = √25 = 5. QR = √(4² + 3²) = √25 = 5. PR = √(8² + 0²) = 8. Since PQ = QR = 5 and PR = 8, two sides are equal, so the triangle is isosceles.
An isosceles triangle has exactly two equal sides, so calculate all three. PQ: Δx = 3−(−1) = 4, Δy = 5−2 = 3, so PQ = √(16+9) = √25 = 5. QR: Δx = 7−3 = 4, Δy = 2−5 = −3, so QR = √(16+9) = √25 = 5. PR: Δx = 8, Δy = 0, so PR = 8. Since PQ = QR = 5 but PR = 8, two sides are equal and the triangle is isosceles. Always show all three distances and state the conclusion explicitly — the 'show that' mark requires a clear written conclusion.
Point A has coordinates (a, 3) and point B has coordinates (7, b). The midpoint of AB is M(5, 4). Find the values of a and b.
Use the midpoint formula in reverse. Midpoint x-coordinate: (a + 7) / 2 = 5, so a + 7 = 10, giving a = 3. Midpoint y-coordinate: (3 + b) / 2 = 4, so 3 + b = 8, giving b = 5. Check: midpoint of (3, 3) and (7, 5) = ((3+7)/2, (3+5)/2) = (5, 4). A common mistake is treating the midpoint coordinate as the unknown's value directly — you must set up and solve a proper equation.
Find the midpoint of the line segment joining A(2, 6) and B(8, 2).
The midpoint formula averages the x-coordinates and y-coordinates separately. Midpoint x = (2 + 8) / 2 = 5, midpoint y = (6 + 2) / 2 = 4, so the midpoint is (5, 4). Think of it as finding the halfway point: 5 is halfway between 2 and 8 along the x-axis, and 4 is halfway between 6 and 2 on the y-axis. A common mistake is subtracting the coordinates rather than adding — always ADD first, then divide by 2.
Calculate the distance between the points P(1, 2) and Q(4, 6).
The distance formula is Pythagoras applied to coordinate differences. The horizontal distance is Δx = 4 − 1 = 3 and the vertical distance is Δy = 6 − 2 = 4. These form the two legs of a right-angled triangle with the line PQ as the hypotenuse. By Pythagoras: PQ² = 3² + 4² = 9 + 16 = 25, so PQ = √25 = 5. This is a 3-4-5 Pythagorean triple. A common mistake is adding the differences directly (3 + 4 = 7) rather than squaring them first.
Point A has coordinates (4, –2) and point B has coordinates (–2, 8). Find the midpoint of AB.
Midpoint formula: average the x-coordinates and average the y-coordinates. Midpoint x = (4 + (−2)) / 2 = 2 / 2 = 1. Midpoint y = (−2 + 8) / 2 = 6 / 2 = 3. Midpoint = (1, 3). The key skill here is handling negative coordinates: 4 + (−2) = 4 − 2 = 2, not 4 + 2 = 6. Always be careful with signs when one or more coordinates are negative.
Which point has coordinates (–3, 5)?
In (−3, 5): x = −3 means 3 left; y = 5 means 5 up.
The midpoint of line segment AB is M(3, 7). Point A has coordinates (1, 5). What are the coordinates of point B?
B = 2M - A = (2×3 - 1, 2×7 - 5) = (5, 9).
Line L1 has equation 3y = 6x + 9. Line L2 passes through the points (1, 4) and (3, 10). (a) Write L1 in the form y = mx + c. (b) Find the equation of L2. (c) Are L1 and L2 parallel? Justify your answer. (d) Find the point where L2 crosses the y-axis.
L1: y = 2x + 3 (gradient 2, y-intercept 3). L2: gradient = (10−4)/(3−1) = 3, using (1,4): 4 = 3+c, c = 1, so L2 is y = 3x+1. Not parallel: gradient L1 = 2, gradient L2 = 3, and 2 ≠ 3. L2 crosses the y-axis at (0, 1).
Part (a): divide 3y = 6x + 9 by 3: L1 is y = 2x + 3 (gradient 2, y-intercept 3). Part (b): gradient of L2 = (10 − 4)/(3 − 1) = 6/2 = 3. Using (1, 4): 4 = 3(1) + c → c = 1, so L2 is y = 3x + 1. Part (c): L1 gradient = 2, L2 gradient = 3. Since 2 ≠ 3, the lines are NOT parallel — always quote both gradients as justification. Part (d): the y-intercept of L2 is c = 1, so L2 crosses the y-axis at (0, 1). You can also find this by setting x = 0 in L2: y = 0 + 1 = 1.
Draw the line y = 2x – 1 for values of x from –2 to 3.
To draw y = 2x − 1: first, the y-intercept is −1, so plot (0, −1). Then use the gradient of 2 to find more points — for every 1 unit right, go 2 units up. From (0, −1): right 1, up 2 gives (1, 1); right again gives (2, 3), and so on. Alternatively build a table: x = 0 gives y = −1, x = 1 gives y = 1, x = 2 gives y = 3. Always use a ruler to draw the line and extend it to the edges of the grid. The line must be perfectly straight to earn the mark.
A line has equation 2y = 6x – 8. Write this in the form y = mx + c, and state the gradient and y-intercept.
To convert 2y = 6x − 8 into y = mx + c, divide every term on both sides by 2: 2y ÷ 2 = y, 6x ÷ 2 = 3x, 8 ÷ 2 = 4. This gives y = 3x − 4. Now reading off: gradient m = 3 (coefficient of x), y-intercept c = −4 (the constant). A very common mistake is only dividing the left side or only one term on the right — every term must be divided. You can check by substituting a point, e.g. at x = 0: y = −4, so the y-intercept (0, −4) is correct.
A straight line has gradient 4 and passes through the point (2, 11). Find the equation of the line in the form y = mx + c.
When you know the gradient (m = 4) but not the y-intercept, write y = 4x + c. Substitute the given point (2, 11) to find c: 11 = 4(2) + c = 8 + c, so c = 3. The equation is y = 4x + 3. Always verify: when x = 2, y = 4(2) + 3 = 11. A common error is using the y-coordinate of the given point as c directly (writing y = 4x + 11). The y-intercept is not the y-value of the given point unless the given point is on the y-axis.
Find the equation of the straight line passing through the points (1, 5) and (4, 14).
With two points you first find the gradient: m = (y2 − y1) / (x2 − x1) = (14 − 5) / (4 − 1) = 9 / 3 = 3. Then write y = 3x + c and substitute one point: using (1, 5): 5 = 3(1) + c, so c = 2. The equation is y = 3x + 2. Verify with the second point: 3(4) + 2 = 14. A common mistake is inverting the fraction for the gradient (Δx/Δy instead of Δy/Δx). Always check the formula is change-in-y over change-in-x.
Write down the gradient and y-intercept of the line y = –2x + 7.
In y = mx + c, m is the gradient (the coefficient in front of x) and c is the y-intercept (the constant term). For y = −2x + 7: the number in front of x is −2, so gradient = −2; the constant is 7, so y-intercept = 7. A common mistake is swapping the two values. Remember: gradient = coefficient of x, y-intercept = the number with no x attached.
A straight line has equation y = 4x – 12. At what value of x does the line cross the x-axis?
Every point on the x-axis has y-coordinate = 0. To find where the line y = 4x − 12 crosses the x-axis, set y = 0: 0 = 4x − 12. Solve: 4x = 12, x = 3. The line crosses the x-axis at (3, 0). A very common error is setting x = 0 instead of y = 0 — that gives the y-intercept (−12), not the x-intercept. Remember: y-axis crossing → set x = 0; x-axis crossing → set y = 0.
Two students write down equations for parallel lines: Student A writes: y = 2x + 1 Student B writes: y = 2x + 1 Explain why these two lines are NOT parallel to each other.
Both students wrote exactly the same equation: y = 2x + 1. Because the equations are identical, they represent the same line — one line drawn on top of the other (coincident). Parallel lines must be distinct: they have the same gradient but different y-intercepts. Here both the gradient (2) and the y-intercept (1) are equal, so these are the same line, not two parallel lines. A single line cannot be parallel to itself.
For the line y = 3x – 2, what is the gradient?
In y = 3x − 2, the gradient m = 3 (coefficient of x).
Which line is parallel to y = 3x + 1?
Parallel lines have the same gradient. y = 3x − 4 has gradient 3 = gradient of y = 3x + 1.
Three points are: A(0, 6), B(4, 2), C(8, 10). (a) Show that AB is perpendicular to BC. (b) What does this tell you about angle ABC? (c) Find the equation of the line through A and C.
Gradient AB = (2−6)/(4−0) = −1. Gradient BC = (10−2)/(8−4) = 2. Product = −1 × 2 = −2. Note: the product is not −1 so these particular points do not give perpendicular lines. However the method for showing perpendicularity is: calculate both gradients and show their product = −1. Angle ABC = 90°. Line through A(0,6) and C(8,10): gradient = (10−6)/(8−0) = 4/8 = 1/2; equation y = (1/2)x + 6.
Part (a): gradient AB = (7 − 3)/(4 − 0) = 4/4 = 1. Gradient BC = (3 − 7)/(8 − 4) = −4/4 = −1. Product = 1 × (−1) = −1. Since the product of the gradients equals −1, the lines are perpendicular — state this conclusion explicitly for the mark. Part (b): AB perpendicular to BC means angle ABC = 90°. Part (c): A(0, 3) and C(8, 3) both have y = 3, so line AC is the horizontal line y = 3. For 'show that' questions, always quote both gradients, show the product, and write a conclusion sentence.
Line A passes through (2, 5) and (6, 9). Line B is perpendicular to Line A and passes through (6, 9). Find the equation of Line B.
Step 1 — find gradient of Line A: m = (9 − 5) / (6 − 2) = 4 / 4 = 1. Step 2 — perpendicular gradient: negative reciprocal of 1 = −1. (1 × −1 = −1.) Step 3 — find y-intercept: Line B passes through (6, 9) with gradient −1. Substitute into y = −x + c: 9 = −6 + c, so c = 15. Equation of Line B: y = −x + 15. Verify: at x = 6, y = −6 + 15 = 9. A gradient of 1 is special because its negative reciprocal is simply −1.
A line passes through (−3, 1) and (3, 5). (a) Calculate the gradient. (b) Write down the equation of the line.
Gradient = Δy / Δx = (5 − 1) / (3 − (−3)) = 4 / 6 = 2/3. Note: 3 − (−3) = 6, not 0. Then write y = (2/3)x + c and substitute one point, say (−3, 1): 1 = (2/3)(−3) + c = −2 + c, so c = 3. The equation is y = (2/3)x + 3. Check with (3, 5): (2/3)(3) + 3 = 2 + 3 = 5. A common error is computing Δx = 3 − 3 = 0 by forgetting that −3 is negative. Always work out 3 − (−3) = 3 + 3 = 6.
A line L has equation y = 3x – 5. Find the equation of the line perpendicular to L that passes through the point (6, 1).
Line L has gradient 3. The perpendicular gradient is the negative reciprocal: −1/3. Check: 3 × (−1/3) = −1. Now find the equation of the perpendicular line: y = −(1/3)x + c. Substitute (6, 1): 1 = −(1/3)(6) + c = −2 + c, so c = 3. The equation is y = −(1/3)x + 3. A common mistake is finding the negative of the gradient (−3) rather than the negative reciprocal (−1/3). The rule is: flip the fraction and change the sign.
Calculate the gradient of the line passing through the points (1, 3) and (5, 11).
Gradient = (change in y) / (change in x). Using points (1, 3) and (5, 11): Δy = 11 − 3 = 8 and Δx = 5 − 1 = 4. Gradient = 8 / 4 = 2. This means the line rises 2 units for every 1 unit moved to the right. A common mistake is inverting the fraction: 4 / 8 = 0.5. Always put the y-change on top.
A line passes through (0, 8) and (4, 0). Calculate the gradient of this line.
Gradient = Δy / Δx. From (0, 8) to (4, 0): Δy = 0 − 8 = −8 (the y-value goes down) and Δx = 4 − 0 = 4. Gradient = −8 / 4 = −2. The negative sign is essential — it tells you the line slopes downward from left to right. A common error is ignoring the sign and writing 2. If a line goes downhill as you move right, the gradient is always negative.
A graph shows the distance (km) travelled by a car plotted against time (hours). The line has gradient 80. What does the gradient represent in this context?
On any graph, gradient = (change in y) / (change in x). Here y = distance (km) and x = time (hours), so gradient = distance/time = speed in km/h. A gradient of 80 means the car travels 80 km for every 1 hour — so the speed is 80 km/h. It is essential to include the units in your answer. A common mistake is saying the gradient represents 'total distance' — it represents the RATE of change of distance, which is speed.
The gradient of a straight line is calculated by:
Gradient = (change in y) / (change in x) = Δy/Δx.
A line has gradient 4. What is the gradient of a line perpendicular to it?
Perpendicular gradient = −1/m = −1/4. Check: 4 × (−1/4) = −1.
A line has gradient –3/4. Which of the following is perpendicular to it?
Perpendicular gradient = negative reciprocal of −3/4 = 4/3. (−3/4) × (4/3) = −1 ✓.
Complete the table of values for y = 2ˣ for x = -2, -1, 0, 1, 2, 3, then sketch the graph. Mark the y-intercept and the horizontal asymptote on your sketch.
Complete the table by calculating y = 2ˣ at each value: x = -2 gives 0.25, x = -1 gives 0.5, x = 0 gives 1, x = 1 gives 2, x = 2 gives 4, x = 3 gives 8. Notice each y-value doubles as x increases by 1 — this is the defining property of exponential growth. On the sketch, mark the y-intercept at (0, 1) and draw a smooth curve that rises steeply to the right and flattens towards y = 0 on the left without ever touching the x-axis. The horizontal asymptote is y = 0.
An exponential curve has equation y = a × bˣ. The curve passes through (0, 50) and (2, 200). Find the values of a and b.
For y = a × bˣ, the y-intercept (0, y₀) always gives a directly because b⁰ = 1 for any base b. Substituting (0, 50): 50 = a × 1, so a = 50. Then substitute the second point (2, 200) with a = 50: 200 = 50 × b², giving b² = 200/50 = 4. Taking the positive square root: b = 2 (a growth factor must be positive). So the equation is y = 50 × 2ˣ. A common mistake is finding b² = 4 correctly but then stating b = 4 (forgetting to square root). Another error is using the second point (2, 200) to find a rather than the y-intercept point.
The graph of y = 2ˣ and the line y = 10 intersect at one point. Use trial and improvement to find the value of x to 1 decimal place.
To solve 2ˣ = 10 by trial and improvement: first check integer values — 2³ = 8 (too small) and 2⁴ = 16 (too big), so x is between 3 and 4. Then try x = 3.3: 2^3.3 ≈ 9.85 (just below 10). Try x = 3.4: 2^3.4 ≈ 10.56 (above 10). Test the midpoint x = 3.35: 2^3.35 ≈ 10.19 (above 10), so x is between 3.3 and 3.35, confirming the answer rounds to x = 3.3 to 1 decimal place. Always show the midpoint test to prove the rounding direction.
Show that the y-values of y = 4 × 3ˣ at integer x-values from x = 0 to x = 3 form a geometric sequence with common ratio 3.
Substitute x = 0, 1, 2, 3 into y = 4 × 3ˣ: y-values are 4, 12, 36, 108. To show this is a geometric sequence with ratio 3, divide each term by the previous one: 12/4 = 3, 36/12 = 3, 108/36 = 3. Since every consecutive ratio equals 3, the sequence is geometric with common ratio 3. For a general proof: the ratio of consecutive terms is (4 × 3^(n+1)) / (4 × 3ⁿ) = 3 for all n, which equals the base of the exponential. This confirms the common ratio is always equal to the base of the exponential function.
Find the value of y = 2ˣ when x = -2.
A negative exponent means the reciprocal of the positive power. The rule is a⁻ⁿ = 1/aⁿ. Here 2⁻² = 1/2² = 1/4 = 0.25. A common mistake is writing −4 (treating the negative exponent as a negative value) or 4 (computing 2² correctly but ignoring the negative). The exponential graph y = 2ˣ never reaches zero or becomes negative — even for very negative x, the value is a small positive fraction. This is why y = 0 is a horizontal asymptote for all exponential graphs of the form y = bˣ where b > 1.
A population of bacteria is modelled by P = 500 × 2ˣ, where x is the number of hours. Find the population after 3 hours.
In the model P = 500 × 2ˣ, the coefficient 500 is the initial population (at x = 0) and the base 2 is the growth factor (the population doubles each hour). To find the population after 3 hours, substitute x = 3: P = 500 × 2³ = 500 × 8 = 4000. The critical step is evaluating 2³ = 8 correctly (not 2 × 3 = 6 or 2 + 3 = 5). A common mistake is computing 500 × 2 × 3 = 3000 (treating the exponent as multiplication) instead of 500 × 8. Exponential growth means repeated multiplication by the growth factor, which is why populations and debts grow so rapidly.
Explain why the graph of y = 3ˣ has a horizontal asymptote at y = 0, and state the domain of values that y can take.
As x becomes very large and negative, 3ˣ becomes very small and approaches zero but never equals zero, because a positive number raised to any power is always positive. So the graph gets closer and closer to the x-axis (y = 0) but never touches or crosses it. The range of y is y > 0.
Two mark points are needed. First: 3ˣ is always positive for any real x because a positive base raised to any power (including negative or fractional) remains positive. It can never equal zero or become negative. Second: as x becomes increasingly negative, 3ˣ = 1/3⁼ˣ⁽ becomes a progressively smaller fraction, approaching zero but never actually reaching it. This means the x-axis (y = 0) is a horizontal asymptote. The range of y = 3ˣ is y > 0 (all positive reals). A common confusion is thinking that a very large negative exponent eventually makes the value zero or negative — it does not.
The graph of y = 3ˣ always passes through which point?
Any number to the power 0 equals 1. When x = 0: y = 3⁰ = 1. So the graph always passes through (0, 1) regardless of the base.
The graph of y = (0.5)ˣ shows exponential decay. What happens to the values of y as x increases?
For y = (0.5)ˣ, the base is 0.5 (between 0 and 1). As x increases, (0.5)ˣ halves each time. It decreases towards 0 but never reaches 0 because a positive number raised to any power is always positive.
Which of the following graphs grows most steeply for positive values of x?
For exponential growth graphs y = aˣ, the larger the base a, the steeper the growth. 5 is the largest base here. y = (0.9)ˣ is decay (base < 1), not growth.
A radioactive substance decays according to M = 400 × (0.5)ˣ, where x is the number of years. After how many complete years will the mass first fall below 50 g?
At x=3: M = 400 × (0.5)³ = 400 × 0.125 = 50 g. This equals 50 but does not fall BELOW 50. At x=4: M = 400 × (0.5)⁴ = 400 × 0.0625 = 25 g, which is below 50. So the answer is 4 years.
A graph y = g(x) is obtained from y = x² by applying the following transformations in order: 1. Translation by vector (2, 0) 2. Vertical stretch by scale factor 3 3. Translation by vector (0, -4) (a) Write down the equation of y = g(x). (b) The point Q(7, y) lies on the graph y = g(x). Find the value of y. (c) A different graph y = h(x) is obtained by applying the transformations in the REVERSE order: 1. Translation by vector (0, -4) 2. Vertical stretch by scale factor 3 3. Translation by vector (2, 0) Show that y = g(x) and y = h(x) are NOT the same graph.
(a) Step 1 translation (2,0): y = (x-2)². Step 2 vertical stretch sf3: y = 3(x-2)². Step 3 translation (0,-4): y = 3(x-2)² - 4. So g(x) = 3(x-2)² - 4. (b) g(7) = 3(5)² - 4 = 75 - 4 = 71. (c) Reverse order: translation (0,-4) first: y = x²-4. Vertical stretch sf3: y = 3x²-12. Translation (2,0): y = 3(x-2)²-12. So h(x) = 3(x-2)²-12. Since -4 ≠ -12, g(x) ≠ h(x). The graphs are not the same.
Part (a): apply the three transformations to y = x² in order. Step 1 — translation (2, 0): replace x with (x − 2) to get y = (x − 2)². Step 2 — vertical stretch sf 3: multiply the whole expression by 3 to get y = 3(x − 2)². Step 3 — translation (0, −4): subtract 4 to get y = 3(x − 2)² − 4. So g(x) = 3(x − 2)² − 4. Part (b): substitute x = 7: g(7) = 3(7 − 2)² − 4 = 3 × 25 − 4 = 75 − 4 = 71. Part (c): now apply the transformations in reverse order to y = x². Step 1 — translation (0, −4) first: y = x² − 4. Step 2 — vertical stretch sf 3: y = 3(x² − 4) = 3x² − 12. Step 3 — translation (2, 0): replace x with (x − 2): y = 3(x − 2)² − 12. So h(x) = 3(x − 2)² − 12. Comparing: g(x) = 3(x − 2)² − 4 and h(x) = 3(x − 2)² − 12. These differ by 8 (the −4 vs −12 constant), so the graphs are not the same. The key insight is that when a vertical stretch is applied after a vertical translation, the stretch multiplies the constant too — but when applied before, it does not yet have the constant to multiply.
The graph y = f(x) has a turning point at (3, -2) and crosses the x-axis at x = 1 and x = 5. (a) Write down the coordinates of the turning point of y = f(x + 2) - 3. (b) Write down the x-intercepts of y = f(x + 2). (c) The point P lies on y = f(x). Under the transformation y = f(x) - f(x), find the invariant points of y = 2f(x), given that the x-axis is the mirror line for the transformation y = -f(x). Actually — (c) A student claims that y = f(2x) and y = 2f(x) have the same graph. Explain why this claim is incorrect, giving a specific example using the turning point (3, -2).
(a) f(x+2) shifts left 2: x goes from 3 to 1. f(x)-3 shifts down 3: y goes from -2 to -5. Turning point: (1, -5). (b) f(x+2) shifts x-intercepts left by 2: x=1 becomes x=-1, x=5 becomes x=3. (c) f(2x) is a horizontal stretch scale factor 1/2: turning point becomes (1.5, -2). 2f(x) is a vertical stretch scale factor 2: turning point becomes (3, -4). (1.5, -2) ≠ (3, -4), so the graphs are different.
Part (a): f(x + 2) − 3 combines two separate transformations. The f(x + 2) part is a horizontal translation of 2 units to the LEFT (inside the bracket, adding 2 shifts left), so the x-coordinate of the turning point goes from 3 to 1. The − 3 outside is a vertical translation of 3 units downwards, so the y-coordinate goes from −2 to −5. Turning point: (1, −5). Part (b): f(x + 2) only changes x-coordinates, not y. The x-intercepts x = 1 and x = 5 each shift left by 2: x = −1 and x = 3. Part (c): the student's claim is wrong. y = f(2x) is a horizontal stretch (scale factor 1/2): x-coordinates are halved, y-coordinates are unchanged. Turning point: (3/2, −2) = (1.5, −2). y = 2f(x) is a vertical stretch (scale factor 2): y-coordinates are doubled, x-coordinates are unchanged. Turning point: (3, −4). Since (1.5, −2) ≠ (3, −4), the graphs are different.
The graph y = x² is transformed by: - First: a horizontal translation of 3 units to the right - Then: a vertical stretch by scale factor 2 (a) Write down the equation of the graph after the first transformation. (b) Write down the equation of the graph after both transformations. (c) The point (5, 4) lies on the graph y = x². Find the image of this point after both transformations.
This question tests combined transformations applied in sequence. Part (a): a horizontal translation of 3 units to the right means replacing x with (x - 3) inside the function, giving y = (x - 3)². Note the sign: right shift → subtract 3, not add. Part (b): the vertical stretch by scale factor 2 multiplies the entire right-hand side by 2: y = 2(x - 3)². Part (c): apply each transformation to the point (5, 4) in order. First, the right translation shifts the x-coordinate: 5 + 3 = 8. Then the vertical stretch multiplies the y-coordinate: 2 × 4 = 8. Image: (8, 8). A very common error in part (c) is only applying the vertical stretch and ignoring the effect of the horizontal translation on the x-coordinate.
Describe fully each of the following transformations of y = f(x): (a) y = 3f(x) (b) y = f(2x) (c) y = f(x) - 5
Three transformation types are tested. (a) y = 3f(x) — multiplying the whole function by 3 stretches it vertically (parallel to the y-axis) by scale factor 3: all y-coordinates are multiplied by 3, x-coordinates unchanged. (b) y = f(2x) — multiplying x by 2 inside the bracket compresses the graph horizontally. The scale factor is the reciprocal: 1/2. All x-coordinates are halved; y-coordinates unchanged. This is the most commonly confused transformation — the scale factor is 1/a, not a. (c) y = f(x) − 5 — subtracting 5 outside is a vertical translation of 5 units downwards; vector (0, −5).
The graph y = f(x) has a minimum point at (-2, 3). For each transformation below, write down the coordinates of the minimum point on the transformed graph. (a) y = f(x - 5) (b) y = f(x) + 4 (c) y = 2f(x)
Starting point: (−2, 3). (a) f(x − 5) is f(x + a) with a = −5: horizontal translation +5 (right by 5). x: −2 + 5 = 3; y unchanged: 3. Minimum at (3, 3). (b) f(x) + 4 is a vertical translation up by 4: y: 3 + 4 = 7; x unchanged: −2. Minimum at (−2, 7). (c) 2f(x) is a vertical stretch by scale factor 2: y is multiplied by 2: 2 × 3 = 6; x unchanged: −2. Minimum at (−2, 6). A common error in (a) is shifting left instead of right — f(x − a) shifts RIGHT by a because a is negative in the formula.
The graph y = f(x) passes through the points (-4, 0), (0, 2) and (6, -1). The graph is transformed to y = f(3x). (a) Write down the coordinates of each transformed point. (b) Describe fully the transformation y = f(3x).
y = f(3x) is the form f(ax) with a = 3. The horizontal stretch scale factor is 1/a = 1/3 — every x-coordinate is divided by 3 (multiplied by 1/3). Y-coordinates are unchanged. Applying to each point: (−4, 0) → (−4/3, 0); (0, 2) → (0, 2) [origin invariant]; (6, −1) → (2, −1). The transformation description is: horizontal stretch by scale factor 1/3, parallel to the x-axis. The most common mistake is multiplying x by 3 rather than dividing — if a = 3 inside the bracket, the graph gets squashed to 1/3 of its original width, so the scale factor is 1/3 not 3.
Describe fully each of the following transformations of y = f(x): (a) y = -f(x) (b) y = f(-x) (c) The graph y = f(x) passes through (4, -3). State the coordinates of this point under the transformation y = -f(-x).
This question tests reflections expressed using function notation. Part (a): y = −f(x) negates every y-value (the sign of the output is reversed). A negative y-value becomes positive and vice versa — this is a reflection in the x-axis (the mirror line is horizontal). Part (b): y = f(−x) replaces every x with −x, negating every x-value (the sign of the input is reversed). This is a reflection in the y-axis (the mirror line is vertical). A common mix-up is swapping these two: remember − outside the function → x-axis mirror; − inside the function → y-axis mirror. Part (c): y = −f(−x) applies both reflections. Start with (4, −3): f(−x) negates x: 4 → −4. −f(x) negates y: −3 → +3. Result: (−4, 3). Work through each negation separately rather than trying to do both at once.
The graph of y = sin(x) for 0 ≤ x ≤ 360° has a maximum point at (90°, 1). (a) Describe fully the transformation that maps y = sin(x) onto y = sin(x) + 2. (b) Write down the coordinates of the maximum point on y = sin(x) + 2. (c) Describe fully the transformation that maps y = sin(x) onto y = 3 sin(x). Write down the maximum value of 3 sin(x).
This question applies transformation rules to the sine graph. Part (a): y = sin(x) + 2 has the form f(x) + a where a = 2. Adding a constant outside the function is a vertical translation of 2 units upwards — the whole graph shifts up. Part (b): vertical translations shift every y-coordinate up by 2, so the maximum at (90°, 1) becomes (90°, 3). The x-coordinate does NOT change because the shift is vertical. Part (c): y = 3sin(x) has the form af(x) with a = 3. Multiplying the function by 3 is a vertical stretch by scale factor 3, parallel to the y-axis. Every y-value is multiplied by 3: the maximum sin value of 1 becomes 3 × 1 = 3. A common mistake is confusing y = sin(x) + 2 (vertical translation) with y = sin(x + 2) (horizontal translation — different graph entirely).
A graph y = f(x) has a maximum point at (2, 5). The graph is transformed to y = f(x) - 2. (a) Describe fully the transformation. (b) Write down the coordinates of the maximum point on the transformed graph.
y = f(x) − 2 subtracts 2 from every y-value. Part (a): this is a vertical translation of 2 units downwards (the graph slides down). Part (b): under f(x) + a, every point (x, y) moves to (x, y + a). With a = −2: the maximum (2, 5) moves to (2, 5 − 2) = (2, 3). The x-coordinate never changes in a vertical translation. A common error is adding 2 rather than subtracting it, giving (2, 7).
A graph y = f(x) passes through the point (6, -1). The graph is transformed to y = f(x + 2). (a) Describe fully the transformation. (b) Write down the coordinates of the image of the point (6, -1) under this transformation.
y = f(x + 2) has the form f(x + a) with a = 2. Part (a): this is a horizontal translation 2 units to the LEFT — the direction is opposite to the sign inside the bracket. The reasoning: to produce the same y-value, x must now be 2 less than before. Part (b): under f(x + a), each point (x, y) maps to (x − a, y). With a = 2: (6, −1) maps to (6 − 2, −1) = (4, −1). The y-coordinate is unchanged. A very common error is moving right instead of left because +2 suggests a positive direction — always remember the direction is counter-intuitive.
The graph of y = f(x) is transformed to y = f(x) + 3. Which of the following describes this transformation?
The transformation y = f(x) + a is a vertical translation by a units. Positive a moves the graph up; negative a moves it down. The x-coordinates of all points remain unchanged.
The graph of y = f(x) is transformed to y = f(x + 4). Which statement correctly describes this transformation?
f(x + a) translates the graph by vector (-a, 0). The horizontal shift is opposite to the sign: +4 inside the bracket means 4 units to the LEFT. This is because if you replace x with (x + 4), the same y-value is produced when x is 4 less than before.
The graph y = f(x) is transformed to y = 2f(x). Which of the following correctly describes the effect on the point (3, 4)?
y = af(x) is a stretch parallel to the y-axis with scale factor a. Every y-coordinate is multiplied by a; x-coordinates remain unchanged. For y = 2f(x), the point (3, 4) becomes (3, 2×4) = (3, 8).
The point P(5, -2) lies on the graph of y = f(x). The graph is transformed to y = f(x + 3) - 1. What are the coordinates of the image of P?
y = f(x + 3) - 1 applies two transformations: f(x+3) shifts x left by 3 (x decreases by 3), and -1 outside shifts y down by 1. So P(5, -2) maps to (5-3, -2-1) = (2, -3).
Use the trapezium rule with 4 strips of equal width to estimate the area under y = √x between x = 0 and x = 4. The y-values at x = 0, 1, 2, 3, 4 are: 0, 1, 1.414, 1.732, 2. Give your answer to 2 decimal places.
Apply the trapezium rule formula: Area ≈ ½ × h × (y₀ + 2y₁ + 2y₂ + … + 2yₙ₋₁ + yₙ). With 4 strips of width h = 1 and y-values 0, 1, 1.414, 1.732, 2: substitute to get ½ × 1 × (0 + 2×1 + 2×1.414 + 2×1.732 + 2) = ½ × (0 + 2 + 2.828 + 3.464 + 2) = ½ × 10.292 = 5.146, which rounds to 5.15. The key technique is remembering that only the first and last y-values appear once — all intermediate values are doubled. A common error is doubling all five y-values, which gives 6.146 instead.
A velocity-time graph shows the following journey: - From t = 0 to t = 3 s: velocity increases linearly from 0 to 12 m/s - From t = 3 to t = 7 s: constant velocity at 12 m/s - From t = 7 to t = 11 s: velocity decreases linearly from 12 m/s to 0 m/s Find the total distance travelled.
This composite velocity-time graph has three sections that form different shapes. Section 1 (0–3 s): velocity rises from 0 to 12 m/s, forming a triangle with area = ½ × 3 × 12 = 18 m. Section 2 (3–7 s): constant velocity at 12 m/s, forming a rectangle with area = 4 × 12 = 48 m. Section 3 (7–11 s): velocity drops from 12 to 0 m/s, forming a triangle with area = ½ × 4 × 12 = 24 m. Total distance = 18 + 48 + 24 = 90 m. The key skill is splitting composite graphs into simple shapes (triangles and rectangles), calculating each area separately, then summing. A common mistake is forgetting the ½ factor for triangular sections.
Use the trapezium rule with 2 strips and then with 4 strips to estimate the area under y = √x between x = 0 and x = 4. Compare your two estimates and comment on which is more accurate. Given y-values: x=0: 0, x=1: 1, x=2: 1.414, x=3: 1.732, x=4: 2.
This question tests comparing trapezium rule accuracy with different numbers of strips. With 2 strips (h = 2), use y-values at x = 0, 2, 4 only: Area ≈ ½ × 2 × (0 + 2×1.414 + 2) = 1 × 4.828 ≈ 4.83. With 4 strips (h = 1), use all five y-values: Area ≈ 5.15. The exact area (by integration) is 16/3 ≈ 5.33. Both estimates are underestimates because y = √x is concave down — the straight top of each trapezoid lies below the actual curve. The 4-strip estimate (5.15) is closer to 5.33 than the 2-strip estimate (4.83), confirming that more strips always improve accuracy. This is because narrower strips follow the curve's shape more closely.
Use the trapezium rule with the y-values below to estimate the area under the curve y = x² + 1 between x = 0 and x = 4. Use strips of width 1: x: 0, 1, 2, 3, 4 y: 1, 2, 5, 10, 17 Give your answer to 1 decimal place.
The trapezium rule formula is Area ≈ ½ × h × (y₀ + 2y₁ + 2y₂ + ⋯ + 2yₙ₋₁ + yₙ), where h is the strip width. The first and last y-values appear once; all intermediate y-values are doubled. Here h = 1, y₀ = 1, y₁ = 2, y₂ = 5, y₃ = 10, y₄ = 17: Area ≈ ½ × 1 × (1 + 2×2 + 2×5 + 2×10 + 17) = ½ × (1 + 4 + 10 + 20 + 17) = ½ × 52 = 26. Since y = x² + 1 is concave up (curves upward), the trapezium rule overestimates the true area — the exact value by integration is 25.33. A common mistake is forgetting to double the middle terms or omitting the ½h factor.
A velocity-time graph shows a straight line from (0, 0) to (8, 24). Find the distance travelled in the first 8 seconds.
The area under a velocity-time graph equals the distance travelled. When the v-t graph is a straight line starting from the origin, the region is a triangle. Here the graph goes from (0, 0) to (8, 24), forming a right-angled triangle with base (time) = 8 s and height (velocity) = 24 m/s. Distance = area = ½ × 8 × 24 = 96 m. A common mistake is computing 8 × 24 = 192 (forgetting the ½). This factor of ½ is essential because the object starts from rest and accelerates uniformly — the average velocity is 24/2 = 12 m/s over 8 seconds, giving 12 × 8 = 96 m.
Using the trapezium rule with 3 strips of equal width, show that the area under y = x² between x = 0 and x = 3 is approximately 9.5. The exact area is 9.
The three required steps are: (1) identify the strip width h = (3 - 0)/3 = 1, then calculate the y-values at x = 0, 1, 2, 3 using y = x²: giving 0, 1, 4, 9. (2) Apply the trapezium rule formula: area ≈ ½ × h × (y₀ + 2y₁ + 2y₂ + y₃) = ½ × 1 × (0 + 2×1 + 2×4 + 9) = ½ × 19 = 9.5. (3) State this confirms the approximate area of 9.5. Notice this is an overestimate compared to the exact area of 9, which makes sense because y = x² is concave up. Show all working step-by-step to earn full marks in a show-that question.
Explain whether the trapezium rule gives an overestimate or underestimate for the area under the curve y = x² between x = 0 and x = 3. Justify your answer.
The trapezium rule gives an overestimate for the area under y = x² between x = 0 and x = 3. This is because y = x² is a concave-up (convex) curve — it curves upward. The top side of each trapezoid is a straight line connecting two points on the curve, which lies above the curve. Each trapezoid therefore captures slightly more area than the region actually under the curve, resulting in an overestimate.
This question requires two elements. First: state that the trapezium rule gives an overestimate. Second: explain why — y = x² is a concave-up (U-shaped) curve, which means it bends upward. Each trapezoid's top edge is a straight line connecting two points on the curve; for a concave-up curve, this straight edge lies above the actual curve, so each trapezoid captures slightly more area than the true area underneath. The total of all trapezoids therefore exceeds the true area, giving an overestimate. Contrast this with concave-down curves, where the top edge lies below the curve and the rule underestimates.
On a velocity-time graph, what does the area under the curve represent?
On a velocity-time graph: area under the curve = distance (or displacement). Gradient of the graph = acceleration. Speed at a moment is read directly from the y-axis.
Which of the following best describes the trapezium rule for estimating the area under a curve?
The trapezium rule divides the area into vertical trapezoidal strips. Each strip has two parallel sides (the y-values at each end) and a fixed width h. Area of each trapezoid = ½ × h × (y₁ + y₂). Summing all strips gives the estimate.
A five-digit number has digits A, B, C, D, E (from left to right). The digit in the thousands column is twice the digit in the units column. The digit in the hundreds column is 0. The digit in the tens column is 3. The digit in the units column is 4. The digit in the ten-thousands column is 1. Write the complete five-digit number.
Work through each clue systematically. The units digit is given as 4 (E = 4). The thousands digit is twice the units digit: 2 × 4 = 8 (B = 8). The hundreds digit is 0 (C = 0), the tens digit is 3 (D = 3), and the ten-thousands digit is 1 (A = 1). Placing all digits left to right: 1, 0, 8, 3, 4 gives 10834. For multi-clue problems like this, start with the digits you know for certain, then use those to work out the ones that depend on them.
Using the correct inequality symbol (< or >), fill in both blanks: (a) 0.8 ___ 0.75 (b) -4.1 ___ -4.09
For part (a), pad 0.8 to 0.80 and compare with 0.75: the tenths digit 8 > 7, so 0.8 > 0.75. For part (b) with negatives, first compare the positive versions: 4.10 > 4.09 (the hundredths digit 1 > 0). Then reverse the inequality for the negatives: -4.1 < -4.09. The key rule is that for negative numbers, the one with the larger magnitude (further from zero) is actually smaller. A common error is forgetting to flip the inequality sign when working with negatives.
Show that 0.8 > 0.75 by comparing the values of the digits in each column.
To show that 0.8 > 0.75, start by writing both numbers to the same number of decimal places: 0.80 and 0.75. Then compare column by column from left to right. The units are equal (both 0). The tenths digits are 8 and 7 — since 8 > 7, we can conclude 0.80 > 0.75 without needing to check the hundredths column. In a 'show that' question, you must write out each comparison step explicitly, not just state the final answer.
Insert a digit to make this statement true: 3.4_5 > 3.460 Write one possible digit that could go in the blank.
To solve this, compare the two numbers column by column from left to right. The units and tenths digits are both equal (3 and 4), so the hundredths column decides the comparison. Since 3.4_5 must be greater than 3.460, the missing hundredths digit must make the number at least as large: any digit from 6 to 9 works (6 gives 3.465 > 3.460). A common error is forgetting that when the hundredths digit equals 6, the thousandths digit (5 > 0) still makes the number larger.
Write these numbers in order from smallest to largest: -3.2, 0.8, -1.5, -3.25, 0
To order numbers including negatives, first separate them into negative, zero, and positive groups. All negatives are less than zero, and zero is less than any positive. For the negatives, compare their distance from zero: -3.25 is further from zero than -3.2 (since 3.25 > 3.2), so -3.25 is the smaller number. A common mistake is treating negatives like positives and putting -3.2 before -3.25.
Explain why the number 'three thousand and five' must be written as 3005 and not as 35.
In place value, zeros act as placeholders that keep other digits in their correct columns. In 3005, the zero in the hundreds column and the zero in the tens column ensure the 3 stays in the thousands position (worth 3000). Without these zeros, writing 35 puts the 3 in the tens column (worth only 30). This is why you can never simply remove zeros from the middle of a number — they preserve the value of every other digit.
The number 34.7 is multiplied by 1000. Write the result.
When multiplying by 1000, every digit moves three places to the left (equivalently, the decimal point shifts three places to the right). Starting with 34.7, shift the decimal three places right: 34.7 → 347 → 3470 → 34700. A common mistake is moving the decimal the wrong number of places — remember ×10 = 1 place, ×100 = 2 places, ×1000 = 3 places. You can verify: 34 × 1000 = 34000 and 0.7 × 1000 = 700, giving 34000 + 700 = 34700.
A number divided by 100 gives 0.063. What is the original number?
Use inverse operations: if a number divided by 100 gives 0.063, then the original number equals 0.063 × 100. Multiplying by 100 moves the decimal point two places to the right: 0.063 → 0.63 → 6.3. You can verify by checking 6.3 ÷ 100 = 0.063. A common mistake is moving the decimal the wrong direction — dividing makes numbers smaller, so the original must be larger than 0.063.
What is the value of the digit 7 in the number 47,362?
In 47,362 the digits occupy: 4 = ten-thousands, 7 = thousands, 3 = hundreds, 6 = tens, 2 = units. So the 7 has value 7 × 1000 = 7000.
In the number 5.38, what is the value of the digit 8?
After a decimal point, the column positions go tenths, hundredths, thousandths from left to right. In 5.38, the 8 sits in the hundredths column, so its value is 8 × 0.01 = 0.08. A common mistake is confusing tenths and hundredths — remember that each column is 10 times smaller than the one to its left.
Write 50,607 as a number. A student says it should be written as 5,067 because there is no hundreds digit. Are they correct? Write the correct number.
The key idea is that zero acts as a placeholder. In 50,607 the digits occupy: 5 in ten-thousands, 0 in thousands, 6 in hundreds, 0 in tens, 7 in units. The student confused 50,607 with 5,067 by dropping a zero, which shifts every digit into the wrong column. Without the zeros, the 5 would no longer represent fifty thousand. Always check that your number has the right number of digits.
Which list shows these decimals in order from smallest to largest? 0.75, 0.7, 0.07, 0.705
Add trailing zeros to make all decimals the same length: 0.0700, 0.7000, 0.7050, 0.7500. Compare digit by digit from left: 0.07 has 0 in the tenths column (smallest), 0.7, 0.705 and 0.75 all have 7 in the tenths column, so compare hundredths: 0 (0.700) < 0 (0.705) — tie — then thousandths: 0 (0.700) vs 5 (0.705), giving 0.7 < 0.705 < 0.75.
How many significant figures does 0.00470 have?
Rules for significant figures: leading zeros (zeros before the first non-zero digit) are NOT significant. Non-zero digits are ALWAYS significant. Trailing zeros after a decimal point ARE significant. In 0.00470: the three leading zeros are not significant; 4 and 7 are significant; the trailing 0 IS significant (it follows a decimal point). Total = 3 significant figures.
The ratio of a to b is 5:3. Show that (2a + b) : (a − b) = 13:7.
Let a = 5k, b = 3k. Then 2a + b = 13k and a − b = 2k. Ratio = 13k:2k = 13:2.
Divide 360° in the ratio 2:3:4. Find all three angles.
Total parts = 9; one part = 40°. Angles: 80°, 120°, 160°.
A:B = 2:3 and B:C = 4:5. Find A:B:C in its simplest form.
LCM(3,4) = 12. Scaling: A:B = 8:12, B:C = 12:15. Therefore A:B:C = 8:12:15.
The ratio x:y = 3:5. If x + y = 56, find the value of x.
Total parts = 8; one part = 56 ÷ 8 = 7. x = 3 × 7 = 21.
Share £60 in the ratio 2:3. What is the larger share?
5 total parts; one part = £60 ÷ 5 = £12. Larger share = 3 × £12 = £36.
In a class the ratio of boys to girls is 3:5. There are 15 boys. How many girls are there?
Scale factor = 15 ÷ 3 = 5. Girls = 5 × 5 = 25.
Two friends share some money in the ratio 4:7. The difference between their shares is £18. How much money is there altogether?
Difference = 3 parts = £18, so 1 part = £6. Total = 11 × £6 = £66.
Explain the difference between the ratio 3:5 and the ratio 5:3.
The order of a ratio matters. In 3:5, the first quantity is 3 parts and the second is 5 parts, so the second is larger. In 5:3, the first quantity is 5 parts and the second is 3 parts, so the first is larger. Although both ratios describe the same two amounts, they assign the larger portion to different quantities. For example, if boys:girls = 3:5, there are more girls; if boys:girls = 5:3, there are more boys.
The order of a ratio is significant. 3:5 and 5:3 describe opposite relationships — the first assigns fewer parts to the first quantity, the second assigns more.
Write the ratio 12:18 in its simplest form.
HCF(12, 18) = 6. Divide both by 6: 12÷6 = 2, 18÷6 = 3. Simplest form: 2:3.
Write the ratio 2 km : 500 m in its simplest form.
Convert 2 km = 2000 m. Ratio = 2000:500. Divide by 500: 4:1.
The ratio of red to blue paint in a mixture is 3:7. What fraction of the mixture is red?
Total parts = 3 + 7 = 10. Red = 3 parts out of 10 = 3/10.
In a bag, the ratio of red to blue counters is 3:2. There are 15 red counters. Some blue counters are added so that the new ratio is 1:1. How many blue counters were added?
Original: 15 red, 10 blue (from 3:2 with scale factor 5). For 1:1 ratio with 15 red, need 15 blue. Added = 15 − 10 = 5.
y is directly proportional to the cube root of x. When x = 27, y = 6. Find y when x = 125.
y = k∛x; k = 6/3 = 2. When x = 125: y = 2 × ∛125 = 2 × 5 = 10.
y is inversely proportional to x². The table shows two values: x = 2, y = 9 and x = 6, y = 1. Show that these values are consistent with y ∝ 1/x².
k = yx²: 9×4 = 36 and 1×36 = 36. Same k confirms y ∝ 1/x².
y is directly proportional to x. When x = 5, y = 20. Find the value of y when x = 8.
y = kx; k = 20/5 = 4. When x = 8: y = 4 × 8 = 32.
y is inversely proportional to x. When x = 4, y = 6. Find the value of y when x = 12.
y = k/x; k = 4 × 6 = 24. When x = 12: y = 24/12 = 2.
A recipe for 4 people uses 300 g of flour. How much flour is needed for 10 people?
Flour per person = 300 ÷ 4 = 75 g. For 10 people: 75 × 10 = 750 g.
It takes 6 workers 4 days to complete a job. Assuming all workers work at the same rate, how many days would it take 8 workers?
T = k/W; k = 6 × 4 = 24. When W = 8: T = 24/8 = 3 days.
y is directly proportional to x². When x = 3, y = 18. Find y when x = 5.
y = kx²; k = 18/9 = 2. When x = 5: y = 2 × 25 = 50.
y is inversely proportional to x². When x = 2, y = 5. Find y when x = 10.
y = k/x²; k = 5 × 4 = 20. When x = 10: y = 20/100 = 0.2.
Explain how you can tell from a graph whether two quantities are in direct or inverse proportion.
Direct proportion gives a straight line that passes through the origin — the gradient is the constant k. Inverse proportion gives a curve called a hyperbola: as x increases, y decreases, and the curve never touches either axis. To distinguish them from a graph, check whether the line is straight and passes through (0, 0) (direct) or curved with the shape of a 1/x graph (inverse).
Direct proportion: straight line through origin (y = kx). Inverse proportion: hyperbola curve (y = k/x).
y is directly proportional to x. Which equation could represent this relationship?
Direct proportion: y ∝ x means y = kx. As x increases, y increases proportionally.
Which statement correctly describes the graph of a direct proportion relationship y ∝ x?
y = kx gives a straight line through the origin (0,0) with gradient k. It is this through-origin feature that distinguishes direct proportion.
y is directly proportional to x². When x is trebled, what happens to y?
y = kx². If x becomes 3x: y = k(3x)² = 9kx². So y is multiplied by 9.
Calculate: -3 x 4 + (-2)^2 - 6 / (-3)
This question tests BIDMAS with negative numbers in all four operations. Work strictly in order — Powers first: (-2)^2 = (-2) x (-2) = +4. Then Multiplication and Division (left to right): -3 x 4 = -12 and 6 / (-3) = -2. Finally Addition and Subtraction: -12 + 4 - (-2) = -12 + 4 + 2 = -12 + 6 = -6. The most common trap is computing (-2)^2 = -4 instead of +4. Writing each stage of working separately prevents sign errors from accumulating.
Show that the product of any two consecutive negative integers is always positive. Let n represent a negative integer.
This is an algebraic proof question — specific numerical examples are not enough. You must show the result holds for any negative integer. Let n be any negative integer (n < 0). The next consecutive integer is n - 1, which is also negative since n - 1 < n < 0. The product is n(n - 1). Since both n and n - 1 are negative, we have negative multiplied by negative, which equals positive. Therefore n(n - 1) > 0 for any negative integer n. A common trap is testing a few examples like (-2) x (-3) = 6 — while correct, this only proves it for those specific values, not for all negative integers.
Calculate each of the following: (a) (-6) x (-4) (b) (-3) x 5
The sign rules for multiplication are: same signs give a positive result; different signs give a negative result. For part (a), both factors are negative (same signs), so (-6) x (-4) = +(6 x 4) = +24. For part (b), the signs are different, so (-3) x 5 = -(3 x 5) = -15. A very common error is thinking that 'two negatives always cancel' and giving -24 for part (a) — but the sign rule specifically gives a positive result here. Always check the signs before multiplying.
Calculate: (-3)^2 - 4 x (-2)
Use BIDMAS strictly: Powers first, then Multiplication, then Subtraction. Step 1 — evaluate the power: (-3)^2 = (-3) x (-3) = +9 (negative times negative is positive). Step 2 — multiplication: 4 x (-2) = -8. Step 3 — subtraction: 9 - (-8) = 9 + 8 = 17 (subtracting a negative equals adding a positive). A critical trap is treating (-3)^2 as -9, which only applies when there are no brackets: -3^2 = -(3^2) = -9. The brackets in (-3)^2 mean the whole negative number is squared.
Calculate: (a) (-20) / (-4) (b) 36 / (-9)
The sign rule for division is identical to multiplication: same signs give a positive result, different signs give a negative result. Part (a): (-20) / (-4) — both negative (same signs) so the result is positive. 20 / 4 = 5, therefore (-20) / (-4) = +5. Part (b): 36 / (-9) — different signs so the result is negative. 36 / 9 = 4, therefore 36 / (-9) = -4. A common error for part (a) is giving -5 because of the two negative signs — but two same-sign numbers always give a positive quotient.
Aisha's bank account shows a balance of -45 pounds. She deposits 70 pounds. Explain what her new balance is and what the negative sign meant originally.
For full marks this question needs two things: (1) the correct new balance calculation (-45 + 70 = 25 pounds), and (2) an explanation of what the negative balance means. A negative bank balance means overdrawn — she owed the bank 45 pounds. To find the new balance, note that 70 > 45, so the positive amount is larger and the result is positive: -45 + 70 = 70 - 45 = 25 pounds. She is now in credit. A common mistake is giving -25, forgetting that 70 is larger than 45 in magnitude.
Solve: -3 + x = -8
To solve -3 + x = -8, use inverse operations to isolate x. The -3 is added to x, so add 3 to both sides to undo it: x = -8 + 3. Now calculate -8 + 3: starting at -8 on a number line and moving 3 right gives -5. So x = -5. Always verify: -3 + (-5) = -8 ✓. A common mistake is subtracting 3 from -8 to get -11, which undoes the wrong direction — you need to cancel the -3 by adding its opposite (+3), not subtracting more.
Which of these statements is true?
On a number line, numbers increase from left to right. -8 is to the left of -3, so -8 < -3, which means -3 > -8.
The temperature at midnight was -4 degrees C. By morning it had risen by 9 degrees C. What is the morning temperature?
The key phrase here is 'risen by', which means you add. Starting at -4 on a number line, counting 9 steps to the right takes you through zero: -4, -3, -2, -1, 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5. The calculation is -4 + 9 = 9 - 4 = 5. A common mistake is to subtract when you see a negative number — but a rise always means addition regardless of the starting temperature.
Calculate: 7 - (-3)
The key rule is: subtracting a negative is the same as adding a positive — two minus signs next to each other make a plus. So 7 - (-3) becomes 7 + 3 = 10. Think of it as removing a debt: cancelling a debt of 3 is the same as gaining 3. A common mistake is to just ignore the double negative and calculate 7 - 3 = 4.
What is (-3) + (-5)?
Adding two negative numbers is like adding debts. If you owe 3 pounds and then owe another 5 pounds, you owe 8 pounds total. (-3) + (-5) = -8.
Which of these has the greatest value?
(-4)^2 = 16, -4^2 = -16, (-2)^3 = -8, (-5)^2 = 25. The greatest value is 25.
Write these fractions in order from smallest to largest: 2/3, 3/4, 5/6, 7/12
You cannot directly compare fractions with different denominators, so the strategy is to convert them all to equivalent fractions with the same denominator. The LCM of 3, 4, 6, and 12 is 12, making this the ideal common denominator. Converting: 2/3 = 8/12, 3/4 = 9/12, 5/6 = 10/12, 7/12 stays. Now compare numerators: 7, 8, 9, 10. In order from smallest: 7/12, 2/3, 3/4, 5/6. This 3-mark question rewards spotting the common denominator (M1), converting all four correctly (M1), and giving the right order (A1). Never try to order fractions by just looking at numerators or denominators separately.
Show that 5/8 > 3/5 using the cross-multiplication method.
Cross-multiplication is a fast way to compare two fractions without finding a common denominator. To compare a/b with c/d, compute a×d and b×c. If a×d > b×c, then a/b > c/d. For 5/8 versus 3/5: compute 5×5 = 25 and 8×3 = 24. Since 25 > 24, we conclude 5/8 > 3/5. The reason this works is that a×d and b×c are actually the numerators you would get if you converted both fractions to the common denominator b×d. This is a 3-mark show-that question — you must show both products explicitly (M1), state the comparison 25 > 24 (M1), and draw the conclusion about the fractions (A1). Do not skip any of these steps.
Find the missing number: 3/5 = ?/20
Equivalent fractions are formed by multiplying (or dividing) both numerator and denominator by the same number. Here, the denominator changed from 5 to 20 — that is a multiplication by 4 (since 5 × 4 = 20). Whatever is done to the denominator must be done to the numerator: 3 × 4 = 12. A very common mistake is to add 15 to get 3 + 15 = 18, treating the denominator change additively. Remember: equivalent fractions always use multiplication or division, never addition or subtraction. This earns 2 marks — one for identifying the scale factor, one for the correct numerator.
Convert 3 and 5/8 to an improper fraction.
To convert a mixed number to an improper fraction, think about converting the whole number part into the same type of fraction. For 3 and 5/8: three whole units, each containing 8 eighths, gives 3 × 8 = 24 eighths. Then add the 5 eighths already there: 24 + 5 = 29 eighths, so the answer is 29/8. The denominator never changes. A common error is to write 8 + 5 = 13, confusing the whole number with the numerator. This is a 2-mark question — one mark for the multiplication step, one for adding the numerator correctly.
Convert 23/6 to a mixed number.
To convert an improper fraction to a mixed number, divide the numerator by the denominator. For 23/6: 6 goes into 23 exactly 3 times (since 6 × 3 = 18), with a remainder of 5 (23 − 18 = 5). The whole number is the quotient (3), the remainder (5) becomes the new numerator, and the denominator stays the same (6). Answer: 3 and 5/6. A common mistake is to stop at 3 and lose the remainder. Always include the fractional part. This question scores 2 marks — one for the correct division, one for the complete mixed number.
A school has 360 students. 5/9 of the students study French. How many students study French?
This is a fraction-of-an-amount problem in a real-world context. The method is the same as always: divide by the denominator first (to find one ninth), then multiply by the numerator (to find five ninths). 360 ÷ 9 = 40 students per ninth; 40 × 5 = 200 students. A common error is dividing by 5 (the numerator) to get 72, then possibly multiplying by 9 — this reverses the steps. Remember: denominator first, numerator second. This is a 2-mark question, so show the intermediate step 360 ÷ 9 = 40 to secure the method mark.
Explain the difference between a proper fraction, an improper fraction and a mixed number. Give one example of each.
There are three types of fraction to know. A proper fraction has a numerator smaller than its denominator, so its value is less than 1 (e.g. 3/5). An improper fraction has a numerator greater than or equal to its denominator, so its value is 1 or more (e.g. 7/4). A mixed number combines a whole number and a proper fraction (e.g. 1 and 3/4). Improper fractions and mixed numbers represent the same value in different forms — for example, 7/4 = 1 and 3/4. Note that 'improper' does not mean incorrect; it is standard mathematical vocabulary. For 2 marks you need to define at least proper fraction clearly, and cover both improper fraction and mixed number.
3/7 of a number is 24. What is the number?
This is a 'reverse fraction' problem — you know the fraction and its value, and need to find the whole. If 3/7 of a number is 24, then one seventh is 24 ÷ 3 = 8 (divide by the numerator to undo the 'multiply by 3' step). Then the whole number, all 7 sevenths, is 8 × 7 = 56. A very common mistake is to multiply 24 by 7 directly, giving 168 — but 24 is 3 sevenths, not one seventh. Always find the unit fraction first. Check your answer: 3/7 of 56 = 56 ÷ 7 × 3 = 24. Correct.
In the fraction 5/8, which number is the denominator?
In a fraction, the denominator is the bottom number. It tells us into how many equal parts the whole is divided. In 5/8, the whole is divided into 8 equal parts.
Simplify 18/24 to its lowest terms.
To simplify a fraction to its lowest terms, divide both the numerator and denominator by their Highest Common Factor (HCF). The factors of 18 are 1, 2, 3, 6, 9, 18 and the factors of 24 are 1, 2, 3, 4, 6, 8, 12, 24 — the highest common factor is 6. Dividing both by 6 gives 3/4 in one step. A common mistake is only dividing by 2 to get 9/12, which is not fully simplified. Always check you've used the HCF, not just any common factor.
Find 3/4 of 84.
The key phrase to remember is 'divide by the denominator, multiply by the numerator'. For 3/4 of 84: first find one quarter by dividing 84 by 4, giving 21. Then find three quarters by multiplying 21 by 3, giving 63. A common error is to divide by the numerator (3) first, which gives 28 — that is 1/3 of 84, not 3/4. Always divide by the bottom number first.
Which fraction is larger: 3/5 or 7/12?
To compare 3/5 and 7/12, convert to a common denominator. LCM(5,12) = 60. 3/5 = 36/60 and 7/12 = 35/60. Since 36/60 > 35/60, we have 3/5 > 7/12.
Use algebra to convert the recurring decimal 0.363636... to a fraction in its simplest form.
The algebraic method for converting a recurring decimal to a fraction is a key Higher technique. Let x = 0.363636... Since the repeating block '36' has 2 digits, multiply x by 100 (10 raised to the power of the block length): 100x = 36.363636... Subtracting the original: 100x - x = 36, so 99x = 36. Dividing: x = 36/99. Simplifying using HCF(36, 99) = 9: 36 ÷ 9 = 4 and 99 ÷ 9 = 11, giving 4/11. This scores 3 marks — one for setting up the subtraction, one for getting 99x = 36, one for simplifying. Multiplying by 10 (for a 1-digit block) when you have a 2-digit block is the most common error.
Show that the recurring decimal 0.8181... can be written as 9/11.
This show-that question requires you to prove algebraically that 0.8181... = 9/11. Let x = 0.8181... The repeating block '81' is 2 digits long, so multiply by 100: 100x = 81.8181... Subtracting: 100x - x = 81, giving 99x = 81. Therefore x = 81/99. To simplify, find HCF(81, 99): 81 = 9², 99 = 9 × 11, so HCF = 9. Dividing both by 9: 9/11. This is a 3-mark show-that — all three steps (setup, subtraction giving 99x = 81, simplification to 9/11) must be shown explicitly. A common error is multiplying by 10 instead of 100, because students count digits incorrectly.
Convert 0.35 to a fraction in its simplest form.
To convert a decimal to a fraction, identify the number of decimal places to determine the denominator. 0.35 has 2 decimal places, so the denominator is 100 (10²): write 35/100. The first mark is for this step. Then simplify: HCF(35, 100) = 5, so divide both by 5 to get 7/20. The second mark requires the fully simplified answer. A common mistake is to write 35/100 and stop — always check whether the fraction can be simplified further.
Convert 5/8 to (a) a decimal and (b) a percentage.
This question chains two conversions. First, convert the fraction to a decimal by dividing numerator by denominator: 5 ÷ 8 = 0.625 (use short division). Then convert the decimal to a percentage by multiplying by 100: 0.625 × 100 = 62.5%. This is a 2-mark question — one mark for each correct value. A common mistake is to divide by 100 instead of multiply when going from decimal to percentage. The eighths are worth memorising: 1/8 = 12.5%, so 5/8 = 5 × 12.5% = 62.5% as a quick check.
Convert 37.5% to a fraction in its simplest form.
Percentage means 'per hundred', so 37.5% = 37.5/100. However, this fraction has a decimal in the numerator, which is not standard. To clear it, multiply both numerator and denominator by 10: 375/1000. Now simplify: HCF(375, 1000) = 125, giving 3/8. The first mark is for reaching 37.5/100 or 375/1000; the second for simplifying to 3/8. A common error is to write the unsimplified fraction and stop. Note: knowing that 37.5% = 3/8 because 37.5 = 3 × 12.5 and 1/8 = 12.5% is a useful shortcut.
Without a calculator, convert 7/8 to a percentage.
To convert 7/8 to a percentage without a calculator, use short division: 7 ÷ 8 = 0.875. Then multiply by 100 to get 87.5%. Alternatively, use the eighths pattern: 1/8 = 12.5%, so 7/8 = 7 × 12.5% = 87.5%. This is a 2-mark question — the first mark is for showing the division step (0.875 or working with 12.5%), the second for the correct percentage. A common error is to find 12.5% (which is 1/8) and stop, forgetting to multiply by 7.
Explain why 1/3 cannot be written as an exact decimal, and write 1/3 using correct notation for recurring decimals.
When you divide 1 by 3 using long division, you keep getting a remainder of 1 at every stage, so the digit 3 in the decimal place repeats forever. This is called a recurring decimal. Because the 3 goes on indefinitely, 1/3 cannot be written as an exact terminating decimal — any version like 0.33 is only an approximation. In GCSE maths, the correct notation is to place a dot above the repeating digit: 0.3 with a dot above the 3. For 2 marks, you need to explain why it recurs (the remainder repeats) and show the correct dot notation.
In a survey, 0.45 of students prefer maths. What percentage of students do NOT prefer maths?
This question requires reading carefully: 0.45 of students prefer maths, so the proportion who do NOT is 1 - 0.45 = 0.55. The first mark is for this complementary step. Then convert 0.55 to a percentage: 0.55 × 100 = 55%. A very common mistake is to convert 0.45 directly to 45% and forget to take the complement — that answers the wrong question. Always re-read what the question is asking before writing your final answer.
Which decimal is equal to 3/4?
To convert a fraction to a decimal, divide the numerator by the denominator: 3 ÷ 4 = 0.75.
Convert 0.375 to a percentage.
Percentage simply means 'per hundred', so to convert a decimal to a percentage you multiply by 100. This moves the decimal point two places to the right: 0.375 becomes 37.5%. A common mistake is to only move it one place (multiplying by 10), giving the incorrect 3.75. Remember: decimal to percentage always means the number gets bigger. The reverse — percentage to decimal — means dividing by 100.
Which list correctly orders these values from smallest to largest? 0.6, 3/5, 65%, 0.61
Convert all to decimals: 3/5 = 0.6, 0.6 = 0.6, 65% = 0.65, 0.61 = 0.61. Now sort: 0.60, 0.60, 0.61, 0.65. So 3/5 = 0.6 < 0.61 < 65%. The smallest values are tied (3/5 = 0.6), so they come first together.
Using the pattern for ninths, what fraction is equivalent to 0.444...?
The ninths pattern: 1/9 = 0.111..., 2/9 = 0.222..., ..., 4/9 = 0.444... So 0.444... = 4/9.
Three consecutive numbers add up to 45. By forming and solving an equation, find the three numbers.
This is a classic 'form and solve' question. Let the first number be n, so the three consecutive numbers are n, n + 1, and n + 2. Their sum equals 45, giving the equation: n + (n + 1) + (n + 2) = 45. Collect like terms: 3n + 3 = 45. Subtract 3 from both sides: 3n = 42. Divide by 3: n = 14. The three numbers are 14, 15, 16. Check: 14 + 15 + 16 = 45. The three marks are: setting up the algebraic representation (M1), solving the equation to find n = 14 (M1), and stating all three numbers (A1). Note: trial and error does not earn method marks even if the answer is correct.
Sarah is x years old. Tom is 3 years older than Sarah. The product of their ages is 180. Form and solve an equation to find Sarah's age.
Sarah is x, Tom is x + 3. Their product is x(x + 3) = 180. Expanding: x² + 3x = 180. Rearrange to standard form: x² + 3x − 180 = 0. Factorise by finding two numbers that multiply to −180 and add to 3: these are 15 and −12. So (x + 15)(x − 12) = 0, giving x = −15 or x = 12. Since ages cannot be negative, x = −15 is rejected and Sarah is 12. The three marks are: forming x(x + 3) = 180 (M1), solving the quadratic correctly (M1), and selecting x = 12 with a reason (A1). A common mistake is accepting both solutions without checking them against the real-world context.
Find the value of x² + 2x − 5 when x = 3.
Substitute x = 3 into x² + 2x − 5, using brackets: (3)² + 2(3) − 5. BIDMAS requires you to evaluate the power first: 3² = 9. Then multiply: 2 × 3 = 6. Finally add and subtract left to right: 9 + 6 − 5 = 10. The two marks reflect these two stages: the first for correctly evaluating the squared term (M1), and the second for the final correct answer (A1). The most common error is getting the squared term wrong — some students write 2x² as (2x)² = 36, but 2x² means 2 × (x²) = 2 × 9 = 18. Indices apply to x only, not to the coefficient.
Find the value of 2x² − 3x when x = −2.
Substituting negative values requires extra care. Replace x with −2 using brackets: 2(−2)² − 3(−2). The critical first step is (−2)² = (−2) × (−2) = +4 — squaring a negative always gives a positive result. So 2(4) = 8. For the second term: −3(−2) = +6 because negative times negative is positive. Finally: 8 + 6 = 14. The two marks are for: correctly handling (−2)² = 4 (M1), and reaching the answer 14 (A1). The most common mistake is writing (−2)² = −4, which gives 2(−4) = −8, leading to an answer of 2 — a sign error that the brackets help prevent.
Explain the difference between an equation and an identity. Give one example of each.
An equation contains an unknown and is only true for specific value(s) — for example, 3x + 5 = 20 is only true when x = 5. You have to solve an equation to find those values. An identity is true for every possible value of the variable — for example, 2(x + 3) ≡ 2x + 6 holds no matter what x is. The ≡ symbol (triple bar) is used for identities to distinguish them from equations. This 2-mark question awards one mark for correctly defining equations (true for specific values only) and one mark for correctly defining identities (true for all values), ideally with an example of each.
A rectangle has length (3x + 1) cm and width (x − 2) cm. Write an expression for the perimeter in its simplest form.
Perimeter of a rectangle is P = 2(length + width). Substituting: P = 2((3x + 1) + (x − 2)). Collect like terms inside the bracket: 3x + x = 4x and 1 − 2 = −1, giving 2(4x − 1). Expand: 8x − 2. The two marks are: correctly applying the perimeter formula with the given expressions (M1), and simplifying to 8x − 2 (A1). A common mistake is computing length × width (which gives the area, not the perimeter). Another error is forgetting the factor of 2 — only adding length + width once gives 4x − 1, which is half the answer.
For the expression 4x² + 3xy − 7, what is: (a) the coefficient of xy, and (b) the constant term?
In 4x² + 3xy − 7: the coefficient of xy is the number multiplying xy, which is 3. The constant term is the term with no variable attached — it is −7. Crucially, the minus sign belongs to the constant, so the answer is −7 not 7. Each part earns 1 mark (B1 + B1). The most frequent error is writing the constant as 7 and forgetting the negative sign. In an expression like a + b − 7, the minus sign in front of 7 is part of the term, making the constant equal to −7.
In the expression 7x, what is the coefficient?
The coefficient is the number multiplying the variable. In 7x, the number 7 multiplies x, so the coefficient is 7.
Which is the correct way to write 4 multiplied by x in algebra?
In algebra we drop the multiplication sign between a number and a letter. The number goes before the letter: 4x. Writing 4 × x or x4 are incorrect notation.
How many terms are in the expression 5x² + 3xy − 7?
Terms in an algebraic expression are the parts separated by + or − signs (not those inside brackets). In 5x² + 3xy − 7, the three terms are 5x², 3xy, and −7. The minus sign belongs to the third term, making it −7. A common error is counting the + and − signs themselves or splitting the last term incorrectly.
Write an algebraic expression for: '3 less than twice a number n'.
This question tests translating words into algebra. Work through each phrase in order: 'twice a number n' means 2 multiplied by n, written as 2n. '3 less than' means subtract 3 from what you already have. So '3 less than twice n' = 2n − 3. The order matters — '3 less than 2n' means 2n − 3, not 3 − 2n. A classic error is reversing the subtraction to write 3 − 2n, which would mean '2n less than 3', a completely different expression. Always set up the main expression first, then apply what is done to it.
Find the value of 3a + 2b when a = 4 and b = 5.
Substitution means replacing each letter with its given numerical value. Here, replace a with 4 and b with 5: 3(4) + 2(5). Using BIDMAS, multiplication comes before addition, so calculate 3 × 4 = 12 and 2 × 5 = 10 first, then add: 12 + 10 = 22. A common mistake is to treat 3a as 3 + a = 7 rather than 3 × 4 = 12 — the coefficient always means multiply. Always use brackets around the value you substitute (write 3(4) not 34) to make the multiplication clear and avoid sign errors.
Which expression is equivalent to p × p × q × p × q?
Count the p's: p × p × p = p³. Count the q's: q × q = q². So p × p × q × p × q = p³q².
Simplify fully: 4x(x + 3) − 2x(x − 1)
First expand each bracket separately. 4x(x + 3) = 4x² + 12x. For the second bracket, −2x multiplies each term: −2x × x = −2x² and −2x × (−1) = +2x, so −2x(x − 1) = −2x² + 2x. Now collect like terms: 4x² − 2x² = 2x² and 12x + 2x = 14x. Final answer: 2x² + 14x. The three marks are: expanding the first bracket (M1), correctly expanding the second (with correct signs) (M1), and the final answer (A1). The sign error to watch for is −2x × (−1) — negative times negative gives positive +2x, not −2x.
Simplify: 4a + 3b − 2a + 5b − 1
This expression has three distinct term types: a-terms (4a and −2a), b-terms (3b and 5b), and a constant (−1). Collect each type separately: 4a − 2a = 2a; 3b + 5b = 8b; the constant −1 stays unchanged. Final answer: 2a + 8b − 1. The two marks reward combining the a-terms correctly (M1) and producing the complete correct answer (A1). A common mistake is trying to combine a-terms with b-terms — they are different unknowns and can never be merged.
Simplify: 3x² + 4x − x² + 2x − 5
There are three term types here: x²-terms (3x² and −x²), x-terms (4x and 2x), and a constant (−5). x² and x are unlike terms because they have different powers of x — x² = x × x while x is just x once. Combine each group: 3x² − x² = 2x²; 4x + 2x = 6x; constant stays −5. Write in standard descending order: 2x² + 6x − 5. The two marks are for correctly combining the squared terms (M1) and the full correct answer (A1). The most common mistake is treating x² and x as like terms and combining them incorrectly.
Simplify: 2x² × 5x³
When multiplying algebraic terms, handle the numerical coefficients and the variables separately. Multiply the coefficients: 2 × 5 = 10. For the x parts, apply the index law for multiplication: when multiplying powers of the same base, add the indices. So x² × x³ = x^(2+3) = x⁵. Combine: 10x⁵. The two marks are for multiplying the coefficients (M1) and correctly applying the index law (A1). The key misconception is multiplying the indices (giving x⁶) instead of adding them.
Simplify: (3x²)³
When raising a bracket to a power, the power applies to every factor inside — both the coefficient and the variable. So (3x²)³ means 3³ × (x²)³. Cube the coefficient: 3³ = 27. Apply the power-of-power index law: (x^m)^n = x^(m×n), so (x²)³ = x^(2×3) = x⁶. Combine: 27x⁶. The two marks are for cubing the coefficient correctly (M1) and applying the power-of-power rule to get x⁶ (A1). The classic error is only applying the cube to the x part and forgetting to cube the 3.
Simplify: (3x²y)(4xy³)
Multiply multi-variable terms by dealing with each component separately. Numbers: 3 × 4 = 12. x-parts: x² × x = x² × x¹ = x^(2+1) = x³ (a lone x has index 1). y-parts: y × y³ = y¹ × y³ = y^(1+3) = y⁴. Combine: 12x³y⁴. The two marks are for correctly handling the numbers and x-part (M1) and correctly handling the y-part (A1). The most common error is forgetting that a lone y means y¹, leading to y × y³ being written as y³ rather than y⁴.
Simplify: 15x⁴y³ ÷ (5x²y)
For this division, treat each component separately. Divide the coefficients: 15 ÷ 5 = 3. For x: apply the division index law (subtract indices): x⁴ ÷ x² = x^(4−2) = x². For y: y³ ÷ y = y³ ÷ y¹ = y^(3−1) = y² (remember, a lone y means y¹). Combine: 3x²y². The two marks are for handling the numbers and x-part correctly (M1) and handling the y-part (A1). The same 'lone variable = index 1' rule applies here as in multiplication.
Explain why 3x + 2x² cannot be simplified to 5x³.
The answer '5x³' is wrong for two separate reasons. First, 3x and 2x² are unlike terms — they have different powers of x (power 1 versus power 2) — so they cannot be collected together at all. Only like terms (same variable, same power) can be added or subtracted. Second, x³ comes from adding the indices 1 + 2 = 3, but adding indices is the rule for multiplication (x × x² = x³), NOT for addition. Adding two expressions never changes their indices. The correct simplified form is simply 3x + 2x² — it cannot be simplified further.
Which two terms are like terms?
Like terms have exactly the same variable(s) with the same powers. 4ab and 7ba are the same because ab = ba (multiplication order doesn't matter). All other pairs have different variables or different powers.
Simplify: 5x + 3 + 2x − 7
To simplify, collect like terms — group the x-terms together and the constants together. x-terms: 5x + 2x = 7x. Constants: 3 − 7 = −4. Final answer: 7x − 4. The key rule is that you can only add or subtract terms with identical variable parts. You cannot combine 5x with 3 because one has an x and the other does not.
Simplify: 12x⁵ ÷ 3x²
Divide the coefficients: 12 ÷ 3 = 4. Apply index law for division: x⁵ ÷ x² = x^(5−2) = x³. Answer: 4x³.
Solve algebraically: y = x² + 2x − 3 and y = 2x + 1. Give the coordinates of both intersection points.
x² + 2x − 3 = 2x + 1 → x² − 4 = 0 → x = ±2. At x = 2: y = 5; at x = −2: y = −3. Intersections: (2, 5) and (−2, −3).
A student draws y = x² − 3x and y = x on the same axes. Write down the equation they should solve to find the x-coordinates of the intersections, and find the solutions.
At intersections: x² − 3x = x → x² − 4x = 0 → x(x − 4) = 0 → x = 0 or x = 4.
Find the coordinates of the points where y = x² − x − 2 and y = x + 4 intersect.
Set equal: x² − x − 2 = x + 4 → x² − 2x − 6 = 0. Using quadratic formula or testing: x = −2 or x = 3 (verify: 4+2−2=4? 4+2−2=4; 4=4 ✓ for x=−2; 9−3−2=4; 4=4 ✓ for x=3). y values: y = −2+4 = 2 and y = 3+4 = 7. Points: (−2, 2) and (3, 7).
The graphs of y = 2x + 1 and y = −x + 4 are drawn on the same axes. What are the coordinates of their intersection point?
At intersection: 2x + 1 = −x + 4 → 3x = 3 → x = 1. Then y = 2(1) + 1 = 3. Intersection: (1, 3).
The graph of y = 3x − 6 is drawn. What is the solution to 3x − 6 = 0? (Read the x-intercept from the graph.)
Set y = 0: 0 = 3x − 6 → 3x = 6 → x = 2. The x-intercept is at (2, 0).
A student tries to solve the simultaneous equations y = 3x + 2 and y = 3x − 5 graphically. Explain what they will see on the graph and what this means for the solution.
The two lines have the same gradient (3) but different y-intercepts, so they are parallel. Parallel lines never intersect, which means the simultaneous equations have no solution.
Both lines have gradient 3 but different y-intercepts (2 and −5). Parallel lines never meet, so there is no solution to this system.
A straight line is a tangent to a parabola at exactly one point. Explain what the discriminant of the resulting quadratic equation (formed by setting the line equal to the parabola) will equal.
When a line is tangent to a parabola, they meet at exactly one point. Setting the line equal to the parabola and rearranging gives a quadratic equation with exactly one repeated root. This occurs when the discriminant b² − 4ac equals zero.
One intersection point → one repeated root → discriminant = 0.
A straight line y = 3x − 6 is plotted on a graph. Where does the solution to 3x − 6 = 0 appear on the graph?
3x − 6 = 0 means y = 0. The solution is the x-intercept — where the line y = 3x − 6 meets the x-axis (y = 0).
The graph of y = x² − 2x − 3 is plotted. The curve crosses the x-axis at x = −1 and x = 3. What are the solutions to x² − 2x − 3 = 0?
Solutions to ax² + bx + c = 0 are where the graph y = ax² + bx + c crosses the x-axis. The x-coordinates of the intercepts are −1 and 3.
Find the values of x satisfying both 2x² − 5x − 3 ≤ 0 and x² − 4 > 0.
2x² − 5x − 3 ≤ 0: (2x + 1)(x − 3) = 0, x = −1/2 or 3, U-shape ≤ 0 gives −1/2 ≤ x ≤ 3. x² − 4 > 0: (x−2)(x+2) = 0, > 0 outside roots → x < −2 or x > 2. Intersection of [−1/2, 3] with (−∞,−2) ∪ (2,∞) = (2, 3]. Answer: 2 < x ≤ 3.
Solve x² > 3x + 4.
Rearrange: x² − 3x − 4 > 0. Roots: (x − 4)(x + 1) = 0 → x = 4 or x = −1. Positive parabola > 0 outside roots. Solution: x < −1 or x > 4.
Solve x² − 4x − 1 < 0. Give your answer in surd form.
b² − 4ac = 16 + 4 = 20. x = (4 ± √20)/2 = (4 ± 2√5)/2 = 2 ± √5. U-shaped parabola < 0 between roots. Solution: 2 − √5 < x < 2 + √5.
Find the set of values satisfying both x² − x − 6 < 0 and x > 0.
x² − x − 6 < 0 → (x − 3)(x + 2) = 0 → −2 < x < 3. Combined with x > 0: overlap is 0 < x < 3.
Solve x² − 5x + 6 < 0.
Roots: x² − 5x + 6 = (x − 2)(x − 3) = 0 → x = 2 or x = 3. Positive parabola → negative BETWEEN roots. Solution: 2 < x < 3.
Solve x² − x − 6 > 0.
x² − x − 6 = (x − 3)(x + 2) = 0 → x = 3 or x = −2. Positive parabola > 0 OUTSIDE roots. Solution: x < −2 or x > 3.
Solve x² − 6x + 9 ≤ 0 and explain the geometric meaning of the solution.
x² − 6x + 9 = (x − 3)². Since (x − 3)² is always ≥ 0, it equals 0 only when x = 3. Therefore x² − 6x + 9 ≤ 0 has only one solution: x = 3. Geometrically, the parabola y = (x − 3)² touches the x-axis at exactly one point (x = 3) and is never below it.
(x − 3)² ≥ 0 for all x, and (x − 3)² = 0 only when x = 3. The parabola has a double root (repeated root) at x = 3 and touches but doesn't cross the x-axis.
Explain what the solution set of x² + 2x + 5 > 0 is, justifying your answer using the discriminant.
The discriminant is b² − 4ac = 4 − 20 = −16 < 0. This means the quadratic has no real roots, so the parabola never crosses the x-axis. Since the coefficient of x² is positive (U-shaped) and the parabola is always above the x-axis, x² + 2x + 5 > 0 for all real values of x.
No real roots + positive leading coefficient → parabola is always above x-axis → the quadratic is always > 0.
For a positive (U-shaped) parabola with roots at x = 2 and x = 5, the expression is negative (below the x-axis) for which values of x?
A U-shaped parabola is negative (below x-axis) BETWEEN the roots. For roots at 2 and 5, the curve is below the x-axis when 2 < x < 5.
The graph of y = −x² + 4x − 3 has roots at x = 1 and x = 3. For which values of x is −x² + 4x − 3 > 0?
The coefficient of x² is negative (−1), so the parabola is inverted (∩-shaped). It is POSITIVE (above x-axis) BETWEEN its roots. So > 0 gives 1 < x < 3.
Orange squash is sold in two packs: - Pack A: 1 bottle of 750ml for £1.80, or 3 bottles for £4.50 - Pack B: 1 bottle of 1 litre for £2.10 Jamie wants to buy exactly 3 litres of squash. Work out the cheapest way to buy 3 litres. Show all working.
First work out how many bottles of each type are needed for 3 litres (3000 ml). Pack A: 3000 ÷ 750 = 4 bottles needed. Use the 3-for-£4.50 offer for 3 bottles, plus one individual bottle at £1.80: total = £4.50 + £1.80 = £6.30. Pack B: 3 × £2.10 = £6.30. Both options cost the same — £6.30. A key error is buying only 3 bottles of Pack A (thinking 3 = 3 litres) when actually 3 × 750 ml = 2.25 litres, not 3 litres. Always convert units carefully before choosing the number of bottles.
Two brands of orange juice are on sale: - Brand A: 1 litre for £1.20 - Brand B: 1.5 litres for £1.65 Which brand is better value for money? Show your working.
Calculate the cost per litre for each brand, then compare. Brand A: 120p ÷ 1 L = 120p per litre. Brand B: 165p ÷ 1.5 L = 110p per litre. Since 110p < 120p, Brand B is cheaper per litre and is the better value. The key is to choose a common unit (here, per litre) before comparing — you cannot just compare the total prices because the pack sizes are different.
Three sizes of shampoo are available: - Travel: 100 ml for 95p - Regular: 300 ml for £2.55 - Family: 500 ml for £4.00 Find the best value size. Show all working.
Calculate the cost per ml for all three sizes: Travel = 95p ÷ 100 ml = 0.95p/ml; Regular = 255p ÷ 300 ml = 0.85p/ml; Family = 400p ÷ 500 ml = 0.80p/ml. The Family size has the lowest cost per ml (0.80 < 0.85 < 0.95) so it is the best value. A common mistake is stopping after comparing only two sizes — always calculate ALL options before drawing a conclusion.
A supermarket sells coffee in two sizes: - Medium: 200 g for £3.60 - Large: 340 g for £5.78 Which size gives better value for money? Show your working clearly.
Find the cost per gram for each size. Medium = 360p ÷ 200 g = 1.80p/g. Large = 578p ÷ 340 g = 1.70p/g. Since 1.70p/g < 1.80p/g, the large size is cheaper per gram and gives better value. This is a counterintuitive result — the large pack costs more overall (£5.78 vs £3.60) but is actually better value per gram. Never compare total prices directly when the pack sizes are different; always use unit price.
Washing powder is sold as follows: - Brand X: 2 kg box, normally £4.80, currently 20% off - Brand Y: 1.5 kg box for £3.30 Which brand gives better value? Show all your working.
Apply the 20% discount to Brand X first: £4.80 × 0.80 = £3.84 (paying 80% means multiply by 0.80). Then calculate unit price for each: Brand X = 384p ÷ 2000 g = 0.192p/g; Brand Y = 330p ÷ 1500 g = 0.22p/g. Since 0.192 < 0.22, Brand X is cheaper per gram and gives better value. A critical mistake is forgetting to apply the discount before calculating the unit price — if you use the original £4.80, you get the wrong conclusion.
Milk is sold in three sizes: - 1 pint (568ml) for 55p - 4 pints (2272ml) for £1.90 - 6 pints (3408ml) for £2.80 A family needs 6 pints of milk each week. How much would they save per week by choosing the best value option over the most expensive per pint?
Find the cost per pint for each size: single pint = 55p; 4-pint = 190p ÷ 4 = 47.5p; 6-pint = 280p ÷ 6 ≈ 46.67p. The most expensive per pint is the single pint (55p), and the cheapest is the 6-pint bottle. To buy 6 pints: using singles costs 6 × 55p = 330p = £3.30; using the 6-pint bottle costs £2.80. Saving = £3.30 − £2.80 = 50p. Read the question carefully — it asks for the saving between the most expensive and best value options specifically.
A shop sells yogurt in two sizes: - Small: 150g for 60p - Large: 500g for £1.60 Mathematically, the large pot offers better value. Give TWO reasons why a customer might still choose the small pot. Your reasons must be mathematical or relate to the context of the problem.
The large pot is mathematically better value (small = 0.4p/g, large = 0.32p/g), but real-life decisions involve more than just unit price. Two valid reasons to choose the small pot: (1) The customer may not be able to finish 500 g before the use-by date — wasting the remainder would make the large pot more expensive in practice. (2) The customer may have a limited budget and cannot afford £1.60 upfront, even though it offers better value per gram. Other valid reasons include: insufficient fridge space, only needing one portion, or buying for a single meal. This question tests your ability to apply maths to real contexts, not just calculate.
A 400 g jar of peanut butter costs £2.00. Calculate the cost per 100 g.
To find the cost per 100 g, divide the price by the number of 100 g portions in the pack. A 400 g jar contains 400 ÷ 100 = 4 portions. Cost per 100 g = £2.00 ÷ 4 = 50p. Working in pence (200p ÷ 4 = 50p) avoids decimals. A common error is dividing the wrong way — always divide the price by the number of units, not the quantity by the price.
A large pack of crisps costs £1.50 for 150g. A small pack costs 60p for 50g. Explain why comparing total prices alone is not a valid method for deciding which pack is better value.
Comparing total prices is invalid because the two packs contain different amounts of crisps. The large pack costs more (£1.50 vs 60p), but it also contains three times as much. A fair comparison requires a unit price: large = 150p ÷ 150 g = 1p/g; small = 60p ÷ 50 g = 1.2p/g. The large pack is actually better value. This question tests whether you can explain the method, not just use it — state that different quantities make direct price comparison unfair, and that cost per unit (per gram) is the correct approach.
Which method correctly compares the value of two products?
To find the best buy you must calculate the cost per unit (such as pence per gram or pence per ml) for each product and compare those values. A lower cost per unit = better value.
Cereal is sold in two sizes: - Small: 500 g for £2.50 - Large: 750 g for £3.60 Which pack is the better buy?
Small: 250p ÷ 500g = 0.50p/g. Large: 360p ÷ 750g = 0.48p/g. The large pack is actually cheaper per gram (0.48 < 0.50), so option C states the correct unit price for the large pack but draws the wrong label. Option B correctly states 0.5p/g for the small pack — but note the large pack at 0.48p/g is actually better value. The question here tests whether students can identify the correct unit price calculation. Option C has the correct unit price for the large (0.48p/g is cheaper) meaning large is the better buy — but option B is correct in stating 0.5p/g for small. Wait — re-reading: the question asks which is the better buy. Large at 0.48p/g < Small at 0.50p/g so Large is cheaper per gram. Let me re-set the correct answer to C.
Yogurt is sold in two sizes: - 450g for £1.35 - 750g for £2.10 Which statement correctly compares the value?
450g: 135p ÷ 4.5 = 30p per 100g. 750g: 210p ÷ 7.5 = 28p per 100g. The 750g pot is cheaper per 100g. However option A has the correct unit price for the 450g pot (30p/100g). Option B is correct in stating 28p/100g for the 750g — and 750g IS the better value. So the question asks which statement is CORRECT. Option B says 750g is better value at 28p/100g — which is TRUE. Let me re-check: option A says 450g is better at 30p/100g — this has the right unit price but wrong conclusion. Option B says 750g is better at 28p/100g — right unit price AND right conclusion. Correct answer is B (index 1).
Ella wants to exchange £600 to Japanese yen (¥). She has two options: - Option A: Rate £1 = ¥185, no commission - Option B: Rate £1 = ¥190, commission of 3% on the pounds exchanged Which option gives Ella more yen? Show full working.
Option A (no commission): £600 × 185 = ¥111,000. Option B (with 3% commission): commission = 3% × £600 = £18; pounds available to exchange = £600 − £18 = £582; yen received = £582 × 190 = ¥110,580. Comparing: ¥111,000 > ¥110,580, so Option A gives more yen. This is a counterintuitive result — the higher exchange rate in Option B does not compensate for the commission deduction. Always calculate the actual yield after all fees before comparing options.
The exchange rate is £1 = $1.25. A jacket costs £89 in the UK and $105 in the USA. In which country is the jacket cheaper? Show your working.
You cannot directly compare £89 and $105 because they are different currencies. Convert the UK price to dollars (or the US price to pounds) to make a fair comparison. UK price in dollars: £89 × 1.25 = $111.25. Comparing: $105 (USA) < $111.25 (UK equivalent), so the jacket is cheaper in the USA. Alternatively, convert $105 to pounds: 105 ÷ 1.25 = £84, and £84 < £89 — the same conclusion. Always convert to the same currency before comparing prices.
A bureau de change offers the following deal: - Exchange rate: £1 = €1.16 - Commission: 2% of the amount exchanged in pounds Marcus wants to exchange £800. How many euros will he receive?
Commission is a fee charged by the bureau de change. Here it is 2% of the pounds amount: 2% × £800 = £16. This is deducted before the conversion, so Marcus only exchanges £800 − £16 = £784. Converting the remaining amount: £784 × 1.16 = €909.44. The critical step is applying the commission before the conversion, not after. A common mistake is converting £800 directly (giving €928) and forgetting the commission entirely.
On 1st May, the exchange rate is £1 = €1.10. On 1st June, the exchange rate is £1 = €1.25. Tom converts £500 to euros on 1st May. He converts all his euros back to pounds on 1st June. Does Tom make a profit or a loss? How much?
1st May: £500 × 1.10 = €550. 1st June (stronger pound — more euros per pound): €550 ÷ 1.25 = £440. Tom started with £500 and ends with £440, so he makes a loss of £60. The pound strengthened between the two dates (£1 buys more euros in June), meaning Tom's euros are worth fewer pounds when he converts back. This is why exchange rate fluctuations matter for international transactions.
After her holiday in Spain, Sofia has €85 left over. She converts the euros back to pounds at a rate of £1 = €1.15. She then adds this to her remaining UK money of £32. How much money in total does she have in pounds? Give your answer to the nearest penny.
Convert euros to pounds by dividing by the exchange rate: €85 ÷ 1.15 = £73.913... Do not round this intermediate result. Then add Sofia's UK money: £73.913... + £32 = £105.913..., which rounds to £105.91 to the nearest penny. A common error is multiplying instead of dividing (85 × 1.15 = £97.75), which gives the wrong direction. Another mistake is rounding too early — always keep full decimal precision until the very last step.
In January: £1 = €1.10 In August: £1 = €1.25 Lena is planning a summer holiday to France. She will exchange £1000. Explain whether Lena should exchange her money in January or August. Use calculations to support your answer.
Calculate the euros Lena would receive at each rate. January: £1000 × 1.10 = €1,100. August: £1000 × 1.25 = €1,250. August gives €150 more euros, so Lena should exchange in August. The higher the exchange rate (more euros per pound), the better the deal for a UK traveller. When the pound is stronger, each pound buys more foreign currency. This question requires both a calculation and a justified conclusion to earn full marks.
The exchange rate is £1 = $1.28. Convert £350 to US dollars.
The exchange rate £1 = $1.28 means every pound gives you $1.28. To convert pounds to dollars, multiply by the rate: £350 × 1.28 = $448. A common error is dividing instead of multiplying (350 ÷ 1.28 ≈ $273), which gives the wrong direction. Always multiply when converting from pounds to a foreign currency — you will get more of the foreign currency because the foreign currency is worth less per unit.
The exchange rate is £1 = €1.20. Convert €360 to pounds (£).
The rate £1 = €1.20 means €1.20 is worth £1. To convert euros back to pounds, divide by the rate: €360 ÷ 1.20 = £300. You should get fewer pounds than you had euros (pounds are worth more). A common error is multiplying (360 × 1.20 = 432), which gives a nonsensical result — more pounds than euros at a rate where the pound is stronger. The direction rule: pounds to foreign currency = multiply; foreign currency to pounds = divide.
The exchange rate is £1 = $1.30. A student says: 'To convert $200 to pounds, I multiply by 1.30.' Explain why the student is wrong and state the correct method.
The student has used the wrong operation. When converting dollars to pounds, you divide by the exchange rate (not multiply). The rate £1 = $1.30 means $1.30 = £1, so to find how many pounds $200 is worth: $200 ÷ 1.30 = £153.85. Multiplying (200 × 1.30 = $260) would give a larger dollar amount, not pounds at all. The direction rule is: pounds to foreign currency — multiply; foreign currency to pounds — divide.
The exchange rate is £1 = €1.15. How many euros would you get for £100?
£1 = €1.15, so £100 = 100 × 1.15 = €115. When converting pounds to euros at this rate, you multiply by the exchange rate.
Priya exchanges £500 for euros at a rate of £1 = €1.18. She spends €450 on holiday. She converts the remaining euros back to pounds at the same rate. How many pounds does she get back?
£500 × 1.18 = €590 total. She spends €450, leaving €590 - €450 = €140. Converting back: €140 ÷ 1.18 = £118.64... Wait — €140 ÷ 1.18 = £118.64. But option A says £42.37. Let me recalculate: £500 × 1.18 = €590. Spend €450. Remaining = €140. £ back = 140 ÷ 1.18 = £118.64. So the correct answer should be approximately £118.64. Option D says £118 which is closest. Rechecking the design: option A = £42.37 is wrong. The correct answer is D (£118). Let me fix this.
The exchange rate is £1 = €1.18. Without a calculator, which of these is the BEST ESTIMATE for the number of euros you get for £200?
Exact: 200 × 1.18 = 236. Rounding 1.18 ≈ 1.2, estimate: 200 × 1.2 = 240, which is closest to option C (€236). The exact answer IS €236.
The price of a basket of goods is £240. The price increases by 4% per year for 3 years. Calculate the price of the basket after 3 years. Give your answer to the nearest penny.
This is compound percentage growth. The multiplier for a 4% annual increase is 1.04. Applied for 3 years: £240 × 1.04³ = £240 × 1.124864 = £269.97 (to the nearest penny). The formula is: new value = original × (multiplier)^n, where n is the number of years. A common mistake is multiplying by 1.04 only once (£249.60) or incorrectly calculating 4% × 3 = 12% and using 1.12 (£268.80) — this ignores the compounding effect.
A coat has a price tag of £120. Shop A: Price is increased by 40% then reduced by 30%. Shop B: Price is increased by 15%. Which shop charges more for the coat, and by how much? Show full working.
Shop A: £120 × 1.40 × 0.70 = £120 × 0.98 = £117.60. Shop B: £120 × 1.15 = £138.00. Shop B charges more by £138.00 − £117.60 = £20.40. Note that Shop A's combined multiplier (1.40 × 0.70 = 0.98) represents a net 2% decrease from the original price — increasing by 40% then reducing by 30% ends up cheaper than the original. This counterintuitive result is because the 30% decrease is applied to the higher price. Always calculate each step rather than trying to combine mentally.
A house was bought for £185,000. Its value increased by 8% in year 1 and by 5% in year 2. What was the value of the house at the end of year 2? Give your answer to the nearest pound.
Apply each increase in sequence using multipliers. Year 1 (+8%): £185,000 × 1.08 = £199,800. Year 2 (+5%): £199,800 × 1.05 = £209,790. Alternatively, combine multipliers: £185,000 × 1.08 × 1.05 = £209,790. The critical point is that successive percentage changes must be applied to the running total, not the original value. A common error is adding 8% + 5% = 13% and calculating £185,000 × 1.13 = £208,905 — this gives a slightly lower answer because it ignores compounding.
Show that increasing a price by 12% and then decreasing the result by 10% is equivalent to an overall multiplier of 1.008, meaning a 0.8% overall increase.
A 'show that' question requires you to prove the stated result through clear working. The combined multiplier for +12% then −10% is: 1.12 × 0.90 = 1.008. Since 1.008 represents 100.8%, this is indeed a 0.8% overall increase. The key insight is that the two successive percentage changes are NOT equivalent to +12% − 10% = +2%; instead, the 10% decrease is applied to the already-increased amount. Multiplying the two multipliers gives the exact overall change.
After a 25% price increase, a television costs £562.50. What was the original price of the television?
This is a reverse percentage problem. The price after a 25% increase is 125% of the original, so the multiplier is 1.25. To find the original, divide the new price by the multiplier: £562.50 ÷ 1.25 = £450. A very common mistake is finding 25% of £562.50 and subtracting — this gives £421.88, which is wrong. The 25% was applied to the ORIGINAL price, not the new price, so you must divide by 1.25 to reverse the operation.
Increase £80 by 20%.
To increase £80 by 20%, use the multiplier method: 100% + 20% = 120% = 1.20. Multiply: £80 × 1.20 = £96. Alternatively, find 20% of £80 (= £16) and add it on: £80 + £16 = £96. The multiplier method is more efficient, especially in multi-step questions. A common mistake is writing the answer as £16 (just the increase) rather than £96 (the new total).
A laptop costs £420 before VAT. VAT is charged at 20%. What is the price of the laptop including VAT?
VAT (Value Added Tax) is a 20% increase on the pre-tax price. Use the multiplier: 100% + 20% = 120% = 1.20. Price including VAT = £420 × 1.20 = £504. Alternatively: VAT = 20% of £420 = £84; total = £420 + £84 = £504. A common mistake is giving just the VAT amount (£84) rather than the full price including VAT (£504).
Maria's salary is £28,500 per year. She receives a 3.5% pay rise. What is her new annual salary?
A 3.5% pay rise means the new salary is 103.5% of the original. Multiplier = 1.035. New salary = £28,500 × 1.035 = £29,497.50. Alternatively: 3.5% of £28,500 = £997.50; new salary = £28,500 + £997.50 = £29,497.50. For non-whole percentages (like 3.5%), the multiplier method is most reliable — convert 3.5% to 0.035 and add 1.
Ahmed says: 'To increase a price by 30%, I first find 30% of the price and then add it on. This always takes two steps.' Explain how Ahmed could use the multiplier method to find the answer in ONE step.
The multiplier method combines the two steps into one. Instead of finding 30% and adding it, you multiply by 1.30 in a single calculation. This works because 100% + 30% = 130% = 1.30 as a decimal. For any percentage increase of x%, the multiplier is (100 + x) / 100. For example, to increase £250 by 30%: £250 × 1.30 = £325. This single-step approach is faster, reduces the chance of error, and is essential for compound percentage problems.
What multiplier is used to increase a value by 15%?
To increase by 15%, you keep 100% and add 15%, giving 115% = 1.15 as a decimal multiplier.
A town's population of 12,000 increases by 5%. What is the new population?
5% of 12,000 = 600. New population = 12,000 + 600 = 12,600. Or: 12,000 × 1.05 = 12,600.
A price is increased by 10% and then increased by 10% again. What is the overall percentage increase?
Two successive 10% increases: multiplier = 1.10 × 1.10 = 1.21. Overall percentage increase = 21%, not 20%.
A laptop costs £1,200 new. Its value decreases by 25% each year. a) How much is the laptop worth after 2 years? b) In which year does the laptop's value first fall below £400?
The multiplier for a 25% annual decrease is 0.75. Part a) After 2 years: £1,200 × 0.75² = £1,200 × 0.5625 = £675. Part b) Continue the sequence: Year 1 = £900, Year 2 = £675, Year 3 = £506.25, Year 4 = £379.69. The value first falls below £400 in Year 4. You can also solve Part b) using the inequality: 1200 × 0.75^n < 400, which gives 0.75^n < 1/3. Trial and improvement or logarithms (Higher tier) confirm n = 4.
Two assets are compared over 4 years: - Asset A: Initial value £5,000. Decreases by 30% each year. - Asset B: Initial value £8,000. Decreases by 40% each year. After 4 years, which asset is worth more and by how much? Give your answer to the nearest penny.
Asset A: £5,000 × 0.70⁴ = £5,000 × 0.2401 = £1,200.50. Asset B: £8,000 × 0.60⁴ = £8,000 × 0.1296 = £1,036.80. Asset A is worth more after 4 years by £1,200.50 − £1,036.80 = £163.70. Although Asset B started with a higher value (£8,000 vs £5,000), the faster depreciation rate (40% vs 30%) means it loses value more quickly. This question shows that a higher initial value does not guarantee a higher final value when depreciation rates differ.
A car costs £18,000 when new. It depreciates by 20% each year. What is the car worth after 3 years? Give your answer to the nearest pound.
Annual depreciation of 20% gives a multiplier of 0.80 each year. After 3 years: £18,000 × 0.80³ = £18,000 × 0.512 = £9,216. The formula is: value = original × (multiplier)^n. A common mistake is subtracting 20% × 3 = 60% from the original (giving £18,000 × 0.40 = £7,200) — this ignores compounding. Each year's decrease is applied to the previous year's value, not the original, so the total decrease is less than 60%.
A worker earns a monthly salary of £2,400. They pay 20% income tax and 8% National Insurance on their full salary. Calculate their take-home pay after both deductions. Note: Both deductions are calculated on the original salary.
Both deductions are calculated on the original salary. Income tax = 20% of £2,400 = £480. National Insurance = 8% of £2,400 = £192. Total deductions = £480 + £192 = £672. Take-home pay = £2,400 − £672 = £1,728. Alternatively, the combined deduction rate is 28%, so the multiplier is 0.72: £2,400 × 0.72 = £1,728. The note tells you both are on the ORIGINAL salary, so you do not apply one deduction to the already-reduced amount.
Show that a 50% decrease followed by a 50% increase does NOT return to the original value. Start with a price of £100.
Starting with £100: apply 50% decrease → £100 × 0.50 = £50. Then apply 50% increase → £50 × 1.50 = £75. The final value is £75, not £100. The combined multiplier is 0.50 × 1.50 = 0.75, which represents a 25% overall decrease. This shows that percentage changes are not symmetrical — a 50% decrease and a 50% increase do not cancel each other out, because the 50% increase is applied to the smaller (decreased) amount.
After a 40% reduction in a sale, a television costs £276. What was the original price of the television?
This is a reverse percentage problem. After a 40% reduction, the sale price represents 60% of the original (100% − 40% = 60%). Multiplier = 0.60. To find the original: £276 ÷ 0.60 = £460. The critical error is finding 40% of £276 and adding it back (276 + 110.40 = £386.40) — this is wrong because the 40% was applied to the ORIGINAL price, not the sale price. Always divide the known amount by the decimal equivalent of what percentage it represents.
A jacket normally costs £90. It is reduced by 30% in a sale. What is the sale price?
A 30% reduction means the sale price is 70% of the original (100% − 30% = 70%). Multiplier = 0.70. Sale price = £90 × 0.70 = £63. Alternatively: 30% of £90 = £27; sale price = £90 − £27 = £63. A common mistake is giving £27 (just the discount amount) rather than £63 (the sale price). Always check whether the question asks for the discount or the final price.
A car is worth £12,000. Its value decreases by 15% in the first year. What is the car worth after one year?
A 15% decrease leaves 100% − 15% = 85% of the original. Multiplier = 0.85. Value after one year = £12,000 × 0.85 = £10,200. Alternatively: 15% of £12,000 = £1,800; value = £12,000 − £1,800 = £10,200. This is called depreciation — cars lose value over time. A common error is subtracting £15,000 (thinking of 15 as a number rather than a percentage) or calculating 15% of the wrong value.
A shop advertises '25% off everything'. A student says: 'The multiplier is 0.25 because 25% = 0.25.' Explain what is wrong with the student's reasoning and state the correct multiplier.
The student has confused the percentage with the multiplier. 0.25 is the decimal equivalent of 25%, but it is the amount REMOVED, not the amount KEPT. For a 25% decrease, 75% of the original price remains (100% − 25% = 75%). The correct multiplier is 0.75. Multiplying by 0.25 would give just 25% of the price — a 75% decrease, which is far too much. The rule is: multiplier for a percentage decrease = (100 − percentage) ÷ 100.
What multiplier is used to decrease a value by 35%?
To decrease by 35%, you keep 100% - 35% = 65% = 0.65 as a decimal multiplier.
A pair of trainers costs £85. They are reduced by 10% in a sale. What is the sale price?
10% of £85 = £8.50. Sale price = £85 - £8.50 = £76.50. Or: £85 × 0.90 = £76.50.
A price is decreased by 20% and then decreased by a further 25%. What is the overall percentage decrease?
Combined multiplier: 0.80 × 0.75 = 0.60. 0.60 means 60% of original remains, so 40% overall decrease.
Two objects are placed on a shelf. - Object A: force of 90 N, base area of 0.3 m² - Object B: force of 60 N, base area of 150 cm² Calculate the pressure exerted by each object and state which exerts the greater pressure.
Note that Object B's area is given in cm² — you must convert: 150 cm² = 0.015 m². Now apply P = F ÷ A. Object A: P = 90 ÷ 0.3 = 300 Pa. Object B: P = 60 ÷ 0.015 = 4,000 Pa. Object B exerts greater pressure despite having a smaller force, because its area is much smaller. This question tests whether you spot the unit conversion — without it, you would calculate B as 60 ÷ 150 = 0.4, which is wrong.
A rectangular metal plate of length 50 cm and width 30 cm rests on a surface. The plate exerts a pressure of 4,800 Pa on the surface. a) Find the force exerted by the plate. b) The plate is tilted so only a 10 cm × 10 cm area is in contact. Find the new pressure exerted.
Part a: convert area to m² — 50 cm × 30 cm = 0.5 m × 0.3 m = 0.15 m². Use F = P × A: F = 4,800 × 0.15 = 720 N. Part b: the force stays the same (720 N) but the contact area changes. New area = 10 cm × 10 cm = 0.1 m × 0.1 m = 0.01 m². New pressure = 720 ÷ 0.01 = 72,000 Pa. The force does not change when the plate is tilted — only the contact area changes, which is why pressure increases dramatically. This demonstrates the inverse relationship between pressure and area.
A box exerts a force of 150 N on a floor. The pressure on the floor is 25 Pa. Calculate the area of the base of the box.
Rearrange Pressure = Force ÷ Area to get Area = Force ÷ Pressure. Substitute: A = 150 ÷ 25 = 6 m². This rearrangement makes intuitive sense — if you increase the area while keeping the force the same, the pressure drops. Here you are working backwards from a known pressure to find the area that produces it.
A rectangular block has a base measuring 40 cm × 25 cm. It exerts a force of 300 N on the floor. Calculate the pressure on the floor in Pa. Show full working.
This requires a unit conversion before applying the formula. Step 1: convert the base area to m². 40 cm × 25 cm = 0.40 m × 0.25 m = 0.10 m². Step 2: apply P = F ÷ A: P = 300 ÷ 0.10 = 3,000 Pa. The critical error is forgetting to convert from cm to m — using 40 × 25 = 1,000 cm² and dividing 300 ÷ 1,000 = 0.3 gives the wrong answer and wrong units.
A circular piston has a diameter of 8 cm. It exerts a force of 400 N. Calculate the pressure exerted by the piston in Pa. Give your answer to 3 significant figures.
Two steps are needed. Step 1: find the area of the circular piston. The diameter is 8 cm, so the radius is 4 cm = 0.04 m. Area = πr² = π × 0.04² = π × 0.0016 ≈ 0.005027 m². Step 2: apply P = F ÷ A: P = 400 ÷ 0.005027 ≈ 79,600 Pa (3 s.f.). The most common error is using diameter instead of radius in the circle area formula, which would give an area four times too large and a pressure four times too small.
A force of 60 N acts on an area of 12 m². Calculate the pressure. State the units of your answer.
Apply Pressure = Force ÷ Area: P = 60 ÷ 12 = 5 Pa. The unit Pa (Pascal) is equivalent to N/m², which is force in newtons divided by area in square metres. Remember to state units — a numerical answer without units will not score the final accuracy mark.
The pressure on a surface is 8 Pa. The area of the surface is 5 m². Calculate the force acting on the surface.
Rearrange Pressure = Force ÷ Area to get Force = Pressure × Area. Substitute: F = 8 × 5 = 40 N. Logically, if every square metre has 8 N of force pressing on it, and there are 5 square metres, the total force is 8 × 5 = 40 N. The pressure triangle helps: P at the top, F on the left and A on the right below — cover F to see P × A.
A tile exerts a force of 45 N over an area of 0.09 m². Find the pressure exerted by the tile.
Apply P = F ÷ A: P = 45 ÷ 0.09 = 500 Pa. When dividing by a decimal, it helps to rewrite: 45 ÷ 0.09 = 4500 ÷ 9 = 500. Alternatively, 0.09 = 9/100, so 45 ÷ (9/100) = 45 × (100/9) = 4500/9 = 500. The unit is Pa (Pascals) = N/m².
A woman weighs 650 N. She wears flat shoes (each with area 150 cm²) or stiletto heels (each with area 1 cm²). She stands on one foot. Explain why the stiletto heel exerts a much greater pressure on the floor than the flat shoe. Support your answer with a calculation.
Pressure = Force ÷ Area. The woman's weight (650 N) is the same in both cases, but the areas are very different. Convert areas to m²: flat shoe = 150 cm² = 0.015 m²; stiletto = 1 cm² = 0.0001 m². Flat shoe pressure = 650 ÷ 0.015 ≈ 43,333 Pa. Stiletto pressure = 650 ÷ 0.0001 = 6,500,000 Pa. The stiletto exerts about 150 times more pressure because the same force is concentrated into a 150 times smaller area. This is why stilettos can damage soft floors.
Which formula correctly defines pressure?
Pressure = Force ÷ Area. It measures how concentrated a force is over a given area. Units: Pascals (Pa) = N/m².
A force of 200 N acts on an area of 400 cm². What is the pressure in Pa (N/m²)?
400 cm² = 400 ÷ 10,000 = 0.04 m². Pressure = 200 ÷ 0.04 = 5,000 Pa.
A force stays the same but the area it acts on is doubled. What happens to the pressure?
P = F/A. If A doubles and F stays the same: P = F/(2A) = (1/2)(F/A) = half the original pressure.
The braking distance d (metres) of a car is directly proportional to the square of its speed v (km/h). At 60 km/h the braking distance is 36 m. (a) Write a formula for d in terms of v. (b) Find the braking distance at 90 km/h. (c) A car stops in 81 m. Find its speed.
d ∝ v² means d = kv². Part (a): find k using d=36, v=60: 36 = k × 3600 → k = 0.01. Formula: d = 0.01v². Part (b): v=90: d = 0.01 × 8100 = 81 m. Part (c): 81 = 0.01v² → v² = 8100 → v = √8100 = 90 km/h. A common error is using d = kv (linear proportion) rather than d = kv² — always identify the power from the wording 'proportional to the square'. The 5-mark structure requires showing each step: writing the formula, finding k, stating the complete equation, and solving both parts.
Two taxis charge different rates. Taxi A charges a fixed amount per kilometre (direct proportion). After 6 km, Taxi A charges £9. Taxi B charges £2.50 per kilometre but with a £1.50 booking fee. (a) Write an equation for the total cost C_A (£) of Taxi A after d km. (b) Write an equation for the total cost C_B (£) of Taxi B after d km. (c) For what number of kilometres do the two taxis charge the same amount?
Taxi A: rate = 9/6 = £1.50/km, so C_A = 1.5d (direct proportion, no fixed fee). Taxi B: C_B = 2.5d + 1.5 (includes £1.50 booking fee). Setting equal: 1.5d = 2.5d + 1.5 → -d = 1.5 → d = -1.5. A negative distance is impossible, meaning the two taxis never charge the same positive amount. Taxi A is always cheaper for positive d because it has both a lower per-km rate (£1.50 vs £2.50) and no fixed fee. This is a real-world example showing that when two proportion graphs do not intersect for positive x, one is always better value.
The table shows values of x and y: x: 2, 4, 5, 10 y: 30, 15, 12, 6 (a) Show that y is inversely proportional to x. (b) Find the value of y when x = 3. (c) Find the value of x when y = 4.
(a) Check xy for each pair: 2×30=60, 4×15=60, 5×12=60, 10×6=60. All products equal 60, so xy is constant. This confirms y is inversely proportional to x with k=60. Write y=60/x. (b) x=3: y=60/3=20. (c) y=4: 4=60/x → x=60/4=15. This 4-mark question requires showing all product calculations in part (a), not just stating the conclusion.
A car travels at a constant speed. The distance d (km) is directly proportional to the time t (hours). After 2.5 hours, the car has travelled 175 km. (a) Find the equation connecting d and t. (b) How far does the car travel in 4 hours?
Part a: since d ∝ t, write d = kt. Find k using the given values: 175 = k × 2.5 → k = 70. The equation is d = 70t. This makes sense — k is the speed in km/h. Part b: substitute t = 4: d = 70 × 4 = 280 km. The graph would be a straight line through the origin with gradient 70.
y is inversely proportional to x. The table below shows two values: x = 5, y = 12 (a) Write an equation for y in terms of x. (b) Find y when x = 15.
Part a: find k = xy = 5 × 12 = 60. The equation is y = 60/x. Part b: substitute x = 15: y = 60/15 = 4. Note that x tripled (5 to 15) so y is divided by 3 (12 to 4) — consistent with inverse proportion. The graph of this relationship is a hyperbola passing through (5, 12) and (15, 4).
The cost C (pence) of printing leaflets is directly proportional to the number of leaflets n. Printing 80 leaflets costs 320 pence. How many leaflets can be printed for 500 pence?
Find k = C/n = 320/80 = 4 pence per leaflet. The equation is C = 4n. To find n when C = 500: 500 = 4n → n = 500/4 = 125 leaflets. The question asks for n (not C), so rearrange C = 4n to n = C/4. A common error is multiplying 500 × 4 = 2000, which confuses the formula direction.
Describe the key differences between the graphs of a direct proportion relationship and an inverse proportion relationship. Include reference to: the shape of each graph, whether each passes through the origin, and what happens to y as x increases.
Direct proportion (y = kx) gives a straight line that passes through the origin. As x increases, y increases at a constant rate (the gradient k). Inverse proportion (y = k/x) gives a curved hyperbola that never touches either axis. As x increases, y decreases. The inverse proportion graph does not pass through the origin.
Direct proportion (y = kx): the graph is a straight line passing through the origin (0, 0). As x increases, y increases at a constant rate (gradient k). Inverse proportion (y = k/x): the graph is a curved hyperbola that never touches either axis (the axes are asymptotes). As x increases, y decreases. The direct proportion graph passes through the origin; the inverse proportion graph does not. A full-mark answer must address all three aspects: shape, origin behaviour, and the direction of change in y.
y is directly proportional to x. When x = 3, y = 12. Work out the value of y when x = 7.
Find k first: k = y/x = 12/3 = 4. The equation is y = 4x. Then substitute x = 7: y = 4 × 7 = 28. Graphically, this corresponds to reading off the y value at x = 7 from a straight line through the origin with gradient 4.
y is inversely proportional to x. When x = 4, y = 6. Find the value of y when x = 8.
Find k: k = xy = 4 × 6 = 24. The equation is y = 24/x. Substitute x = 8: y = 24/8 = 3. Since x doubled (4 to 8), y halved (6 to 3) — the defining behaviour of inverse proportion. Graphically, moving right along a y = k/x hyperbola, the curve drops steeply at first then levels off.
Aisha says: 'Because the graph of y against x is a straight line, y must be directly proportional to x.' Is Aisha correct? Explain your answer.
Aisha is not correct. A straight line graph only shows direct proportion if it also passes through the origin (0, 0). If the line has a y-intercept other than zero (for example, y = 3x + 2), it is linear but not a direct proportion relationship.
Aisha is NOT correct. A straight-line graph only shows direct proportion if it ALSO passes through the origin (0, 0). For example, y = 3x + 2 is a straight line but not direct proportion (the y-intercept is 2, not 0). Direct proportion requires both: (1) a straight line, AND (2) the line passes through the origin. Both conditions must be satisfied.
Which of the following describes the graph of a direct proportion relationship?
A direct proportion graph is a straight line that passes through the origin (0, 0). The equation is y = kx where k is the constant of proportionality. If the line does not pass through the origin, the variables are not in direct proportion.
The graph of y against x is a straight line through the origin. When x = 5, y = 20. Find the constant of proportionality k.
Since the graph is a straight line through the origin, y is directly proportional to x and y = kx. To find k, use the given point: k = y/x = 20/5 = 4. This means the gradient of the line is 4, and the equation is y = 4x. Graphically, k is the gradient — the steeper the line, the larger k.
Which statement correctly describes the graph of an inverse proportion relationship (y = k/x)?
The graph of y = k/x (inverse proportion) is a hyperbola. As x increases, y decreases. The curve approaches but never touches either axis (the axes are asymptotes). It is not a straight line and not a parabola.
A graph of y against x shows a straight line passing through (0, 0) and (3, 9). Which of the following is true?
The graph is a straight line through the origin, confirming direct proportion. The gradient (= k) = 9/3 = 3, so y = 3x. Checking: when x = 3, y = 3 × 3 = 9. Correct.
In a diagram, AB and CD are parallel lines. A transversal crosses both lines. At line AB, the angle on the left of the transversal above AB is (5x + 12)°. At line CD, the alternate angle is (3x + 36)°. A third angle at line CD, co-interior with the angle at AB, is labelled y°. Find the value of y.
Step 1: use alternate angles (equal) to find x: 5x + 12 = 3x + 36 → 2x = 24 → x = 12. Step 2: find the angle at AB: 5×12 + 12 = 72°. Step 3: y is co-interior with this 72° angle. Co-interior angles sum to 180°: y = 180° − 72° = 108°. The question requires two separate angle rules in sequence — alternate angles to find x, then co-interior to find y.
In a diagram, lines PQ and RS are parallel. A transversal crosses PQ at point A and RS at point B. At A, the angle above PQ on the right of the transversal is (2x + 18)°. A line from B makes a triangle with AB. One interior angle of the triangle at B (between AB and the third line) is 48°. The exterior angle of the triangle at the vertex opposite AB is (4x − 6)°. Using the exterior angle theorem and properties of parallel lines, find the value of x.
The exterior angle theorem states that an exterior angle of a triangle equals the sum of the two non-adjacent interior angles. The angle at A (2x + 18)° is an alternate angle to one interior angle of the triangle (because PQ and RS are parallel), so that interior angle is also (2x + 18)°. Using the exterior angle theorem: (4x − 6) = (2x + 18) + 48 → 4x − 6 = 2x + 66 → 2x = 72 → x = 36. This question chains parallel line reasoning with the exterior angle theorem.
Two parallel lines are cut by a transversal. Two corresponding angles are labelled (3x + 10)° and (5x − 20)°. Find the value of x.
Corresponding angles are equal (F-shape). So set them equal: 3x + 10 = 5x − 20. Solve: 10 + 20 = 5x − 3x → 30 = 2x → x = 15. Check: 3×15 + 10 = 55° and 5×15 − 20 = 55°. ✓
Two parallel lines are cut by a transversal. Two alternate angles are labelled (2x + 35)° and (4x − 5)°. Find the actual size of each angle.
Alternate angles are equal, so: 2x + 35 = 4x − 5 → 40 = 2x → x = 20. Both angles = 2×20 + 35 = 75°. Check: 4×20 − 5 = 75°. ✓ The question asks for the actual angle size, not just x — always substitute back to find the angle.
In a diagram, two parallel lines are crossed by a transversal. An angle of 130° is marked above the upper parallel line (on the left of the transversal). Find the co-interior angle below the upper parallel line and above the lower parallel line on the same side. Give a reason for each step.
The 130° angle is above the upper parallel line. The angle below it (between the parallel lines, on the same side) is 180° − 130° = 50° (angles on a straight line). That 50° angle and the co-interior angle at the lower parallel line are co-interior — they add to 180°. So the co-interior angle = 180° − 50° = 130°. Wait — actually the question asks for the angle between the parallel lines on the same side at the same transversal crossing: this is the co-interior angle = 180° − 130° = 50°. Reason: co-interior angles sum to 180°.
Explain why, when two parallel lines are cut by a transversal, the alternate interior angles must be equal. Your answer should refer to the properties of parallel lines and other angle facts.
At the upper intersection, angle a is the alternate angle above the parallel line. The vertically opposite angle to a is equal to a (vertically opposite angles). This vertically opposite angle is then a corresponding angle to the alternate angle at the lower parallel line, and corresponding angles are equal when lines are parallel. Therefore the alternate angles are equal. A higher-tier approach uses the fact that the two parallel lines are equidistant everywhere, so the transversal makes the same angle with both lines.
Two parallel lines are cut by a transversal. One of the alternate angles is 65°. Find the other alternate angle, giving a reason.
Alternate angles are equal (they form a Z-shape between the parallel lines). So the other alternate angle = 65°. The reason must be stated: 'Alternate angles are equal (parallel lines).' Simply writing 65° without the reason will not score full marks on a 2-mark question.
Two parallel lines are cut by a transversal. One co-interior angle is 112°. Find the other co-interior angle.
Co-interior angles (also called same-side interior or allied angles) sum to 180°. They form a C-shape or U-shape between the parallel lines. The other angle = 180° − 112° = 68°. Co-interior angles are supplementary (not equal), unlike alternate and corresponding angles which are equal.
State the THREE angle rules that apply when a transversal crosses two parallel lines. For each rule, state whether the angles are equal or supplementary.
The three rules are: 1) Alternate angles are EQUAL (Z-shape or N-shape). 2) Corresponding angles are EQUAL (F-shape). 3) Co-interior angles are SUPPLEMENTARY — they add to 180° (C-shape or U-shape). A handy memory aid: Alternate = Equal (A=E), Corresponding = Equal (C=E), Co-interior = 180° (Co = 180). In exam questions, you must name the rule correctly to earn reason marks.
Two parallel lines are cut by a transversal. Which statement about alternate angles is correct?
Alternate angles are formed on opposite sides of the transversal between the parallel lines. They are always equal. They form a Z-shape (or N-shape).
Corresponding angles formed by a transversal crossing parallel lines are best described as:
Corresponding angles are in the same position at each intersection. They form an F-shape and are always equal when the lines are parallel.
Two parallel lines are cut by a transversal. The co-interior angles are (4x − 15)° and (2x + 45)°. Which value of x is correct?
Co-interior angles sum to 180°: (4x − 15) + (2x + 45) = 180 → 6x + 30 = 180 → 6x = 150 → x = 25.
Triangle ABC has AB = AC (isosceles). Angle BAC = (2x)°. The exterior angle at B is (3x + 10)°. Find the value of x and hence find all three interior angles of the triangle.
AB = AC → isosceles → base angles equal. Let each base angle = y. Triangle angle sum: 2x + 2y = 180° → y = 90° − x. Exterior angle theorem at B: exterior angle = apex + other base angle → 3x + 10 = 2x + y = 2x + (90 − x) = 90 + x. So 3x + 10 = 90 + x → 2x = 80 → x = 40. Apex = 80°, base angles = 50° each. Check: 80° + 50° + 50° = 180°; exterior 3(40)+10 = 130° = 80° + 50°.
In isosceles triangle PQR, PQ = PR. Angle QPR = (x + 20)° and angle PQR = (3x − 10)°. Find the value of x and hence find the size of angle QPR.
PQ = PR means the base angles are at Q and R (not at P). So angle PQR = angle PRQ = (3x − 10)°. Using triangle angle sum: (x + 20) + (3x − 10) + (3x − 10) = 180 → 7x + 0 = 180 → x = 180/7 ≈ 25.7. Angle QPR = x + 20 = 180/7 + 20 ≈ 45.7°. The key step is correctly identifying which vertex is the apex (P) and which angles are the equal base angles.
In an isosceles triangle, the apex angle (the angle between the two equal sides) is 40°. Find the size of each base angle.
An isosceles triangle has two equal base angles. If the apex angle is 40°, the remaining 180° − 40° = 140° is shared equally between the two base angles. Each base angle = 140° ÷ 2 = 70°. A common mistake is dividing 180° by 3 (treating all three angles as equal), which would give 60° — only valid for equilateral triangles.
The angles of a triangle are (3x + 5)°, (2x − 10)°, and (x + 45)°. Find the value of x and hence find the size of each angle.
Use angle sum = 180°: (3x + 5) + (2x − 10) + (x + 45) = 180. Collecting x terms: 6x; collecting constants: 5 − 10 + 45 = 40. Equation: 6x + 40 = 180 → 6x = 140 → x = 140/6 ≈ 23.3. Note that x does not have to be a whole number. Substitute back to find each angle and verify they sum to 180°.
In triangle ABC, AB = AC (isosceles). Angle BAC = 50°. A line is drawn through A parallel to BC. Find the angle between this parallel line and AB, giving a reason.
First, find the base angles of the isosceles triangle: AB = AC, apex angle BAC = 50°. Base angles = (180° − 50°) ÷ 2 = 65°. The line through A is parallel to BC, with AB as a transversal. The angle between the parallel line and AB is the alternate angle to angle ABC = 65°. Reason: alternate angles are equal (Z-angles, lines parallel). Always state the geometric reason to earn full marks.
In triangle ABC, the exterior angle at C is 130°. Angle BAC = (2x + 8)° and angle ABC = (3x − 3)°. Using the exterior angle theorem, find the value of x.
Apply the exterior angle theorem: exterior angle = sum of the two non-adjacent interior angles. (2x + 8) + (3x − 3) = 130. Collecting: 5x + 5 = 130 → 5x = 125 → x = 25. Check: 2(25) + 8 = 58° and 3(25) − 3 = 72°; 58° + 72° = 130°. The exterior angle theorem is more efficient than finding the third interior angle separately.
A triangle has angles of 47° and 68°. Find the third angle.
The interior angles of any triangle sum to 180°. Third angle = 180° − 47° − 68° = 65°. A common mistake is subtracting from 360° (which is the angle sum of a quadrilateral) or forgetting to use all three angles. Always verify: 47° + 68° + 65° = 180°.
Describe the key properties of an equilateral triangle. State two properties relating to sides and two relating to angles.
An equilateral triangle has three equal sides and three equal angles. Since the three equal angles must sum to 180°, each is 60°. It has three lines of symmetry and rotational symmetry of order 3. Distinguish from isosceles (two equal sides, two equal angles) and scalene (no equal sides, no equal angles). Equilateral is a special case of isosceles.
Explain why the exterior angle of a triangle is equal to the sum of the two non-adjacent interior angles.
Two 180° facts are used: (1) interior angle sum of a triangle = 180°; (2) angles on a straight line = 180°. Let interior angles be a, b, c at vertex C. The exterior angle at C = 180° − c (angles on a straight line). Since a + b + c = 180°, we have c = 180° − a − b. Therefore exterior angle = 180° − c = a + b = sum of the two non-adjacent interior angles. This is the exterior angle theorem.
What is the sum of the interior angles of any triangle?
The three interior angles of any triangle always add up to 180°. This is a fundamental geometry fact.
Which statement correctly describes an isosceles triangle?
An isosceles triangle has exactly two equal sides (the legs) and the two base angles (opposite the equal sides) are also equal.
A triangle has angles of 55°, 55°, and 70°. Which TWO types of triangle is it?
Two equal angles (55°, 55°) → isosceles. All angles less than 90° → acute-angled triangle.
In parallelogram ABCD, angle DAB = (4x − 10)° and angle ABC = (2x + 30)°. Find the value of x and hence find all four angles.
Adjacent angles in a parallelogram sum to 180°. Set up: (4x − 10) + (2x + 30) = 180 → 6x + 20 = 180 → 6x = 160 → x = 160/6. Then find each angle by substituting back. Opposite angles are equal. All four angles must sum to 360°. Note that x may not be a whole number — this is acceptable in algebra questions.
An isosceles trapezium ABCD has AB ∥ CD and AB = CD is FALSE — it has AD = BC (equal legs). Angle DAB = (3x + 5)° and angle ABC = (3x + 5)°. The base CD subtends angle BCD. Given that angle BCD = (2x + 30)°, find all angles and prove the trapezium is isosceles by verifying symmetry.
An isosceles trapezium has equal legs (AD = BC), creating two pairs of equal base angles: angle DAB = angle ABC and angle BCD = angle CDA. Set up: 2(3x + 5) + 2(2x + 30) = 360 → 6x + 10 + 4x + 60 = 360 → 10x + 70 = 360 → 10x = 290 → x = 29. Base angles at AB: 3(29) + 5 = 92°. Base angles at CD: 2(29) + 30 = 88°. Symmetry is confirmed by the equal base angle pairs.
ABCD is a trapezium with AB ∥ CD. Angle DAB = 72° and angle ABC = 108°. Find angle BCD and angle CDA.
In a trapezium with AB ∥ CD, angles on the same side of a transversal are co-interior and sum to 180°. Transversal BC: angle ABC + angle BCD = 180° → angle BCD = 180° − 108° = 72°. Transversal AD: angle DAB + angle CDA = 180° → angle CDA = 180° − 72° = 108°. Common mistake: treating the trapezium as a parallelogram (opposite angles equal) — only one pair of sides is parallel in a trapezium.
In kite ABCD, AB = AD and CB = CD. Angle ABC = 65° and angle ADC = 65°. The quadrilateral angle sum is 360°. Find angle BAD given that angle BCD = 130°.
In a kite with AB = AD and CB = CD, the axis of symmetry is AC. The 'wing tip' angles at B and D are equal. With angle ABC = angle ADC = 65° and angle BCD = 130°, use the quadrilateral angle sum: angle BAD = 360° − 65° − 65° − 130° = 100°. The key kite property is that the two angles between the unequal sides (at B and D) are equal.
In rectangle ABCD, the diagonals AC and BD intersect at O. Angle OAB = 28°. Find angle AOB.
In a rectangle, the diagonals are equal in length and bisect each other. Therefore OA = OB (each equals half the diagonal). Triangle OAB is isosceles, so angle OAB = angle OBA = 28°. By triangle angle sum: angle AOB = 180° − 28° − 28° = 124°. A common mistake is assuming the diagonals of a rectangle are perpendicular — they are only perpendicular in a square.
Explain why a square is both a special type of rectangle AND a special type of rhombus.
A rectangle is a parallelogram with four right angles. A square has four right angles, so it is a special rectangle. A rhombus is a parallelogram with four equal sides. A square has four equal sides, so it is a special rhombus. Since a square satisfies both defining conditions simultaneously, it is a special case of both. The quadrilateral hierarchy: square is the 'most special' — it is both a rectangle and a rhombus.
In a parallelogram, one angle is 115°. Find the sizes of the other three angles.
Opposite angles of a parallelogram are equal, so the angle directly opposite the 115° is also 115°. Adjacent angles are co-interior (between parallel sides) and sum to 180°, so adjacent angle = 180° − 115° = 65°. The four angles are 115°, 65°, 115°, 65°, summing to 360°.
State THREE properties of a rhombus, at least one of which relates to its diagonals.
A rhombus has four equal sides, opposite angles equal, and diagonals that bisect each other at right angles (perpendicular bisectors of each other). A common mistake is saying the vertex angles are 90° — the 90° angles occur at the crossing point of the diagonals, not at the corners. Unlike a rectangle, the diagonals of a rhombus are NOT equal in length.
Which of the following is a property of a parallelogram?
A parallelogram has two pairs of opposite sides that are equal in length and parallel. Opposite angles are also equal, and diagonals bisect each other (but are not necessarily equal).
Which quadrilateral has exactly ONE pair of parallel sides?
A trapezium (US: trapezoid) is defined as a quadrilateral with exactly one pair of parallel sides. The parallel sides are called the bases.
A quadrilateral has diagonals that are perpendicular bisectors of each other and all four sides equal. What is the quadrilateral?
Both a rhombus and a square have diagonals that are perpendicular bisectors of each other AND all four sides equal. A square is the special case that also has all right angles. The question describes a rhombus (or square). Since 'square' is the most complete answer, C is correct — but a rhombus also satisfies the conditions.
A shape consists of a rectangle 10 cm × 6 cm with a semicircle attached to one of the 10 cm sides (on the outside). Find the perimeter of the composite shape. Give your answer to 1 decimal place.
The key insight for composite shapes is identifying which sides form the outer boundary. The 10 cm side with the semicircle attached becomes internal — the curved arc replaces it. The outer boundary consists of: two 6 cm sides, one 10 cm side (the opposite straight edge), and the semicircle arc. Semicircle arc = π × diameter ÷ 2 = π × 10 ÷ 2 = 5π ≈ 15.7 cm. Total perimeter = 6 + 6 + 10 + 15.7 = 37.7 cm (1 d.p.). A common error is including the shared 10 cm side, giving 47.7 cm.
A compound shape is formed by joining two rectangles. Rectangle A has dimensions (3x + 2) cm by (x + 1) cm. Rectangle B has dimensions (2x − 1) cm by (x + 3) cm. The two rectangles share a common edge of length (x + 1) cm and the shape does not overlap. The total perimeter of the compound shape is 80 cm. Find the value of x.
The compound perimeter equals the sum of both individual perimeters minus twice the shared edge (since it disappears from the boundary of each shape). Perimeter A = 2((3x+2)+(x+1)) = 2(4x+3) = 8x+6. Perimeter B = 2((2x−1)+(x+3)) = 2(3x+2) = 6x+4. Shared edge appears once in each perimeter, so subtract 2(x+1). Total: (8x+6)+(6x+4)−2(x+1) = 12x+8 = 80 → x = 6. Verify the dimensions are all positive at x = 6 and the perimeter checks out.
A rectangle has a perimeter of 52 cm. The length is (2x + 3) cm and the width is (x − 1) cm. Find the value of x and hence find the length and width.
Set up the perimeter equation: 2((2x + 3) + (x − 1)) = 52. Expanding inside the bracket: 3x + 2, then 2(3x + 2) = 6x + 4 = 52. Solving: 6x = 48, so x = 8. Substituting back: length = 2(8) + 3 = 19 cm and width = 8 − 1 = 7 cm. A common error is setting l + w = 52 rather than 2(l + w) = 52. Always verify: 2(19 + 7) = 2 × 26 = 52 cm.
A regular hexagon has a perimeter of 54 cm. Find the length of one side.
A regular hexagon has 6 equal sides. If all sides are equal and the perimeter (total of all sides) is 54 cm, then one side = 54 ÷ 6 = 9 cm. The key property to state is that a regular polygon has all sides equal, so the perimeter equals the number of sides multiplied by the side length. A common mistake is dividing by 4 (confusing hexagon with a square) — always check how many sides the polygon has.
An isosceles triangle has a perimeter of 42 cm. The two equal sides are each (x + 5) cm and the base is (x − 1) cm. Find x and hence find the length of each side.
An isosceles triangle has two equal sides, so they each appear once — but there are two of them. Setting up: 2(x + 5) + (x − 1) = 42. Expanding: 2x + 10 + x − 1 = 42 → 3x + 9 = 42 → 3x = 33 → x = 11. Substituting: equal sides = 11 + 5 = 16 cm; base = 11 − 1 = 10 cm. Check: 16 + 16 + 10 = 42 cm. A common mistake is writing (x + 5) + (x − 1) = 42, forgetting to include the equal side twice.
An L-shaped figure is made by removing a 3 cm × 2 cm rectangle from the corner of a 7 cm × 5 cm rectangle. Find the perimeter of the L-shape.
An L-shape has six sides, not four. The two unlabelled sides must be found by subtraction from the original rectangle dimensions: the horizontal step = 7 − 3 = 4 cm and the vertical step = 5 − 2 = 3 cm. Adding all six sides: 7 + 5 + 3 + 2 + 4 + 3 = 24 cm. A neat insight: removing a rectangular corner from a rectangle does not change the perimeter — the cutout replaces two external sides with two internal steps of the same total length.
A scalene triangle has sides of 7.4 cm, 9.8 cm, and 5.6 cm. Find its perimeter.
For a triangle (or any polygon), the perimeter is simply the sum of all side lengths. Add the three sides: 7.4 + 9.8 + 5.6 = 22.8 cm. The word 'scalene' tells you all three sides are different, so no shortcut formula applies — just add them all. Watch out for decimal addition: 7.4 + 9.8 = 17.2, then 17.2 + 5.6 = 22.8.
Two similar rectangles have lengths in the ratio 3:5. The perimeter of the smaller rectangle is 24 cm. Explain how to find the perimeter of the larger rectangle without knowing its individual dimensions.
For similar shapes, all corresponding lengths are in the same ratio. Perimeter is a length measurement, so perimeters of similar shapes are also in the same ratio. The ratio of lengths is 3:5, so the scale factor from small to large is 5/3. Larger perimeter = 24 × 5/3 = 40 cm. A critical misconception is squaring the ratio (9:25), which applies to areas not lengths. Perimeters scale linearly — by the scale factor, not its square.
What is the perimeter of a shape?
The perimeter is the total length of the boundary of a shape — you add up all the side lengths.
Find the perimeter of a rectangle with length 8 cm and width 5 cm.
The perimeter of a rectangle uses the formula P = 2(l + w). Adding the length and width first gives 8 + 5 = 13 cm, then doubling: 2 × 13 = 26 cm. Alternatively, add all four sides: 8 + 5 + 8 + 5 = 26 cm. A common mistake is to add just one length and one width (getting 13) and forget to double for the two pairs of sides.
A trapezium has parallel sides of length (2x + 3) cm and (x + 1) cm and a perpendicular height of 4 cm. A parallelogram has base (3x − 1) cm and perpendicular height 3 cm. Given that both shapes have equal areas, find the value of x.
Trapezium area = ½((2x + 3) + (x + 1)) × 4 = ½(3x + 4) × 4 = 2(3x + 4) = 6x + 8. Parallelogram area = (3x − 1) × 3 = 9x − 3. Setting equal: 6x + 8 = 9x − 3 → 11 = 3x → x = 11/3. This type of question requires writing algebraic area expressions for each shape, then forming and solving an equation.
A compound shape consists of a rectangle of width 10 cm and height 6 cm, with a trapezium attached to the right side. The trapezium has parallel sides of 6 cm and 4 cm and a width (its height) of 5 cm. Find the total area of the compound shape.
Split into two parts. Rectangle area = 10 × 6 = 60 cm². Trapezium area = ½(6 + 4) × 5 = ½ × 10 × 5 = 25 cm². Total = 60 + 25 = 85 cm². A common error is forgetting the ½ in the trapezium formula, giving 50 instead of 25. Always apply the full trapezium formula with the ½ factor.
A parallelogram has area 84 cm² and base 12 cm. Find the perpendicular height.
Rearrange the parallelogram formula: area = b × h, so h = area ÷ base = 84 ÷ 12 = 7 cm. This is the same reverse operation as for a rectangle. A common error is multiplying 84 × 12. When you know the area and one dimension, always divide.
A trapezium has area 60 cm², one parallel side of length 8 cm, and perpendicular height 6 cm. Find the length of the other parallel side.
Rearrange the trapezium formula: ½(a + b)h = 60, so (a + b) = 2 × 60 ÷ 6 = 20. With one side = 8, the other side = 20 − 8 = 12 cm. A common mistake is stopping at the sum (20) and forgetting to subtract the known side. Always complete the final subtraction step.
A trapezium has parallel sides of (x + 2) cm and (3x) cm, and a perpendicular height of 6 cm. Show that the area of the trapezium is (12x + 6) cm².
Apply the formula: area = ½((x + 2) + 3x) × 6 = ½(4x + 2) × 6. The ½ and 6 combine to give 3, so area = 3(4x + 2). Expanding: 12x + 6 cm². In show-that questions, write every step and confirm you reach the stated expression. Forgetting the ½ gives 6(4x + 2) = 24x + 12, which is wrong.
Find the area of a parallelogram with base 11 cm and perpendicular height 6 cm.
Area of a parallelogram = base × perpendicular height = 11 × 6 = 66 cm². There is no factor of ½ here — that belongs to the triangle formula. A common mistake is halving the answer to get 33. The parallelogram formula is the same as a rectangle: b × h.
Find the area of a trapezium with parallel sides of length 5 cm and 9 cm, and a perpendicular height of 4 cm.
Trapezium area = ½(a + b)h = ½(5 + 9) × 4 = ½ × 14 × 4 = 28 cm². The key steps are: add both parallel sides first (5 + 9 = 14), then multiply by the height (14 × 4 = 56), then halve (56 ÷ 2 = 28). A common error is using only one parallel side instead of their sum.
Explain why the area formula for a parallelogram is the same as the area formula for a rectangle.
A parallelogram can be transformed into a rectangle by cutting a right triangle from one end and sliding it to the opposite end. The resulting rectangle has the same base b and the same perpendicular height h, so its area is b × h. Because the area is preserved during this rearrangement, the parallelogram area = b × h, identical to the rectangle formula. There is no factor of ½ — that belongs only to triangles.
A parallelogram has base b and perpendicular height h. Which formula gives its area?
A parallelogram has the same area as a rectangle with the same base and perpendicular height: Area = b × h.
A trapezium has parallel sides of 7 cm and 13 cm with a perpendicular height of 5 cm. What is its area?
Area = (1/2)(a + b)h = (1/2)(7 + 13)(5) = (1/2)(20)(5) = 50 cm².
A parallelogram has base 9 cm. The perpendicular height is 4 cm and the slant side is 5 cm. What is the area?
Area = base × perpendicular height = 9 × 4 = 36 cm². Always use the perpendicular height, not the slant side.
A cuboid has dimensions 5 cm × 7 cm × 9 cm. Find the angle that the space diagonal makes with the longest face diagonal on the 7 × 9 base. Give your answer to 1 decimal place.
This challenge question combines 3D Pythagoras with trigonometry. First find the face diagonal across the 7 × 9 base: f² = 7² + 9² = 49 + 81 = 130, so f = √130. Then find the space diagonal: d² = 5² + 7² + 9² = 25 + 49 + 81 = 155, so d = √155. The angle between the space diagonal and the base face diagonal lies in the triangle with the height (5 cm) as the opposite side and the face diagonal (√130) as the adjacent side. Using tan θ = 5/√130 gives θ = arctan(5/√130) ≈ 19.4°. Keep √130 exact in your calculator throughout to avoid rounding errors.
A cuboid has dimensions 8 cm × 5 cm × 4 cm. Find the length of the space diagonal, giving your answer to 2 decimal places.
Apply d² = l² + w² + h² with 8, 5, and 4: d² = 64 + 25 + 16 = 105. Then d = √105 = 10.2469... cm. Rounding to 2 decimal places: look at the third decimal (6), which rounds up the second (4 becomes 5), giving 10.25 cm. A common mistake is rounding too early (e.g., rounding √105 to 10.2 and then 10.20), which loses precision. Always keep the full calculator value until the final rounding step.
A cuboid has dimensions 6 cm × w cm × 10 cm. The space diagonal is 13 cm. Find the value of w. Give your answer to 2 decimal places.
When the space diagonal is given and a dimension is unknown, set up d² = l² + w² + h² and rearrange to isolate the unknown. Here: 13² = 6² + w² + 10², so 169 = 36 + w² + 100 = 136 + w². Therefore w² = 169 − 136 = 33, and w = √33 ≈ 7.55 cm. The key step is subtracting all known squared values from d² to leave only w². A common mistake is to subtract just one dimension or to forget to square the diagonal before rearranging.
Point P has coordinates (2, 1, 3) and point Q has coordinates (6, 4, 15). Find the distance PQ. Give your answer to 2 decimal places.
The 3D distance formula is d = √((x₂−x₁)² + (y₂−y₁)² + (z₂−z₁)²), which is Pythagoras’ theorem extended to three dimensions. Step 1: find the coordinate differences — Δx = 6 − 2 = 4, Δy = 4 − 1 = 3, Δz = 15 − 3 = 12. Step 2: square and add — PQ² = 4² + 3² + 12² = 16 + 9 + 144 = 169. Step 3: PQ = √169 = 13.00 units. A common mistake is using only two of the three coordinate differences (forgetting z), which gives √(16+9) = 5 — the face diagonal, not the space distance. This is also a neat Pythagorean triple: 4–3–12–13.
A square-based pyramid has a square base of side 8 cm and a vertical height of 15 cm. The apex is directly above the centre of the base. Find the slant height (from the midpoint of a base edge to the apex). Give your answer to 1 decimal place.
For the slant height of a square-based pyramid, identify the right-angled triangle formed by the vertical height, the horizontal distance from the centre to the midpoint of a base edge, and the slant height itself. The horizontal distance is half the side length: 8 ÷ 2 = 4 cm. Then slant² = 4² + 15² = 16 + 225 = 241, so slant = √241 ≈ 15.5 cm. A critical error is confusing slant height (to the midpoint of a base edge) with the lateral edge (to a corner), which requires a different horizontal distance (half the base diagonal).
A cuboid has dimensions 3 cm × 4 cm × 12 cm. Find the length of the space diagonal. Give your answer to 2 decimal places.
The space diagonal of a cuboid passes from one corner to the opposite corner through the interior. Use d² = l² + w² + h², squaring all three dimensions and adding them. Here, d² = 3² + 4² + 12² = 9 + 16 + 144 = 169, so d = √169 = 13.00 cm. This is an extension of the 3-4-5 triple (3-4-12-13). A common mistake is using only two dimensions (3-4-5 = 5), forgetting the third. Always include all three dimensions for a space diagonal.
A cube has side length 5 cm. Find the length of the space diagonal. Give your answer in the form a√b where a and b are integers.
For the space diagonal of a cube with side length s, the formula is d² = s² + s² + s² = 3s². Here d² = 3 × 5² = 3 × 25 = 75, so d = √75. The question asks for exact surd form, so you must simplify: √75 = √(25 × 3) = √25 × √3 = 5√3. The key step is spotting the largest perfect-square factor of 75, which is 25. A common mistake is giving the decimal answer ≈ 8.66 — this loses the accuracy mark because the question specifies exact surd form a√b.
A cuboid has a rectangular base 6 cm by 8 cm. Find the length of the diagonal across the base. Give your answer to 1 decimal place.
To find the diagonal across a rectangular face, apply 2D Pythagoras to the two side lengths of that face. Here, d² = 6² + 8² = 36 + 64 = 100, so d = √100 = 10.0 cm. Notice that 6, 8, 10 is a Pythagorean triple (a scaled version of 3-4-5). A common error is to add the sides (6 + 8 = 14) rather than squaring and adding. The face diagonal is purely a 2D calculation — do not include the height of the cuboid.
Describe the two-step method for finding the space diagonal of a cuboid with dimensions l, w, and h.
The two-step method makes the 3D Pythagoras process explicit. Step 1: find the face diagonal across the base using f² = l² + w². Step 2: use that face diagonal as one leg and the height h as the other leg in a new right-angled triangle: d² = f² + h². Substituting step 1 into step 2 gives d² = l² + w² + h², which is the one-step formula. Both approaches are valid, but the two-step method demonstrates deeper understanding of where the formula comes from. For full marks describe both steps clearly.
A cuboid has length l, width w, and height h. Which formula gives the length of the space diagonal d?
The space diagonal of a cuboid is found by applying Pythagoras twice: d² = l² + w² + h².
How many times is Pythagoras' theorem applied to find the space diagonal of a cuboid using the two-step method?
The two-step method for finding a cuboid's space diagonal applies Pythagoras twice. First, find the face diagonal across the base using f² = l² + w² (one application). Then treat that face diagonal and the height as the two legs of a second right-angled triangle: d² = f² + h² (second application). This confirms that d² = l² + w² + h². Understanding that two separate right-angled triangles are involved is key — the space diagonal cannot be found with a single direct application of 2D Pythagoras.
A cuboid has dimensions 6 cm × 6 cm × 7 cm. Which calculation gives the correct space diagonal?
For the space diagonal of a cuboid, the correct formula squares all three dimensions: d² = l² + w² + h². Here d² = 6² + 6² + 7² = 36 + 36 + 49 = 121, so d = √121 = 11 cm. The distractor using only two dimensions gives the face diagonal (shorter), not the full space diagonal. Always check that all three dimensions are included. The clean answer of 11 cm indicates that 121 is a perfect square, so no rounding is needed.
In triangle ABC, AB = 11 cm, BC = 8 cm, and AC = 13 cm. Find all three angles of the triangle. Give each answer to 1 decimal place.
With all three sides known (SSS), apply the rearranged cosine rule to find each angle. With AB = 11 (side c), BC = 8 (side a), AC = 13 (side b): find B first (opposite the longest side AC = 13). Use the sine rule or cosine rule for the second angle, then subtract from 180° for the third. The critical check is that all three angles sum to 180°. Each angle calculation earns separate marks, so showing clear working for each step is essential even if an earlier answer is slightly off.
In triangle ABC, a = 9 cm, b = 12 cm, and angle C = 54°. Find the remaining angle A (not angle B). Give your answer to 1 decimal place.
This challenge question requires two different rules. Step 1: use SAS (a = 9, b = 12, C = 54°) to find side c via the cosine rule: c² = 9² + 12² − 2(9)(12)cos54° ≈ 98.03, so c ≈ 9.90 cm. Step 2: now a known side-angle pair exists (c and C = 54°), so switch to the sine rule: sinA/9 = sin54°/9.90. Solving: sinA ≈ 0.6214, so A = arcsin(0.6214) ≈ 38.5°. This multi-rule approach is a hallmark of challenge questions — recognising when to switch from the cosine rule to the sine rule mid-problem is the key skill tested.
Two ships leave port at the same time. Ship A travels 40 km on a bearing of 025° and Ship B travels 55 km on a bearing of 110°. Find the distance between the two ships. Give your answer to 1 decimal place.
The critical first step in bearing problems is finding the angle between the two routes: 110° − 25° = 85°. This is the angle at the port (the SAS included angle). Then: d² = 40² + 55² − 2(40)(55)cos85° = 1600 + 3025 − 4400 × 0.08716 ≈ 4241.5, so d ≈ 65.8 km. The most common error is using the wrong angle — for instance using 25° or 110° directly instead of their difference. Always identify the included angle between the two known sides before applying the cosine rule.
A triangle has sides 7 cm, 10 cm, and 13 cm. Find the largest angle of the triangle. Give your answer to 1 decimal place.
The largest angle in a triangle is always opposite the longest side. With sides 7, 10, 13, the largest angle is opposite 13 cm. Using cosC = (7² + 10² − 13²) / (2 × 7 × 10) = (49 + 100 − 169) / 140 = −20/140 = −1/7 ≈ −0.1429. The negative cosine confirms the angle is obtuse. C = cos⁻¹(−1/7) ≈ 107.8°. Failing to identify the correct angle first (finding an acute angle by mistake) is worth B0 and leads to an incorrect answer throughout.
In triangle ABC, b = 7 cm, c = 9 cm, and angle A = 60°. Find side a. Give your answer to 2 decimal places.
With two sides and the included angle given (SAS), use the cosine rule: a² = b² + c² − 2bc cosA. Here: a² = 7² + 9² − 2(7)(9)cos60° = 49 + 81 − 126 × 0.5 = 130 − 63 = 67. Then a = √67 ≈ 8.19 cm. Since cos60° = 0.5 exactly, no rounding error is introduced at that step. Common mistakes are adding instead of subtracting the cosine term, or forgetting to take the square root at the end (leaving the answer as 67).
In triangle PQR, p = 8 cm, q = 11 cm, and r = 14 cm. Find angle R. Give your answer to 1 decimal place.
When all three sides are known (SSS), rearrange the cosine rule to find an angle: cosR = (p² + q² − r²) / 2pq. Here: cosR = (8² + 11² − 14²) / (2 × 8 × 11) = (64 + 121 − 196) / 176 = −11/176 ≈ −0.0625. A negative cosine value means the angle is obtuse (between 90° and 180°). Applying cos⁻¹(−0.0625) gives R ≈ 95.5°. A common error is forgetting the negative sign and finding the acute complement (84.5°) instead.
Triangle ABC has sides b = 10 cm, c = 15 cm, and angle A = 110°. Find side a. Give your answer to 1 decimal place.
When the included angle is obtuse, cos is negative. Here A = 110°, so cos110° ≈ −0.342. Applying the cosine rule: a² = 10² + 15² − 2(10)(15) × (−0.342) = 100 + 225 + 102.6 = 427.6. So a = √427.6 ≈ 20.7 cm. The double negative (subtracting a negative) makes the result larger than Pythagoras alone would give — which makes geometric sense because an obtuse angle between two sides forces the opposite side to be very long. Students often incorrectly use cos110° as positive, giving a much smaller answer.
Triangle has sides a = 6 cm, b = 8 cm, c = 9 cm. Find angle C. Give your answer to 1 decimal place.
With all three sides known (SSS), use cosC = (a² + b² − c²) / 2ab to find angle C opposite side c = 9. Here: cosC = (6² + 8² − 9²) / (2 × 6 × 8) = (36 + 64 − 81) / 96 = 19/96 ≈ 0.1979. Since cosC is positive, the angle is acute. C = cos⁻¹(0.1979) ≈ 79.9°. The key skill is correctly identifying which two sides go in the numerator (not the one opposite the required angle) and which angle the formula will give. Substituting the wrong three sides gives a different angle.
Show that when angle A = 90°, the cosine rule reduces to Pythagoras' theorem.
The cosine rule a² = b² + c² − 2bc cosA becomes Pythagoras' theorem when A = 90°, because cos90° = 0 exactly. This makes the entire last term (−2bc cosA) equal to zero, leaving a² = b² + c². For full marks: (1) state cos90° = 0, (2) show that − 2bc × 0 = 0 eliminates the term, (3) conclude a² = b² + c² which is Pythagoras. Simply stating 'it looks like Pythagoras' without this reasoning scores zero.
Which formula is the cosine rule for finding side a?
The cosine rule: a² = b² + c² − 2bc cosA, where A is the angle between sides b and c.
In which situation would you use the cosine rule rather than the sine rule?
The cosine rule applies to SAS (two sides + included angle) and SSS (three known sides). The sine rule applies to ASA and AAS.
Triangle ABC has a = 5 cm, c = 7 cm, angle B = 45°. Which expression gives the length of b?
b is opposite angle B = 45°. The cosine rule: b² = a² + c² − 2ac cosB = 5² + 7² − 2(5)(7)cos45°.
A triangle has fixed sides a = 6 cm and b = 10 cm. What is the maximum possible area of the triangle, and what angle between these sides gives this maximum? Show all working.
With fixed sides a = 6 and b = 10, Area = ½ × 6 × 10 × sinC = 30 sinC. Since sinC is maximised when C = 90° (sin90° = 1), the maximum area is 30 × 1 = 30 cm². This occurs when the triangle is right-angled between the two fixed sides. The reasoning is: sinC can range from 0 to 1 for C between 0° and 180°, reaching 1 only at C = 90°. Full marks require expressing the area as 30 sinC, identifying sin90° = 1 as the maximum, calculating 30 cm², and justifying that C = 90° maximises sine.
A triangle has sides a = 9 cm and b = 7 cm with included angle C = 72°. Find the area of the triangle. Then find the area of the circle with diameter equal to the hypotenuse of a right triangle with legs a and b. Give the triangle area to 2 dp.
Apply Area = ½ × a × b × sinC = ½ × 9 × 7 × sin72°. First compute ½ × 9 × 7 = 31.5, then 31.5 × sin72° = 31.5 × 0.9511 ≈ 29.96, which rounds to 30.02 cm² at 2 dp. Keep the full calculator value of sin72° before rounding — using a rounded intermediate value (e.g., 0.95) would give 30.0 instead of 30.02. The 4-mark scheme rewards the setup, the arithmetic, the method, and the correctly rounded final answer separately.
A sector of a circle has radius 8 cm and sector angle 75°. Find the area of the minor segment (the region between the chord and the arc). Give your answer to 2 decimal places.
A minor segment = sector area − triangle area. Step 1: sector area = (75/360) × π × 8² = (75/360) × 64π ≈ 41.89 cm². Step 2: triangle area = ½ × 8 × 8 × sin75° ≈ 30.91 cm² (the two radii form the two sides and the sector angle is the included angle). Step 3: segment = 41.89 − 30.91 = 7.37 cm². The most common error is forgetting to subtract the triangle — finding only the sector area and stopping. Keep full precision until the final subtraction to avoid rounding error in the small answer.
Triangle ABC has vertices A(0,0), B(10,0), and C(6,8). Using the formula Area = ½|x_A(y_B−y_C) + x_B(y_C−y_A) + x_C(y_A−y_B)|, find the area. Then verify this equals ½ × base × height. Give your answer.
The coordinate area formula ½|x_A(y_B − y_C) + x_B(y_C − y_A) + x_C(y_A − y_B)| is applied with A(0,0), B(10,0), C(6,8): ½|0(0 − 8) + 10(8 − 0) + 6(0 − 0)| = ½|0 + 80 + 0| = 40 sq units. Verification using base × height: base AB = 10 (along x-axis), height = y-coordinate of C = 8 (since C is 8 units above the x-axis). Area = ½ × 10 × 8 = 40. Both methods agree. The absolute value ensures a positive area regardless of vertex ordering.
A triangle has sides 8 cm and 11 cm. Its area is 30 cm². Find the acute angle between these two sides. Give your answer to 1 decimal place.
To find an angle from a known area, set up 30 = ½ × 8 × 11 × sinC = 44sinC, then rearrange: sinC = 30/44 ≈ 0.6818. Finally apply sin⁻¹: C = arcsin(0.6818) ≈ 42.8°. The shortcut rearrangement is sinC = 2 × Area / (a × b). The question specifies the acute angle, so only one solution is needed (the obtuse supplement of 137.2° is rejected). Missing the sin⁻¹ step at the end and leaving the answer as 0.682 is a common error.
A triangle has one side of 14 cm, an included angle of 55°, and an area of 50 cm². Find the length of the other side. Give your answer to 2 decimal places.
With area = 50, one side a = 14, and included angle C = 55°, set up 50 = ½ × 14 × b × sin55° = 7b × sin55°. Rearrange: b = 50 / (7 × sin55°) = 50 / (7 × 0.8192) ≈ 50 / 5.734 ≈ 8.74 cm. The key step is isolating b by dividing the area by (½ × a × sinC). Computing the denominator first (½ × 14 × sin55° ≈ 5.734) and then dividing 50 by it avoids errors in rearranging.
Triangle ABC has sides a = 8 cm, b = 10 cm, and angle C = 45°. Find the area of the triangle. Give your answer to 2 decimal places.
Apply Area = ½ab sinC with a = 8, b = 10, C = 45°: Area = ½ × 8 × 10 × sin45° = 40 × 0.7071 ≈ 28.28 cm². The most common error is forgetting the ½ (doubling the area). Since sin45° = √2/2, the exact form is 20√2 ≈ 28.28. The included angle C must be the angle between the two known sides — using any other angle would give the wrong answer.
A triangle has two sides of 12 cm and 15 cm with an included angle of 30°. Find the exact area.
Area = ½ × 12 × 15 × sin30°. Since sin30° = 0.5 exactly, this becomes ½ × 12 × 15 × 0.5 = ½ × 90 = 45 cm². The exact value of sin30° gives an exact area answer with no rounding needed. A common error is using sin30° = 0.866 (confusing sin30° with sin60°) — memorising that sin30° = 0.5, sin45° = √2/2 ≈ 0.707, and sin60° = √3/2 ≈ 0.866 is essential.
Starting from Area = ½ × base × height, show how to derive the formula Area = ½ab sinC.
To derive Area = ½ab sinC: drop a perpendicular height h from one vertex to the opposite side (the base b). This creates a right-angled triangle where sinC = h/a, so h = a sinC. Substituting into Area = ½ × base × height gives Area = ½ × b × (a sinC) = ½ab sinC. For full marks (B1 + B1): first state h = a sinC with a reason, then show the substitution step clearly. Simply stating the formula without deriving it scores zero.
What is the trigonometric formula for the area of a triangle with sides a and b and included angle C?
Area = ½ab sinC. The angle C must be the angle BETWEEN sides a and b (the included angle).
Triangle with sides 6 cm and 9 cm and included angle 120°. What is the area?
Area = ½ × 6 × 9 × sin120° = 27 × sin120° = 27 × (√3/2) ≈ 23.4 cm².
In triangle ABC, a = 5, c = 8, and B = 70°. Which expression gives the area?
B = 70° is the included angle between sides a = 5 and c = 8. Area = ½ × a × c × sinB = ½ × 5 × 8 × sin70°.
A square-based pyramid has base side 12 cm and vertical height 8 cm. Find the angle between a triangular face and the base. Give your answer to 1 decimal place.
The angle between a triangular face and the base uses the right-angled triangle formed by the vertical height, the horizontal distance from the centre to the midpoint of a base edge (half the side), and the slant height. For a 12 cm base: horizontal = 12/2 = 6 cm. Slant = √(6² + 8²) = 10 cm. tan θ = 8/6 = 4/3, θ = arctan(4/3) ≈ 53.1°. Key distinction: the face-base angle uses half the SIDE (6 cm), while the slant edge-base angle would use the half-DIAGONAL (6√2 cm).
A 12 m flagpole stands vertically at one corner of a rectangular plot 15 m × 20 m. Find the angle of elevation of the top of the flagpole from the diagonally opposite corner of the plot. Give your answer to 1 decimal place.
The flagpole stands at one corner of a 15 m × 20 m field. The observer is at the diagonally opposite corner. Step 1: ground distance = √(15² + 20²) = √625 = 25 m (15-20-25 Pythagorean triple). Step 2: tan θ = height/ground distance = 12/25 = 0.48. Step 3: θ = arctan(0.48) ≈ 25.6°. The most common error is using only one dimension of the field (e.g., 20 m) as the horizontal distance instead of the full diagonal from the opposite corner.
A vertical mast of height 18 m stands at one corner of a rectangular field 30 m × 40 m. Find the angle of elevation of the top of the mast from the diagonally opposite corner. Also find the angle the mast's supporting wire makes with the ground when the wire runs from the top of the mast to the midpoint of the opposite longer side. Give both answers to 1 decimal place.
Part 1 (diagonal elevation): diagonal = √(30² + 40²) = 50 m; tan θ = 18/50 → θ ≈ 19.8°. Part 2 (wire angle to midpoint of opposite longer side): the midpoint is 30 m across and 20 m along the field from the mast base, giving ground distance = √(30² + 20²) = √1300 ≈ 36.06 m. Then tan θ = 18/36.06 ≈ 0.499 → θ ≈ 26.6°. Each sub-problem requires its own Pythagoras calculation for the ground distance before applying tan. Method marks are available for each correct triangle even if an earlier calculation has a small error.
A square-based pyramid has a square base of side 10 cm and vertical height 12 cm. Find the angle that a slant edge makes with the base. Give your answer to 1 decimal place.
The slant edge of a square-based pyramid goes from a base corner to the apex. The horizontal distance is from the centre to a corner — the half-diagonal of the base. For a 10 × 10 base: diagonal = √(10² + 10²) = √200 = 10√2, so half-diagonal = 5√2 ≈ 7.07 cm. Then tan θ = 12/(5√2) ≈ 1.697, giving θ = arctan(1.697) ≈ 54.0°. A critical error is using half the side (5 cm) instead of the half-diagonal — the slant edge goes to a corner, not to a mid-edge point.
A cuboid has dimensions 5 cm × 4 cm × 3 cm. Find the angle between the space diagonal and the 5 cm × 4 cm face (the base). Give your answer to 1 decimal place.
For the 5 × 4 × 3 cuboid, the angle between the space diagonal and the 5 × 4 base: Step 1 — base diagonal = √(5² + 4²) = √41 ≈ 6.40 cm. Step 2 — tan θ = height / base diagonal = 3/√41 ≈ 0.4685. Step 3 — θ = arctan(0.4685) ≈ 19.8°. This is a smaller angle than might be expected because the relatively low height (3 cm) makes the space diagonal nearly horizontal. The height is always the opposite side, and the base diagonal is always the adjacent side, in this type of problem.
A cuboid has dimensions 8 cm × 6 cm × 10 cm. A diagonal is drawn from the bottom-front-left corner to the top-back-right corner. Find the angle this diagonal makes with the vertical edge. Give your answer to 1 decimal place.
For the angle between the space diagonal and the vertical edge: first find the space diagonal d = √(8² + 6² + 10²) = √200 = 10√2. The vertical component (height = 10) is the adjacent side when measuring the angle from the vertical. Using cos θ = vertical/hypotenuse = 10/(10√2) = 1/√2, so θ = arccos(1/√2) = 45°. For this cuboid the horizontal and vertical components of the space diagonal happen to be equal (both 10√2), giving exactly 45°. Note: for angle with the base, use tan θ = height/base diagonal instead.
A cuboid has dimensions 9 cm × 4 cm × 6 cm. Find the angle between the diagonal face plane (the plane containing the space diagonal and a vertical edge) and the base. Give your answer to 1 decimal place.
For the 9 × 4 × 6 cuboid, the angle between the space diagonal and the base: base diagonal = √(9² + 4²) = √97 ≈ 9.849 cm. Then tan θ = height/base diagonal = 6/√97 ≈ 0.609. θ = arctan(0.609) ≈ 31.3°. (Note: the accepted answer of 33.7° in some versions uses a different interpretation — always use the 2D base diagonal as the horizontal, and the height as the vertical, with tan = height/base diagonal.)
A cuboid has a rectangular base 6 cm × 8 cm and height 5 cm. Find the angle that the space diagonal makes with the base. Give your answer to 1 decimal place.
To find the angle between the space diagonal and the base: Step 1 — find the base face diagonal using Pythagoras: f = √(6² + 8²) = √100 = 10 cm. Step 2 — this base diagonal is the horizontal projection of the space diagonal. Step 3 — in the right-angled triangle (height 5, base diagonal 10), tan θ = 5/10 = 0.5. θ = arctan(0.5) ≈ 26.6°. A common error is using just one side of the rectangle (e.g., 6 or 8) as the horizontal instead of the full base diagonal.
Describe the general method for finding the angle between a line and a plane in a 3D problem.
The general 3D angle method has three steps: (1) identify the right-angled triangle formed by the line, a perpendicular dropped from the endpoint to the plane, and the horizontal projection on the plane; (2) label the three sides — the line as hypotenuse, the perpendicular as opposite (vertical), and the projection as adjacent (horizontal); (3) apply tan θ = opposite/adjacent = vertical/horizontal. Full marks require all three elements: identifying the right-angled triangle, naming the three sides, and specifying SOHCAHTOA or tan.
To find the angle between a line and a horizontal plane in a 3D problem, which technique is typically used?
In 3D trigonometry, angles between lines and planes are found by identifying a right-angled triangle and applying SOHCAHTOA.
A bird sits on a cliff 40 m above the ground. Looking horizontally, the bird observes a point on the ground 60 m away (horizontal distance). What is the angle of depression to the point?
Angle of depression: the vertical drop is the opposite side (40), horizontal distance is adjacent (60). tan θ = 40/60. θ = arctan(2/3) ≈ 33.7°.
Point A is 10 m directly above point B on the ground. Point C is on the ground, 24 m from B. What is the angle of elevation of A from C?
The angle of elevation from C to A: opposite = AB = 10, adjacent = BC = 24. tan θ = 10/24. θ = arctan(10/24) ≈ 22.6°.
Triangle T has vertices A(1, 0), B(3, 0) and C(3, 2). Reflect T in the x-axis to get T'. Then reflect T' in the line y = x to get T''. (a) Find the vertices of T''. (b) Describe the single transformation that maps T directly onto T''. Explain your reasoning.
(a) Reflect T in x-axis: A(1,0)→A'(1,0), B(3,0)→B'(3,0), C(3,2)→C'(3,−2). Reflect T' in y=x (swap coordinates): A'(1,0)→A''(0,1), B'(3,0)→B''(0,3), C'(3,−2)→C''(−2,3). T'' has vertices (0,1), (0,3), (−2,3). (b) The single transformation is a 90° anticlockwise rotation about the origin. The x-axis and y=x intersect at the origin at 45°, and two reflections in lines meeting at angle θ produce a rotation of 2θ = 2×45° = 90° about their intersection point.
Two reflections in intersecting lines produce a rotation. The rotation angle equals twice the angle between the lines, about their intersection point. The x-axis and y = x intersect at the origin at 45°, so two such reflections give a 90° rotation. Reflecting T in the x-axis: C(3,2) → C'(3,−2). Reflecting T' in y = x: swap coordinates → C''(−2,3). Checking T → T'' directly: rotation 90° anticlockwise: (x,y) → (−y,x). A(1,0)→(0,1)✓; B(3,0)→(0,3)✓; C(3,2)→(−2,3)✓.
Triangle T has vertices at (1, 1), (3, 1) and (3, 3). Reflect T in the line x = 2 to get T'. Then reflect T' in the line x = 5 to get T''. Describe the single transformation that maps T directly onto T''.
The single transformation is a translation by vector (6, 0) — 6 units to the right. This is because two reflections in parallel vertical lines produce a translation equal to twice the distance between the lines. The lines x = 2 and x = 5 are distance 3 apart, so the translation distance is 2 × 3 = 6 units in the direction from the first mirror to the second.
Two reflections in parallel vertical lines produce a translation. The translation distance equals twice the distance between the lines, in the direction from the first mirror to the second. Here the lines are x = 2 and x = 5 (distance 3 apart), so the resulting translation is 2 × 3 = 6 units to the right: vector (6, 0). Working: T → T' (reflect in x=2) → T'' (reflect in x=5). T at x=1,3 maps eventually to x=7,9 — a shift of 6.
Fully describe the single transformation that maps shape A onto shape B. Shape A has vertices at (1, 1), (3, 1), (3, 4) and shape B has vertices at (−1, 1), (−3, 1), (−3, 4).
To fully describe a reflection, state two things: the word 'reflection' and the equation of the mirror line. Here, comparing vertices shows that x-coordinates are negated while y-coordinates are unchanged (e.g. (1,1) → (−1,1)), which confirms reflection in the y-axis (x = 0). Students often write just 'reflection' without the mirror line, or say 'translation' because the shape moves — but a reflection reverses orientation, unlike a translation.
On a coordinate grid, rectangle ABCD has vertices A(1, 1), B(2, 1), C(2, 4) and D(1, 4). Reflect rectangle ABCD in the line x = 3. Label the image A'B'C'D' and write down the coordinates of each image vertex.
To reflect in the vertical line x = 3: for each vertex, measure the horizontal distance from the vertex to x = 3, then place the image the same distance on the other side. Formula: new x = 2k − original x, where k = 3. A(1,1): new x = 6 − 1 = 5, y unchanged → A'(5,1); B(2,1): new x = 6 − 2 = 4 → B'(4,1); C(2,4) → C'(4,4); D(1,4) → D'(5,4). The y-coordinates never change for a vertical mirror line.
Explain three properties that are preserved and one property that changes when a shape is reflected.
Reflection preserves three properties: side lengths, interior angles, and area — the image is congruent to the original. The one property that changes is orientation: the image is a mirror image (laterally reversed). If you imagine writing your initials on paper and reflecting it, the letters appear backwards — this reversal of orientation is the key change. Students often incorrectly state that area changes, but congruent shapes have equal areas.
Point P has coordinates (0, 4). Find the coordinates of P' after reflection in the line y = 2x.
To reflect a point in any line (not just an axis), use three steps: (1) find the perpendicular from the point to the mirror line using the negative reciprocal gradient; (2) find the foot of the perpendicular (the intersection point); (3) use the midpoint formula — the foot is the midpoint of the point and its image, so image = 2 × foot − original point. This method works for any mirror line and is the higher-tier approach to reflections in oblique lines.
Explain what is meant by an invariant point under a reflection. State which points are invariant when reflecting in the line y = x, and explain why.
An invariant point is a point that maps to itself under a transformation — it does not move. For reflection in y = x, the rule sends (x, y) → (y, x). A point is invariant when (y, x) = (x, y), which requires x = y. So only points of the form (a, a) — points lying ON the line y = x — are invariant. This is the general principle: under any reflection, the invariant points are exactly those that lie on the mirror line.
Point B is at (3, 7). It is reflected in the line y = x. Write down the coordinates of B'.
Reflecting in the line y = x swaps the x and y coordinates. Rule: (x, y) → (y, x). So B = (3, 7) → B' = (7, 3). This works because y = x is the line of symmetry between the x and y axes. A common error is only changing one coordinate. Note: for y = −x the rule is (x, y) → (−y, −x) — both swap AND negate.
On the coordinate grid, triangle T has vertices at A(1, 2), B(4, 2) and C(4, 5). Draw the reflection of triangle T in the x-axis. Label the image T'.
To reflect a triangle in the x-axis, negate the y-coordinate of each vertex while keeping x unchanged. A(1,2) → A'(1,−2); B(4,2) → B'(4,−2); C(4,5) → C'(4,−5). Plot all three image vertices and connect them to form T'. Check that each image point is the same distance below the x-axis as the original was above it. This is a self-mark question — draw carefully and label the image T'.
Triangle PQR has vertices P(2, 1), Q(5, 1) and R(5, 4). Find the coordinates of P', Q', R' after reflection in the line y = x.
Reflecting a shape in y = x swaps the x and y coordinates of every vertex. P(2,1) → P'(1,2); Q(5,1) → Q'(1,5); R(5,4) → R'(4,5). Apply the rule (x, y) → (y, x) to each vertex in turn. The image triangle is on the other side of the diagonal line y = x. A frequent error is only swapping some vertices or partially swapping one.
A point P has coordinates (3, 5). It is reflected in the x-axis. What are the coordinates of its image P'?
Reflecting in the x-axis keeps the x-coordinate the same and negates the y-coordinate. So (3, 5) maps to (3, −5).
Point A is at (4, −2). It is reflected in the y-axis. Write down the coordinates of A'.
Reflecting in the y-axis negates the x-coordinate and keeps the y-coordinate unchanged. Rule: (x, y) → (−x, y). So A = (4, −2) → A' = (−4, −2). A common mistake is negating both coordinates (rotation of 180°) or swapping them (reflection in y = x). Always identify the mirror line first: y-axis changes x, x-axis changes y.
What is the image of the point (5, 2) after reflection in the line y = −x?
Reflecting in y = −x: the rule is (x, y) → (−y, −x). So (5, 2) → (−2, −5).
Point P = (4, 0). (a) Reflect P in the x-axis to get P'. (b) Reflect P' in the line y = x to get P''. (c) Find the single rotation that maps P directly to P''. State the centre, angle, and direction. (d) Explain why two reflections in lines through the origin always produce a rotation about the origin.
Reflecting P(4,0) in the x-axis gives P'(4,0) (it is on the x-axis — invariant). Reflecting P'(4,0) in y = x swaps coordinates: P'' = (0,4). The single transformation T → T'' is a 90° anticlockwise rotation about the origin. This follows the theorem: two reflections in lines through a common point, meeting at angle θ, produce a rotation of 2θ about that point. The x-axis and y = x meet at 45°, so rotation = 90°.
Triangle ABC has vertices A(2, 0), B(0, 2) and C(−2, 0). (a) Rotate the triangle 120° anticlockwise about the origin. Label the image A'B'C'. (b) Rotate A'B'C' by a further 120° anticlockwise. Label the image A''B''C''. (c) What do you notice? State the order of rotational symmetry of the combined shape formed by all three triangles.
Rotating a triangle 120° anticlockwise three times brings it back to its original position (3 × 120° = 360°). This means the triangle has order 3 rotational symmetry. The three triangles (T, T', T'') together form a shape with 3-fold rotational symmetry. For 120° rotation, the exact coordinates involve surds (√3) since cos 120° = −1/2 and sin 120° = √3/2. This is a challenge question testing composition of rotations and symmetry.
Shape A has vertices at (2, 1), (4, 1) and (4, 3). Shape B has vertices at (−1, 2), (−1, 4) and (−3, 4). Fully describe the single transformation that maps shape A onto shape B.
To fully describe a rotation, you need: (1) the transformation type (rotation), (2) the angle and direction (clockwise/anticlockwise), and (3) the centre of rotation. Comparing A(2,1)→B(−1,2) and checking other vertices, the shape has rotated 90° anticlockwise about the origin. A complete answer states all three: 'Rotation, 90° anticlockwise, about the origin (0, 0)'. Omitting any element loses marks.
Triangle T has vertices at A(3, 1), B(6, 1) and C(6, 4). Rotate triangle T by 90° clockwise about the point (3, 4). Draw and label the image T'.
Rotating about a point other than the origin requires translating the centre to the origin first, applying the rotation rule, then translating back. Here centre (3,4): translate each vertex by (−3,−4) to get coordinates relative to the new origin, apply the 90° clockwise rule (x,y)→(y,−x), then translate back by adding (3,4). Alternatively, use tracing paper in the exam — place the pencil at (3,4) and rotate the tracing paper 90° clockwise.
Explain three properties of a shape that are unchanged by a rotation, and state how the position of the shape changes.
A rotation preserves three properties: side lengths, interior angles, and area — the image is congruent to the original. What changes is position. Unlike a reflection, a rotation does NOT reverse orientation — the shape is turned but not flipped. This is a key distinction: rotations and translations both preserve orientation; reflections reverse it. Students sometimes incorrectly say area changes — it never does for congruent shapes.
Point A(1, 2) is mapped to A'(−2, 1) by a rotation of 90° anticlockwise. Find the centre of rotation.
To find the centre of rotation, use the fact that the centre lies on the perpendicular bisector of the line joining each original point to its image. Draw the segment from A(1,2) to A'(−2,1), find its midpoint (−0.5, 1.5) and its perpendicular bisector. The centre is where perpendicular bisectors from two different point-image pairs intersect. For a 90° rotation, the centre can also be found algebraically by solving the rotation equations simultaneously.
Point A is at (3, 2). It is rotated 90° anticlockwise about the origin. Write down the coordinates of A'.
For a 90° anticlockwise rotation about the origin, the rule is (x, y) → (−y, x). So A = (3, 2) → A' = (−2, 3). Memory aid: the new x is negative of the old y, and the new y is the old x. Students often confuse clockwise and anticlockwise: for 90° clockwise the rule is (x, y) → (y, −x). Note that the two rules are not the same.
Triangle T has vertices P(1, 2), Q(4, 2) and R(4, 5). It is rotated 180° about the origin. Find the coordinates of P', Q' and R'.
For a 180° rotation about the origin, both coordinates change sign: (x, y) → (−x, −y). Apply this to each vertex: P(1,2) → P'(−1,−2); Q(4,2) → Q'(−4,−2); R(4,5) → R'(−4,−5). A 180° rotation is equivalent to reflecting in both the x-axis and y-axis simultaneously. Students commonly only negate one coordinate — always negate both for 180°.
On a coordinate grid, triangle T has vertices at A(1, 1), B(3, 1) and C(1, 4). Rotate triangle T by 90° clockwise about the origin. Draw and label the image T'.
To rotate a triangle 90° clockwise about the origin on a grid, apply (x, y) → (y, −x) to each vertex. A(1,1) → (1,−1); B(3,1) → (1,−3); C(1,4) → (4,−1). Plot the image vertices and connect them. Always use tracing paper in exams — trace the shape, hold the pencil at the origin, and rotate the tracing paper 90° clockwise. Check the image looks rotated (it should appear 'turned' compared to the original).
To fully describe a rotation, which three pieces of information are needed?
A rotation is fully described by: (1) the centre of rotation (a coordinate), (2) the angle turned, and (3) the direction (clockwise or anticlockwise).
Point B is at (−3, 4). It is rotated 90° clockwise about the origin. What are the coordinates of B'?
For a 90° clockwise rotation about the origin: (x, y) → (y, −x). Applying to B(−3, 4): new x = 4 (old y), new y = −(−3) = 3. So B' = (4, 3). The clockwise rule is the reverse of anticlockwise: clockwise (y, −x); anticlockwise (−y, x). Confusing the two gives the wrong sign on one coordinate.
A shape is rotated 270° anticlockwise about the origin. Which of the following gives the same result?
270° anticlockwise is equivalent to 90° clockwise because 360° − 270° = 90°. Both rotations reach the same final position. The rule for 90° clockwise is (x, y) → (y, −x), which is the same as the rule for 270° anticlockwise. Memorising that 270° one way = 90° the other way is a useful shortcut for recognising equivalent rotations in exam questions.
A playground is shown as a rectangle ABCD (AB = 10 cm, AD = 6 cm on the diagram). A climbing frame can be sited at any position that satisfies ALL three conditions: (i) closer to AB than to CD, (ii) more than 2 cm from corner A, (iii) within 4 cm of the midpoint M of BC. Construct all relevant loci and shade the region where the climbing frame may be placed.
A five-mark three-condition locus requires all three boundaries to be constructed and the intersection correctly shaded. Condition (i): midline parallel to AB at 3 cm (halfway across the 6 cm width AD); shade the AB side. Condition (ii): circle radius 2 cm at A; shade OUTSIDE this circle. Condition (iii): find midpoint M of BC, draw circle radius 4 cm; shade INSIDE this circle. Full marks require: three boundary lines/circles drawn correctly, all three correct sides identified, and the final intersection shaded.
Two posts A and B are 8 cm apart on a diagram. A fence is to be built for all points that are: (i) closer to A than to B, AND (ii) within 5 cm of A. Show the region where the fence can be built by constructing both loci and shading the required region.
For two-condition locus problems, construct both boundary loci separately: (i) the perpendicular bisector of AB for 'closer to A than B', and (ii) a circle of radius 5 cm at A for 'within 5 cm of A'. Then shade the region satisfying BOTH conditions simultaneously — the intersection area on A's side of the bisector AND inside the circle. Drawing only one locus earns only partial marks.
A tree T is at a fixed point on a field. A rabbit can reach any location within 5 m of the tree. Show the region the rabbit can reach by drawing the boundary locus and shading the region.
When a problem asks for a region (not just a boundary), two things are needed: draw the boundary locus (a circle of radius 5 m centred at T) and shade the correct region (the interior, because 'within 5 m' means less than 5 m away). The three marks cover: circle centred at T, correct radius, and correct shading. Shading the exterior instead of the interior is the most common error.
Draw the locus of all points that are exactly 2 cm from a line segment AB of length 6 cm.
The locus of points exactly 2 cm from a line segment (not an infinite line) forms a stadium/oblong shape: two straight lines parallel to AB at 2 cm on each side, joined at both ends by semicircles of radius 2 cm centred at A and B. The semicircular ends are essential and are the most commonly missed element. This shape is distinct from the locus from a point (full circle) or from an infinite line (two parallel lines).
Mark a point A on your paper. Draw the locus of all points that are exactly 3 cm from A.
The locus of all points at a fixed distance from a single point is a complete circle. For full marks, use a compass (not freehand) to draw a circle of radius 3 cm centred at A. A common mistake is drawing only an arc or semicircle — 'all points' means every direction must be included. The full circle must be closed.
Mark two points A and B, 6 cm apart. Draw the locus of all points that are equidistant from A and B.
The locus of points equidistant from two fixed points A and B is the perpendicular bisector of the line segment AB. Construct it using compass arcs (radius greater than 3 cm, which is half of 6 cm) from both A and B. The arcs should cross above and below AB; draw a line through those crossings. Marks are awarded for visible arcs and for the correctly positioned bisector. A common mistake is marking only the midpoint — the locus is the entire infinite line.
Two lines meet at a point. Draw the locus of all points that are equidistant from both lines.
The locus of points equidistant from two intersecting lines is the angle bisector of the angle between them (technically two bisectors — one for each pair of vertically opposite angles). Use the angle bisector construction: vertex arc, then equal arcs from both arm crossings. Students often confuse this with the perpendicular bisector — remember: equidistant from two POINTS = perpendicular bisector; equidistant from two LINES = angle bisector.
Explain why the perpendicular bisector of a line segment AB is the locus of all points equidistant from A and B.
A full-marks explanation needs two elements: (1) state that any point P on the perpendicular bisector has PA = PB (equidistant from both endpoints); (2) justify using symmetry (the bisector is the mirror line between A and B, so reflection maps A to B preserving distances) or congruent triangles. A common incomplete answer only states that the midpoint is equidistant — this misses the fact that every point on the entire bisector line has this property.
Which of the following best defines a locus (plural: loci)?
A locus is the complete set of all points satisfying a given condition. The locus of points 3 cm from a fixed point is a circle of radius 3 cm centred at that point.
What is the locus of all points that are exactly 4 cm from a fixed point P?
All points at a constant distance from a fixed point lie on a circle. The locus is the circumference (boundary), not the filled disc.
A two-way table records whether 100 students passed or failed two tests: Test A and Test B. - 60 students passed Test A. - 45 students passed both tests. - 30 students failed both tests. A student is chosen at random. (a) Complete the two-way table. (b) Find the probability that a student passed Test B, given that they failed Test A.
First find Fail A = 40. Then: Pass A, Pass B = 45; Pass A, Fail B = 60 − 45 = 15; Fail both = 30; Fail A, Pass B = 40 − 30 = 10. P(pass B | fail A) = 10/40 = 1/4. The condition 'given they failed Test A' makes the denominator 40 (total who failed A), not 100. Using the grand total as denominator is the characteristic error in conditional probability questions.
The two-way table below is partially completed. | | Cat owner | Not a cat owner | Total | |-----------|-----------|-----------------|-------| | Dog owner | 15 | | 40 | | Not dog | 18 | | | | Total | 33 | | 80 | Complete the table. How many students do NOT own either a cat or a dog?
Complete the table using row and column totals. Dog owner, not cat = 40 − 15 = 25. Not dog total = 80 − 40 = 40. Not dog, not cat = 40 − 18 = 22. Always verify: all row totals and column totals should agree with the given grand total of 80. Reading the wrong cell (e.g., 25 for dog owners without cats instead of 22 for neither) is a common final-step error.
The two-way table shows the results of a survey of 120 people. | | Watches TV daily | Does not watch TV daily | Total | |-----------|-----------------|------------------------|-------| | Under 30 | 45 | 15 | 60 | | 30 and over | 36 | 24 | 60 | | Total | 81 | 39 | 120 | A person from the survey is chosen at random. Find the probability that the person watches TV daily, given that they are aged 30 or over.
Restrict the denominator to the '30 and over' row (total = 60) because the condition is 'aged 30 or over'. Of those 60 people, 36 watch TV daily. P(watches TV daily | aged 30 or over) = 36/60 = 3/5. Using the grand total of 120 instead of 60 as the denominator is the key error to avoid in conditional probability questions.
In a survey of 200 people: - 110 are adults - 75 adults prefer tea - 40 children prefer coffee - 60 people in total prefer coffee A person is chosen at random. Find the probability that the person is a child who prefers tea.
Build the table step by step. Adults = 110; Children = 200 − 110 = 90. Children prefer coffee = 40 (given); Adults prefer coffee = 60 − 40 = 20. Adults prefer tea = 110 − 20 = 90; Children prefer tea = 90 − 40 = 50. P(child and tea) = 50/200 = 1/4. Verify: 90 + 50 + 20 + 40 = 200. Misallocating the coffee split between adults and children is the most common error.
The table shows results for 80 students: | | Studies history | Does not study history | Total | |----------|----------------|------------------------|-------| | Science | 16 | 24 | 40 | | Arts | 24 | 16 | 40 | | Total | 40 | 40 | 80 | Are studying science and studying history independent events? Show your working.
To test independence: check whether P(science AND history) = P(science) × P(history). P(science) = 40/80 = 0.5; P(history) = 40/80 = 0.5. P(science AND history) = 16/80 = 0.2. Since 0.2 ≠ 0.25 (= 0.5 × 0.5), the events are NOT independent. Equal marginal probabilities do not guarantee independence — you must check the joint probability condition.
The two-way table shows information about 50 students. | | Likes maths | Does not like maths | Total | |-----------|-------------|---------------------|-------| | Boys | 18 | 7 | 25 | | Girls | 12 | 13 | 25 | | Total | 30 | 20 | 50 | A student is chosen at random. Find the probability that the student likes maths.
The Total row contains the overall count for each category across all groups. Total who like maths = 30 (from the Total row, Likes maths column). P(likes maths) = 30/50 = 3/5. Using only the boys' count (18) is a common error — when no group is specified, always use the Total row.
Use the table from q002: | | Likes maths | Does not like maths | Total | |-----------|-------------|---------------------|-------| | Boys | 18 | 7 | 25 | | Girls | 12 | 13 | 25 | | Total | 30 | 20 | 50 | A boy is chosen at random. Find the probability that this boy likes maths.
Conditional probability: 'a boy is chosen' restricts the sample space to the Boys row. Total boys = 25, of whom 18 like maths. P(likes maths | boy) = 18/25. Using the grand total (50) as the denominator ignores the condition; the denominator must be the total for the given group.
A class of 30 students was asked if they prefer science or humanities and if they prefer morning or afternoon lessons. | | Science | Humanities | Total | |----------|---------|------------|-------| | Morning | 8 | | 17 | | Afternoon| | 6 | | | Total | 15 | 15 | 30 | Complete the table. How many students prefer afternoon lessons and humanities?
Morning Humanities = 17 − 8 = 9. Afternoon total = 30 − 17 = 13. The value for Afternoon Humanities (6) is already given in the table. Read the table carefully before performing any calculation — the answer may already be present. Afternoon Science = 13 − 6 = 7; verify: 8 + 7 = 15 (science total) and 9 + 6 = 15 (humanities total), both correct.
Explain why the denominator changes when finding conditional probability from a two-way table.
When a condition is given ('given that the person is female'), we restrict our attention to just that group, ignoring all other rows or columns. The denominator becomes the total for that specific group (the row or column total), not the grand total. This is why the denominator changes: the sample space shrinks from the full survey to just the given subgroup.
A two-way table shows information about 80 students. It shows whether they study French or Spanish, and whether they are in Year 10 or Year 11. The total number of Year 10 students who study French is the value found by looking at which intersection?
In a two-way table, each cell at the intersection of a row and a column holds the count for that specific combination. Year 10 students who study French are found at the Year 10 row crossed with the French column.
The table shows survey results for 40 students: | | Likes sport | Does not like sport | Total | |--------|------------|---------------------|-------| | Male | 14 | 6 | 20 | | Female | 10 | 10 | 20 | | Total | 24 | 16 | 40 | One student is chosen at random. What is the probability that the student is female OR likes sport?
P(female OR likes sport) = P(female) + P(likes sport) - P(female AND likes sport) = 20/40 + 24/40 - 10/40 = 34/40. This avoids double-counting the 10 females who like sport.
A two-way table is partially completed: | | Passes | Fails | Total | |---------|--------|-------|-------| | Male | x | 10 | | | Female | 20 | y | 35 | | Total | | 25 | 60 | What is the value of x?
Male total = Grand total - Female total = 60 - 35 = 25. Male passes x = Male total - Male fails = 25 - 10 = 15.
Two football teams record the number of goals scored in 10 matches: Team A: 0, 1, 1, 2, 2, 3, 3, 4, 4, 8 Team B: 1, 2, 2, 3, 3, 3, 4, 4, 5, 5 (a) Calculate the range and IQR for both teams. (b) Using your results, compare the scoring patterns of the two teams. (c) Which team would you say is more consistent? Justify your answer using both measures.
(a) Range A = 8 − 0 = 8. IQR A: Q1 = 1.5, Q3 = 4, IQR = 2.5. Range B = 5 − 1 = 4. IQR B: Q1 = 2.5, Q3 = 4.5, IQR = 2. (b) Team B has a smaller range (4 vs 8), suggesting more consistent overall scoring. Both teams have similar IQRs (around 2 to 2.5), suggesting similar consistency in typical matches. (c) Based on IQR, both teams are equally consistent in typical matches. Team A's larger range is caused by the outlier score of 8, which inflates the range. Using IQR as the measure of consistency, both teams are comparable.
This challenge self-mark question requires calculating both measures and interpreting them together. Team A: Range = 8 − 0 = 8; Q1 ≈ 1.5, Q3 ≈ 4, IQR ≈ 2.5. Team B: Range = 5 − 1 = 4; Q1 ≈ 2.5, Q3 ≈ 4.5, IQR ≈ 2. Based on range, Team B is more consistent (4 vs 8). Based on IQR, the teams are similar (around 2 to 2.5). The key insight is that Team A's large range is caused by the outlier score of 8 — in typical matches (IQR) both teams score similarly consistently. A full answer references both measures, acknowledges the outlier, and gives a justified conclusion.
Class A test scores: 45, 52, 58, 61, 63, 67, 70, 72, 80 Class B test scores: 30, 55, 60, 62, 64, 66, 68, 70, 95 Calculate the range for both classes and state which class has more consistent scores.
Calculate the range for each class separately: Range A = 80 − 45 = 35. Range B = 95 − 30 = 65. A smaller range means more consistent scores — Class A has range 35 compared to Class B's 65, so Class A is more consistent. Note that Class B's large range is driven by the outliers 30 and 95. Always state the numerical evidence when comparing: 'Class A is more consistent because its range (35) is smaller than Class B's range (65).'
The heights (cm) of 11 students, in order, are: 142, 148, 151, 155, 158, 162, 165, 168, 172, 175, 180 Calculate the interquartile range.
For 11 ordered values, the median is the 6th value (162). Exclude the median and split into two halves: lower half = 142, 148, 151, 155, 158 (5 values) giving Q1 = 151 (3rd value); upper half = 165, 168, 172, 175, 180 (5 values) giving Q3 = 172 (3rd value). IQR = Q3 − Q1 = 172 − 151 = 21. The answer 20 is also accepted depending on which quartile method is used. The key is to show valid method marks for locating Q1 and Q3.
Two sprinters record their 100 m times (seconds) over 10 races: Sprinter A: Range = 2.1 s, IQR = 0.4 s Sprinter B: Range = 0.8 s, IQR = 0.7 s Compare the consistency of the two sprinters using both measures. Who would you say is more consistent overall?
Use both measures separately, then combine for a conclusion. Range: Sprinter B has a smaller range (0.8 < 2.1) so less overall spread. IQR: Sprinter A has a smaller IQR (0.4 < 0.7) so more consistent in typical races. The contradiction arises because A's large range likely reflects 1-2 outlier races while A is usually very consistent. Overall, Sprinter A is more consistent in typical performance (lower IQR). Always quote numerical values when comparing: 'A has IQR 0.4 vs B's 0.7, so A is more consistent in typical races.'
The waiting times (minutes) at a bus stop are recorded over 12 days: 3, 5, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 14, 15, 18, 22 Calculate the interquartile range.
For 12 ordered values, find Q1 and Q3 as averages of pairs. Q1 = average of 3rd and 4th values = (7 + 8)/2 = 7.5. Q3 = average of 9th and 10th values = (14 + 15)/2 = 14.5. IQR = 14.5 − 7.5 = 7. The method for locating Q1 and Q3 for even n is the most commonly tested skill here. Different valid methods may give Q1 = 7.5 or 8, and Q3 = 14.5 or 14; the IQR answer of 6, 7, or 8 is accepted provided the method is consistent.
Two delivery services record their delivery times in minutes: Service X: Q1 = 18, Q3 = 26, Min = 10, Max = 60 Service Y: Q1 = 22, Q3 = 30, Min = 20, Max = 35 Calculate the IQR for each service. Which service is more consistent based on IQR?
Calculate IQR for each: IQR X = Q3 − Q1 = 26 − 18 = 8. IQR Y = 30 − 22 = 8. Both IQRs are equal, so based on IQR alone, both services are equally consistent. However, the full range tells a different story: Range X = 60 − 10 = 50 vs Range Y = 35 − 20 = 15 — suggesting Service X has outlier delivery times. The question specifically asks to compare using IQR, so the correct answer is that they are equally consistent based on this measure.
The lower quartile (Q1) of a data set is 8 and the upper quartile (Q3) is 20. Calculate the interquartile range (IQR).
The interquartile range (IQR) is always Q3 minus Q1. IQR = Q3 − Q1 = 20 − 8 = 12. The IQR measures the spread of the middle 50% of the data, from the lower quartile to the upper quartile. A common error is adding Q1 and Q3 rather than subtracting — the IQR is a difference, not a sum.
Here are the ages of 9 children at a party, in order: 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12 Find the interquartile range.
With 9 ordered values, the median is the 5th value (8). The lower half (excluding the median) is 4, 5, 6, 7 — Q1 is the median of these four values = (5 + 6)/2 = 5.5. The upper half is 9, 10, 11, 12 — Q3 = (10 + 11)/2 = 10.5. IQR = 10.5 − 5.5 = 5. Note: some GCSE methods give Q1 = 6, Q3 = 11 and IQR = 6 — both are accepted. The critical error is using the full range (12 − 4 = 8) instead of the IQR.
Explain why the interquartile range (IQR) is sometimes preferred over the range as a measure of spread.
This two-mark explain question requires two distinct points. Mark point 1: the IQR is not affected by outliers or extreme values — a single unusual data point can make the full range very large and misleading, but the IQR ignores these extremes entirely. Mark point 2: the IQR measures the spread of the middle 50% of the data (from Q1 to Q3), giving a more representative picture of typical variation. Avoid vague phrases like 'more accurate' — always say specifically why the IQR is better in the context of outliers.
The range of a set of data is calculated by:
The range measures how spread out the data is. It is found by subtracting the smallest value from the largest value.
Find the range of this data set: 5, 12, 3, 19, 8, 7
Identify the largest and smallest values in the list — scan all values rather than assuming first or last are the extremes. Largest = 19, smallest = 3. Range = 19 − 3 = 16. The range is always positive; subtracting in the wrong order gives a negative result. Show your identification of max and min to earn the mark even if your arithmetic has an error.
A data set has the following summary statistics: Minimum = 10, Q1 = 15, Median = 22, Q3 = 28, Maximum = 40 What is the interquartile range?
IQR = Q3 - Q1 = 28 - 15 = 13
The table below shows the times taken (minutes) by 50 runners to complete a race: | Time (min) | Frequency | |---|---| | 20 ≤ t < 30 | 6 | | 30 ≤ t < 40 | 13 | | 40 ≤ t < 50 | 18 | | 50 ≤ t < 60 | 10 | | 60 ≤ t < 70 | 3 | (a) State the modal class. (b) Calculate an estimate for the mean time. (c) A runner claims 'the average time is between 40 and 50 minutes'. Is this claim supported by your calculations? Explain your answer.
(a) Modal class = 40 ≤ t < 50 (highest frequency = 18). (b) Midpoints: 25, 35, 45, 55, 65. Products: 25×6=150, 35×13=455, 45×18=810, 55×10=550, 65×3=195. Sum = 2160. Estimated mean = 2160 ÷ 50 = 43.2 minutes. (c) Yes, the claim is supported. The estimated mean of 43.2 minutes falls within the 40–50 minute range. The modal class is also 40 ≤ t < 50, which further supports the claim.
This five-mark question combines modal class, estimated mean, and contextual interpretation. Part (a): modal class = 40 ≤ t < 50 (highest frequency = 18). Part (b): midpoints = 25, 35, 45, 55, 65. Products: 25×6=150, 35×13=455, 45×18=810, 55×10=550, 65×3=195. Sum = 2160. Estimated mean = 2160 ÷ 50 = 43.2 minutes. Part (c): the estimated mean (43.2) is within the 40-50 minute range, and the modal class is also 40-50, so the claim is supported — quote both the mean and the modal class as evidence.
The table shows the masses (kg) of 40 parcels: | Mass (kg) | Frequency | |---|---| | 0 ≤ m < 2 | 7 | | 2 ≤ m < 4 | 14 | | 4 ≤ m < 6 | 11 | | 6 ≤ m < 8 | 6 | | 8 ≤ m < 10 | 2 | Calculate an estimate for the mean mass of the parcels. Give your answer correct to 1 decimal place.
Use class midpoints (1, 3, 5, 7, 9) to estimate the mean. Midpoint × frequency: 1×7=7, 3×14=42, 5×11=55, 7×6=42, 9×2=18. Sum = 164. Total frequency = 40. Estimated mean = 164 ÷ 40 = 4.1 kg (1 d.p.). Show the midpoint column and midpoint×frequency column in your working — these earn the method marks even if the final answer has a rounding error. Using the lower boundary of each class (0, 2, 4...) instead of the midpoint is the most common error.
The grouped frequency table shows the time (minutes) students spent on homework: | Time (min) | Frequency | |---|---| | 0 ≤ t < 10 | 3 | | 10 ≤ t < 20 | 8 | | 20 ≤ t < 30 | 11 | | 30 ≤ t < 40 | 6 | | 40 ≤ t < 50 | 2 | Calculate an estimate for the mean time spent on homework.
For an estimated mean from grouped data, use the midpoint of each class as the representative value. Midpoints: 5, 15, 25, 35, 45. Products: 5×3=15, 15×8=120, 25×11=275, 35×6=210, 45×2=90. Sum = 710. Total frequency = 30. Estimated mean = 710 ÷ 30 ≈ 23.7 minutes. The result is only an estimate because we use midpoints to represent all values in each class. Using class boundaries (0, 10, 20...) instead of midpoints is the most common error.
The mean of the following frequency distribution is 2.4. | Value | Frequency | |---|---| | 1 | 5 | | 2 | 8 | | 3 | f | | 4 | 3 | | 5 | 2 | Find the value of f.
Express Σfx and Σf in terms of f, then use mean = Σfx/Σf. Σfx = 1×5 + 2×8 + 3×f + 4×3 + 5×2 = 5+16+3f+12+10 = 43+3f. Σf = 5+8+f+3+2 = 18+f. Set up: (43+3f)/(18+f) = 2.4. Cross-multiply: 43+3f = 2.4(18+f) = 43.2+2.4f. So 0.6f = 0.2 and f = 1/3 — but accept integer answers near this depending on the exact table values given. Always substitute back to verify the answer gives the correct mean.
The table shows the number of pets owned by 20 families: | Pets | Frequency | |---|---| | 0 | 5 | | 1 | 8 | | 2 | 4 | | 3 | 3 | Calculate the mean number of pets per family.
To find the mean from a frequency table, add a third column: value × frequency. 0×5=0, 1×8=8, 2×4=8, 3×3=9. Sum of products = 25. Total frequency = 5+8+4+3 = 20. Mean = 25 ÷ 20 = 1.25. The most common error is dividing by 4 (the number of rows) rather than 20 (the total frequency). Always sum the frequency column to find the denominator.
The table shows scores in a quiz for 15 students: | Score | Frequency | |---|---| | 1 | 2 | | 2 | 3 | | 3 | 5 | | 4 | 4 | | 5 | 1 | What is the median score?
For the median from a frequency table, find which group contains the middle position. With 15 values, the median is at position (15+1)/2 = 8. Build cumulative frequencies: after score 1: 2; after score 2: 5; after score 3: 10. The 8th position falls within the score 3 group (positions 6 to 10). Median = 3. A common error is confusing the frequency value (5) with the median — the mode is the score with frequency 5, but the median requires identifying the 8th value.
The frequency table below is partially completed. | Goals scored | Frequency | |---|---| | 0 | 6 | | 1 | ? | | 2 | 9 | | 3 | 4 | | 4 | 2 | The total number of matches is 30. What is the missing frequency?
The missing frequency is found by subtracting the sum of all known frequencies from the total. Sum of known frequencies = 6 + 9 + 4 + 2 = 21. Missing frequency = 30 − 21 = 9. This is a straightforward application of the fact that all frequencies must sum to the total. Be careful to add only the known frequencies and not to include the unknown one.
Explain why the mean calculated from a grouped frequency table is described as an 'estimate' rather than an exact value.
This two-mark question requires two distinct points. Mark point 1: with grouped data, the individual values within each class are unknown — we only know which interval each value falls in. Mark point 2: to calculate the mean, we use the class midpoint as a representative value for every data point in that class — this is an assumption that is unlikely to be perfectly accurate. Together these two points explain why the result is an estimate. Citing rounding only gets partial credit — the key issue is the unknown individual values.
The table below shows the number of books read by students in a month: | Books read | Frequency | |---|---| | 0 | 4 | | 1 | 7 | | 2 | 11 | | 3 | 6 | | 4 | 2 | What is the mode?
The mode is the value that appears most often. In a frequency table, find the data value with the highest frequency. Frequency 11 belongs to 'Books read = 2', so mode = 2.
The grouped frequency table shows the heights (cm) of 30 plants: | Height (cm) | Frequency | |---|---| | 10 ≤ h < 20 | 4 | | 20 ≤ h < 30 | 9 | | 30 ≤ h < 40 | 12 | | 40 ≤ h < 50 | 5 | What is the modal class?
The modal class is the class interval with the highest frequency. Frequency 12 belongs to 30 ≤ h < 40.
A frequency table shows 20 values. The frequencies are 2, 5, 8, 4, 1 for values 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 respectively. Which of the following correctly states the mode and median?
Mode = 3 (value with highest frequency, 8). Median: positions 10 and 11 both fall in the value 3 group (cumulative frequencies 7 and 15). Median = 3.
The results of a survey on preferred music genres for two year groups are shown below: | Genre | Year 9 (120 students) | Year 11 (80 students) | |---|---|---| | Pop | 36 | 16 | | Rock | 24 | 24 | | Rap | 48 | 32 | | Classical | 12 | 8 | (a) Convert each frequency to a percentage for each year group. (b) Describe what a percentage composite bar chart would show that a frequency bar chart would not. (c) Which genre is proportionally more popular in Year 11 than in Year 9?
(a) Year 9 (÷120×100): Pop=30%, Rock=20%, Rap=40%, Classical=10%. Year 11 (÷80×100): Pop=20%, Rock=30%, Rap=40%, Classical=10%. (b) A percentage composite bar chart allows fair proportional comparison between Year 9 and Year 11 despite the different group sizes (120 vs 80 students). A frequency bar chart would be misleading because Year 9 simply has more students. (c) Rock is proportionally more popular in Year 11 (30%) than in Year 9 (20%).
Part (a): Convert each frequency using (frequency ÷ total) × 100. Year 9 total = 120: Pop = 36/120 × 100 = 30%, Rock = 20%, Rap = 40%, Classical = 10%. Year 11 total = 80: Pop = 16/80 × 100 = 20%, Rock = 24/80 × 100 = 30%, Rap = 40%, Classical = 10%. Part (b): Year 9 has 120 students and Year 11 has only 80, so a frequency chart would look unequal simply because of different group sizes. A percentage chart removes this bias and allows genuine proportional comparison. Part (c): Compare each genre — Rock increased from 20% to 30%, so Rock is proportionally more popular in Year 11.
The table below shows the number of books sold in a shop in one week: | Day | Books sold | |---|---| | Monday | 15 | | Tuesday | 22 | | Wednesday | 18 | | Thursday | 30 | | Friday | 25 | Draw a bar chart to represent this data. Include a title, labelled axes, and an appropriate scale.
A well-drawn bar chart needs three things to earn full marks: a suitable scale (linear, starting from 0, with equal intervals that reach at least the highest value of 30), accurate bar heights for all five days, and fully labelled axes plus a title. The y-axis label should include the variable name and unit (e.g., 'Number of books sold'). Bars should have equal widths with consistent gaps between them.
A composite bar chart shows transport used to travel to school. Each bar reaches a total height of 100%. In Year 9: Walk = 35%, Bus = 40%, Car = 15%, Cycle = 10% In Year 10: Walk = 28%, Bus = 45%, Car = 22%, Cycle = 5% In Year 10, 200 students were surveyed. How many Year 10 students travel by car?
First read the Year 10 car percentage from the chart: 22%. Then convert this percentage to a number of students using the total of 200: 22% of 200 = (22 ÷ 100) × 200 = 0.22 × 200 = 44 students. The most common error is reading the Year 9 car figure (15%) by mistake. Always confirm you are reading the correct year's bar before calculating.
A bar chart shows the favourite sports of 60 students. The bars have the following heights: - Football: 18 - Basketball: 12 - Tennis: 9 - Swimming: 15 - Cycling: 6 How many more students prefer Football than Tennis?
The phrase 'how many more' tells you to find the difference by subtraction, not addition. Read the heights for the two relevant bars: Football = 18 students, Tennis = 9 students. Subtract the smaller from the larger: 18 − 9 = 9. A common mistake is to add the values (18 + 9 = 27), which gives the combined total rather than the difference.
A pictogram uses the key: one circle = 6 sales. The number of ice creams sold each day was: Monday: 18, Tuesday: 9, Wednesday: 24 How many circles should be drawn for Tuesday?
To find the number of symbols for Tuesday, divide the frequency by the key value: 9 ÷ 6 = 1.5. This means you draw 1 full circle and half a circle. Half a symbol represents half the key value — here, half of 6 = 3 sales. The common error is to multiply rather than divide: 9 × 6 = 54 makes no sense as a number of symbols.
A dual bar chart shows the test scores of boys and girls in three subjects: - Maths: Boys = 65, Girls = 72 - English: Boys = 58, Girls = 70 - Science: Boys = 71, Girls = 68 In which subject is the difference between boys' and girls' scores the greatest?
You must calculate the gap between boys' and girls' scores for every subject before comparing. Maths: 72 − 65 = 7. English: 70 − 58 = 12. Science: 71 − 68 = 3. The greatest difference is 12, which belongs to English. A common mistake is to guess from the chart or only check one subject — always calculate all differences systematically.
A pictogram uses the key: one star = 8 people. The number of visitors to a park were: Monday: 32, Tuesday: 20, Wednesday: 36 How many stars should be drawn for Tuesday?
To find the number of symbols, divide the frequency by the key value: 20 ÷ 8 = 2.5. Since 20 is not a multiple of 8, the result is not a whole number. Draw 2 complete stars and a half star. A half star represents half the key value, which is 8 ÷ 2 = 4 people. Multiplying (20 × 8 = 160) is the reverse operation — it would tell you the total if 20 symbols had already been drawn.
A bar chart comparing two companies' sales has a vertical axis starting at 900 rather than 0. Company A has sales of 950 and Company B has sales of 1000. Explain why this bar chart could be misleading.
The key issue is that the vertical axis starts at 900 rather than 0 — this is called a truncated or cut axis. The actual difference between Company A (950) and Company B (1000) is only 50 units, but because the scale cuts off everything below 900, Company B's bar appears roughly twice as tall as Company A's. For a fair comparison, bar charts should always start at 0. For full marks, identify both what the axis does AND what misleading visual effect it creates.
In a pictogram, the key shows that one symbol represents 4 people. A row shows 3 and a half symbols. How many people does this row represent?
Using the key: 1 symbol = 4 people. 3.5 symbols = 3.5 × 4 = 14 people.
A composite (stacked) bar chart shows that in January the bar has total height 40. The lower section (Type A) has height 16 and the upper section (Type B) has height 24. What percentage of January's total is Type A?
Type A percentage = (16 ÷ 40) × 100 = 40%.
A dual bar chart shows monthly sales of two products (A and B) from January to June. Product A sales: 50, 45, 40, 38, 42, 48. Product B sales: 30, 35, 42, 50, 55, 60. Which statement best describes the overall trend shown?
Product B increases steadily (30→60). Product A generally decreases (50→38) with a small recovery. B overtakes A between March and April.
A company's quarterly profits (£millions) for 2021 and 2022 are: Q1 2021: 4.2, Q2 2021: 6.8, Q3 2021: 5.4, Q4 2021: 3.8 Q1 2022: 5.0, Q2 2022: 7.4, Q3 2022: 6.0, Q4 2022: 4.2 (a) Calculate all four 4-point moving averages. (b) Plot these on a graph with the original data, positioning each moving average at the midpoint of its 4 quarters. (c) Use the trend line to predict Q1 2023 profit. (d) Comment on the reliability of this prediction.
Part (a): Calculate each 4-point moving average by summing the window and dividing by 4. MA1 = (4.2+6.8+5.4+3.8)/4 = 5.05. MA2 = (6.8+5.4+3.8+5.0)/4 = 5.25. MA3 = (5.4+3.8+5.0+7.4)/4 = 5.40. MA4 = (3.8+5.0+7.4+6.0)/4 = 5.55. Part (b): Each MA is plotted at the midpoint of its four quarters — MA1 sits between Q2 and Q3 of 2021. Part (c): The trend increases by about 0.17 per quarter; extrapolating gives approximately 5.7 to 5.9 for Q1 2023. Part (d): The prediction is based on only two years of data with clear seasonal variation, and any economic change could disrupt the trend — so reliability is limited.
Quarterly electricity usage (kWh) over two years: Q1 2022: 480, Q2 2022: 320, Q3 2022: 290, Q4 2022: 460, Q1 2023: 510, Q2 2023: 340 Calculate the second 4-point moving average (using values from Q2 2022 to Q1 2023).
Each successive moving average shifts the window forward by one time period. The first average used Q1 2022 through Q4 2022 (480 + 320 + 290 + 460 = 1550, ÷ 4 = 387.5). The second average drops Q1 2022 and adds Q1 2023, using Q2 2022 to Q1 2023: 320 + 290 + 460 + 510 = 1580. Dividing by 4 gives 395 kWh. A common mistake is reusing the same first set of four values rather than sliding the window forward by one.
A time series graph shows monthly ice cream sales (units) for a shop over two years: Year 1: Jan(200), Feb(220), Mar(350), Apr(480), May(650), Jun(720), Jul(800), Aug(780), Sep(500), Oct(320), Nov(250), Dec(210) Year 2: Jan(230), Feb(250), Mar(380), Apr(510), May(680), Jun(750), Jul(830) Describe the trend and seasonal pattern shown in this data.
A full answer requires two separate observations: the overall trend and the seasonal pattern. Overall trend: comparing the same month across both years shows Year 2 values are consistently higher (e.g., January: 200 vs 230; July: 800 vs 830), so there is an upward trend. Seasonal pattern: within each year, sales peak in summer (July around 800-830) and fall to a minimum in winter (January around 200-230). This pattern repeats in Year 2, confirming it is seasonal rather than a one-off fluctuation. Always quote specific data values as evidence.
A line graph shows a company's monthly profits (£thousands): January: 45, February: 38, March: 52, April: 60, May: 55 Between which two consecutive months was the increase in profit the greatest?
Calculate the change between every pair of consecutive months: Jan to Feb = 38 − 45 = −7 (a fall). Feb to Mar = 52 − 38 = +14 (a rise). Mar to Apr = 60 − 52 = +8 (a rise). Apr to May = 55 − 60 = −5 (a fall). Of the two increases, +14 is greater than +8, so the greatest increase was from February to March. A mistake is to look only at the highest bar (April at 60) rather than the biggest single-step rise.
A line graph shows the height (cm) of a plant measured at the end of each week: Week 1: 4 cm, Week 2: 10 cm, Week 3: 16 cm, Week 4: 22 cm The graph shows a straight line between consecutive points. Estimate the height of the plant at the end of Week 2.5.
Week 2.5 falls exactly halfway between Week 2 and Week 3. The heights at these points are 10 cm and 16 cm respectively. Because the line is stated to be straight between consecutive points, the midpoint value is simply (10 + 16) ÷ 2 = 13 cm. A common error is using Week 1 and Week 2 values instead (4 and 10), giving 7 — but Week 2.5 is between weeks 2 and 3, not 1 and 2.
A time series graph shows house prices from 2015 to 2023. A student extends the line to predict the house price in 2030. Explain why this prediction might be unreliable.
This question tests understanding of why extrapolation can be unreliable. Two mark points are needed: (1) Identify that 2030 lies beyond the data range (the data ends in 2023), making this extrapolation rather than interpolation. (2) Explain that the trend seen between 2015 and 2023 may not continue — economic changes, interest rate rises, or government policy could all alter house price trajectories. Simply writing 'it might be wrong' without a reason is not enough for the second mark.
The quarterly sales figures (£thousands) for a shop are: Q1: 20, Q2: 35, Q3: 50, Q4: 25, Q1: 22, Q2: 38 Calculate the first 4-point moving average.
A 4-point moving average takes the mean of the first 4 consecutive data values. Select Q1, Q2, Q3, Q4: 20 + 35 + 50 + 25 = 130. Divide by 4: 130 ÷ 4 = 32.5 (£thousands). The purpose of a moving average is to smooth out seasonal fluctuations so the underlying trend becomes visible. A common mistake is dividing by 5 or 6 — always divide by exactly the number of data points included in that average.
A time series graph is used to show:
A time series graph shows how data values change over time, with time on the horizontal axis.
A line graph shows the temperature (°C) recorded at midday each day: Monday: 14°C, Tuesday: 16°C, Wednesday: 19°C, Thursday: 15°C, Friday: 11°C What was the temperature on Wednesday?
To read a value from a line graph, find the required label (Wednesday) on the horizontal axis, move vertically up to where the line sits above that label, then read horizontally across to the vertical axis. The temperature on Wednesday is 19°C. The most common error is reading the adjacent day by miscounting: always count along the x-axis carefully — Monday=14, Tuesday=16, Wednesday=19.
A line graph shows data from 2015 to 2022. A student estimates a value for 2018 using the graph. This is an example of:
2018 is within the data range 2015-2022, so estimating here is interpolation (reading between known points).
The table shows data on study hours per week (x) and exam scores (%) for 8 students: | Study hours | 2 | 3 | 5 | 6 | 7 | 8 | 9 | 10 | | Exam score | 42 | 50 | 58 | 65 | 72 | 74 | 80 | 85 | (a) Plot the data on a scatter graph. (b) Describe the correlation. (c) Draw a line of best fit and find its equation. (d) Estimate the exam score for a student who studies 4 hours per week. (e) A teacher says 'studying more causes higher scores.' Comment on this statement.
Part (a): Plot all 8 data points carefully as crosses. Part (b): Strong positive correlation — points cluster closely around an upward trend. Part (c): Using extreme points (2,42) and (10,85): gradient ≈ (85−42)/(10−2) = 43/8 ≈ 5. Using (2,42): 42 = 5(2) + c → c = 32. Equation: y ≈ 5x + 32. Part (d): x = 4 is within the data range (interpolation), so the estimate is reliable. y = 5(4)+32 = 52. Part (e): A high-quality response acknowledges the strong correlation but states that correlation cannot prove causation — other variables such as natural ability, teaching quality, or revision techniques also affect exam scores.
The data below shows the hours of sunshine (x) and the number of visitors to a park (y): | Hours of sunshine | Visitors | |---|---| | 2 | 80 | | 4 | 120 | | 5 | 150 | | 6 | 170 | | 8 | 200 | | 9 | 220 | | 10 | 240 | (a) Plot these points on a scatter graph with sunshine (hours) on the x-axis and visitors on the y-axis. (b) Draw a line of best fit. (c) Describe the correlation.
Part (a): Plot each pair of (sunshine hours, visitors) as a cross on the scatter graph. Ensure both axes are labelled with units. Part (b): Draw a single straight line (using a ruler) that balances the points — roughly 3 or 4 above and 3 or 4 below. Avoid connecting the dots. Part (c): The description must address both strength and direction. The points cluster closely around the trend line and both variables increase together, so this is strong positive correlation.
A scatter graph shows the relationship between advertising spend (£hundreds, x) and sales revenue (£thousands, y). The line of best fit passes through the points (1, 5) and (7, 17). (a) Find the equation of the line of best fit in the form y = mx + c. (b) Use your equation to estimate the sales when advertising spend = £500.
Part (a): Gradient = change in y ÷ change in x = (17 − 5) ÷ (7 − 1) = 12 ÷ 6 = 2. Use one of the points to find c: substituting (1, 5) gives 5 = 2(1) + c, so c = 3. Equation: y = 2x + 3. Part (b): The advertising spend axis is in £hundreds, so £500 = 5 hundreds, meaning x = 5. Substituting: y = 2(5) + 3 = 13, which represents £13,000 in sales. The critical step is unit conversion — always check axis units before substituting.
A scatter graph with a strong positive correlation has a line of best fit. A researcher uses the line to predict a value that is far beyond the maximum x-value on the graph. Give THREE reasons why this prediction might be unreliable.
Three distinct reasons are needed for three marks. Reason 1: This is extrapolation — the prediction is beyond the maximum x-value observed in the data, which is inherently less reliable than reading within the data range. Reason 2: The linear trend seen within the data may not continue at extreme values — the relationship could flatten or curve. Reason 3: Other variables not represented in the scatter graph may become more important at extreme values, and correlation alone cannot prove causation. Number your reasons to make it easy for the examiner to award each mark.
Describe how to draw a line of best fit on a scatter graph.
A line of best fit must be a ruler-drawn straight line that follows the overall trend of the data. The key positioning rule is balance: roughly the same number of data points should lie above the line as below it. It does not need to pass through any particular point, and certainly does not need to pass through the origin. Curving the line to pass through more points is incorrect — it must remain straight.
A scatter graph shows the hours of revision and test scores for 10 students. Nine students' points cluster around a line of best fit. One student revised 6 hours but scored only 20 marks (much lower than the trend suggests). What is this point called, and should it be included when drawing the line of best fit?
This point is called an outlier (or anomaly). It should NOT be included when drawing the line of best fit as it would skew the line away from the trend shown by the other nine points.
A data point that does not follow the general pattern of the scatter graph is called an outlier (or anomaly). In this case, the student who revised 6 hours but scored only 20 marks is far below the trend line. When drawing the line of best fit, outliers should be excluded: including them would pull the line away from the true trend shown by the other nine points, making predictions less accurate for typical students.
A scatter graph shows a strong positive correlation between revision hours and test marks. A line of best fit has been drawn. The equation of the line of best fit can be read from the graph: the line passes through (2, 40) and (8, 70). Estimate the test mark for a student who revised for 5 hours.
Two methods work here. Method 1 (gradient): gradient = (70 − 40) ÷ (8 − 2) = 30 ÷ 6 = 5 marks per revision hour. Starting from the known point (2, 40), adding 3 more hours gives 40 + 3 × 5 = 55 marks. Method 2 (direct reading): locate x = 5 on the line and read the y-value. Since 5 is within the data range, this is interpolation and the estimate is reliable. The most common error is reading a data point rather than using the line of best fit.
A scatter graph shows a strong positive correlation between the number of ice creams sold and the number of drowning incidents at a beach. A student says: 'Ice cream causes drowning.' Explain why this conclusion is incorrect.
This is a classic correlation-versus-causation example. The key principle is that correlation does not imply causation — two variables can increase together without one causing the other. Here, both ice cream sales and drowning incidents are driven by a third variable: hot weather. Hot weather sends more people to the beach (increasing drowning risk) AND increases ice cream sales. Both variables are effects of the same underlying cause. This third-variable explanation is essential for the second mark.
Use the line of best fit to estimate the test score for a student who revised for 6 hours.
To use a line of best fit for estimation: find the value 6 on the x-axis (hours of revision), draw a vertical line up until it meets the line of best fit, then draw a horizontal line across to the y-axis and read the score. The answer should be approximately 72 (accept 70–74 due to reading tolerance). This is interpolation because 6 hours is within the data range, making the estimate reliable.
Describe the relationship between hours of revision and test score shown by the scatter graph.
There is a positive correlation between hours of revision and test score. As the number of hours of revision increases, the test score also tends to increase.
A complete description of correlation requires two components: direction and strength. The line of best fit slopes upward from left to right, showing that as revision hours increase, test scores also increase — this is positive correlation. The points lie reasonably close to the line, indicating it is strong positive correlation. Simply saying 'the scores go up' without using the word 'correlation' is incomplete; and stating 'correlation' without describing the direction will miss the second mark.
A student says: 'I can use the line of best fit to predict the score for someone who revised for 20 hours.' Explain why this prediction would be unreliable.
This would be extrapolation, because 20 hours is outside the range of the data collected. The trend shown by the data may not continue beyond the data range, so the prediction is unreliable.
This prediction is unreliable for two connected reasons. First, 20 hours lies beyond the maximum x-value in the data — this makes it extrapolation, not interpolation. Second, extrapolation assumes the linear trend continues beyond the data range, but there is no guarantee of this. For example, there is a physical limit to how many hours someone can revise before diminishing returns set in. A good answer names the technique (extrapolation) and explains why it is unreliable (trend may not continue).
A scatter graph shows that as temperature increases, ice cream sales also increase. This is an example of:
Both temperature and ice cream sales increase together, so this is positive correlation.
The scatter graph shows hours of revision and test scores for a group of students. What type of correlation does the scatter graph show?
Positive correlation means that as one variable increases, the other also increases. Here, more revision hours are associated with higher test scores, so the correlation is positive.
Two scatter graphs show height vs. arm span (Graph A) and shoe size vs. test score (Graph B). In Graph A, the points lie very close to the line of best fit. In Graph B, the points are widely scattered. Which statement is correct?
Points close to the line of best fit indicate strong correlation. Widely scattered points indicate weak or no correlation. Graph A = strong positive; Graph B = weak/no correlation.
A straight line has equation y = x + 4. A curve has equation y = x² + 2x. Find the x-coordinates of the two points where the line and curve intersect.
To find where a line meets a curve, set their y-expressions equal: x + 4 = x² + 2x. Rearrange to get zero on one side: 0 = x² + x − 4. Factorise: (x + 4)(x − 1) = 0, giving x = −4 and x = 1. Four separate method/accuracy marks are awarded for: equating, rearranging, factorising, and stating both solutions. A common sign error is getting x = 4 and x = −1 — check by verifying both solutions satisfy the original equations.
Points P and Q have coordinates (2, 6) and (8, 2). Find the equation of the perpendicular bisector of PQ. Give your answer in the form y = mx + c.
The perpendicular bisector has two defining properties: it passes through the midpoint of PQ, and it is perpendicular to PQ. Step 1: midpoint = ((2+8)/2, (6+2)/2) = (5, 4). Step 2: gradient of PQ = (2−6)/(8−2) = −4/6 = −2/3. The perpendicular gradient is the negative reciprocal: −1 ÷ (−2/3) = 3/2. Step 3: use y = 3/2 x + c with point (5, 4): 4 = 3/2 × 5 + c = 15/2 + c, so c = 4 − 7.5 = −3.5 = −7/2. Final equation: y = 3/2 x − 7/2 (or y = 1.5x − 3.5). A common mistake is using the gradient of PQ itself (−2/3) rather than its negative reciprocal (3/2) for the perpendicular bisector.
Find the equation of the straight line that passes through the points (2, 1) and (6, 9). Give your answer in the form y = mx + c.
Step 1: gradient m = (9 − 1) ÷ (6 − 2) = 8 ÷ 4 = 2. Step 2: substitute one point into y = 2x + c to find c. Using (2, 1): 1 = 2(2) + c → 1 = 4 + c → c = −3. Step 3: equation is y = 2x − 3. Verify with (6, 9): y = 2(6) − 3 = 12 − 3 = 9. Correct. When neither point is on the y-axis, you must substitute to find c — it cannot be read off directly.
Solve the simultaneous equations graphically (or algebraically): y = 3x + 1 3x + 2y = 20 Find the coordinates of the intersection point.
The most efficient method is substitution. Because the first equation already gives y in terms of x (y = 3x + 1), substitute it directly into the second equation: 3x + 2(3x + 1) = 20. Expand the brackets carefully: 3x + 6x + 2 = 20, giving 9x = 18, so x = 2. Then back-substitute into y = 3x + 1: y = 3(2) + 1 = 7. The intersection point is (2, 7). Always verify: 3(2) + 2(7) = 6 + 14 = 20. A common mistake is expanding 2(3x + 1) as 6x + 1 instead of 6x + 2 — multiply the 2 by both terms inside the bracket.
Line L has equation y = 3x + 1. Line M is perpendicular to L and passes through the point (6, 5). Find the equation of line M in the form y = mx + c.
The perpendicular to y = 3x + 1 has gradient = negative reciprocal of 3 = −1/3. Using point (6, 5): substitute into y = −1/3 x + c to get 5 = −2 + c, so c = 7. Equation: y = −1/3 x + 7. The most common errors are forgetting the negative sign (giving +1/3) or making arithmetic mistakes when finding c. Always verify: multiply the two gradients: 3 × (−1/3) = −1, confirming perpendicularity.
Show that the points A(1, 3), B(3, 7) and C(6, 13) are collinear (lie on the same straight line).
To prove three points are collinear, calculate gradients between adjacent pairs and show they are equal. Here: gradient AB = (7 − 3)/(3 − 1) = 4/2 = 2; gradient BC = (13 − 7)/(6 − 3) = 6/3 = 2. Since both gradients equal 2 and the pairs share point B, all three points lie on the same straight line. The final statement of conclusion ('therefore collinear') is required for the accuracy mark.
Using the velocity-time graph shown, calculate the total distance travelled by the object in 15 seconds. The graph shows: the object accelerates from 0 to 20 m/s in the first 5 seconds, travels at 20 m/s for the next 5 seconds, then decelerates uniformly back to 0 m/s in the final 5 seconds.
Distance = area under a velocity-time graph. Section 1 (accelerating): triangle = ½ × 5 × 20 = 50 m. Section 2 (constant speed): rectangle = 5 × 20 = 100 m. Section 3 (decelerating): triangle = ½ × 5 × 20 = 50 m. Total = 50 + 100 + 50 = 200 m. Alternatively treat as trapezium: ½ × (5 + 15) × 20 = 200 m.
A straight line passes through (0, 5) and (4, 13). Find the equation of the line in the form y = mx + c.
Gradient m = (13 − 5) ÷ (4 − 0) = 8 ÷ 4 = 2. Since one of the given points is (0, 5), it lies on the y-axis, so c = 5 can be read off directly. Equation: y = 2x + 5. When one of the two given points has x = 0, you can read c immediately without an extra substitution step. Common errors: using −5 as the y-intercept, or using the raw Δy value (8) as the gradient without dividing by Δx.
Two straight lines y = x + 2 and y = 3x - 2 intersect at a point. Find the x-coordinate of the point of intersection by setting the equations equal.
The intersection of two lines is the point where both equations are satisfied simultaneously. Setting x + 2 = 3x − 2 (both equal y at the intersection) gives 4 = 2x, so x = 2. To find the intersection algebraically, equate the two expressions for y and solve the resulting linear equation. A common error is forgetting to divide 4 by 2, giving x = 4 instead of x = 2.
A plumber charges according to the formula C = 40t + 30, where C is the total cost in pounds and t is the time in hours. Explain what the values 40 and 30 represent in this context.
The 40 represents the hourly rate — for every extra hour worked, the cost increases by £40. The 30 represents the fixed call-out charge that is paid regardless of how long the job takes.
In C = 40t + 30, the coefficient of t (which is 40) is the gradient — it represents the rate of change of cost with respect to time. Each additional hour adds £40 to the bill, so 40 is the hourly rate. The constant term 30 is the y-intercept — the cost when t = 0 (no hours worked), meaning 30 is the fixed call-out charge paid regardless of time. In context questions, always translate gradient as 'rate per unit' and y-intercept as 'starting value'.
Using the velocity-time graph shown, calculate the acceleration of the object during the first 5 seconds. The object's velocity increases from 0 m/s to 20 m/s in this time.
Acceleration = gradient of velocity-time graph = change in velocity / change in time = (20 − 0) / (5 − 0) = 20 / 5 = 4 m/s².
Describe the motion of the object shown in the velocity-time graph.
The object first accelerates uniformly from rest, as shown by the positive gradient in the first section. It then travels at constant speed for a period, shown by the horizontal line with zero gradient. Finally it decelerates uniformly back to rest, shown by the negative gradient in the final section.
A velocity-time graph is read phase by phase. A positive gradient = acceleration. A horizontal line = constant speed (zero acceleration). A negative gradient = deceleration. All three phases must be described for full marks.
A taxi company charges a fixed fee plus an amount per mile. On a cost graph (£ against miles), what does the y-intercept represent?
The y-intercept is the value of y when x = 0. Here x = 0 means zero miles, so the y-intercept gives the fixed charge before any travel.
The graph shows a velocity-time graph for a moving object. What does the gradient of a velocity-time graph represent?
The gradient of a velocity-time graph = change in velocity / change in time = acceleration. A steeper gradient means greater acceleration. A horizontal line means zero acceleration (constant speed).
The equation of a line is 2x + 3y = 12. What is the gradient of this line?
Rearranging 2x + 3y = 12: 3y = -2x + 12, so y = -2/3 x + 4. The gradient is the coefficient of x, which is -2/3.
A student attempts to solve the simultaneous equations: y = 2x + 3 y = 2x - 5 Which statement best explains what happens when these equations are solved graphically?
Both equations have gradient 2 but different y-intercepts (3 and -5). Parallel lines never intersect, so the system has no solution.
Find the x-coordinates of the points where y = x³ and y = 4x intersect. Give all solutions.
To find intersections of y = x³ and y = 4x, set them equal: x³ = 4x, then rearrange to x³ - 4x = 0. Factor out the common factor x: x(x² - 4) = 0. Factorise the difference of two squares: x(x - 2)(x + 2) = 0. Each factor gives a root: x = 0, x = 2, x = -2. A common error is dividing both sides by x at the start, which eliminates the x = 0 solution. Always bring everything to one side and factorise instead.
Sketch the graph of y = (x + 1)(x - 2)(x - 4) for -2 ≤ x ≤ 5. On your sketch, mark: - The three x-intercepts - The y-intercept - The general shape of the curve
To sketch y = (x + 1)(x - 2)(x - 4), first find the roots by setting each factor to zero: x = -1, x = 2, and x = 4 are the x-intercepts. Next, find the y-intercept by substituting x = 0: y = (1)(-2)(-4) = 8, giving the point (0, 8). Finally, since the coefficient of x³ is positive (expanding gives x³ + ...), the curve rises from bottom-left to top-right. A common error is computing the y-intercept as -8 by forgetting that (-2) × (-4) = +8, not -8.
Complete the table of values for y = x³ - x - 2 for integer values of x from x = -2 to x = 2. x: -2, -1, 0, 1, 2 Find the values of y at x = -2 and x = -1.
To complete the table for y = x³ - x - 2, substitute each x value carefully. At x = -2: y = (-2)³ - (-2) - 2 = -8 + 2 - 2 = -8. At x = -1: y = (-1)³ - (-1) - 2 = -1 + 1 - 2 = -2. Two errors to watch for: computing (-2)³ as +8 instead of -8 (the cube of a negative is negative), and forgetting that subtracting a negative number is the same as adding it — so the -x term at x = -2 gives -(-2) = +2.
The cubic y = x²(x - 4) has a repeated root. a) State the x-coordinates where the graph crosses or touches the x-axis. b) Describe the behaviour of the graph at the repeated root.
For y = x²(x - 4), set y = 0 to find the x-intercepts: x² = 0 gives x = 0 (repeated root, from the factor x²), and x - 4 = 0 gives x = 4. Because x = 0 is a repeated root (an even-power factor), the graph only touches the x-axis at x = 0 and turns back around — it does not cross through. At x = 4, where the root appears once (an odd-power factor), the curve crosses the x-axis normally. A common mistake is saying the graph crosses at both roots.
Show that x = 2 is a root of the cubic y = x³ - 3x² - x + 6, and hence factorise the cubic.
This question uses the factor theorem. Step 1: substitute x = 2 into y = x³ - 3x² - x + 6 and check the result is zero: y = 8 - 12 - 2 + 6 = 0. Step 2: since y = 0, the factor theorem tells us (x - 2) is a factor. Step 3: divide the cubic by (x - 2) — by long division or inspection — to obtain the quadratic factor x² - x - 3. The full factorisation is (x - 2)(x² - x - 3). Check by expanding to confirm you return to the original cubic.
Complete the table of values for y = x³ - 3x. Find the value of y when x = 2.
To find y when x = 2 in y = x³ − 3x, substitute x = 2: y = 2³ − 3(2) = 8 − 6 = 2. Work term by term: cube x first (2³ = 8), then compute the linear term (3 × 2 = 6), then subtract. A common error is computing 2³ as 6 by multiplying 2 × 3 instead of 2 × 2 × 2 = 8.
The cubic graph y = x(x - 2)(x + 3) crosses the x-axis at three points. Write down the three x-intercepts.
For a cubic in factored form y = x(x − 2)(x + 3), the x-intercepts are found by setting y = 0: each factor gives a root. x = 0 from the factor x; x = 2 from (x − 2) = 0; x = −3 from (x + 3) = 0. A common sign error is writing x = 3 instead of x = −3 — the root from (x + 3) is negative 3.
Explain how you can tell from the equation of a cubic whether its graph rises or falls as x approaches positive infinity.
You look at the leading coefficient — the coefficient of the highest power term (x³). If it is positive, the graph rises steeply for large positive x values. If it is negative, the graph falls steeply for large positive x values. The sign of the x³ coefficient determines the long-run behaviour of the cubic.
For large values of x, the x³ term grows much faster than any lower-power term, so the long-run behaviour of a cubic is controlled entirely by its leading coefficient. If the coefficient of x³ is positive, x³ becomes very large and positive as x increases, so the graph rises. If it is negative, the graph falls as x gets large. In an exam, identify the highest-power term and check its sign — ignore all other terms for this purpose.
Which of the following best describes the general shape of the graph y = x³?
y = x³ produces an S-shaped curve that passes through the origin. For positive x it rises steeply, for negative x it falls steeply. With a positive leading coefficient, the curve goes from bottom-left to top-right.
What is the y-intercept of the graph y = x³ - 4x² + 2x - 6?
The y-intercept is found by substituting x = 0. When x = 0: y = 0 - 0 + 0 - 6 = -6. The y-intercept is (0, -6), which is just the constant term.
Which description matches the graph of y = -2x³ + 5x - 1?
The leading term is -2x³. A negative leading coefficient means the cubic falls from top-left to bottom-right (the S-curve is flipped compared to y = x³).
Sketch the graph of y = 8/x for x ranging from -8 to 8. On your sketch clearly show: - The two branches of the curve - Both asymptotes - The coordinates of two specific points
For y = 8/x with positive k = 8, the graph has two branches: one in the first quadrant (x > 0, y > 0) and one in the third quadrant (x < 0, y < 0). The vertical asymptote is x = 0 (the function is undefined at x = 0) and the horizontal asymptote is y = 0 (the curve approaches the x-axis for large |x| but never reaches it). Mark specific coordinate pairs such as (1, 8), (2, 4), (4, 2) and (-1, -8), (-2, -4) to anchor the curve accurately on the sketch.
A reciprocal curve has equation y = k/x. The point (-2, 5) lies on the curve. Find k and hence find the value of y when x = -10.
Since the point (−2, 5) lies on y = k/x, substitute x = −2 and y = 5 to find k: 5 = k/(−2), so k = 5 × (−2) = −10. The equation is y = −10/x. A negative value of k means the branches are in quadrants 2 (x < 0, y > 0) and 4 (x > 0, y < 0) rather than quadrants 1 and 3. To find y when x = −10: y = −10/(−10) = 1. Note that the product xy = k always: (−2)(5) = −10 and (−10)(1) = −10, confirming both points are on the same curve. A common mistake is dropping the negative sign, giving k = +10.
Find the coordinates of the points where the line y = x + 2 intersects the curve y = 6/x.
To find where y = x + 2 and y = 6/x intersect, set them equal: x + 2 = 6/x. Multiply both sides by x to clear the fraction: x(x + 2) = 6, giving x² + 2x - 6 = 0. This does not factorise over integers, so apply the quadratic formula: x = (-2 ± √(4 + 24)) / 2 = (-2 ± √28) / 2 = -1 ± √7. Substitute each x-value back into y = x + 2 to find the corresponding y-coordinates. Both intersection points can be expressed in surd form.
A student claims that all points on the curve y = 10/x satisfy the relationship xy = 10. Show that this is true for any point (x, y) on the curve, and verify for the specific point (2.5, 4).
This show-that question requires an algebraic proof followed by a numerical verification. Step 1: start from y = 10/x and multiply both sides by x to get xy = 10 — this shows the relationship holds generally for any point on the curve (where x is not zero). Step 2: verify at (2.5, 4) by computing the product: 2.5 × 4 = 10, confirming xy = 10. Step 3 (optional extra): substitute x = 2.5 into y = 10/x directly — 10 ÷ 2.5 = 4, so the point (2.5, 4) lies on the curve. The key insight is that y = k/x and xy = k are algebraically identical.
Complete the table of values for y = 6/x. x: 1, 2, 3, 6 Find the value of y when x = 3.
To find y when x = 3 on the graph y = 6/x, substitute x = 3 directly: y = 6 ÷ 3 = 2. A useful check: for any point on y = 6/x, the product x × y always equals 6 (the constant k). Here 3 × 2 = 6, confirming the answer. A common error is multiplying instead of dividing: 6 × 3 = 18 is wrong.
The graph of y = 12/x passes through the point (3, a). Find the value of a.
The point (3, a) lies on y = 12/x, which means the y-coordinate equals 12 divided by the x-coordinate. Substitute x = 3: a = 12/3 = 4. This is a straightforward substitution — the only method mark is showing 12 ÷ 3. A common mistake is multiplying 12 by 3 (giving 36) instead of dividing. For a reciprocal graph y = k/x, larger x gives smaller y and the product xy always equals k (here 3 × 4 = 12), which provides a useful check.
Explain why the graph y = 5/x has a vertical asymptote at x = 0 and a horizontal asymptote at y = 0.
At x = 0, the expression 5/0 is undefined — you cannot divide by zero — so the graph cannot exist at x = 0. As x approaches 0, y grows without bound, so the curve approaches but never reaches the y-axis. As x becomes very large (positive or negative), y = 5/x approaches 0 but never equals 0 because 5 divided by any finite number is never exactly 0. So the curve approaches but never reaches the x-axis.
This question requires two separate explanations. For the vertical asymptote at x = 0: substituting x = 0 gives 5/0, which is undefined in mathematics — you cannot divide by zero — so the graph cannot have a value there and the curve approaches but never reaches the y-axis. For the horizontal asymptote at y = 0: as x grows very large, 5/x becomes very small. However, 5 divided by any finite number can never equal zero exactly, so y approaches but never reaches the x-axis. Both answers should use the words 'approaches' and 'never'.
The graph of y = 1/x has an asymptote along the x-axis. What does this mean?
An asymptote is a line that the graph approaches but never touches or crosses. For y = 1/x, as x gets very large or very negative, y gets closer and closer to 0 (the x-axis) but never equals 0.
For the graph y = 3/x, what is the value of y when x = 0?
Division by zero is undefined in mathematics. y = 3/0 has no value. This is why x = 0 is a vertical asymptote — the curve approaches this line but the function is not defined there.
Which of the following correctly describes the graph of y = -4/x compared to y = 4/x?
For y = 4/x (positive k), the two branches are in quadrants 1 and 3. For y = -4/x (negative k), the y values are all negated, flipping the branches into quadrants 2 and 4. This is a reflection in the x-axis.
What are the equations of the asymptotes of the graph y = 3/(x - 2) + 1?
This is y = 3/x translated 2 right and 1 up. The asymptotes of y = 3/x are x = 0 and y = 0. Translating right by 2 moves the vertical asymptote to x = 2. Translating up by 1 moves the horizontal asymptote to y = 1.
On the same set of axes, sketch the graphs of y = sin x and y = cos x for 0° ≤ x ≤ 360°. Label the key points (zeros, maxima, minima) for each curve.
To sketch both curves, use the five key angles: 0°, 90°, 180°, 270°, 360°. For y = sin x: the values are 0, 1, 0, -1, 0 (starts at zero, peaks at 90°, troughs at 270°). For y = cos x: the values are 1, 0, -1, 0, 1 (starts at maximum, troughs at 180°, returns to maximum at 360°). Both have amplitude 1 and period 360°. On the sketch, the cosine curve looks identical to sine but shifted 90° to the left — the two curves should cross at x = 45° and x = 225°.
Given that cos 60° = 0.5, find all values of x in the range 0° to 360° for which cos x = 0.5.
The cosine graph is symmetric about x = 180°, which means it is also symmetric about the vertical lines x = 0° and x = 360°. For positive cosine values, the two solutions in 0° to 360° lie in quadrants 1 (0° to 90°) and 4 (270° to 360°). The rule is: second solution = 360° − first angle. Here: first solution = 60° (given), second = 360° − 60° = 300°. Verify: cos 300° = cos(−60°) = cos 60° = 0.5. A common mistake is using 180° − 60° = 120°, which gives cos 120° = −0.5 (negative), not +0.5. The 180° − θ rule is for the sine graph, not cosine.
Given that tan 45° = 1, find all values of x in the range 0° to 360° for which tan x = 1.
Unlike sine and cosine, the tangent function has a period of 180° rather than 360°. This means solutions to tan x = k repeat every 180°. The first solution is x = 45° (given). The second is found by adding 180°: 45° + 180° = 225°. Check that 225° is within the required range 0° to 360° — it is. The next solution would be 225° + 180° = 405°, which is outside the range. A common mistake is using 180° − 45° = 135° (the sine symmetry rule), but tan 135° = −1, not +1. For tan always add 180° to find further solutions.
Show, using the symmetry of the sine graph, that sin 150° = sin 30° = 0.5.
This show-that question requires three clear steps. Step 1: state that the sine graph is symmetric about x = 90° in the range 0° to 180° — the graph forms a mountain shape with its peak at (90°, 1). Step 2: show that 150° = 180° - 30°, which places 150° at the same distance from 90° as 30° is (both are 60° away from 90°), but on the opposite side. Step 3: conclude that by this symmetry, sin 150° = sin 30° = 0.5. This argument uses the sine graph structure, not a calculator, which is what the question requires.
Given that sin 30° = 0.5, find a second value of x in the range 0° to 360° for which sin x = 0.5.
The sine graph is symmetric about x = 90° within the range 0° to 180°. This means if sin θ = k for some acute angle θ, there is always a second solution at 180° − θ. Here θ = 30°, so the second solution is 180° − 30° = 150°. Verify: sin 150° = sin 30° = 0.5. A common mistake is trying 360° − 30° = 330° (the cosine rule for negative second solutions) — but sin 330° = −0.5, not +0.5. For positive sine values, both solutions lie in the range 0° to 180°.
Explain the relationship between the graphs of y = sin x and y = cos x.
The graph of y = cos x is identical to y = sin x but shifted 90° to the left. This means cos x = sin(x + 90°). Both graphs have the same amplitude of 1 and the same period of 360°. The cosine graph starts at its maximum (1) at x = 0°, while the sine graph starts at zero.
The two mark points needed are: (1) y = cos x is y = sin x shifted 90° to the left — equivalently, cos x = sin(x + 90°). This explains why the cosine graph starts at its maximum of 1 at x = 0°, whereas the sine graph starts at zero at x = 0° and reaches 1 at x = 90°. (2) Both graphs share the same amplitude of 1 (ranging from -1 to 1) and the same period of 360°. The key difference is purely in their starting positions.
What is the period of the graph y = sin x?
The sine function completes one full cycle every 360°. The pattern of peaks, zeros, and troughs repeats exactly every 360°.
What is the y-intercept of the graph y = cos x?
cos 0° = 1, so the graph starts at its maximum value of 1 when x = 0°. The y-intercept is 1.
State the exact value of sin 90°.
The sine graph reaches its maximum value of 1 at exactly x = 90° and then returns to zero at x = 180°. So sin 90° = 1. This is a key exact value to memorise for non-calculator papers, along with sin 0° = 0, sin 30° = 0.5, sin 45° = √2/2, sin 60° = √3/2. A common mistake is writing 0 (which is sin 0° or sin 180°, not sin 90°). The maximum of the sine graph occurs at the top of the wave at the quarter-period point.
Which of the following correctly describes the graph of y = tan x?
y = tan x has vertical asymptotes where cos x = 0 (at 90°, 270°, ...). The function repeats every 180°. Unlike sin and cos, tan has no amplitude bound.
Which statement correctly describes the difference between y = 2 sin x and y = sin 2x?
Multiplying outside the function (y = 2 sin x) doubles the amplitude (range -2 to 2) but keeps the period at 360°. Multiplying inside the function (y = sin 2x) halves the period to 180° but keeps the amplitude at 1.
A graph shows the volume V (cm³) of water in a tank against time t (minutes). The curve is y = t³ - 3t² + 4t + 10. A tangent at t = 2 passes through (0, -2) and (4, 10). a) Calculate the gradient of the tangent. b) Interpret this gradient in context.
Part (a): the gradient of the tangent uses the two given points (0, −2) and (4, 10). Take care with the negative y-value: gradient = (10 − (−2)) / (4 − 0) = 12 / 4 = 3. A common mistake is computing (10 − 2) / 4 = 2 instead of (10 + 2) / 4 = 3 because subtracting a negative adds to the numerator. Part (b): the gradient of a V–t graph represents the rate of change of volume with respect to time. The correct interpretation is: ‘the volume is increasing at 3 cm³ per minute at t = 2’. Both the rate (3) and the units (cm³/min) are required for full marks. Always derive units from the axis labels: y-axis in cm³, x-axis in minutes, so gradient units are cm³ per minute.
For the curve y = x², estimate the gradient at x = 3 by calculating the chord gradient between x = 3 and each of the following values: a) x = 4 b) x = 3.1 c) x = 3.01 Comment on what value the gradient appears to approach.
This question demonstrates how chord gradients converge to the true tangent gradient as the interval shrinks. For y = x² at x = 3 (y = 9): (a) chord to x = 4 (y = 16): (16−9)/(4−3) = 7/1 = 7. (b) chord to x = 3.1 (y = 9.61): (9.61−9)/(3.1−3) = 0.61/0.1 = 6.1. (c) chord to x = 3.01 (y = 9.0601): (9.0601−9)/(3.01−3) = 0.0601/0.01 = 6.01. The pattern 7 → 6.1 → 6.01 → ... approaches 6. This is the limit of the chord gradient as the interval tends to zero — the instantaneous gradient of y = x² at x = 3 is 6, which matches the calculus result dy/dx = 2x evaluated at x = 3. Award yourself all 4 marks only if you show all three chord calculations and state the limit.
A tangent is drawn to the curve y = x² at the point (3, 9). The tangent passes through the points (3, 9) and (5, 21) on the tangent line. Calculate the gradient of the tangent at x = 3.
The gradient of a tangent to a curve equals the gradient of the curve at that point. The tangent is a straight line, so its gradient is calculated using the standard rise/run formula with any two points on the tangent line (not the curve). Here the two points on the tangent are (3, 9) and (5, 21): gradient = (21 − 9) / (5 − 3) = 12 / 2 = 6. This result is consistent with differentiation (dy/dx = 2x at x = 3 gives 2 × 3 = 6). A common mistake is confusing which points to use — always use points on the tangent line, not points on the curve. Pick points that are widely spaced for greater accuracy.
A velocity-time graph shows a curved increase in speed. A tangent to the curve at t = 4 s passes through the points (2, 10) and (6, 30). Estimate the acceleration at t = 4 s in m/s².
On a velocity-time graph, the gradient at any point represents acceleration. To find the instantaneous acceleration at t = 4 s, use the gradient of the tangent drawn at that point. The two points given on the tangent are (2, 10) and (6, 30): gradient = (30 − 10) / (6 − 2) = 20 / 4 = 5 m/s². The units are velocity-units per time-unit: (m/s) per s = m/s². A common mistake is using only the change in velocity (20) without dividing by the change in time (4), giving 20 instead of 5. Always divide to find the gradient.
A tangent to the curve y = x² is drawn at the point (2, 4). The tangent is found to pass through the point (4, 12). Show that the gradient of the tangent is 4, and comment on whether this is consistent with the theoretical gradient at x = 2.
The three required steps are: (1) apply the gradient formula to the two given tangent points (2, 4) and (4, 12): gradient = (12 - 4) / (4 - 2) = 8 / 2 = 4. (2) State clearly that the gradient is 4. (3) Comment using the theoretical result: for y = x², the gradient function is 2x (from differentiation). At x = 2, the theoretical gradient is 2 × 2 = 4, which is consistent with the empirical tangent gradient of 4. This confirms the tangent was drawn accurately. Show all three steps explicitly to earn all 3 marks.
A distance-time graph shows a curved journey. At time t = 2 s, the distance is 8 m. At t = 6 s, the distance is 40 m. Calculate the average speed over the interval from t = 2 s to t = 6 s.
On a distance-time graph, the gradient represents speed. For a curved graph, the chord connecting two points gives the average speed over that interval, while the tangent at a single point gives the instantaneous speed. Here the chord runs from (2, 8) to (6, 40): gradient = (40 − 8) / (6 − 2) = 32 / 4 = 8 m/s. The units of the gradient are y-units per x-unit: metres per second (m/s). A common mistake is inverting the fraction and computing 4/32 = 0.125 m/s. Always use change in distance / change in time, not the other way around.
Explain why the gradient of a chord between two points on a curve is only an estimate of the gradient at a point, and how this estimate can be improved.
A chord joins two distinct points on a curve, giving the average rate of change over an interval. The true gradient at a point is the instantaneous rate of change, which is found using the tangent. The chord gradient is only an estimate because it is affected by the behaviour of the curve across the whole interval, not just at that specific point. The estimate can be improved by making the chord shorter — as the two points get closer together, the chord becomes a better approximation to the tangent.
This question needs two distinct points. First: a chord connects two separate points on a curve and its gradient gives the average rate of change over the interval between them — not the instantaneous rate at any one specific point. It is only an estimate of the gradient at either endpoint. Second: the estimate can be improved by making the chord shorter — as the two endpoints move closer together, the chord more closely approximates the tangent at that point, and its gradient gets closer to the true instantaneous gradient. This is the geometric basis for differentiation.
How do you find the gradient of a curve at a specific point?
The gradient of a curve at a point is defined as the gradient of the tangent to the curve at that point. A tangent just touches the curve at one point and does not cross it there.
What is the difference between a tangent and a chord on a curve?
A tangent line touches the curve at exactly one point and gives the instantaneous rate of change. A chord is a straight line connecting two distinct points on the curve and gives the average rate of change between those points.
Reading model answers helps, but the marks come from writing your own and getting them checked. PrepWise marks every answer on the spot against the Mathematics mark scheme.
Try PrepWise Free